NPO Analyze Desktop - User Guide174465110e10

Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Title page
Alcatel-Lucent
NPO Analysis Desktop User Guide | Release M4
NPO Document
User Guide
npoug
3BK174465110TQZZA
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Issue 10
March 2011
Legal notice
Legal notice
Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright 2011 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Contains proprietary/trade secret information which is the property of Alcatel-Lucent and must not be made available to, or copied or used by anyone outside
Alcatel-Lucent without its written authorization.
Not to be used or disclosed except in accordance with applicable agreements.
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Contents
Preface
Purpose ........................................................................................................................................................................................ xxix
xxix
Reason for revision ................................................................................................................................................................. xxix

xxix
Document pertinence .............................................................................................................................................................. xxix

xxix
Audience ..................................................................................................................................................................................... xxix

xxix
Assumed knowledge ............................................................................................................................................................... xxix

xxix
Product names ........................................................................................................................................................................... xxix

xxix
How to comment ....................................................................................................................................................................... xxx

xxx
1 Introduction to NPO
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1-1
Terminology ................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-1

1-1
NPO presentation ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1-6

1-6
NPO user interface ................................................................................................................................................................... 1-6

1-6
NPO functions ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1-9

1-9
NPO advanced optimization features .............................................................................................................................. 1-13

1-13
2 Getting started with Analysis Desktop
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1

2-1
Procedure 2-1: Initialize Analysis Desktop first time .................................................................................................. 2-3

2-3
Procedure 2-2: Initialize Analysis Desktop ..................................................................................................................... 2-4

2-4
Procedure 2-3: Exit Analysis Desktop .............................................................................................................................. 2-5

2-5
Use title bar ................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-5

2-5
Procedure 2-4: Use standards, modes, topology and function classifications .................................................... 2-6
2-6
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary iii
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Customize analysis desktop ................................................................................................................................................ 2-34
2-34
Procedure 2-5: Reorganize standards, modes, topology .......................................................................................... 2-35

2-35
Use tool tips .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-35

2-35
Procedure 2-6: Display functions browser values ...................................................................................................... 2-37

2-37
Create and execute reports .................................................................................................................................................. 2-38

2-38
Procedure 2-7: Diagnose QoS problems ........................................................................................................................ 2-40

2-40
Create tuning operations ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-40

2-40
Use cartography management functions ........................................................................................................................ 2-41

2-41
QoS analysis using Thematic Layers (THL) ................................................................................................................ 2-41

2-41
Manage network stability, availability and alarms ..................................................................................................... 2-42

2-42
Use remote inventory data management (RIDM) ...................................................................................................... 2-42

2-42
Access online help ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-43

2-43
Use tip of the day .................................................................................................................................................................... 2-44

2-44
Manage licensing .................................................................................................................................................................... 2-45

2-45
Procedure 2-8: Manage notifications .............................................................................................................................. 2-50

2-50
Manage tokens ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-51

2-51
Procedure 2-9: View consolidation follow up .............................................................................................................. 2-54

2-54
Procedure 2-10: Select / deselect all items .................................................................................................................... 2-56

2-56
Procedure 2-11: String based tree filtering ................................................................................................................... 2-57

2-57
3 Functional window common tasks
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1

3-1
Drag and drop objects ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-1

3-1
Procedure 3-1: Propagate network objects or object zones between topology classification or zone
modes .................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-6
3-6
Procedure 3-2: Display and edit properties ..................................................................................................................... 3-7

3-7
Procedure 3-3: Copy URL ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-9

3-9
Use generic editor .................................................................................................................................................................. 3-10

3-10
Refresh ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-14

3-14
Procedure 3-4: Search ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-15

3-15
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
iv Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Execution context ................................................................................................................................................................... 3-19
3-19
Procedure 3-5: Set QoS requirement ............................................................................................................................... 3-33

3-33
4 Topology objects
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1

4-1
Presentation ................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-1

4-1
Topology object tabs ................................................................................................................................................................ 4-2

4-2
Display topology object properties .................................................................................................................................. 4-11

4-11
Procedure 4-1: Add associated network objects .......................................................................................................... 4-21

4-21
Use network object class ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-22

4-22
Procedure 4-2: Use network object class editor .......................................................................................................... 4-25

4-25
Procedure 4-3: Assign operational network object class ......................................................................................... 4-31

4-31
5 Use object zone
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1

5-1
Presentation ................................................................................................................................................................................. 5-1

5-1
Procedure 5-1: Compute object zone ................................................................................................................................. 5-6

5-6
Display object zone properties ............................................................................................................................................. 5-6

5-6
Procedure 5-2: Use object zone editor ............................................................................................................................ 5-10

5-10
6 Use topology classifications
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1

6-1
Presentation ................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-2

6-2
Procedure 6-1: Open topology classification editor ..................................................................................................... 6-3

6-3
Topology Classifications containing Parameters .......................................................................................................... 6-3

6-3
Topology Classifications based on Parent or Related objects ................................................................................. 6-4

6-4
Topology Classifications based on Free Fields ............................................................................................................. 6-5

6-5
Topology Classifications based on Topology Parameters .......................................................................................... 6-6

6-6
Procedure 6-2: Create topology classification ................................................................................................................ 6-8

6-8
Procedure 6-3: Create topology classification by copy ............................................................................................ 6-11

6-11
Procedure 6-4: Edit topology classification .................................................................................................................. 6-12

6-12
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary v
Issue 10 March 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 6-5: Apply filter on topology classification ............................................................................................. 6-13
6-13
Procedure 6-6: Delete topology classification ............................................................................................................. 6-14

6-14
7 Use function classifications
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-1

7-1
Presentation ................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-1

7-1
Procedure 7-1: Open function classification editor ...................................................................................................... 7-2

7-2
Procedure 7-2: Create function classification ................................................................................................................. 7-3

7-3
Procedure 7-3: Create function classification by copy ................................................................................................ 7-6

7-6
Procedure 7-4: Edit function classification ..................................................................................................................... 7-7

7-7
Procedure 7-5: Delete function classification ................................................................................................................. 7-8

7-8
8 Use working zone
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-1

8-1
Presentation ................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-1

8-1
Procedure 8-1: Open working zone editor ....................................................................................................................... 8-4

8-4
Procedure 8-2: Create working zone ................................................................................................................................. 8-5

8-5
Procedure 8-3: Create working zone by copy .............................................................................................................. 8-10

8-10
Procedure 8-4: Edit working zone .................................................................................................................................... 8-11

8-11
Procedure 8-5: Delete working zone ............................................................................................................................... 8-12

8-12
Procedure 8-6: Create sub-working zones .................................................................................................................... 8-13

8-13
Procedure 8-7: Change current working zone ............................................................................................................. 8-22

8-22
9 Use counters and indicators
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-1

9-1
Presentation ................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-1

9-1
Procedure 9-1: Display and manage counter properties and descriptions ......................................................... 9-46
9-46
Procedure 9-2: Display and manage indicator properties and descriptions ...................................................... 9-53
9-53
Procedure 9-3: Propagate counters and indicators ..................................................................................................... 9-63

9-63
Procedure 9-4: Create busy hour reference indicator ................................................................................................ 9-64

9-64
Procedure 9-5: Create indicator value at busy hour ................................................................................................... 9-66

9-66
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
vi Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Issue 10 March 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 9-6: Display counter and indicator values ................................................................................................ 9-68
9-68
Procedure 9-7: Display type 110 counters .................................................................................................................... 9-69

9-69
Procedure 9-8: Find indicator from counter ................................................................................................................. 9-72

9-72
Procedure 9-9: Use indicator editor ................................................................................................................................. 9-73

9-73
10 Manage parameters
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-1

10-1
Presentation .............................................................................................................................................................................. 10-1

10-1
Display logical / design parameter properties .............................................................................................................. 10-3

10-3
Procedure 10-1: Display parameters ............................................................................................................................... 10-9

10-9
Procedure 10-2: Propagate parameters ........................................................................................................................ 10-10

10-10
Manage parameters ............................................................................................................................................................. 10-10

10-10
11 Use reference values
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-1

11-1
Presentation ............................................................................................................................................................................... 11-1

11-1
Procedure 11-1: Compare different reference values ................................................................................................ 11-8

11-8
Procedure 11-2: Create user defined reference values ............................................................................................ 11-10

11-10
12 Use operator reference values (ORV)
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 12-1

12-1
Presentation .............................................................................................................................................................................. 12-1

12-1
Procedure 12-1: Save as operator reference ................................................................................................................. 12-4

12-4
Import / update / export / delete user defined operator reference values ........................................................... 12-5
12-5
13 Use rules
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-1

13-1
Presentation .............................................................................................................................................................................. 13-1

13-1
Display Rule Properties ..................................................................................................................................................... 13-10

13-10
Procedure 13-1: Execute rules ........................................................................................................................................ 13-13

13-13
Procedure 13-2: Create user defined rules .................................................................................................................. 13-14

13-14
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary vii
Issue 10 March 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Use events
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-1

14-1
Presentation .............................................................................................................................................................................. 14-1

14-1
Display event properties ...................................................................................................................................................... 14-4

14-4
Procedure 14-1: Display events ........................................................................................................................................ 14-7

14-7
Procedure 14-2: Display event synthesis .................................................................................................................... 14-16

14-16
15 Use free fields
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-1

15-1
Presentation .............................................................................................................................................................................. 15-1

15-1
Display free field properties ............................................................................................................................................... 15-4

15-4
Manage free fields .................................................................................................................................................................. 15-6

15-6
Procedure 15-1: Execute free fields ................................................................................................................................. 15-7

15-7
16 Use user note
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 16-1

16-1
Presentation .............................................................................................................................................................................. 16-1

16-1
Display user note .................................................................................................................................................................... 16-2

16-2
Procedure 16-1: Create user note ...................................................................................................................................... 16-3

16-3
Procedure 16-2: Edit user note ......................................................................................................................................... 16-4

16-4
Procedure 16-3: Delete user note ...................................................................................................................................... 16-5

16-5
17 Use favorites
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-1

17-1
Presentation .............................................................................................................................................................................. 17-1

17-1
Procedure 17-1: Select favorite function ....................................................................................................................... 17-3

17-3
Procedure 17-2: Add a function to favorite functions ............................................................................................... 17-4

17-4
Procedure 17-3: Create group to add favorites ............................................................................................................ 17-6

17-6
Procedure 17-4: Rename group of favorites ................................................................................................................. 17-7

17-7
Procedure 17-5: Delete favorite / group of favorites ................................................................................................. 17-9

17-9
Procedure 17-6: Organize favorites ............................................................................................................................... 17-10

17-10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
viii Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Issue 10 March 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 17-7: Move favorite / group of favorites to folder ............................................................................. 17-12
17-12
Procedure 17-8: Import favorites ................................................................................................................................... 17-13

17-13
Procedure 17-9: Export favorites ................................................................................................................................... 17-15

17-15
18 Views
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-1

18-1
Presentation .............................................................................................................................................................................. 18-2

18-2
Display view properties ..................................................................................................................................................... 18-11

18-11
Procedure 18-1: View template editor .......................................................................................................................... 18-21

18-21
Procedure 18-2: Execute view ........................................................................................................................................ 18-42

18-42
Procedure 18-3: Edit executed view interactively ................................................................................................... 18-53

18-53
Procedure 18-4: Edit executed view using dialog box ........................................................................................... 18-75
18-75
Use executed view ............................................................................................................................................................... 18-79

18-79
Highlight in view ................................................................................................................................................................. 18-83

18-83
Show legend ........................................................................................................................................................................... 18-85

18-85
Sort ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 18-89

18-89
Filter in view .......................................................................................................................................................................... 18-90

18-90
Hide / unhide rows / columns / repeated values ....................................................................................................... 18-95

18-95
Change view display type ................................................................................................................................................. 18-98

18-98
Resize ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-98

18-98
Procedure 18-5: Copy to system clipboard ................................................................................................................ 18-99

18-99
Copy executed view ............................................................................................................................................................ 18-99

18-99
Duplicate executed view ................................................................................................................................................... 18-99

18-99
Procedure 18-6: Rename executed view ................................................................................................................... 18-100

18-100
Procedure 18-7: Save executed view as template .................................................................................................. 18-101

18-101
Close executed view(s) .................................................................................................................................................... 18-101

18-101
Procedure 18-8: Export executed views .................................................................................................................... 18-103

18-103
Procedure 18-9: Execute diagnosis in an executed view .................................................................................... 18-107

18-107
Manage axis ......................................................................................................................................................................... 18-107

18-107
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary ix
Issue 10 March 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19 Reports
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-1

19-1
Presentation .............................................................................................................................................................................. 19-2

19-2
Procedure 19-1: Use report template editor ............................................................................................................... 19-18

19-18
Procedure 19-2: Execute reports .................................................................................................................................... 19-30

19-30
Procedure 19-3: Edit executed report interactively ................................................................................................. 19-34

19-34
Procedure 19-4: Edit executed report using dialog box ......................................................................................... 19-54
19-54
Procedure 19-5: Schedule reports .................................................................................................................................. 19-60

19-60
Display pending and archived executed reports ....................................................................................................... 19-66

19-66
Procedure 19-6: Use job scheduler editor ................................................................................................................... 19-70

19-70
Use executed report ............................................................................................................................................................. 19-80

19-80
Filter in report ....................................................................................................................................................................... 19-82

19-82
Highlight in all report views ............................................................................................................................................ 19-83

19-83
Display grid in all report views ....................................................................................................................................... 19-83

19-83
Procedure 19-7: Edit view from executed report template ................................................................................... 19-84
19-84
Duplicate executed report ................................................................................................................................................. 19-84

19-84
Procedure 19-8: Rename executed report ................................................................................................................... 19-85

19-85
Resize automatic views and legends in report ........................................................................................................... 19-85

19-85
Synchronize axis management ........................................................................................................................................ 19-86

19-86
Archive reports ..................................................................................................................................................................... 19-86

19-86
Toggle display type (tabular / graphical) ..................................................................................................................... 19-87

19-87
Synchronize 3D view graphs ........................................................................................................................................... 19-87

19-87
Synchronize legend resizing ............................................................................................................................................ 19-88

19-88
Procedure 19-9: Save executed report as template .................................................................................................. 19-89

19-89
Close executed report(s) .................................................................................................................................................... 19-89

19-89
Procedure 19-10: Export executed reports ................................................................................................................. 19-90

19-90
Export views from executed report ............................................................................................................................... 19-92

19-92
Display spatial aggregation in views / reports ........................................................................................................... 19-93

19-93
Use static trend prediction in evolution views and reports ................................................................................... 19-94
19-94
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
x Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Issue 10 March 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use dynamic trend prediction in executed views and reports ............................................................................. 19-96
19-96
20 MultiNET Mode
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 20-1

20-1
Presentation .............................................................................................................................................................................. 20-1

20-1
Use MultiNET mode ............................................................................................................................................................. 20-2

20-2
Procedure 20-1: Populate MultiNET mode .................................................................................................................. 20-4

20-4
Apply filters in MultiNET mode ...................................................................................................................................... 20-5

20-5
Procedure 20-2: Execute view / report in MultiNET mode .................................................................................... 20-7

20-7
21 POD mode
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 21-1

21-1
Presentation .............................................................................................................................................................................. 21-1

21-1
Procedure 21-1: Populate POD mode ............................................................................................................................. 21-2

21-2
Procedure 21-2: Remove Object(s) from POD mode ............................................................................................... 21-3

21-3
Procedure 21-3: Clear a POD mode ................................................................................................................................ 21-4

21-4
22 Diagnosis
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 22-1

22-1
Presentation .............................................................................................................................................................................. 22-2

22-2
Display diagnosis scenario properties ............................................................................................................................. 22-3

22-3
Procedure 22-1: Propagate diagnosis scenario ............................................................................................................ 22-7

22-7
Propagate selection between synthetic and detailed report and topology classifications ............................ 22-7
22-7
Procedure 22-2: Open diagnosis editor .......................................................................................................................... 22-8

22-8
Procedure 22-3: Execute diagnosis in synthetic mode ............................................................................................. 22-9

22-9
Procedure 22-4: Execute diagnosis in detailed mode ............................................................................................. 22-11

22-11
Display execution logs ....................................................................................................................................................... 22-14

22-14
Procedure 22-5: Edit detailed diagnosis ...................................................................................................................... 22-15

22-15
Copy diagnosis view to system clipboard ................................................................................................................... 22-19

22-19
Procedure 22-6: Schedule executed diagnosis reports ........................................................................................... 22-20

22-20
Display pending executed diagnosis ............................................................................................................................. 22-23

22-23
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary xi
Issue 10 March 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Close executed detailed diagnosis ................................................................................................................................. 22-24
22-24
Procedure 22-7: Export diagnosis .................................................................................................................................. 22-25

22-25
23 Tuning
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 23-1

23-1
Presentation .............................................................................................................................................................................. 23-1

23-1
Display tuning operation properties ................................................................................................................................ 23-4

23-4
Procedure 23-1: Use tuning session manager .............................................................................................................. 23-6

23-6
Procedure 23-2: Manage tuning jobs ............................................................................................................................ 23-19

23-19
Procedure 23-3: Edit tuning session .............................................................................................................................. 23-28

23-28
Procedure 23-4: Propagate from tuning session ....................................................................................................... 23-62

23-62
Procedure 23-5: Manage reference object(s) for tuning ........................................................................................ 23-66

23-66
Procedure 23-6: Manage tuning inhibition of network objects ........................................................................... 23-71

23-71
24 Cartography
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 24-1

24-1
Presentation .............................................................................................................................................................................. 24-2

24-2
Open cartography ................................................................................................................................................................. 24-16

24-16
Procedure 24-1: Use layer manager .............................................................................................................................. 24-17

24-17
Procedure 24-2: Use cartography navigation ............................................................................................................ 24-45

24-45
Display information interactively .................................................................................................................................. 24-56

24-56
Minimap .................................................................................................................................................................................. 24-56

24-56
Manage network objects .................................................................................................................................................... 24-57

24-57
Procedure 24-3: Thematic Layer Template (THL) .................................................................................................. 24-65

24-65
Procedure 24-4: Execute THL ......................................................................................................................................... 24-86

24-86
Procedure 24-5: Display thematics for adjacencies ................................................................................................. 24-92

24-92
Procedure 24-6: Manage frequency re-use ................................................................................................................. 24-93

24-93
Procedure 24-7: Show THL legend ............................................................................................................................... 24-95

24-95
Procedure 24-8: Export THL ........................................................................................................................................... 24-97

24-97
Procedure 24-9: Manage adjacencies ......................................................................................................................... 24-100

24-100
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xii Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Issue 10 March 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
25 Alerters
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 25-1

25-1
Presentation .............................................................................................................................................................................. 25-1

25-1
Procedure 25-1: Use alerter editor ................................................................................................................................. 25-12

25-12
Display and use alerter list ............................................................................................................................................... 25-35

25-35
Display and use alerts list ................................................................................................................................................. 25-38

25-38
26 User preferences
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 26-1

26-1
Presentation .............................................................................................................................................................................. 26-1

26-1
Procedure 26-1: Configure user preferences ................................................................................................................ 26-2

26-2
General user preferences ...................................................................................................................................................... 26-2

26-2
Views / reports user preferences ....................................................................................................................................... 26-5

26-5
Cartography user preferences .......................................................................................................................................... 26-10

26-10
3D views user preferences ................................................................................................................................................ 26-11

26-11
Layout user preferences ..................................................................................................................................................... 26-13

26-13
Save user preferences implicitly ..................................................................................................................................... 26-14

26-14
27 Icons
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 27-1

27-1
Tool bar icons ........................................................................................................................................................................... 27-1

27-1
Topology icons ........................................................................................................................................................................ 27-4

27-4
Function icons ....................................................................................................................................................................... 27-16

27-16
28 NPO example files
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 28-1

28-1
Procedure 28-1: Download NPO example files .......................................................................................................... 28-2

28-2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary xiii
Issue 10 March 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xiv Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Issue 10 March 2011
List of tables
3-1 Trend calculation ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-25

3-25
4-1 Cell2G object properties frequencies and TRX mapping ......................................................................... 4-16
4-2 Cell 2G object properties neighborhood ......................................................................................................... 4-17
4-3 Cell 2G object properties OMC external view ............................................................................................. 4-17
5-1 Filtering Object Zone ............................................................................................................................................. 5-15

5-15
11-1 Description of Parameters from the Reference Values Header ............................................................... 11-3
13-1 Description of parameters from rules header ................................................................................................ 13-3
18-1 Parameters of the Advanced Rollup/DrillDown window ...................................................................... 18-58
18-3 Example of Highlighting Colors (UpperIsFault = true for Indicators) ............................................. 18-83
23-1 Tuning job status icon colors ............................................................................................................................ 23-21
23-2 Tuning session status icons ............................................................................................................................... 23-22
26-1 General user preferences parameters ............................................................................................................... 26-4
27-1 Tool bar icons and descriptions .......................................................................................................................... 27-1
27-2 GSM Network Objects in a Topology Tree ................................................................................................... 27-5
27-3 W-CDMA Network Objects in a Topology Tree ....................................................................................... 27-12
27-4 LTE Network Objects in a Topology Tree ................................................................................................... 27-15
27-5 WiMAX Network Objects in a Topology Tree .......................................................................................... 27-16
27-6 Function icons - Counter .................................................................................................................................... 27-16
27-7 Function icons - indicator .................................................................................................................................. 27-17
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary xv
Issue 10 March 2011
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
27-8 Function icons - Design ...................................................................................................................................... 27-17
27-9 Function icons - Logical .................................................................................................................................... 27-17
27-10 Function icons - Rule .......................................................................................................................................... 27-18
27-11 Function icons - Diagnosis ................................................................................................................................ 27-18
27-12 Function icons - Thematics ............................................................................................................................... 27-18
27-13 Function icons - Event ........................................................................................................................................ 27-19
27-14 Function icons - Tuning ...................................................................................................................................... 27-20
27-15 Function icons - Free Field ............................................................................................................................... 27-20
27-16 Function icons - View Template ...................................................................................................................... 27-20
27-17 Function icons - Report Template ................................................................................................................... 27-21
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xvi Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Issue 10 March 2011
List of figures
2-1 Tool tip example 1 .................................................................................................................................................. 2-35

2-35
2-2 Tool tip example 2 .................................................................................................................................................. 2-36

2-36
3-1 Example view template editor ............................................................................................................................ 3-10
3-2 Filter options panel inside Execution Context window ............................................................................ 3-29
3-3 Event synthesis options ......................................................................................................................................... 3-30
4-1 Example of BSC properties ................................................................................................................................. 4-12
4-2 Example of eNodeB Properties .......................................................................................................................... 4-13
8-1 Parent Working Zone ............................................................................................................................................. 8-15
9-1 Example availability domain ................................................................................................................................. 9-6

9-6
9-2 Threshold and sampling for Call_Drop_Rate indicator ............................................................................ 9-29
9-3 Threshold and sampling for Call_Success_Rate indicator ...................................................................... 9-30
10-1 Example logical parameter properties ............................................................................................................. 10-4
10-2 Example design parameters properties ............................................................................................................ 10-6
11-1 Example of Columns Header for Reference Values File .......................................................................... 11-4
13-1 Example rule header ............................................................................................................................................... 13-3

13-3
13-2 Example of column header for rules file ........................................................................................................ 13-5
13-3 Example first column rules data ........................................................................................................................ 13-6
13-4 Example last column rules data ......................................................................................................................... 13-6
13-5 Example executed rules ...................................................................................................................................... 13-13
14-1 Example executed events ..................................................................................................................................... 14-8
14-2 All events executed view ................................................................................................................................... 14-12
14-3 Multi-object comparison view ......................................................................................................................... 14-13
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary xvii
Issue 10 March 2011
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14-4 Mono-object evolution view ............................................................................................................................. 14-14
14-5 Multi-object evolution view ............................................................................................................................. 14-15
14-6 Event synthesis in tabular mode of mono-object evolution view ....................................................... 14-18
15-1 Example free fields function tab ........................................................................................................................ 15-2
16-1 Example user note ................................................................................................................................................... 16-2

16-2
18-1 Differences of view template indicator properties depending on mode .............................................. 18-7
18-2 Matrix view templates with grid without independent columns ............................................................ 18-8
18-3 Matrix view templates without grid with independent columns ............................................................ 18-8
18-4 Matrix view templates without grid without independent columns ..................................................... 18-9
18-5 Matrix view templates with grid without independent columns ............................................................ 18-9
18-6 Matrix view templates with grid with independent columns .................................................................. 18-9
18-7 Example of standard view properties window ........................................................................................... 18-12
18-8 Example of vector view properties window ............................................................................................... 18-14
18-9 Example of matrix view properties window ............................................................................................... 18-16
18-10 Example of equipment view properties window ....................................................................................... 18-18
18-11 Mono-object evolution view with counters ................................................................................................ 18-44
18-12 Multi-object comparison with indicators ..................................................................................................... 18-45
18-13 Multi-object comparison view with parameters ........................................................................................ 18-45
18-14 Multi-object evolution with multiple network objects, one counter and several dates ............... 18-45
18-15 Multi-counters, one object evolution with raw counters ........................................................................ 18-45
18-16 Indicator view, multiple network objects, one indicator, several dates ............................................. 18-45
18-17 Indicator view, one network object, multiple indicators, several dates ............................................ 18-46
18-18 Indicator view, multiple network objects, multiple indicators, one date .......................................... 18-46
18-19 Indicator view, multiple network objects, multiple indicators, several dates ................................. 18-46
18-20 Vector view ............................................................................................................................................................. 18-46

18-46
18-21 Matrix view ............................................................................................................................................................. 18-46

18-46
18-22 Equipment view with Preferred Date Display Type=Visible and Among Network Objects No with
N=10 and Top N Item = Alarm-Specific Problem ................................................................................. 18-47
18-23 Mono-object evolution view with counters ................................................................................................ 18-47
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xviii Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Issue 10 March 2011
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-24 Multi-object evolution view ............................................................................................................................. 18-48
18-25 Multi-object comparison view with indicators .......................................................................................... 18-48
18-26 Multiple network object, multiple indicators, several dates ................................................................. 18-49
18-27 Vector view ............................................................................................................................................................. 18-49

18-49
18-28 Matrix view with static bound out-of range values .................................................................................. 18-50
18-29 Equipment view with visible dates example (N=4, Top N Item=Alarm Perceived Severity, Among
Network Objects=No) ...................................................................................................................................... 18-50
18-30 Equipment view with visible dates example (N=4, Top N Item=Alarm Perceived Severity, Among
Network Objects=No) ...................................................................................................................................... 18-51
18-31 Equipment view with Visible Dates Example (N=4, Top N Item=Alarm Perceived Severity,
Among Network Objects=No) ..................................................................................................................... 18-51
18-32 Raw graphical display for one counter, multi-object evolution ........................................................... 18-52
18-33 Raw graphical display for multi-counter, one object evolution ........................................................... 18-52
18-34 Zoom in rectangular mode ................................................................................................................................ 18-69
18-35 Selected values highlighted in view ............................................................................................................. 18-88
18-36 Highlighting changes when critical values are selected in legend ...................................................... 18-89
18-37 Nested table (double column header) ......................................................................................................... 18-109
18-38 Nested table (double row header) ................................................................................................................ 18-109
19-1 Mono-object evolution table ............................................................................................................................... 19-4
19-2 Example mono-object evolution table ............................................................................................................. 19-4
19-3 Multi-object evolution table made with an object list ............................................................................... 19-5
19-4 Example of multi-object evolution table made with an object list ........................................................ 19-5
19-5 Multi-object comparison table ............................................................................................................................ 19-5
19-6 Example multi-object comparison table ......................................................................................................... 19-6
19-7 Mono-object distribution table - vector view ................................................................................................ 19-6
19-8 Mono-object distribution table - matrix view ............................................................................................... 19-6
19-9 Warning reports: best value filtering on color .............................................................................................. 19-9
19-10 Warning reports: worst value filtering on color ......................................................................................... 19-10
19-11 Value filtering on variation value .................................................................................................................... 19-10
19-12 Warning table for area threshold ..................................................................................................................... 19-15
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary xix
Issue 10 March 2011
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-13 Example warning table for area threshold ................................................................................................... 19-15
19-14 Example warning table for area variation .................................................................................................... 19-16
19-15 Number of reports generated based on report type, number of network objects, and number of
report templates selected ................................................................................................................................. 19-31
19-16 Multi-object evolution report with spatial aggregation option ............................................................ 19-93
19-17 Multi-object evolution view with spatial aggregation option ............................................................... 19-93
19-18 Multi-object comparison view with spatial aggregation option .......................................................... 19-94
22-1 Example view tabular mode - multi-object comparison containing diagnosis ................................. 22-9
22-2 Example detailed diagnosis view .................................................................................................................... 22-13
22-3 Example exported diagnosis report ................................................................................................................ 22-26
23-1 Tuning session grouped by object type ......................................................................................................... 23-30
23-2 Tuning session grouped by parameters ......................................................................................................... 23-32
23-3 Tuning session window - parameter tuning ................................................................................................ 23-42
23-4 Tuning session window - relation tuning ..................................................................................................... 23-48
23-5 Tuning session window - relation tuning - new object ........................................................................... 23-49
23-6 Tuning session window - frequency tuning ................................................................................................ 23-53
23-7 Tuning session window - advice tuning ....................................................................................................... 23-57
24-1 The information bar ................................................................................................................................................ 24-5

24-5
24-2 Cartography browser .............................................................................................................................................. 24-6
24-3 Example of collapsed cells ................................................................................................................................ 24-11
24-4 Full-expanded cells .............................................................................................................................................. 24-12

24-12
24-5 Example of Cartography window ................................................................................................................... 24-15
24-6 Background layer legend dialog ...................................................................................................................... 24-25
24-7 Network object layer legend dialog ............................................................................................................... 24-26
24-8 Display background layer properties ............................................................................................................. 24-27
24-9 Display THL layer properties ........................................................................................................................... 24-27
24-10 Example Add Layer in Layer Manager window ....................................................................................... 24-32
24-11 Example of site exported in Google Earth at level of detail expanded ............................................. 24-41
24-12 Example of Site Exported in Google Earth at level of detail collapsed ............................................ 24-42
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xx Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Issue 10 March 2011
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-13 Example of site exported in Google Earth at level of detail where cells are not shown ............ 24-42
24-14 Google Earth places window ............................................................................................................................ 24-43
24-15 Sector tool tip ......................................................................................................................................................... 24-44

24-44
24-16 Example of object zoom .................................................................................................................................... 24-49
24-17 Example of site exported in Google Earth at level of detail expanded ............................................. 24-51
24-18 Example of site exported in Google Earth at level of detail collapsed ............................................. 24-52
24-19 Example of site exported in Google Earth at level of detail where cells are not shown ............ 24-52
24-20 Example of executed THL template .............................................................................................................. 24-88
24-21 Example executed THL properties window ................................................................................................ 24-89
24-22 Example input for radius window .................................................................................................................. 24-94
24-23 Example THL template with one criterion legend .................................................................................... 24-95
24-24 Example THL template with two criteria legend ...................................................................................... 24-96
24-25 Single adjacency representation .................................................................................................................... 24-101
24-26 Bi-directional adjacencies representation .................................................................................................. 24-102
24-27 Non co-localized cells in full-expanded / expanded rendering mode ............................................. 24-103
24-28 Co-localized cells in full-expanded rendering mode ............................................................................. 24-103
24-29 Packed links for colocalized cells in collapsed rendering mode ....................................................... 24-104
24-30 Packed links for colocalized cells in expanded rendering mode ...................................................... 24-105
24-31 Packed links between sectors and sites ...................................................................................................... 24-106
24-32 Example adjacency properties ....................................................................................................................... 24-111
24-33 Relations layer legend dialog ......................................................................................................................... 24-120
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary xxi
Issue 10 March 2011
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxii Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Issue 10 March 2011
List of procedures
2 Getting started with Analysis Desktop
2-1 Initialize Analysis Desktop first time ................................................................................................................. 2-3
2-2 Initialize Analysis Desktop .................................................................................................................................... 2-4

2-4
2-3 Exit Analysis Desktop .............................................................................................................................................. 2-5

2-5
2-4 Use standards, modes, topology and function classifications ................................................................... 2-6
2-5 Reorganize standards, modes, topology .......................................................................................................... 2-35
2-6 Display functions browser values ..................................................................................................................... 2-37
2-7 Diagnose QoS problems ....................................................................................................................................... 2-40
2-8 Manage notifications .............................................................................................................................................. 2-50

2-50
2-9 View consolidation follow up ............................................................................................................................. 2-54
2-10 Select / deselect all items ..................................................................................................................................... 2-56

2-56
2-11 String based tree filtering ..................................................................................................................................... 2-57
3 Functional window common tasks
3-1 Propagate network objects or object zones between topology classification or zone modes ........ 3-6
3-2 Display and edit properties .................................................................................................................................... 3-7
3-3 Copy URL .................................................................................................................................................................... 3-9

3-9
3-4 Search .......................................................................................................................................................................... 3-15

3-15
3-5 Set QoS requirement .............................................................................................................................................. 3-33

3-33
4 Topology objects
4-1 Add associated network objects ......................................................................................................................... 4-21
4-2 Use network object class editor ......................................................................................................................... 4-25
4-3 Assign operational network object class ......................................................................................................... 4-31
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary xxiii
Issue 10 March 2011
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Use object zone
5-1 Compute object zone ................................................................................................................................................ 5-6

5-6
5-2 Use object zone editor ........................................................................................................................................... 5-10

5-10
6 Use topology classifications
6-1 Open topology classification editor .................................................................................................................... 6-3
6-2 Create topology classification ............................................................................................................................... 6-8
6-3 Create topology classification by copy ........................................................................................................... 6-11
6-4 Edit topology classification ................................................................................................................................. 6-12
6-5 Apply filter on topology classification ............................................................................................................ 6-13
6-6 Delete topology classification ............................................................................................................................ 6-14
7 Use function classifications
7-1 Open function classification editor ..................................................................................................................... 7-2
7-2 Create function classification ................................................................................................................................ 7-3

7-3
7-3 Create function classification by copy ............................................................................................................... 7-6
7-4 Edit function classification ..................................................................................................................................... 7-7

7-7
7-5 Delete function classification ................................................................................................................................ 7-8

7-8
8 Use working zone
8-1 Open working zone editor ...................................................................................................................................... 8-4
8-2 Create working zone ................................................................................................................................................. 8-5

8-5
8-3 Create working zone by copy ............................................................................................................................. 8-10
8-4 Edit working zone ................................................................................................................................................... 8-11

8-11
8-5 Delete working zone .............................................................................................................................................. 8-12

8-12
8-6 Create sub-working zones .................................................................................................................................... 8-13
8-7 Change current working zone ............................................................................................................................. 8-22
9 Use counters and indicators
9-1 Display and manage counter properties and descriptions ........................................................................ 9-46
9-2 Display and manage indicator properties and descriptions ...................................................................... 9-53
9-3 Propagate counters and indicators .................................................................................................................... 9-63
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxiv Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Issue 10 March 2011
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-4 Create busy hour reference indicator ............................................................................................................... 9-64
9-5 Create indicator value at busy hour .................................................................................................................. 9-66
9-6 Display counter and indicator values ............................................................................................................... 9-68
9-7 Display type 110 counters .................................................................................................................................... 9-69
9-8 Find indicator from counter ................................................................................................................................. 9-72
9-9 Use indicator editor ................................................................................................................................................ 9-73

9-73
10-1 Display parameters ................................................................................................................................................. 10-9

10-9
10-2 Propagate parameters .......................................................................................................................................... 10-10

10-10
11-1 Compare different reference values .................................................................................................................. 11-8
11-2 Create user defined reference values ............................................................................................................. 11-10
12 Use operator reference values (ORV)
12-1 Save as operator reference ................................................................................................................................... 12-4
13 Use rules
13-1 Execute rules .......................................................................................................................................................... 13-13

13-13
13-2 Create user defined rules .................................................................................................................................... 13-14
14 Use events
14-1 Display events .......................................................................................................................................................... 14-7

14-7
14-2 Display event synthesis ...................................................................................................................................... 14-16
15 Use free fields
15-1 Execute free fields .................................................................................................................................................. 15-7

15-7
16 Use user note
16-1 Create user note ....................................................................................................................................................... 16-3

16-3
16-2 Edit user note ........................................................................................................................................................... 16-4

16-4
16-3 Delete user note ....................................................................................................................................................... 16-5

16-5
17 Use favorites
17-1 Select favorite function ......................................................................................................................................... 17-3

17-3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary xxv
Issue 10 March 2011
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-2 Add a function to favorite functions ................................................................................................................ 17-4
17-3 Create group to add favorites .............................................................................................................................. 17-6
17-4 Rename group of favorites ................................................................................................................................... 17-7
17-5 Delete favorite / group of favorites ................................................................................................................... 17-9
17-6 Organize favorites ................................................................................................................................................ 17-10

17-10
17-7 Move favorite / group of favorites to folder ............................................................................................... 17-12
17-8 Import favorites ..................................................................................................................................................... 17-13

17-13
17-9 Export favorites ..................................................................................................................................................... 17-15

17-15
18 Views
18-1 View template editor ............................................................................................................................................ 18-21

18-21
18-2 Execute view .......................................................................................................................................................... 18-42

18-42
18-3 Edit executed view interactively ..................................................................................................................... 18-53
18-4 Edit executed view using dialog box ............................................................................................................. 18-75
18-5 Copy to system clipboard .................................................................................................................................. 18-99
18-6 Rename executed view ..................................................................................................................................... 18-100
18-7 Save executed view as template .................................................................................................................... 18-101
18-8 Export executed views ..................................................................................................................................... 18-103
18-9 Execute diagnosis in an executed view ...................................................................................................... 18-107
19 Reports
19-1 Use report template editor ................................................................................................................................. 19-18
19-2 Execute reports ...................................................................................................................................................... 19-30

19-30
19-3 Edit executed report interactively ................................................................................................................... 19-34
19-4 Edit executed report using dialog box ........................................................................................................... 19-54
19-5 Schedule reports .................................................................................................................................................... 19-60

19-60
19-6 Use job scheduler editor ..................................................................................................................................... 19-70
19-7 Edit view from executed report template ..................................................................................................... 19-84
19-8 Rename executed report ..................................................................................................................................... 19-85
19-9 Save executed report as template .................................................................................................................... 19-89
19-10 Export executed reports ...................................................................................................................................... 19-90

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxvi Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Issue 10 March 2011
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20 MultiNET Mode
20-1 Populate MultiNET mode .................................................................................................................................... 20-4
20-2 Execute view / report in MultiNET mode ...................................................................................................... 20-7
21 POD mode
21-1 Populate POD mode ............................................................................................................................................... 21-2

21-2
21-2 Remove Object(s) from POD mode ................................................................................................................. 21-3
21-3 Clear a POD mode .................................................................................................................................................. 21-4

21-4
22 Diagnosis
22-1 Propagate diagnosis scenario .............................................................................................................................. 22-7
22-2 Open diagnosis editor ............................................................................................................................................ 22-8
22-3 Execute diagnosis in synthetic mode ............................................................................................................... 22-9
22-4 Execute diagnosis in detailed mode ............................................................................................................... 22-11
22-5 Edit detailed diagnosis ........................................................................................................................................ 22-15

22-15
22-6 Schedule executed diagnosis reports ............................................................................................................. 22-20
22-7 Export diagnosis .................................................................................................................................................... 22-25

22-25
23 Tuning
23-1 Use tuning session manager ................................................................................................................................ 23-6
23-2 Manage tuning jobs .............................................................................................................................................. 23-19
23-3 Edit tuning session ............................................................................................................................................... 23-28

23-28
23-4 Propagate from tuning session ......................................................................................................................... 23-62
23-5 Manage reference object(s) for tuning .......................................................................................................... 23-66
23-6 Manage tuning inhibition of network objects ............................................................................................ 23-71
24 Cartography
24-1 Use layer manager ................................................................................................................................................ 24-17

24-17
24-2 Use cartography navigation .............................................................................................................................. 24-45
24-3 Thematic Layer Template (THL) .................................................................................................................... 24-65
24-4 Execute THL .......................................................................................................................................................... 24-86

24-86
24-5 Display thematics for adjacencies .................................................................................................................. 24-92
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary xxvii
Issue 10 March 2011
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-6 Manage frequency re-use ................................................................................................................................... 24-93
24-7 Show THL legend ................................................................................................................................................. 24-95
24-8 Export THL ............................................................................................................................................................. 24-97

24-97
24-9 Manage adjacencies ........................................................................................................................................... 24-100

24-100
25 Alerters
25-1 Use alerter editor ................................................................................................................................................... 25-12

25-12
26 User preferences
26-1 Configure user preferences .................................................................................................................................. 26-2
28-1 Download NPO example files ............................................................................................................................ 28-2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxviii Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Issue 10 March 2011
Preface
Preface
Purpose
This guide describes how to use the Network Performance Optimizer (NPO) in order to
view and manage counter and indicator values for various network objects, and to know
how to monitor and optimize the radio network.
For information about NPO administration procedures, refer to the NPO Administration
User Guide and NPO Platform User Guide.
Reason for revision

Refer to the following Editions for a list of technical and editorial updates to the current
guide.
In Edition 10
First official release of document for Release M4 R5.
In Edition 02
In Edition 01
Document pertinence
This document applies to the NPO M4.1 projects.
Audience
This guide is intended for engineers responsible for the day-to-day optimization of the
network.
Assumed knowledge
You must have a basic understanding of the Alcatel-Lucent operations and maintenance
concepts for the BSS and RNS.
Product names
This document uses the following NPO naming convention: 9959 NPO and the generic
term NPO refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 9959 Network Performance Optimizer.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary xxix
Issue 10 March 2011
Preface
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How to comment
To comment on this document or indicate an error, please contact your customer
representative.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxx Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Issue 10 March 2011
1 Introduction to NPO
1
Overview
Purpose
This section provides an overview of NPO functions and features, and introduces current
terminology.
Contents
Terminology 1-1
NPO presentation 1-6
NPO user interface 1-6
NPO functions 1-9
NPO advanced optimization features 1-13
Terminology
This document uses the following terms.
Term Description
Alerter Based on the reported Performance Measurement data, alerters are defined to
detect QoS problems and generate QoS alarms in the OMC-R.
Availabil- This defines the availability of counters, indicators, parameters, view templates,
ity and report templates both spatially and temporally.
Domain The availability domain of a view template is the intersection of the indicators' or
parameters' availability domain used in the view template. The view templates that
are displayed in the mode RNC, for example, mean that the RNC is in the
availability domain for the view template.
The availability domain of a report template is the intersection of the contained
view templates' availability domain used in the report template. The report
templates that are displayed in the mode RNC, for example, mean that the RNC is
in the availability domain for the report template.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 1-1
Issue 10 March 2011
Introduction to NPO Terminology
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Term Description
Classifica- A classification defines how a set of objects are classified using some criteria. The
tion result of a classification applied to a set of objects is a tree structure in which the
objects are the leaves, and the classification criteria are the nodes.
A classification can be applied to Network Objects (Topology Classification),
Object Zones (Zone Classification), and Functions (Function Classification).
Typical classifications are:
All (all objects)
Topo (all objects classified according to topologic relations between them).
LAC (all objects classified according to their LAC attribute)
etc.
Execution The execution context contains what is required to obtain the indicator or counter
Context values on a set of network objects, for example:
Periodicity (Raw, Hour, Day, Week, Month, 5 Minutes, 1/4 Hour, 1/2 Hour,
busy hours, Trend choices (hours of day, hours of week, days of week, and
days of month), 2 Hours, 3 Hours, 4 Hours, 6 Hours, 8 Hours.)
Time interval
Sampling
Interpolation
Reliability options.
When referring to the execution context, the spatial scope itself (set of network
objects) is not included.
The execution context is used when creating views and reports.
Comment A comment zone is an area of text that may be entered in a report template and is
Zone therefore displayed in an executed report.
Comment zones are not mandatory. They may be interleaved with the view
templates in the report template.
Design Parameters that define the radio network architecture in term of coverage and
Parameters mobility capability.
Diagnosis Diagnosis scenarios provide information on the possible causes of a QoS problem
Scenario and suggest ways to solve it.
The result of the diagnosis appears in the executed view or as an .html file.
The following modes apply:
Detailed mode
When executed in detailed mode, the diagnosis scenario report contains a
precise reporting execution description for each node of the scenario.
Synthetic mode
When executed in Synthetic mode, the diagnosis report contains a synthetic
status associated with a description string for the whole scenario. The
execution process is stopped at the first for the first error encountered.
Tuning mode
The diagnosis can be triggered for checking the Tuning Session.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-2 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Term Description
Events Events are historical network configuration data which keep track of logical /
design parameter modifications and / or topology modifications.
Filter In a topology or function classification, a filter is a set of criteria that can be
applied on top of the classification. It allows hiding of objects that do not match
the filtering criteria in the classification.
In a view, whether on its own or in a report, filtering allows hiding of tabular data
based on user defined criteria.
Function A function is the generic term used to refer to individual objects of a data group or
analysis service class.
Depending on the considered domain, a function is:
A counter
An indicator
A design / logical parameter
An event
A rule
A synthetic diagnosis
A view template or a report template.
Function A function tree is a tree in a mode displaying: counters, indicators, parameters,
Tree events, rules, synthetic diagnosis, view templates or report templates.
Mode A Mode is characterized by:
An Object Type
A list of available topology classifications for the objects of that type
A list of available data / functions applicable to these objects.
Typical modes for GSM are:
BSC
Cell
Adjacency
TRX
Traffic Zone.
Typical modes for W-CDMA are:
RNC
Cell
Adjacency.
Typical modes for LTE are:
eNodeB
Cell.
Depending on the selected mode, the user has a specific list of available topology
classifications and functions.
All available modes are grouped in the Mode Manager.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Term Description
Hardware Collection of hardware and firmware information of the network elements, coming
Inventory from the associated OMC-Rs.
Logical Parameters that permit the telecom behavior optimization. They are also called
Parameters telecom algorithm parameters.
Network A Network Object is the generic term used to refer to individual topology objects
Object such as:
A cell
An RNC
BSS
BSC
BTS
eNodeB
Adjacency
TRX.
Object An Object Zone refers to the logical topology objects that allow the manipulation
Zone of a set of network objects as a single topology object.
The Global Object Zone is defined with no criteria and allows visualization of the
entire Working Zone.
QoS QoS Counters are used as building blocks in the formation of QoS Indicators.
Counter
QoS An Optimization Application view used to track the quality of service in a radio
Indicator network.
It is computed from Performance Measurements / Counters values, other
indicators, or any other available network parameters values (e.g.: radio
parameters).
Reference Excel files that express the default value that a parameter for a given network
Values object should have.
Report A report displays the results coming from indicators or parameters in view
templates, in a tabular or graphical way.
A report contains the network objects, views, comment zones, and an.
A report is also known as an executed report and appears in the report viewer.
Report A report template describes a sequence of graphical representations of QoS
Template indicator or parameter values.
A report template is mainly composed of one or more view templates and
comment zones.
The report template is used when building a report.
A report template is composed of view templates, as a report is composed of
views.
Rules Excel files that express the dependency between two or more parameters of a
given object, and are stored in the Oracle database.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Term Description
Topology A topology tree is a tree displaying network objects.
Tree
Tuning Tuning is a preparation mode consisting of a significant set of modifications
required to correct misbehaviors of the network or to enhance its quality of
service.
A Tuning Session contains Tuning Operations such as parameter modifications or
topology changes.
A Tuning Session can be applied whenever necessary. All Tuning Operations are
then be forwarded to the concerned OMC-Rs. All these operations have to be
considered as recommendations sent to the OMC-R operator(s).
View A view displays the results coming from counters, indicators or parameters, in a
tabular or graphical way.
A view contains the network objects, functions, and (period, interval, sampling,
interpolation, reliability options).
View A view template is a formal description of a graphical representation of QoS
Template indicator or parameter values, depending on the type of view template.
The view template is used when building a view.
As a report template is composed of view templates, a report is composed of
views.
Working A Working Zone is a set of criteria applied on the entire network to compute the
Zone sub-network that appears in the Analysis Desktop.
The Global Working Zone is defined with no criteria and allows visualizing the
entire network.
This subset of cells can be:
Global: All the objects in the database are accessible
User-defined: Using the Working Zone Manager, you define the cells that are
accessible within a particular Working Zone.
You can open only one Working Zone at a time on your workstation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Introduction to NPO NPO presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO presentation
The NPO offers a full range of multi-standard QoS Monitoring and radio network
optimization facilities:
Powerful Graphical User Interface supporting all efficient use of the NPO functions
QoS analysis
QoS decrease cause diagnosis
Radio resource configuration tuning
Cartographic telecom management
Manage hardware inventory
Customizing.
It includes the multi-standard version of the previous products deployed in Alcatel-Lucent
networks:
RNO
NPA
LASER.
The NPO supports GSM, W-CDMA, LTE and WiMAX Radio Access Networks.
This product includes a powerful Oracle database containing performance measurements
and calculated indicators. Based on the database, the detection of QoS degradation is
much faster, as the NPO also proposes the appropriate correction tasks and an improved
logical configuration for the radio network, even in multi-standard environments.
Performance measurements ensure:
Efficient planning and optimization of the network
Efficient optimization of the network
Usage statistics
Detailed investigation of a past problem
Realtime analysis.
NPO user interface

The user interface is the main asset of the NPO. The user interface is intuitive, allowing
the optimizer to interact with the tool in an intuitive way, in order to receive all required
information, commands, and processing results.
The NPO user interface uses the latest graphical methods to provide a clear representation
of all types of data. Functions, referred to as gadgets, are used to present objects (e.g.
GSM, W-CDMA or LTE cells, QoS indicators, logical parameters, etc.) and sort data by
different criteria. Gadgets are grouped into tabs according to their use (e.g. selection of
cells and parameters, or display of QoS indicators). Data appears in tables or charts, and
some facilities allow the user to quickly reorganize the user-interface look.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Introduction to NPO NPO user interface
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure shows the main Man-Machine Interface (MMI) window, the QoS
analysis desktop.
The user interface is based on an object-oriented design, whereby all actions are
accessible through contextual menus. Depending on the selected object(s), only the
relevant commands are provided. Most operations can be performed through the drag and
drop mechanism or with the help of menu bars and tool bars.
The main NPO user interface (analysis desktop) is composed of the following five areas.
Standards and modes browser

Standards define the technologies available on NPO (GSM, W-CDMA, WiMAX, LTE).
Each standard tab has a set of modes. According to the selected mode, the list of
displayed counters / indicators / parameters / reports / views is not the same. It is filtered
according to the availability domain.
Topology classification browser

Radio resources (cells), as well as physical resources (BTS, NodeB, BSC, RNC, eNodeB)
are displayed in tree gadgets and can be selected from the tree gadgets. Different tree
gadgets are used to display the network resources by different classification criteria.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The classification can be done, for example, by:
LAC
Hardware topology
Cell type
Routing area (for GPRS).
Function classification browser

Functions belonging to a selected network resource from the topology browser are also
displayed inside tree gadgets and can be selected from the tree gadgets. This area allows
the operator to select QoS indicators, QoS counters, logical / design parameters, or views
/ reports (grouped into families).
View browser
The view browser is the target place for drag and drop of one or more network resources
and one or more functions.
It contains views that are used to display values of logical / design parameters, indicators,
and counters.
The displayed data in the view can be exported to Excel for further analysis.
Two mode forms are available:
Tabular
Graphic.
Report browser
The report browser is the target place for drag and drop of one or more network resources
and one or more views.
A report is composed of several views, each displaying a set of defined indicators or
parameters for a user defined report period.
Data displayed in the report can be exported to Excel for further analysis.
Tuning browser
The tuning components offer services to create, edit, and apply tuning sessions on tunable
systems (OMC-Rs). A Tuning Session is a set of changes (object / parameters /
adjacencies / frequency creation, update or deletion) that can be created, updated and
applied.
Detailed diagnosis report browser

The detailed diagnosis report browser gives information on the possible cause of a
detected QoS problem, and offers hyperlinks to view the Python node code.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cartography browser
The geographical representation capability is a complement to the tree gadgets
representation. GSM cells, W-CDMA cells, LTE cells, BTSs, NodeBs, BSCs, RNCs,
MSCs, OMC-Rs, eNodeBs, or adjacencies are displayed with geographical maps in the
background, in order to display the location of the network elements, the sectoring, the
type and the status of cells at a glance. This geographical representation offers zooming
facilities and searching facilities (by dragging and dropping objects from tree gadges
representations).
NPO functions
The NPO enables you to optimize the following functions.
QoS analysis
The NPO collects periodical measurements of the radio traffic, radio resource usage, and
handover behavior from the network elements through the declared OMC-Rs. These
measurements serve the quality of service monitoring at the NPO, and back-office
activities such as network optimization and network planning.
The permanent, network-wide QoS monitoring relies on the regular collection of the same
performance counters on all managed Network Elements.
Raw measurements are stored in the NPO database. Based on raw measurements,
indicators are calculated and stored for up to two years. These indicators are consolidated
in daily, weekly, and monthly values, and can be additionally consolidated on a group of
Network Elements. The indicators correspond to high level information which can be
directly managed by the operator and are defined by Alcatel-Lucent.
The user can select and launch any predefined or user-defined QoS report. the NPO
provides a powerful dynamic graphical user interface that eases QoS report analysis. For
specific needs where the provided standard indicators are not appropriate, the operator
can define via an Indicator Manager its own indicators called Customer Indicators.
The NPO operator can display the results in the form of reports containing both tables and
graphs (several indicators graphically displayed simultaneously). The customer can also
customize reports, for an easier adaptation to operator needs.
Special functions allow identification of the worst or best cells related to a QoS indicator,
to get reports on the QoS evolution, and to compare the service quality of different cells.
Comparing QoS indicator values with predefined thresholds, the NPO ensures rapid
verification of the quality of service in each single cell.
Reference values
Reference values are the recommended values of parameters. They allow a quick audit of
the network and allow the operator to detect which objects are not following
recommendations for parameter values. The reference values for a parameter depend on
different criteria, such as cell type, cell class, frequency, and BTS type.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Introduction to NPO NPO functions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO is delivered with a default set of reference values, which can be customized to fit the
operator's needs.
Operator reference values

The network Operator Reference Values (ORV) are sets of parameters related to network
objects. The Operator Reference Values are the reference values for an instance of
objects, and not for an object type as reference values.
The ORV data are stored in the database and can be restored later through a tuning
session.
Rules and diagnosis

The NPO is used to investigate and diagnose QoS problems. Depending on the raised
problem, it proposes some corrective actions and / or extra investigations.
In order to benefit directly from any optimizer's field experience, the NPO allows
integrating new diagnosis scenarios. In this way, the network optimizer can rely on the
diagnosis rules supplied by Alcatel-Lucent, but also on the ones derived from their own
optimization experience.
Whenever a QoS indicator reaches its alert threshold, the NPO offers the diagnosis
feature to the optimizer, in order to find out the possible cause of the QoS degradation.
Events
Events show when key information of a parameter (identifier, BSC, frequency) or
topology (eg. Move BTS) changes, based on the QoS evolution of the network.
The NPO is delivered with a default set of events.
Note: For W-CDMA, only the following events are available:
Cell
Adjacency
Network element creation / deletion.
For LTE, the events are not available.
Configuration parameters
The configuration function is used to verify the operational logical parameter settings.
This is done by comparing the operational values with the reference values.
Additionally, the operational cell design is verified by comparison with the planned
design. In order to follow the evolution of the logical parameter settings, the imported
operational values are stored in the NPO database. Appropriate reports can be requested at
any time.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Tuning
After a network optimization session is completed, a radio parameter tuning is performed
using the NPO. This is done in order to correct the network misbehavior and uses
functions of monitoring, checking, and diagnosis. The NPO user can prepare radio
resource configuration modifications, frequency changes and neighborhood modification
and apply them through the managed OMC-Rs.
Cartography
The cartography module allows the user to show the location of the network elements, the
sectoring, the type and the status of cells at a glance. It displays cells, adjacencies, BTSs,
BSCs and eNodeBs with geographical maps in the background, coming from RNP. The
integrated cartography editor offers zooming, highlighting, searching, and exporting
facilities.
Contextual menus on cells allow a quick identification of interfered cells, serving cell
area, neighborhood, etc. Finally, it is possible to choose any group of cells in the
geographical representation and show them selected in the different tree gadgets. NPO
geographical representation supports standard vector formats.
Network stability, availability and alarms

The Network Unavailability and Alarm Reporting Tool (NUART):
Analyzes and reports system quality degradation
Detects the impact on stability and unavailability
Highlights faulty equipment
Extracts unavailability related to managed objects for a specified time period
Filters and sorts statistics.
Based on the reported PM data, alerters detect QoS problems and generate QoS alarms.
For more information, refer to the NPO Unavailability User Guide.
Remote inventory data management (RIDM)

Note: This section is not applicable for W-CDMA.
The NPO manages the hardware inventory for Network Elements from the OMC-Rs that
send data automatically, in order to show information about the required equipment.
The NPO offers support for statistics, and search and comparison with the list of allowed
items referred to as CAL (Customer Acceptance List).
For more information, refer to the NPO Unavailability User Guide.
Customizing
In order to allow immediate use of the NPO, all adaptable values are set with default
values provided by Alcatel-Lucent at delivery. The operator must perform the
customization, as specific access rights are required.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You can customize the following values:
User defined QoS indicators
NPO users can create their own indicators when required.
QoS indicator thresholds
The user can define three alert thresholds corresponding to three QoS requirement
levels, for each QoS indicator.
Views
A view is an arrangement of consistent graphs and tables for a set of QoS indicators,
parameters, and other functions.
The following four types of views are defined: standard, vector, and matrix and
equipment.
Apart from the specific case of Equipment, views can also be grouped into four types
of evolution and comparison:
Mono-Object Evolution View
Multi-Object Evolution View
Multi-Object Comparison View
Mono-Object Distribution View.
Reports
A report is composed of one or several views, and enables the user to display results
coming from QoS indicators, parameters, and other functions in view templates.
NPO provides the five types of reports:
Mono-Object Evolution Report
Multi-Object Evolution Report
Multi-Object Comparison Report
Mono-Object Distribution Report
Warning Report.
Working zones
A Working Zone defines an area on which an optimizer performs his network
optimization activities (network resource filter).
Object zones
An object zone is a user-defined filter that works on the current Working Zone.
Topology classifications
The topology classification defines how network objects are classified in a tree
structure, depending on the selected mode. It is dependant on used technology.
Function classifications
The function classification defines how functions are classified in a tree structure. It is
not dependant on the used technology.
Free field definitions
Free fields are attributes that can be defined on any topology objects (such as cells,
BSCs, RNCs). Sorting and filtering capabilities can then be used to take advantage of
the information provided by these fields.
Parameter reference values
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The reference value of a logical parameter is the one recommended by the
optimization expert.
Parameter checking rules
A parameter checking rule expresses the functional dependency between a set of
parameters of objects like cell, BSS or adjacent cells.
Diagnosis scenarios
A diagnosis scenario is an analysis tree that contains ways to investigate a quality of
service problem using the data available in NPO. Scenarios can be system or user
defined.
Alerters
Alerters are defined to detect QoS problems and generate QoS alarms in the OMC-R,
on the basis of reported Performance Measurement data, then automatically loaded
inside the NPO. They are calculated from indicators.
NPO advanced optimization features

The NPO provides the following advanced optimization features.
Working zones
Working zones facilitate the work on a specific set of network objects and functions. They
are sub-network definitions, to assist the operator, who can only work in some Working
Zones.
When starting the Analysis Desktop, the user selects the preferred Working Zone to work
with and only sees the objects from this Working Zone.
To define a Working Zone, a set of criteria on base objects (for example, cells) is provided
and other accessible objects are deduced from this basic set of objects.
The Global Working Zone is a Working Zone with no filter that contains all objects.
Radio measurement statistics

Even if the Radio Measurement Statistics (RMS) feature is a GSM-specific feature, the
NPO offers some services based on RMS because it is of prime importance for GSM
operators and the aim of the NPO is to offer all the means possible to optimize the radio
network, regardless of the type of technology used.
RMS allows the operator to:
Detect interfered frequencies
Assess the quality of cell coverage
Assess the traffic distribution in the cell using statistics on reported neighbor cells
Evaluate the voice quality in the cell.
To Import RMS Template Values (GSM Specific), refer to the NPO Administration User
Guide document.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Introduction to NPO NPO advanced optimization features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
QoS and resource unavailability correlation
Note: This section is not available for W-CDMA.
When a cell has a bad QoS (for example, because of congestion), it is important for the
optimizer to know if this bad QoS is due to a pure radio problem, or to a hardware failure
or maintenance action that led to the unavailability of the corresponding equipment. For
example, if a cell with four TRX had two of the four TREs out of service during the day,
there is a strong probability that there was some congestion during this period.
LASER calculates unavailability indicators based on information collected from the
managed OMC-Rs, which are then imported into the NPO. Each indicator reflects the
availability percentage of the corresponding resource (for example, cell or TRX). The
operator can display these indicators or use them as an optional filter for warning reports
(for example, to display the 20 worst cells of the Working Zone, in terms of congestion,
and having an unavailability less than 5% during the day).
User defined indicators

The NPO provides a rich set of default QoS indicators that allow the optimizer to
carefully follow the network's quality of service and take corrective actions, in the case
they are not optimal.
At the same time, it also allows operators to define their own QoS indicator formulas,
using a graphical editor. Once the indicators are created, they are available for all QoS
related functions, such as QoS reports.
Alcatel-Lucent delivers its own set of indicators (system indicators), but the operator can
create its own (customer indicators).
The threshold of system indicators can be updated by the optimizer.
User defined rules

The NPO interface allows the user to change the applicable rules and checked parameters.
Rules are the dependencies between two or more parameters of a given network object
(for example, one timer must be higher than another). The format of the rules file is
Excel.
Default rules are provided with the system, but they can also be changed to better suit
customer needs. The maximum value of rules provided within the NPO application (per
RNS / BSS / eNodeB release) is 200. The operator can create up to 50 rules.
User defined diagnosis

The NPO investigates the causes of QoS weaknesses for particular QoS indicators and
complex rules, using predefined diagnosis scenarios. It then suggests corrective actions
and / or further investigation.
System diagnosis scenarios are provided by the NPO, but optimizers can create their own
diagnosis scenarios, using the Eclipse editor. The procedure is explained in the NPO
Diagnosis Development User Guide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User defined thematic layers
The thematic layer is a feature that allows the user to visualize QoS information on the
geographical representation. It colors parts of the geographical representation, according
to user requests on the QoS indicators, parameter values, analysis results, etc.
The NPO provides a thematic layer editor where each operator is free to enter his own
requests and the associated colors depending on the results. The product is delivered with
some default layers like traffic distribution or frequency reusing.
The results are mapped on cell contours (when analysis is done on cells) to provide a
good representation, even at low zoom level.
User defined topology objects

Note: This is not available for LTE.
Besides the imported topology objects, the customer can create their own topology
objects. The procedure is defined in Manage customer topology objects, in the NPO
Administration User Guide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
2 2 etting started with
G
Analysis Desktop
Overview
Purpose
This section describes how to initialize and perform simple tasks using the Analysis
Desktop main window.
Contents
Procedure 2-1: Initialize Analysis Desktop first time 2-3

Procedure 2-2: Initialize Analysis Desktop 2-4
Procedure 2-3: Exit Analysis Desktop 2-5
Use title bar 2-5
Procedure 2-4: Use standards, modes, topology and function classifications 2-6
Customize analysis desktop 2-34
Procedure 2-5: Reorganize standards, modes, topology 2-35
Use tool tips 2-35
Procedure 2-6: Display functions browser values 2-37
Create and execute reports 2-38
Procedure 2-7: Diagnose QoS problems 2-40
Create tuning operations 2-40
Use cartography management functions 2-41
QoS analysis using Thematic Layers (THL) 2-41
Manage network stability, availability and alarms 2-42
Use remote inventory data management (RIDM) 2-42
Access online help 2-43
Use tip of the day 2-44
Manage licensing 2-45
Procedure 2-8: Manage notifications 2-50
Manage tokens 2-51
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 2-9: View consolidation follow up 2-54

Procedure 2-10: Select / deselect all items 2-56
Procedure 2-11: String based tree filtering 2-57
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-1: Initialize Analysis Desktop first time
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 2-1: Initialize Analysis Desktop first time

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Start the Analysis Desktop.

Result: The Select Working Zone window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the appropriate Working Zone (global or user defined) and then click on Open.
Result: The default standard, mode, topology classification and function classification
appear for the selected Working Zone.
The topology and function trees are created, but only the first level trees are visible.
The QoS requirement is set as that of the Working Zone.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-2: Initialize Analysis Desktop
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 2-2: Initialize Analysis Desktop

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Start the Analysis Desktop.

Result: The following question appears:
Last Working Zone was <working_zone_type> , would you like to open
it?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform one of the following options.
To Click on
Initialize the last selected Working Zone Yes
The last accessed standard, mode, topology classification
and function classification are loaded for the selected
Working Zone, with everything that the user accessed the
last time.
However, only the first level function and topology trees are
displayed.
Open the Select Working Zone window No
Result: The Working Zone is initialized or the Select Working Zone window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the appropriate Working Zone, then click on Open.

Result: The default standard, mode, topology classification and function classification
are displayed for the selected Working Zone.
The topology and function trees are created, but only the first level trees are
displayed.
The QoS requirement is set as that of the Working Zone.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-3: Exit Analysis Desktop
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 2-3: Exit Analysis Desktop

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform one of the following options:

Select Analysis Desktop -> Exit, OR
Click on the icon from the tool bar.
Result: If the user preferences are set with the Prompt to confirm on exit option, the
following confirmation appears:
Modified data has not been saved and will be lost if you exit now
(executed views or reports, tuning sessions, object editors).
Are you sure you want to exit?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
To Click on
Exit the Analysis Desktop without saving the information and Yes
close all opened object editors
Keep program open and save or close views / reports and / or No
object editors
Result: The Analysis Desktop closes.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Use title bar

The title bar is the strip at the top of the Analysis Desktop window. It contains the current
working zone and the QoS requirement.
The icon and company name appear on the left. On the right, several icons allow the user
to minimize, maximize or close the application.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4: Use standards, modes, topology and
function classifications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 2-4: Use standards, modes, topology and function

classifications
This section describes the Analysis Desktop main window. If the user logs in for the first
time, the first level tree expands.
The standard browser comprises the following functions.
Function Displays
Mode Browser -> Topology Network Objects
Classification Browser Functions
Mode Browser -> Function
Classification Browser
Executed View Browser Executed Views
The executed view browser can contain:
One or more network objects
One or more counters / indicators / view
templates / parameters (design or logical) / rules /
events / free fields / diagnosis.
Executed Report Browser Executed Reports
The executed report browser can contain:
One or more view templates / report templates.
Cartography Browser Cartography Information, containing three main
regions:
Tool bar
View port
Minimap.
The cartography browser contains:
A viewport with the geographical representation
of the evaluated zone containing several network
objects
The Layer Manager with a list of layers and
sub-layers.
Tuning Browser Tuning Sessions
The tuning browser can contain:
One or more tuning sessions
One or more tuning jobs
Synthesis table.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Function Displays
Detailed Diagnosis Browser Detailed Diagnosis Scenario Execution.
The Detailed Diagnosis Report browser contains test
nodes grouped in trees, giving information on the
possible cause of a detected QoS problem, and
offering hyperlinks to see the Python node code.
Analysis Desktop browsers and tabs

The following figure shows how the Analysis Desktop is organized into browsers and
tabs.
Standards and modes browser

The standards define the available technologies:
GSM
W-CDMA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LTE
WiMAX.
When one standard is selected, the tab is highlighted. This is called the active standard.
Arrow buttons are available for accessing all standards if they are not visible due to the
width of the standard browser.
Each standard tab has a set of modes. When one mode is selected, it is highlighted. This is
called the active mode.
According to the selected mode, the list of displayed counters / indicators / parameters /
reports / views is not the same. It is filtered according to the availability domain.
The default display for the modes for GSM is the tabular mode.
The default display for the modes for W-CDMA and LTE is the tree.
For multi-standard, the default mode is the tree.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The mode tree displays all modes that can be classified using hierarchical relations
between them (i.e. to put all modes corresponding to sub-objects of Cell3G below the
mode of Cell3G).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Topology classification browser

The topology browser comprises:
Topology Classification Tabs
These are the set of tabs for topology mode classification.
If all tabs cannot be displayed due to the width of the Topology browser, arrow
buttons appear allowing the user to scroll among all the existing tabs.
Topology Status Bar
The topology status bar displays the number of selected objects and the total number
of objects. It is dynamically refreshed when the selection changes.
Topology Tree
The Topology Tree displays the network objects as a tree, for the selected mode and
topology classification. The All classification is applicable for all modes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Function classification browser

The function browser comprises:
Function Tabs
The function tabs include the set of tabs for the selected mode.
If all tabs cannot be displayed due to the width of the Function browser, arrow buttons
appear allowing the user to scroll among all the existing tabs.
Function Status Bar
The function status bar displays the number of selected functions and the total number
of functions. It is dynamically refreshed when the selection changes.
Functions Tree
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The function tree displays the following list of functions per selected mode and function:
Counters
The functions tree only displays the scalar counters. However, when creating
indicators, all types of counters, i.e. Scalar, Matrix, Vector and Axis are displayed in
the tree. Counters are classified as Family / Sub-Family, with up to four levels of
sub-families.
Design
Design parameters can have four sub-levels in the family hierarchy (i.e. family and
sub-family).
Indicators
The indicator tree only displays presentation indicators. Axis indicators appear in the
indicator tree only when creating indicators and view templates.
You can display indicators in two different classifications:
Indicator Type / Family / Sub-Family Classification
In this classification, the indicator type can be Scalar / Vector / Matrix. Four levels
of family / sub-family classification are supported.
It is possible to sort indicators per indicator type.
Family / Sub-Family Classification
No indicator type is present for the indicator. Four levels of family / sub-family
classification are supported.
Logical
Logical parameters can have four sub-levels in the family hierarchy (i.e. family and
sub-family).
Report
Report Templates can be displayed in three different classifications:
Report
In this classification, the Report Template Type can be Mono-Object Evolution,
Multi-Object Evolution, etc.
The family / sub-family classification can be up to four levels.
No report template type is mentioned for the report. Four levels of family /
sub-family classification are supported.
Report Type Classification
In this classification, the Report Template Type can be Mono-Object Evolution,
Multi-Object Evolution, etc.
View
View Templates can be displayed in two different classifications:
View Template Type / Family / Sub-Family Classification
In this classification, the View Template Type can be Scalar / Vector / Matrix /
Equipment. Four levels of family / sub-family classification are supported.
No view template type is mentioned for the view. Four levels of family /
sub-family classification are supported.
Free Fields
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Free Fields are displayed in alphabetic order and no user-defined classification can be
created for them.
No icon is associated with the free field.
Diagnosis Scenarios
Diagnoses are displayed classified by their family and sub-families properties.
One Diagnosis can be associated with more than one family / sub-family and thus be
displayed more than once.
Rules
Rules are displayed classified by their family and sub-families properties.
One Rule can be associated with more than one family / sub-family and thus be
Thematics
THL are displayed classified by their family and sub-families properties.
One THL can be associated with more than one family / sub-family and thus be
Tuning
Tuning classification contains Tuning Operations. Most of the Tuning Operations are
leaves and can be dragged and dropped in a Tuning Session.
Tuning Operations are sorted by alphabetical order and Parameters are displayed
classified by their family and sub-families properties under a Standard node. Only
Parameters for which the Visible property is set to True and that are tagged as being
Tunable are displayed.
Events
Events are displayed classified by standard.
Executed view browser

The executed view browser can contain:
One or more counters / indicators / view templates / parameters (design or logical) /
rules / events / free fields / diagnosis.
Executed report browser

The executed report browser can contain:
One or more view templates / report templates.
Cartography browser
The cartography browser contains:
A viewport with the geographical representation of the evaluated zone containing
several network objects
The Layer Manager with a list of layers and sub-layers.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Detailed diagnosis report browser
The Detailed Diagnosis Report browser contains test nodes grouped in trees, giving
information on the possible cause of a detected QoS problem, and offering hyperlinks to
see the Python node code.
Tuning browser
The tuning browser can contain:
One or more tuning sessions
One or more tuning jobs
Synthesis table.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 2-4.1: Collapse all in topology classification browser (p. 2-17).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 2-4.2: Organize modes in standards and modes browser (p. 2-18).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 2-4.3: Hide mode in standards and modes browser (p. 2-21).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Procedure 2-4.4: Refresh mode in standards and modes browser (p. 2-22).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Procedure 2-4.5: Organize topology classification trees (p. 2-23).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Procedure 2-4.6: Hide topology classification (p. 2-25).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Procedure 2-4.7: Refresh topology tree (p. 2-26).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Procedure 2-4.8: Collapse all in topology browser (p. 2-27).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Procedure 2-4.9: Apply filter on topology classification (p. 2-28).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Procedure 2-4.10: Organize function trees (p. 2-29).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Procedure 2-4.11: Hide function tree (p. 2-31).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Procedure 2-4.12: Refresh function tree (p. 2-32).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Procedure 2-4.13: Collapse all function trees (p. 2-33).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4.1: Collapse all in topology classification
browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 2-4.1: Collapse all in topology classification

browser
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right click on the Mode tree and select Collapse all.

Result: The selected mode level closes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Use the Collapse all option to go back to the first level visible nodes and close
everything.
Result: The tree nodes are hidden.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4.2: Organize modes in standards and modes
browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 2-4.2: Organize modes in standards and modes

browser
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right click on a mode and select Organize Modes....

Result: The Organize Modes window opens in tab mode, displaying the available
modes.
The Organize Modes window also opens in tree mode, displaying the available
modes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Only select the modes to display.
To Do
Hide a mode Perform the following steps:
1. Deselect or select the required mode and
click on Hide.
The following confirmation message
appears:
Deselected Mode and its
Topology Classifications and
functions will also be hidden
2. Click on Yes.
Move a mode one position higher Select the required mode and click on
Move Up.
Move a mode one position lower Select the required mode and click on
Move Down.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Show a mode Click on Show.
Result: The mode presentation is defined.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on OK.
Result: The following message appears:
Are you sure you want to see the changes in the modes?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on Yes.
Result: The mode changes are defined.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4.3: Hide mode in standards and modes
browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 2-4.3: Hide mode in standards and modes browser

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right click on a mode and select Hide Mode.

Result: The following message appears.
Note: In LTE NPO, the confirmation message does not appear.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on Yes.
Result: The selected mode and its corresponding topology classification and data trees
are hidden.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4.4: Refresh mode in standards and modes
browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 2-4.4: Refresh mode in standards and modes

browser
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right click on a mode and select Refresh Mode.

Result: The mode is refreshed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If required, select another mode and then select Refresh Mode.

Result: The selected mode and its corresponding topology classification and data trees
are refreshed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4.5: Organize topology classification trees
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 2-4.5: Organize topology classification trees

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right click on a topology classification tab and select Organize Trees....

Result: The Organize Topology Classification window opens, displaying the
available classifications.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4.5: Organize topology classification trees
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Only select the classifications to display.
To Do
Hide a classification Perform the following steps:
1. Deselect or select the classification and
click on Hide.
appears.
Deselected Topology
Classifications will be hidden.
2. Click on Yes.
Move a classification one position higher Select the classification and click on Move Up.
Move a classification one position lower Select the classification and click on
Move Down.
Show a classification Click on Show.
Result: The classification organization is defined.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on OK.
Are you sure you want to see the changes in the topology
classifications?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on Yes.
Result: The classification changes are defined.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4.6: Hide topology classification
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 2-4.6: Hide topology classification

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right click on a classification and select Hide Tree.

Note: In LTE NPO, the confirmation message does not appear.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on Yes.
Result: The selected topology classification are hidden.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4.7: Refresh topology tree
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 2-4.7: Refresh topology tree

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right click on a classification and select Refresh Tree.

Result: The selected topology classification is refreshed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If required, select another classification and then select Refresh Tree.

Result: The selected topology classification is refreshed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4.8: Collapse all in topology browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 2-4.8: Collapse all in topology browser

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right click on the topology browser and select Collapse all.

Result: The selected tree level closes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Use the Collapse all option to go back to the first level visible nodes and close
everything.
Result: The tree nodes are hidden.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4.9: Apply filter on topology classification
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 2-4.9: Apply filter on topology classification

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right click on a topology classification and select Select Filter.

Result: A window with the list of existing filters appears, but without the current
active filter.
The first item is labeled No Filter and is used to remove any filter on the
classification.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the appropriate pre-defined filter.

Result: The topology tree is refreshed according to the filtered classification.
For more information, refer to Chapter 6, Use topology classifications.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4.10: Organize function trees
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 2-4.10: Organize function trees

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right click on a function tree and select Organize Trees...

Result: The Organize Data Trees window opens, displaying the available function
trees.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4.10: Organize function trees
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Only the function trees to display must be selected.
To Do
Hide a mode Perform the following steps:
1. De-select or select the mode and click on
Hide.
appears.
Deselected Data Trees will be
hidden.
2. Click on Yes.
Move a mode one position higher Select the mode and click on Move Up.
Move a mode one position lower Select the mode and click on Move Down.
Show a mode Click on Show.
Result: The function tree presentation is defined.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on OK.
Are you sure you want to see the changes in the data trees?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on Yes.
Result: The function tree changes are defined.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4.11: Hide function tree
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 2-4.11: Hide function tree

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right click on a function and select Hide.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on Yes.
Result: The selected function tree is hidden.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4.12: Refresh function tree
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 2-4.12: Refresh function tree

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right click on a function tree and select Refresh Tree.

Result: The selected function tree is refreshed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If required, select another function tree and then select Refresh Tree.
Result: The selected function tree is refreshed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4.13: Collapse all function trees
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 2-4.13: Collapse all function trees

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right click on the function tree and select Classification.

Result: A new window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select one of the following options.
To Select
Display design / logical parameters, counters, Family / Sub-Family
indicators, views, reports, tuning, events, free
fields
Display reports, diagnosis scenarios, rules Type
Display indicators, views, reports Type / Family / Sub-Family
Display all functions, if customer function <Customer Defined>
classifications are created; see Procedure 7-2:
Create function classification (p. 7-3).
Result: The function tree is classified based on the selected option.

For more information, refer to Chapter 7, Use function classifications.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Customize analysis desktop
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Customize analysis desktop

User preferences
The behavior of Analysis Desktop can be customized to fit user preferences. Refer to
Procedure 26-1: Configure user preferences (p. 26-2).
The window location, splitter position and window size are stored as implicit user
preferences.
Resizing
A horizontal splitter separates the Mode browser and Executed View browser; and a
vertical splitter separates the Mode browser and Executed Report browser. The browsers
can be re-sized and the splitters act as partitions (see Layout user preferences
(p. 26-13)).
Visibility management
If a Sub-Family is not defined, then the function object appears under the Family. If a
Family is not defined, then the function object is invisible and can only be seen by the
Administrator and its owner at the root level.
Visibility management for objects in the modes and functions browser takes into
consideration the following factors:
When an object has no family, it is only visible to the Administrator and its owner in
the editors, not in the Analysis Desktop tree (except concerning working zone)
When an object has a family, it is visible only if the Visible flag is set to true
When an operator removes the family associated with an object, the Visible flag is
automatically set to false and cannot be changed until a new family is reentered
When an operator associates a family with an object, the Visible flag is automatically
set to true but can then be changed before being saved
For System objects, only the Administrator can change the Visible property.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-5: Reorganize standards, modes, topology
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 2-5: Reorganize standards, modes, topology

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the menu bar, select one of the following:

Edit -> Organize -> Standards... / Modes... / Topology...
Result: The Organize Standards / Modes / Topology window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the technology whose standard / mode / topology to modify.

Result: The technology is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Hide the selected technology Click on Hide.
Move the selected technology Select the technology and click on Move Up.
Move the selected technology Select the technology and click on
Move Down.
Show the selected technology Click on Show.
Result: The selected technology is reorganized.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Use tool tips

To enhance the information on an item, the NPO provides tool tips by hovering the cursor
over the item, without clicking it.
A small box appears with supplementary information regarding the item being hovered
over.
Tool tips are available for all NEs, functions, views / reports, user note, cursors in
graphics, etc.
Figure 2-1 Tool tip example 1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Use tool tips
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-2 Tool tip example 2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-6: Display functions browser values
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 2-6: Display functions browser values

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 You can either use the drag and drop facility or the menu tool bar to display the values of
indicators / counters / parameters / views / reports.
Use Action
Drag and drop Into the Executed View / Report browser
Select from the menu tool bar, as appropriate Select one of the following options:
View -> Execute View... for indicators /
counters / parameters / views
Report -> Execute Report... for reports.
Press Select one of the following options:
Ctrl+Q, for indicators / counters /
parameters / views
Ctrl+Shift+R, for reports.
Result: The Execution Context window opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Set the appropriate values for:

Periodicity
Interval date and time
Interpolation
Sampling
Reliability
Tuning session for forecast value
Filter for warning reports
Event synthesis and trend predictions.
Result: The values are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on OK.
Result: The functions browser values are displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-6: Display functions browser values
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
View templates, report templates and indicators
To View Do
View templates Perform the following steps:
1. Select the appropriate view.
2. Right click and select View Template OR
select Data-> View Template from the
tool bar OR press CTRL+E.
The View Template Editor window opens,
displaying the properties of the selected view
template.
Report templates Perform the following steps:
2. Right click and select Report Template
OR select Data-> Report Template from
the tool bar OR press CTRL+R.
The Report Template Editor window opens,
displaying the properties of the selected report
template.
Indicators Perform the following steps:
2. Right click and select Indicator... OR
select Data-> Indicators... from the tool
bar OR press Ctrl+N.
The Indicator Editor window opens,
displaying the properties of the selected
indicator.
Create and execute reports

Reports are created to display QoS reports based on user's own selections. A report is
composed of graphs and tables, each displaying a set of defined QoS functions for a
selected set of network resources and the defined report period (see Procedure 19-1.2:
Create report template (p. 19-20)).
For an easier adaptation to operator needs, the operator can customize QoS reports; see
Procedure 19-1.4: Edit report template (p. 19-25).
The NPO provides five types of QoS reports:
Mono-object evolution reports
Multi-object evolution reports
Multi-object comparison reports
Multi-object distribution reports
Warning reports.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Create and execute reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The user may choose to:
Procedure 19-2: Execute reports (p. 19-30), OR
Procedure 19-5: Schedule reports (p. 19-60).
After their execution, the reports are made available in a repository.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-7: Diagnose QoS problems
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 2-7: Diagnose QoS problems

If a QoS weaknesses is detected in the NPO, use the diagnosis function to find its root
cause and propose corrective actions and / or further investigation.
The NPO has its own system diagnosis scenarios, but the operator can create a diagnosis
scenario to better suit customer needs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 22-2: Open diagnosis editor (p. 22-8).

Result: The diagnosis editor is open.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Create a new scenario.

Refer to the NPO Diagnosis Development User Guide document, to Create Scenario.
Result: The new scenario is created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To trigger an investigation of the identified QoS problems, execute a view in:

Procedure 22-3: Execute diagnosis in synthetic mode (p. 22-9), for a short
presentation of where the problem is located
Procedure 22-4: Execute diagnosis in detailed mode (p. 22-11), to see the detailed
report of the investigation.
Create tuning operations

The NPO uses the results from the optimized reports to tune the radio configuration.
You can then define and propose network modifications to the OMC-R operator, such as:
Create parameter tuning operations
Create topology relation tuning operations
Create frequency tuning operations
Create advice tuning operations.
The tuning session is then applied; see Procedure 23-1.6: Apply tuning session
(p. 23-16). The NPO generates tuning files, which can be viewed and exported to the
OMC-R.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Use cartography management functions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use cartography management functions

The NPO offers a geographical representation capability for its network objects.
Before being able to visualize the layers, the administrator has to import raster and vector
files directly from the Analysis Desktop or via web administration tools; see Import
vector file using GUI and Import raster file using GUI in the NPO Administration User
Guide.
The operator may then:
Procedure 24-1.6: Add layer in DT, CCA and background layer (p. 24-30)
Add network objects in viewport (p. 24-58)
Perform the required operations with the displayed result:
Procedure 24-2.1: Use pan rendering viewport (p. 24-48)
Procedure 24-2.2: Zoom in / out / rectangular (p. 24-49)
Use single / circular selection (p. 24-46)
Highlight network objects (p. 24-61)
Procedure 24-2.4: Compute distance between points / network objects
(p. 24-54).
Propagate network object selection from cartographic viewer into mode (p. 24-60)
Propagate executed view to highlight network objects in cartography (p. 24-60)
Procedure 24-1.12: Export displayed layers / viewport (p. 24-37).
QoS analysis using Thematic Layers (THL)

The values of logical / design parameters, QoS indicators, diagnosis, rules, geographic
(ex: distance from the POI) and customer data (free fields) can be displayed graphically
using Thematic Layers (THL).
Thematic Layers display a visual analysis of one property for a group of network objects
in the map window.
The NPO offers a default Thematic Layer when installed, but you can create, modify and
delete your own; see Procedure 24-3: Thematic Layer Template (THL) (p. 24-65).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Manage network stability, availability and alarms
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Manage network stability, availability and alarms

Based on the OMC-R imported data, the NUART (Network Unavailability and Alarm
Reporting Tool) monitors the system stability and availability, gathered under the generic
terminology of system quality.
For more information about how to import LASER dictionaries, refer to Import
availability management dictionary using GUI in the NPO Administration User Guide
document.
For more information about how to load NUART data on demand, refer to Load
availability management data using command line in the NPO Administration User
Guide document.
The NUART user application enables you to display and update various reports:
Display Basic Unavailability (BU)
Display Suspect Origin of Basic Unavailability
Display Alarms and Logs.
Define Sort Criteria for Alarms and Logs.
Based on the reported PM data, alerters detect QoS problems and generate QoS alarms.
You can perform the following operations using alerters:
Procedure 25-1.2: Create an alerter template (p. 25-14), Procedure 25-1.7: Edit an
alerter (p. 25-28) and Procedure 25-1.9: Delete an alerter (p. 25-30)
Display and use alerter list (p. 25-35)
Display and use alerts list (p. 25-38).
Use remote inventory data management (RIDM)

The hardware inventory data of the entire network is necessary to prepare interventions
on sites. You can remotely read information about the required equipment.
Examples of information that you can read include:
OMC-R hostname
Equipment first commissioning date
Exact location of the board (its rack number, shelf number and slot number)
Serial number of the board and its part number
Date of end of warranty for a piece of equipment.
Customer Acceptance List (CAL) files are used to compare the equipments which should
be in the customer field with what is actually present there.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Use remote inventory data management (RIDM)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The automatic collection of hardware inventory is available for 9100 BTS, 9130 BSC
Evolution, all types of MFS, and for TC supervised from OMC-R. All of these types of
equipment provide inventory data for all the active boards, for racks and some support
equipments (fans, power supplies). Elements such as cables and plugs are not part of the
inventory.
Hardware inventory data can be imported automatically or on demand. For more
information, refer to Miscellaneous import tasks, to Load Inventory, in the NPO
Administration User Guide document.
Refer to Remote Inventory Data Management in the NPO Remote Inventory User Guide
document, for information on how to view NE boards, end of warranty, boards in CAL or
not in CAL.
Access online help

Consult the documentation as follows.
To consult related documentation Do

All NPO functions Perform one of the following options:
From the tool bar, select Help -> Analysis
Desktop help..., OR
Press F1.
The major panels of the Analysis Desktop Click on Help in the selected open window.
The online help documentation appears. The information is shown in html format,
including hyperlinks to allow easy browsing between related domains.
If the Online help browser is already open, its content is updated with the newly requested
documentation.
The operator can use the back / next navigation facilities to navigate through the history
of the displayed help pages. Back is allowed only when at least two different pages were
displayed. Next is allowed only after at least one back action was triggered.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Access online help
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use tip of the day

During the Analysis Desktop initialization, a Tip of the day window appears, listing a tip
which is chosen randomly among the list of available tips.
You can also invoke the Tip of the day window by selecting Help -> Tip of the Day
from the menu bar.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Use tip of the day
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Display the next available tip Click on Next Tip
Display the previously displayed tip Click on Previous Tip
Disable the display of tips at Analysis Desktop Deselect the Show Tips on Startup check box
startup
The default option is as set in the Display tips on startup in the user preferences.
Manage licensing
During the Analysis Desktop start up, the application checks to see if there are temporary
licenses that are due to expire soon.
If there is at least one temporary license that will expire in less than X days, (X is a
configurable value), a warning message appears.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Manage licensing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following table gives the list of licensed features available with the NPO.
License Name Description

MUSE_AD_MAX_INSTANCES_ Gives the maximum number of authorized of AD
LICENSE instances running at the same time.
Default value = 5.
MUSE_QOS_<TECHNO>_ Required for the administrator to declare a QoS data
LICENSE source for the given technologies (GSM, W-CDMA,
LTE).
MUSE_PARAM_<TECHNO>_ Required for the administrator to declare a Parameter
LICENSE data source for the given technologies (GSM,
W-CDMA, LTE).
MUSE_PLANNED_<TECHNO>_ Required to declare a Planned data source for a given
LICENSE technology (GSM, W-CDMA).
MUSE_PARAM_HISTORY_ Required for the history of parameters to be kept.
LICENSE
MUSE_QOS_HISTORY_LICENSE Limits the history of the QoS Data to one week.
MUSE_CUSTOMER_RULES_ Required to import or export the rules where the
LICENSE supplier is customer.
MUSE_QOS_INDICATOR_ Required to:
CREATION Create / update / delete indicator threshold
_LICENSE Create / edit an indicator
Create a customer indicator by copy
Delete customer indicator
Create / edit / save temporary indicator or edit
thresholds / sampling value of temporary indicator.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

MUSE_MAX_CUSTOMER_ Required to create a stored customer indicator (basic
INDICATOR indicator or stored temporal aggregation).
_LICENSE
MUSE_REPORT_TEMPLATE_ Required to create report templates by the operator or
CREATION administrator.
_LICENSE
MUSE_OBJECT_ZONE_LICENSE Makes all Object Zone modes available. The special
Network mode is not displayed.
If the license is not available:
All items in popup menus, menu bar related to
Object Zones are grayed
All items in dialog windows (such as the Working
Zone editor) related to Object Zones are grayed
The special Network mode appears.
MUSE_REPORT_LICENSE Required to execute reports.
MUSE_SCHEDULING_LICENSE Required to schedule reports.
MUSE_WORKING_ZONE_ Makes Working Zone Editor available.
LICENSE If the license is not available:
All items in menu bar and popup menu are hidden
and not just grayed
It is not possible to change the current Working
Zone
When launching the Analysis Desktop, no Working
Zone list appears and the Global Working Zone is
automatically loaded.
MUSE_TUNING_LICENSE Allows tuning operations.
MUSE_DIAGNOSIS_LICENSE Allows diagnosis operations.
MUSE_MAX_CELL Maximum number of cells.
MUSE_CARTOGRAPHY_ Makes the whole cartography viewer available from the
LICENSE NPO client. The cartography servers are started. The
administration functions (imports) are available.
MUSE_RMS_GPRS_TUNING_ Required to import / edit / export RMS template and
LICENSE GPRS threshold values.
This is not applicable for W-CDMA and LTE.
MUSE_REMOTE_INVENTORY_ Makes the Inventory features available. The import
LICENSE inventory data and the Web Inventory Management tool
are available.
This is not applicable for W-CDMA.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

MUSE_LASER_<TECHNO>_ Required to declare a LASER data source for the given
LICENSE technology.
MUSE_ALERTER_LICENSE Makes Alerter related features available (Alerter Editor,
Alerter List, Alerts List).
This feature is also available for NPOe and MPM.
MUSE_MAX_CUSTOMER_ Maximum number of stored customer indicators. The
INDICATOR Min value is 0 and the Max value is unlimited (depends
on the machine).
This includes the stored telecom indicator, the
presentation indicator and each stored temporal
aggregation on an indicator (for example, one new
customer indicator can create many new stored
indicators).
MUSE_PARAM_COMPARE_ Makes the Network Parameter changes between two
BETWEEN_TWODATES_ dates features available.
LICENSE
MUSE_PARAM_COMPARE_WITH_ Makes the Comparison of the Network Configuration
REFVALUES_LICENSE against Reference Value features available.
This is not applicable for W-CDMA and LTE.
MUSE_NUART_LICENSE Required to navigate to NUART functions.
MUSE_OPERATOR_REF_VALUES_ Allow the operator to:
LICENSE Import / export / delete / update the Operator
Reference Values parameter dictionary
Compare operational data with Operational
Reference Values data
Load / export Operational Reference Values data.
This is not applicable for LTE.
MUSE_IMPROVED_IMPORT_ Makes the improved import follow-up function
FOLLOWUP_LICENSE available.
MUSE_<TECHNO>_ADJWIZARD_ Makes the Cartography Adjacency Wizard available
CARTOGRAPHY_LICENSE from the NPO client for a given technology (GSM,
W-CDMA).
This is not applicable for LTE.
MUSE_WEB_PUBLISHING_ Required to publish views / reports.
LICENSE
MUSE_WEB_CLIENT_LICENSE Required to use web client.
MUSE_ARCHIVED_REPORTS_ Required to archive the executed reports.
SUPPORT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

NPO_REPORT_XLS_CUSTO_ Required to use customized excel reports.
LICENSE This is not applicable for WiMAX.
To view the installed licenses, refer to the NPO Administration User Guide document, to
Display list of installed license.
To install a new license, refer to the NPO Platform User Guide document, to Activate
New License.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-8: Manage notifications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 2-8: Manage notifications

As soon as an object is created / deleted / modified in NPO, you are informed of this
through a notification window.
As the NPO is not connected in realtime to the OMC-Rs, the newly created object in the
OMC-R does not cause an immediate notification. This is only done at the next refresh (at
most, one night).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click on the icon from the tool bar, OR
From the menu bar, select Window -> Notification Window..., OR
Press Ctrl+W.
Result: The Notification window opens, listing all the unacknowledged messages.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the notification messages to acknowledge, then click on Acknowledge.

Result: The selected notification messages are removed from the window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Close.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-8: Manage notifications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The window closes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Refresh the Analysis Desktop.

Result: The Analysis Desktop is refreshed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Manage tokens
The Token Management system limits the number of clients running simultaneously. If
there is an inactive client, its token is automatically released and becomes available for
another client. When a client loses its token due to an inactivity period, it is possible to
retrieve a token (if there is any available) and continue to work as usual.
With this feature, it is possible to have a number of clients running on a HMI server
bigger than the maximum number of allowed users, because some clients can be
considered as inactive.
Token request
When the Analysis Desktop is started, it requests for a token from the server. The server
returns the token to the client.
If there is no token available, an error message appears.
In this message, you can:

Request a token again, by clicking on Request Token, OR
Close the Analysis Desktop, by clicking on Exit.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Manage tokens
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Token refresh
When the Analysis Desktop is running, it refreshes the token every five minutes by
sending a request to the server. If the server does not receive any request for the token
from the Analysis Desktop for more than five minutes, then the token is released in the
server.
If there is no token available when a refresh request is received, the server sends an error
message.
In this message, you can:

Exit from the application after confirmation (any unsaved work will be lost), by
clicking on Exit, OR
Try again to retrieve a token if one was released by someone else, by clicking on
Retrieve Token.
A new request is sent to the server, and depending on the answer:
The same error message as above appears again, OR
The token is now refreshed and you can continue working as before having lost
the token.
Automatic token release

When a client is inactive (no input received from the user) for a configurable period of
time, a warning message appears.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Manage tokens
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This message indicates that the Token will be released in <remaining time>, when
<remaining time> is updated every 5 seconds until 0 is reached.
You can keep the current token by clicking on Keep Token.
If you are still inactive during this time, an error message appears.
This message indicates that the Token was released following a <inactivity_period-
_value>.
You can:
Exit from the application after confirmation and any unsaved work will be lost, by
clicking on Exit, OR
Try again to retrieve a token if one was released by someone else, by clicking on
Retrieve Token.
A new request is sent to the server, and depending on the answer:
If there is one token available, then the user can continue the session
If not, the No Token is available error message appears, and you can
exit from the Analysis Desktop or retry the operation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-9: View consolidation follow up
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 2-9: View consolidation follow up

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click in the Analysis Desktop menu bar on the Consolidation Follow Up icon.
The color codes of the Consolidation Follow Up icon are displayed in the following table.
Consolidation Follow Up icon Description

There are recovered data not yet consolidated
There is an on-going consolidation
There is no on-going consolidation and no

recovered data
Invalid response from the server.
Result: The NPO Administration window opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Enter the appropriate username and password.

Result: The NPO Data Management - Consolidation Follow up window opens,
displaying the consolidation activity status. Each row displays the status of the
consolidation for a day (five recoverable days appear by default).
The columns contain the following information:
Column Description
Date of the consolidation Displays a list of dates for the consolidation.
Status Status:
OK when the consolidation was
successful
Not performed
Failed
Ongoing.
Last performed step, for example: This information appears only if the status of
RR / HR Transfer that consolidation is Failed or Ongoing.
Normalization
Recovered data: Yes means that since the consolidation, new
Yes data is loaded (is present in RR tables) and
No so a recovery consolidation can be launched
in order to take it into account.
No means that no data is loaded since the
consolidation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-9: View consolidation follow up
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Column Description
An action hyperlink: There is no action hyperlink if the status is
Recover / Consolidate. OK or Not performed and the Recovered
Data is No, or if there is at least one
Ongoing consolidation for another
displayed day.
Details Contains an Detail hyperlink only in case
the associated Action button is Recover.
For all the other Action values, the column
value is empty.
Note: To recover or consolidate data, refer to Launch Consolidation Follow-Up in the

NPO Administration User Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 To refresh data, click on Refresh.

Result: The data is refreshed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 To exit the Consolidation Follow Up page, click on Cancel.

Result: The Consolidation Follow Up page closes.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-10: Select / deselect all items
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 2-10: Select / deselect all items

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click in the window where the required items must be selected

Result: The window is activated.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the tool bar menu, select Edit -> Select All, OR
Press Ctrl+A.
Result: All the required items are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 To deselect all selected items, select Edit -> Deselect All from the tool bar menu.
Result: All the required items are deselected.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-11: String based tree filtering
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 2-11: String based tree filtering

Presentation
With this feature, a new filtering capability is offered in all trees available in order to
allow restricting the list of objects displayed in the tree.
At the top of all the topology and function trees in both Analysis Desktop main window
and in editors, is present a text box labeled Find.
The applied label filters do not persist. If the user session is closed and reopened, trees
will not have any active label filters.
The string based filters are lost in case of a change Working Zone.
In a same user session, the applied label filters are kept (until they are modified or
cleared). They are also kept after a refresh tree / refresh all actions.
Note: When a filter is applied, the [<filtering string>] is displayed in the tree footer.
The number of objects and selected objects displayed in the tree footer is updated
based on the filtered tree. When no "specific topology" filter is selected, remove [No
Filter] in the footer of the topology window.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Find text box, type the name of the object to find and click on Enter.
Note: Only tree items equals exactly to the entered string are retained (together with
their hierarchy/children).
If you want to display objects starting or ending or containing a given string, you must
use the following wildcards:
*: Any multiple characters (including zero character)
?: Any single character.
Result: If any matching object of the complete tree is found, it is displayed in the tree.
Note:
If a leaf node matches the filtering string, it is kept with its hierarchy (if any).
If a non leaf node matches the filtering string, it is kept with all its children as well as
its hierarchy.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 To clear the content of the text box, click on Clear.

Result: The complete tree is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-11: String based tree filtering
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
3 3unctional window
F
common tasks
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the common tasks in the functional windows.
Contents
Drag and drop objects 3-1

Procedure 3-1: Propagate network objects or object zones between topology 3-6
classification or zone modes
Procedure 3-2: Display and edit properties 3-7
Procedure 3-3: Copy URL 3-9
Use generic editor 3-10
Refresh 3-14
Procedure 3-4: Search 3-15
Execution context 3-19
Procedure 3-5: Set QoS requirement 3-33
Drag and drop objects

Many operations inside the Analysis Desktop can be done using drag and drop. This
facility can be used for single or multiple objects.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Drag and drop objects
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following table describes the objects which can be dragged and dropped in the
different views.
Viewer Name Parameter Name Allowed Dragable Allowed Dropable

Objects Objects
Executed View Executed View None. You can drop the
browser browser following objects:
One or more
Network Objects
One or more
counter(s) /
indicator(s) /
parameter(s) / view
template(s) / events
/ rules / diagnosis /
free fields.
The user can drop
a nondouble
selection, for
example, network
objects without
functions.
Counters,
parameters,
indicators and / or
view templates
cannot be mixed in
a the same
selection.
Executed Report Executed Report None. You can drop the
browser browser following objects:
One or more
Network Objects
One or more
counter(s) /
indicator(s) /
parameter(s) / view
template(s) / events
/ rules / diagnosis /
free fields.
The user cannot
drop a nondouble
selection, for
example, network
objects without
functions.
View Template View Template Tree None. None.
Editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Objects Objects
Indicators Indicators None.
The user can drag
one or several
indicators at a time
and drop them in the
Properties panel.
Counters Counters None.
The user can drag
one or more counters
at a time.
Design Parameters Design Parameters None.
The user can drag
one or several design
parameters at a time
Properties panel.
Logical Parameters Logical Parameters None.
The user can drag
one or several logical
parameters at a time
Properties panel.
Tabular Properties Indicators / Counters Indicators / Counters /
panel / Logical and Design Logical and Design
Parameters Parameters.
Primary Graphics None. Indicators / Counters /
panel Logical and Design
Parameters.
Secondary Graphics None. Indicators / Counters /
panel Logical and Design
Parameters.
Standard View Tabular View Indicators / QoS Indicator / QoS
Templates Parameters / Counters / QoS
Counters / Rules / Parameters.
Events in the tabular One or more QoS
view. Indicators / Counters /
Parameters that are not
already in the tabular
view.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Objects Objects
Primary Graphic View Indicators / QoS Indicator /
Parameters / Parameter / Counter
Counters in the contained in the tabular
tabular view. view.
Secondary Graphic View Indicators / QoS Indicator /
Counters in the contained in tabular
tabular view. view
Vector View Tabular View Vector Indicators in QoS Vector Indicators,
Templates the tabular view. One or more QoS
Vector Indicators that
are not already in the
tabular view.
Primary Graphic View Vector QoS Vector Indicators
Indicators in the contained in the tabular
tabular view view.
Secondary Graphic View Vector QoS Vector Indicator
Indicators in the contained in the tabular
tabular view view.
Matrix View Tabular View Matrix Indicators in QoS Matrix Indicators.
Templates the tabular view. One or more QoS
Matrix Indicators that
are not already in the
tabular view.
Axis Indicator Matrix Indicators in QoS Matrix Indicator
the tabular view. contained in tabular
view
Equipment View - - -
Templates
View Properties Tabular View Indicators / QoS Indicator / QoS
panel Parameters / Counters / QoS
Counters in the Parameters. One or
tabular view. more QoS Indicators /
Counters / Parameters
that are not already in
the tabular view.
Indicators / QoS Indicator /
tabular view. view.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Objects Objects
Indicators / QoS Indicator /
tabular view. view.
Report Template View Template Tree View Template None.
Editor The user can drag
one or several view
templates at a time.
Report Properties View and Comment None. View Template
panel Zone list One or several view
templates that are not
already in the view
template list.
Executed Report Spatial Scope None. Network objects that
are the same type as
those in the current
spatial scope.
Tuning Function - Tuning operations or None.
Tree tunable parameters
can be dragged.
Topology - All the Topology None.
Classification Tree objects in the tree
can be dragged. User
can drag one or more
objects at a time.
Tuning Session - None. Topology objects /
Viewer Operations Tuning operations /
Tree Tunable parameters.
User can drag one or
more topology objects /
tunable parameters at a
time. But only one
tuning operation can be
dragged at a time.
Note: To change the drag and drop, modify, add or remove, refer to Procedure 26-1:
Configure user preferences (p. 26-2).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Procedure 3-1: Propagate network objects or object zones
between topology classification or zone modes
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-1: Propagate network objects or object zones

between topology classification or zone modes
This section describes how to propagate a selection of network objects or object zones
between topology classifications and zone modes.
The following propagations are possible:
Network objects to topology classification or zone modes
Object zones to network objects
Network objects to object zones.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click on the network object or object zone to propagate.

It is possible to perform multiple selections and de-selections.
Result: If it is a leaf node, the object is selected. If it is a nonleaf node, all objects
under that node are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Drag the selected network object / object zone and drop it to a different zone mode or
topology classification.
During the dragging process, if the mode or classification are incompatible with the
selected network object / object zone, the mouse pointer changes to .
Continue the dragging process to an appropriate mode / classification, where the mouse
pointer is .
Result: The selected network object / object zone is successfully relocated.
Depending on how the Display time before a tab is raised and made active
parameter is set as a user preference, the target mode or target classification, with the
highlighted propagated network object or object zone:
Is automatically displayed, OR
You have to switch to the target mode / classification to view it.
The view is auto-scrolled until the first selected object is visible.
Note: If a filter is applied on the target classification, some dropped objects may not
be visible. In this case, a message appears and you must either choose to remove the
current filter (i.e. switch to No Filter), or to drop it.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Procedure 3-2: Display and edit properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-2: Display and edit properties

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
To display the properties Right click on the network object / counter / indicator /
design parameter / logical parameter / report / view,
then select Properties... from the popup menu, OR
Double click on the item whose properties to view.
To view the properties of an item in Select the item, then select Topology -> Properties...
the topology classification from the tool bar, OR
Select the item, then press Alt+Enter.
To view the properties of a counter / Select the item, then select Data -> Properties... from
indicator / design parameter / logical the tool bar.
parameter / report / view:
Select the item, then press Ctrl+P.
Result: The Properties window for the selected object opens.

Hyperlinks are included to allow easy browsing of related properties. Clicking on one
of these hyperlinks refreshes the current Properties window or opens a new one,
depending on the Default behavior for hyperlinks user preference.
When a nonleaf object is selected, the properties of this object are displayed. If the
nonleaf object has no associated properties, then the Properties window displays only
the name of the object.
If the operator selects another object in a function tree when the Properties window
is still open, the window is refreshed and displays the properties of the newly selected
object.
Note that the newly selected object can be of a different type compared to the
previous one (i.e. select a counter, open the Properties window by selecting an
indicator, and the indicator properties in the previously opened Properties window
should appear).
Note: Only one Properties window can be opened at a time.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 To keep a copy of the Properties window and display several on screen at the same time,
use the Snapshot feature.
Click on .
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Procedure 3-2: Display and edit properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The selected windows remain on screen.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Edit the properties Perform the following steps:
1. In the Properties window, click on Edit.
The specific editor opens with the
corresponding template displayed.
2. Click on .
3. Perform the appropriate changes, then
save by clicking on .
4. Close the template by clicking on Close.
To view the results of the edit, reselect the
object, right click and select Properties.
View the previous object in the same category Click on
View the next object in the same category Click on
View the previous page in the same category Click on
View the next page in the same category Click on
Close the window Click on Close.
Result: The properties are managed accordingly.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Procedure 3-3: Copy URL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-3: Copy URL

Perform this task to visualize and print an objects properties page from outside the
Analysis Desktop, using a web browser.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right click in the Properties window.

Result: The Copy URL popup appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on Copy URL.

Result: The HTTPS URL of the properties page is copied to the System Clipboard
and can be pasted in any web browser (IE, Firefox).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Procedure 3-3: Copy URL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Use generic editor

When creating or editing an indicator / view / report / cartography / topology
classification / object zone / working zone / alerter / job scheduler, an editor with a
generic format is available.
Note: For diagnosis editor, refer to the NPO Diagnosis Development User Guide
document, to Diagnosis Editor.
The title bar of all the editors displays the user name and the IP address of the NPO
server.
The window can be resized by dragging the edges and corners.
Figure 3-1 Example view template editor
Note: If a FAD is not allocated to an item, it is grayed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Use generic editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Generic editor panels
Panel Options
Object Selection tree The left panel displays all the objects,
irrespective of the mode, sorted as in the
Function browser.
You can perform the following functions
within the object selection tree:
Copy
Edit
Delete
Find
Refresh
Right click on an item and select Refresh.
The entire tree is refreshed.
When selecting an item on the left panel, its
properties are displayed in the middle panel.
If there is an ongoing creation or edition, the
items on the left panel are greyed.
A filtering function is present at the top of the
panel, refer to Procedure 2-11: String based
tree filtering (p. 2-57).
Properties panel The middle panel is the working area for the
object editor. This is where the displaying,
creation and updates are performed.
Refer to the specific section for information
about each kind of object.
Functions from the right frame can be dropped
in the Properties panel.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Panel Options
Sub-Object Selection tree The right panel contains a set of function trees
to fill the object editor fields.
Sub-objects can be dragged and dropped in the
properties panel.
The sub-object selection list is filtered
according to the objects that can be used in the
object editor. For example, if a Mono Object
distribution report is being created, then only
vector and matrix view templates are
displayed in the sub-object selection list.
You can perform the following functions
within the sub-object selection tree:
Drag items to the middle working area
View properties
Right click on an item and select
Properties.
The Properties window for the selected
object opens.
Refresh
Right click on an item and select Refresh.
The entire tree is refreshed.
Collapse all
Right click on an item and select Collapse
all. This option allow you to go back to the
first level nodes visible and everything is
closed.
Find
A filtering function is present at the top of the
panel, refer to Procedure 2-11: String based
tree filtering (p. 2-57).
Splitters The left splitter is used to adjust the object
selection tree size.
The right splitter is used to adjust the
sub-object selection tree size.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Generic editor buttons
Depending on the allowed operations, the buttons on the tool bar are activated or grayed
dynamically.
Button Description
Creates a new template.
The user becomes the owner of the new
template.
Copies selected item to a new one.
The user becomes the owner of the new
template. The template properties window is
filled with the pre-defined values.
Launches the editor mode.
Deletes the selected object(s).
To export the selected object(s).
Applies the ongoing operation.
Cancels the ongoing operation.
Closes the window.

If the user performed changes which have not
been applied, and they chose to close the
window, then the Editor prompts a save
option.
Opens online help in a separate widow.
See Access online help (p. 2-43) for more
information.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Refresh
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refresh
Select one of the following options.
To refresh Do
All the functions of the Analysis Desktop From the tool bar, select Edit -> Refresh -> All
or press F5.
All topology and function trees of the selected From the tool bar, select Edit -> Refresh ->
mode Active Mode.
Only the selected topology / function tree From the tool bar, select Topology -> Refresh
Active Tree.
It is only for the topology case.
From the tool bar, select Data -> Refresh
Active Tree.
It is only for the function case.
Right click in the topology / function tree and
select Refresh Tree.
When a tree is refreshed, the tree remains with the structure opened as before the refresh
operation and on the same position (same selected objects), therefore the current selection
is kept (i.e. the objects that were selected before the refresh operation remain selected
after the refresh operation, if they are still present in the tree).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Procedure 3-4: Search
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-4: Search

The search facility is available in all windows of the Analysis Desktop (Topology /
Function / Tuning Operations Trees, Object Editors, etc).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Display the search window:

From the tool bar menu, select Edit -> Find..., OR
In the appropriate operation tree, right click and select Find..., OR
Press Ctrl+F.
Result: The Search window appears.
The first time you open the window all its fields are unchecked by default, except
Add to selection check box, then the last used values are automatically filled in.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Type the name of the object to search.

If necessary, select one of the following options.
Option Description
Match case If Match case is not checked, then the search
ignores case differences (eXaMple =
example).
Find whole words only If Find whole words only is checked, then
partial match is not considered a search result
(e.g. searching for cell does not find cell_12).
Use wildcards If Use wildcards is checked, then
* is interpreted as wildcard for any
number of unknown characters.
? is interpreted as wildcard for just one
unknown character.
If it is not checked, * and ? are interpreted as
standard characters, allowing their usage in
names of searches.
Include user note If Include user note is checked, then the
content of the user note is also searched while
exploring the tree.
Creation or Modification date of the user note,
as well as Owner of it is also checked when
the search is triggered.
Add to selection Enables to choose the behavior of the selection
when an element is found.
If Add to selection is checked, the found item
is added to the selection (instead of replacing
it).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Option Description
Search order Down - the search is made then from the first
selected object to the end of the tree.
Up - the search is made from the first selected
object to the beginning of the tree.
All - the search is made from the beginning till
the end of the tree.
Result: The search criteria is defined.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Find Next.

Result: If any matching object is found, it is selected and the tree is automatically
scrolled to make it visible (nodes can be expanded if they were not previously).
The number of selected items are displayed in the bar down. You can drag and drop
the selected items and the selected network element to the view window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note that the search is only performed in the active classification, and that no special
search limited to a sub-tree or to a sub-selection is required.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
W-CDMA and LTE

For W-CDMA and LTE, it is possible to search in the Modes tree.
Right click and select Find... from the popup menu. The following window appears.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
It automatically searches for the same string starting from the first selected object or from
the beginning of the tree if there is no selected object.
If any matching object is found, it is selected and the tree is automatically scrolled to
make it visible.
If there are no objects which match the search criteria, then a message appears stating that
the searched mode is not found.
Search ignores case differences.

Partial match is considered, for example searching for cell will select cell_2G.
* and ? are considered as standard characters for use in names and searches.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Execution context
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Execution context
When executing functions (view / report / diagnosis / rules / events / free fields / THL /
indicators / parameters) in the tabular/graphical viewer or in the report viewer, the
execution context information must be filled in.
The window comprises two tabs:
General
Options.
Periodicity
To define the granularity of the executed view / report / function, the periodicity must be
set.
Periodicity choices are dynamic and depend on the intersection of availability domain of
the objects (Counters / Indicators / Parameters) to be displayed. Depending on the
selected view / report / function(s), some periodicity units are grayed and are not
available for selection.
Free fields and events (when they are defined for the considered technology) are available
for day periodicity only.
The periodicity options are:
Hour
Day
Week
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Month
5 Minutes
1/4 Hour
1/2 Hour
Raw (available for counters only)
Busy Hour choices (indicators or fixed)
Trend choices (hours of day, hours of week, days of week, and days of month)
2 Hours
3 Hours
4 Hours
6 Hours
8 Hours.
This list may vary.
The following table shows the maximum storage duration for each periodicity.
The values are customized based on the technologies/hardware used during the NPO
installation. These values may also be configured using the process defined in Configure
indicator storage duration from NPO Administration Handbook document.
Internal Periodicity NPO User Periodicity Maximum Storage

Duration
RAW Raw 30 Days
Hour (if Base Object)
5 Minutes
1/4 Hour
1/2 Hour
2/3/4/6/8 Hours
Normalized Hour (if non Base Object) 30 Days
Day Day 14 Months
Week Week 36 Months
Month Month 36 Months
For diagnosis, less than Hour and Raw periodicities are not allowed.
For the equipment view, the available periodicities are H / D / W / M only.
Periodicity is not required in the case of a parameter (design or logical) with no historical
value requested, or in the case of an Equipment View of an alarm (only H / D / W / M are
accessible in this case).
No historical value requested is defined in user preferences, refer to Views / reports user
preferences (p. 26-5).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Execute report options
In the case of report execution, two extra options are present in the General tab of the
Execution Context window: .
Option Description
Immediate Execution Use this option to execute the report immediately. In this case, fill
in the appropriate Date and hour (p. 3-21), and all necessary
fields from the Options tab.
To Be Scheduled Use this option to postpone the report execution to a later time. A
new panel with three tabs appears ( Date, General, Repeat), as
presented in the figure below.
Refer to Procedure 19-5: Schedule reports (p. 19-60) for detailed information on how to
use these options.
Date and hour

The following times must be set for the execution:
Starting Date (From) - Date and time for start of view / report / function execution.
Any date prior to 2000 is invalid.
Ending Date (To) - Date and time for end of view / report / function execution.
Note: From and To Date fields represent the start time of the last value to be
displayed.
For example, to visualize an hourly report with the following set times: From: 09:00 -
To: 17:00, the hourly report displays values for the 09:00 - 18:00 interval.
The dates chosen cannot be higher than the current day. If the ending date extends past the
current day, then the ending date is decreased to the current day-1.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The hour cannot be higher than the current hour -1 (except if the chosen hour equal to 0
o'clock). If the user enters an hour higher or equal to the current hour, the hour is
automatically set to the current hour - 1, if the hour is not equal to 0.
Dates are automatically normalized when selecting the OK button according to the
periodicity, as shown in the following tables.
Start Date and Time In the Execution Context dialog, the Start date and time are
decreased to the beginning of the first period (for the selected periodicity) of the
observation interval.
Periodicity Adjustment
5 Minutes 0, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55 min.
1/4 Hour 0, 15, 30, or 45 min.
1/2 Hour 0 or 30 min
Hour The last completed hour before current time (now) if the
input start date and time are not completed, otherwise no
adjustment needed.
2 / 3 / 4 / 6 / 8 Hours The first hour of the last completed 2/3/4/6/8-hour interval
before current time (now) if the input start date and time are
not completed (for considered periodicity), otherwise no
adjustment needed.
Day The last completed day before current day (today) if the
input start date is older than current day, otherwise no
adjustment needed.
Week First day of the week (according to the system user
preferences) to which belongs the user input Start date if
this considered week is completed, otherwise the first day
of the last completed week before current day (now).
Month Day 1 of the month to which belongs the user input Start
date if this considered month is completed, otherwise the
first day of the last completed month before current day
(now).
Trend on hours of day The current day (today) if the input start date is not
completed, otherwise no adjustment needed.
Trend on hours of week The first day of current week if the input start date is not
completed, otherwise the first day of the week to which
belongs the input start date.
Trend on days of month The first day of current month if the input start date is not
completed, otherwise the first day of the month to which
belongs the input start date.
Busy Hour ('BH_xxx') The last completed day before current day (today) if the
input start date is not completed, otherwise no adjustment
needed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fixed Busy Hour The last completed day before current day (today) if the
input start date combined with the chosen Fixed Busy Hour
are not completed, otherwise no adjustment needed.
Raw The last completed minute before current time (now) if the
input start date and time is not completed, otherwise no
adjustment needed.
End Date and Time In the Execution Context dialog, the End date and time are
decreased to the beginning of the last period (for the selected periodicity) of the
observation interval.
5 Minutes 0, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55 min.
1/4 Hour 0, 15, 30, or 45 min.
1/2 Hour 0 or 30 min
Hour The last completed hour before current time (now) if the
input end date and time are not completed, otherwise no
adjustment needed.
2 / 3 / 4 / 6 / 8 Hours The first hour of the 2/3/4/6/8-hour interval to which
belongs the user input End time (relatively to the Start time
and the considered periodicity) if this considered
2/3/4/6/8-hour interval is completed, otherwise the first
hour of the last completed 2/3/4/6/8-hour interval before
current time (now).
Day The last completed day before current day (today) if the
input end date is older than current day, otherwise no
adjustment needed.
Week First day of the week (according to the system user
preferences) to which belongs the user input End date if this
considered week is completed, otherwise the first day of the
last completed week before current day (now).
Month Day 1 of the month to which belongs the user input End
date if this considered month is completed, otherwise the
first day of the last completed month before current day
(now).
Trend on hours of day The current day (today) if the input end date is not
completed, otherwise no adjustment needed.
Trend on hours of week The last day of current week if the input end date is not
completed, otherwise the last day of the week to which
belongs the input end date.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trend on days of month The last day of current month if the input end date is not
completed, otherwise the last day of the month to which
belongs the input end date.
Busy Hour ('BH_xxx') The last completed day before current day (today) if the
input end date is not completed, otherwise no adjustment
needed.
Fixed Busy Hour The last completed day before current day (today) if the
input end date combined with the chosen Fixed Busy Hour
are not completed, otherwise no adjustment needed.
Raw The last completed minute before current time (now) if the
input end date and time is not completed, otherwise no
adjustment needed.
Based on the periodicity selection, the date appears in the following format.
Periodicity Format
1/4 Hour <date> <HH>:<MM>
1/2 Hour <date> <HH>:<MM>
Hour <date> <HH>:<MM>
Day <date>
Week <date>
Month <date>
The following table lists the default values for starting and ending dates.
To set the default start and end date and time values, click on Default Dates. Depending
on the periodicity, the following values are automatically filled.
Periodicity Default Starting Date Default Ending Date

5 Minutes Today 00:00 The first minute of the last
completed 5 minutes before
current time (now)
1/4 Hour Today 00:00 The first minute of the last
completed quarter before current
time (now)
1/2 Hour Today 00:00 The first minute of the last
completed half-hour before
current time (now)
Hour Today 00:00 The first minute of the last
completed hour before current
time (now)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Periodicity Default Starting Date Default Ending Date

Day Yesterday Yesterday
Week 1st day of the previous week 1st day of the previous week
Month 1st day of the previous month 1st day of previous month
Trend on hours of day Today - 7 days Yesterday
Trend on hours of week Today - 14 days Yesterday
Trend on days of week Today - 28 days Yesterday
Trend on days of month Today - 84 days Yesterday
Trend periodicities
The following checks are made if a trend is selected:
For the trend on hours of day, the period must cover at least 1 day (24 hours)
For the trend on hours of week, the period must cover at least 1 week
For the trend on days of week, the period must cover at least 1 week
For the trend on days of month, the period must cover at least 1 month.
Trend on hours of day and trend on hours of week are available if the Hour period is also
available.
Trend on days of week and trend on days of month are available if the Day period is also
available.
The following table presents information on the trend calculation.
Table 3-1 Trend calculation
Periodicity Calculation
Trend on hours There are 24 columns from 00h, 01h, 02h,... 23h.
of day The value at hour n is the average for all selected day at hour n.
For example, value at 1AM is the average of the value at Monday 1AM,
Tuesday 1AM.
Trend on hours There are 7 * 24 columns.
of week The first column is the first day of the week (according to the system
preferences) followed by ' ' and then followed by HHh.
For example, if Monday is the first day of the week, then the columns start
and end as:
The value at hour n for day d is the average for all selected weeks at hour n
and day d.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 3-1 Trend calculation (continued)
Periodicity Calculation
Trend on days The days of the week are displayed in seven columns
of week The first column is the first day of the week as defined in the system
preferences.
For example, if the first day of the week is Monday, then the columns are:
The value at day d is the average of the value at day d for all selected week.
For example, the value at Monday is the average of the value of Monday the
1st week and Monday the 2nd week.
Trend on days The days of the month are displayed as DD.
of month For example if the month of September is used, then the days are: 01, 02,
03,..., 30.
If, for example, the months of Sept Dec are used, then the days are: 01, 02,...,
30, 31.
The value of the n day, is the average of the value of the indicator at day n for
any selected month.
The trend calculation is not applied directly on the indicator formula, but on the stored
indicators (basic indicators) belonging to the formula.
For example an indicator I = A / B, where A and B are stored indicator, then a trend
calculation on the indicator I become trend(I) = avg(A) / Avg(B).
Note: The trend option takes into account only alarms loaded data. Null values are not
considered for trending calculations.
Spatial aggregation
When the Spatial checkbox is selected for Aggregation, then the spatial aggregation
method of each basic indicator is used.
This option can only be applied to standard indicators, it is not available neither for
parameters nor for counters.
This check box is disabled in the following cases:
For warning reports
For MultiNET mode and all modes containing object zones
If the view / report deals only with one object
If after an interactive modification, the execution context contains different type of
objects or object zones.
Refer to Display spatial aggregation in views / reports (p. 19-93) for detailed
information on how to use this option.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Temporal aggregation
When the Temporal check box is selected for Aggregation, the aggregation is performed
on the temporal axis.
This check box is disabled in the following cases:
For warning reports
For BH trends periodicities
For Static Trend prediction
For Zone modes, Traffic Zone and MultiNET mode
If the function does not contain at least one standard indicator.
QoS requirement
The values of QoS Requirement are Low, Medium, and High, as previously set as a user
preference.
This changes which values are highlighted in the view from the Legend, based on the
threshold values per QoS requirement set in the indicator definition.
Interpolation
Interpolation is used to automatically complete the missing values in the data warehouse.
You can either use the default interpolation on the QoS data, or select the first and second
interpolation methods from the displayed list.
Parameter Definition
None Only the existing values are used (no interpolation).
Linear The missing values are replaced by a linear interpolation between
the previous known value and the next known value.
The linear interpolation can be specific if the values before or
after are not known.
Only OK value When a display period is not fully available, a NULL value is
provided for that displayed period
Extend Only the existing values are used and they are extended to the
wanted displayed period
Zero All the missing periods are set to the zero value
Padding All the missing periods are set to a padding value. This is zero by
default, but can be configurable through the Padding parameter.
Interpolation is only required if there are indicators in the view and the Allow Dynamic
Interpolation user preference is true.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Sampling
When Sampling is set and Upper_is_fault flag is set to FALSE for the sampling indicator
and the value of the sampling indicator is smaller than the sampling value defined in the
indicator, then values are displayed in gray.
In the other cases, values are displayed in their normal style.
Reliability
Note: This feature is not applicable for W-CDMA.
When Reliability is set, if the value of the reliability indicator is incorrect (not green), the
values are displayed in italic.
In the other cases, values are displayed in their normal style.
Note: The chosen values are stored as implicit user preferences. When the same
screen is reopened, these values are displayed as default one.
Select forecast values in tuning sessions

Select tuning sessions / jobs for forecast values:
1. Click on Tuning Sessions....
The list of all owned tuning sessions and all tuning jobs are displayed.
The limit for the number of tuning sessions and jobs that can be selected to be
displayed is 20, by default.
2. Select one or more tuning sessions / jobs from which the corresponding forecast
values would be displayed in the view.
The tuning sessions / jobs that are opened in the current Analysis Desktop and are
modified without being saved are marked with an * after their name.
This value is mandatory if forecast is chosen to be displayed for parameters in the
view template or in the user preferences.
This value is not required if forecast was not chosen or if there is no parameter in the
view.
Filter unavailable objects

The user can choose to filter warning reports, based on the values of availability indicator,
comparison operator, and threshold value of the network object type on which this
warning report is being executed.
This field is only used if Execution Context is subject for a warning report. If the
execution does not imply a warning report and QoS Availability Indicators, then the list is
grayed.
If Filter Unavailable Objects is checked, then the following parameters must also be set:
QoS availability indicator (p. 3-29)
Comparison operator (p. 3-29)
Threshold value (p. 3-29).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure shows the Filter Options panel inside the Execution Context
window.
Figure 3-2 Filter options panel inside Execution Context window
To define the family of the indicators defined in the list, update the qosUnAvailability-
Family parameter from the following file:
/alcatel/muse/technologies/GSM/QoS/metadata/MaatQueryMetadata.xml
For LTE technology, update the qosUnAvailabilityFamily parameter from the following
file:
/alcatel/muse/technologies/LTE/QoS/metadata/MaatQueryMetadata.xml
QoS availability indicator
QoS Availability Indicators are used to filter objects based on the and the.
Select one value from the list that displays the Long Names (Reference Names) of the
indicators which are part of the System Parameter Filtering Unavailable Objects family,
defined in system user preferences for the network object on which the warning report is
being executed.
The implicit user preference keeps the last value used for this network object type. To
display it, click on .
If no value was defined in the system user preference, or the family does not exist, then
no indicators are shown and the filtering option is grayed.
Comparison operator
The following values are used as comparison operators:
>, <, =, <>, <=, >=
Select the appropriate operator from the list.
Threshold value
Type a real number for the Threshold Value.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Event synthesis
Select Display Event Synthesis, to display the Event Synthesis in both tabular and
graphical modes for the given network object. This parameter is used in the case of a
Mono-Object evolution view with Day periodicity that contains only standard indicators
and / or parameters.
Click on Show Event Synthesis Options to view the list of available events.
From the Event Synthesis Options list, select the event type that composes the event
synthesis. It is mandatory to select one type if Display Event Synthesis is set to Yes.
Figure 3-3 Event synthesis options
Trend predictions
Select one of the following options.
To Do
Display the trend prediction associated to Select Display Trends.
every embedded scalar indicator supporting
trend, in Evolution Views and Reports. It is
used if evolution view or report embedding at
least one scalar indicator supporting trend.
Display a Warning Report on Trends. It is
used if warning report embedding at least one
view template with a filtering indicator
supporting trend.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Set Trend Type: Linear Regression or Click on Show Trend Options.
Moving Average
Set Predicted Period
The default value for the Number of Periods
for Trend Prediction is 0 and enables to have
the trend on the observation interval. A
read-only date field is provided together with
Predicted Period field to display the
corresponding target trend prediction date.
The following figure shows the trend predictions options.
The icon is attached to the indicators with a Trend Prediction Supported attribute. A
tool tip appears when mouse is over this icon.
The Display Trends option is not available for Trend Periodicities
Trend on Hours of Day
Trend on Hours of Week
Trend on Days of Week
Trend on Days of Month.
Refer to the following sections for more information:
Execute warning report on trends predictions (p. 19-16)
Use static trend prediction in evolution views and reports (p. 19-94).
Buttons
The following figure shows the buttons.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use the buttons as follows.
To Click on
Execute views / reports / functions Execute
Execute and publish views / reports / functions Execute and Publish
The 3D Views cannot be published.
Refer to the NPO Web Publishing User
Guidedocument for more information.
Cancel the ongoing execution Cancel
Open online help Help
Refer to Access online help (p. 2-43) for
more information.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Procedure 3-5: Set QoS requirement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-5: Set QoS requirement

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the menu bar, select Analysis Desktop -> Set QoS Requirement....
Result: The QoS Requirement Level menu appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the appropriate QoS Requirement Level (Low, Medium or High), according to the
desired sensitivity of the threshold; see Threshold and sampling (p. 9-28).
Result: The QoS Requirement Level is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on OK.
Result: The QoS Requirement Level window closes.
The newly set QoS requirement becomes the default one in the used when executing
views and reports.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Procedure 3-5: Set QoS requirement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
4 Topology objects
4
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the common tasks when dealing with topology objects.
Contents
Presentation 4-1
Topology object tabs 4-2
Display topology object properties 4-11
Procedure 4-1: Add associated network objects 4-21
Use network object class 4-22
Procedure 4-2: Use network object class editor 4-25
Procedure 4-3: Assign operational network object class 4-31
Presentation
The objects found in the Topology window represent objects in your network. They
appear in different relational lists represented by tabs and sub-tabs.
These objects are discovered by the NPO through files retrieved from the declared data
sources (for example, parameter files, PM files). At this moment, they are considered as
operational objects.
When a network object disappears from the network, the OMC no longer reports data on
it. The NPO will detect it but will keep it in its database as a soft-deleted object (marked
with the red cross icon ).
The time until an object appears as soft-deleted depends on the way it is reported.
If an object is not reported anymore within a topology that can be considered as a
reference, then NPO will soft-delete it immediately.It is the case for instance when a 2G
TRX is not reported anymore for a BTS.For other objects, the soft-deletion will occur if
no data are reported on it for 5 days.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Soft-deleted objects can be filtered from different menus and are excluded from
aggregations.
To use network objects, drag and drop them together with their appropriate parameters
and functions in the other functional windows.
To create / load / delete customer topology objects, refer to the NPO Administration User
Guide document, to Manage customer topology objects.
Free fields are attributes that can be declared on any topology object present in the NPO
database. Refer to the NPO Administration User Guide document, to Import free fields
using GUI.
For a network element, you can assign a different network object class. Refer to
Procedure 4-2.2: Create network object class (p. 4-28).
To create sub-working zones from the selected topology objects, refer to Procedure 8-6.3:
Create sub-working zone from topology objects list (p. 8-19).
For a list of topology objects icons, refer to Topology icons (p. 27-4).
Topology object tabs

GSM object class tree and tabs
The GSM object class tree and the corresponding tabs are as follows.
Object Class Tree Tabs

Cells All
BSS Release
BTS_D
Cell Class
Cell Freq. Band
Cell Type
GPU
LAC
MFS
OMC (represents an OMC-R)
RA
BSS All
BSS Release
MFS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Topology object tabs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

MFS The only MFS tab is: All.The MFS names are listed.
The correspondence between MFS name and the MFS
external ID shown in Import Follow-Up needs to be
checked on OMC.
SGSN_IP_NSVC All
BSS Release
OMC
SGSN_ITF The only SGSN_ITF tab is: All.
Adjacencies All
BSS Release
Band -> Band
Cell Class
Cell Type
To External
LAC
LAC -> LAC
RA
Type -> Type
Adjacencies 2G to 3G All
BSS Release
Band -> Band
Cell Class
Cell Type
To External
LAC
LAC -> LAC
RA
Type -> Type
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Traffic Zones All Traffic Zones
BSS Release
Cell Class
Cell Freq. Band
Cell Type
GPU
LAC
RA
TRX All TRX
BSS Release
Cell Class
Cell Type
LAC
MFS
RA
TRX TS All TRX
BSS Release
Cell Class
Cell Type
LAC
MFS
RA
BTS All
BSS Release
GPU
MFS
X25 All
BSS Release
MFS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

BTS_BSC_LAPD All
BSS Release
MFS
BSC_MFS_LAPD All
BSS Release
GPU
MFS
N7SL All
BSS Release
MFS
SS7SL All
BSS Release
MFS
N7LS All
BSS Release
MFS
AIC All
BSS Release
MFS
GPU All
BSS Release
MFS
PVC All
MFS
Bearer Channel All
MFS
Cell Zones The only Cell Zones tab is: SubObjectZones.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TRX Zones The only TRX Zones tab is: SubObjectZones.
Generic Zones SubObjectZones
Family / Sub-Family
GSM 2G External Cells The only GSM 2G External Cells tab is: All.
GSM 3G External Cells The only GSM 3G External Cells tab is: All.
MultiNET The only MultiNET tab is: Basket.
For more information, refer to Chapter 20, MultiNET
Mode.
W-CDMA object class tree and tabs

The first and second levels of the W-CDMA object class tree and the corresponding tabs
are as follows.

RNC The only RNC tab is: All.
Cell 3G All
DlFreq
LAC_RAC
Topology
IuB All
Topology
TMU All
Topology
IuR All
Source_RNC
Target_RNC
RemoteCell3G All
Topology
3G Adjacency Profile All
Topology
PLMN All
Topology
RadioAccessService All
Topology
NodeB All
Topology
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

HSDPA All
Topology
HSXPA All
Topology
EDCH All
Topology
Cell Group All
Topology
Board All
Topology
PC All
Topology
PCM All
Topology
IMA Group All
Topology
IPRAN All
Topology
NodeB Vcc All
Topology
IP Itf All
Topology
Object Zone Family / SubFamily
SubObjectZones
Cell Zone Family / SubFamily
SubObjectZones
2G Ext Cell The only 2G Ext Cell tab is: All.
Transport Node The only Transport Node tab is: All.
ATM Port All
Topology
LP All
Topology
Lan All
Topology
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Iub If All
Topology
Aal2 If All
Topology
SS7 All
Topology
ATMMPE All
Topology
Ip If All
Topology
MicroNodeB All
Topology
CCP All
Topology
MITFB All
Topology
Control Port All
Topology
Sector All
Topology
UserDataPort All
Topology
ALCAP All
Topology
oneBTS All
Cell_Source
Mode.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LTE object class tree and tabs
The LTE object class tree and the corresponding tabs are as follows.

eNodeB All
Duplex
LTE Cell All
Topology
Duplex
Adjacency All
SourceCell
TargetCell
S1C Interface All
Topology
X2 Interface All
Topology
MME The only MME tab is: All.
HOST All
Topology
MIF All
Topology
MAF All
Topology
Host TA All
Topology
TA The only TA tab is: All.
Object Zone SubObjectZones
Family/SubFamily
Cell Zone SubObjectZones
Family/SubFamily
Mode.
External LTE Cell The only External LTE Cell tab is: All.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WiMAX object class tabs and sub-tabs
Object Class Tabs Sub-Tabs

Ran Access Network The only Ran Access Network tab is: All.
CoreServiceNetwork The only CoreServiceNetwork tab is: All.
WACCluster All
WACCL Release
WAC All
OMC / Topo
WAC Release
BS Cell All
OMC / Topo
BS Release
WAC Centric
Processor The only Processor sub-tab is: OMC / Topo.
Physical Link The only Physical Link sub-tab is: OMC / Topo.
WAC to AAA Connection All
CSN-Centric
OMC / Topo
AAA Server All
CSN-Centric
W-Adjacency OMC / Topo Source Cell
OMC / Topo Target Cell
Target External Cell
BSCELL to CSN link CSN centric
OMC / Topo
WAC to CSN link CSN centric
OMC / Topo
WACCL to CSN link CSN centric
OMC / Topo
BS All
OMC / Topo
BS Release
DL_burst_profile The only DL_burst_profile sub-tab is: OMC / Topo.
UL_burst_profile The only UL_burst_profile sub-tab is: OMC / Topo.
DL_permutation_zone The only DL_permutation_zone sub-tab is: OMC / Topo.
UL_permutation_zone The only UL_permutation_zone sub-tab is: OMC / Topo.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Object Class Tabs Sub-Tabs

UL_Interval_User_Code The only UL_Interval_User_Code sub-tab is: OMC / Topo.
DL_Interval_User_Code The only DL_Interval_User_Code sub-tab is: OMC / Topo.
Sub-Map The only Sub-Map sub-tab is: OMC / Topo.
Sub-Allocation The only Sub-Allocation sub-tab is: OMC / Topo.
Generic Zones SubObjectZones
Family / SubFamily
CellZones The only CellZones sub-tab is: SubObjectZones.
BS to CSN link CSN centric
OMC / Topo
BSCELL_WAC_LINK OMC / Topo
WAC-Centric
External Cell The only External Cell sub-tab is: WAC centric.
MultiNET The only MultiNET sub-tab is: Basket.
Mode.
Display topology object properties

See Procedure 3-2: Display and edit properties (p. 3-7).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Display topology object properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-1 Example of BSC properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-2 Example of eNodeB Properties
The following table lists the parameters and provides a brief description of each
parameter.
Parameter Name Description

Object ID The Muse ID of the object or the ID of the relation
For relations, MUSE ID is the concatenation of the MUSE ID of
the source and the MUSE ID of the target.
Object Type The type of the displayed object or relation (2G Cell, RNC,
Network for example)
External ID Description The External ID Label of the object or relation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

External ID External ID value of the object or relation
Parent ID A link to the parent object. The link opens the parent properties
window.
Parent Type Type and friendly name of the parent object.
Friendly Name Friendly name of the object or relation.
Planned OFN Planned name of the object
Discovery Date Date and time at which the object is created in MUSE
Import Date Date and time of the last import of the object.
This field is displayed only for Root Loading Objects (RLO).
Children Types A list of links that displays available children types. Each link
opens the properties page of the selected child.
Outgoing Relation Types A list of links that displays available Outgoing relation types. The
link displays a page that shows the list of related objects.
Incoming Relation Types A list of links that displays available Incoming relation types. The
link displays a page that shows the list of related objects.
The following figure shows an example of cell 2G properties.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Additional parameters exist for the cell properties pages, as presented in the tables below.
Table 4-1 Cell2G object properties frequencies and TRX mapping

Frequencies & TRX Link to Frequency and TRX mapping for the selected cell. This lists
mapping all the TRX under the cell with their corresponding frequency values.
With Hopping Configuration
Number Of TRX Value obtained from the radio parameter Number_Of_TRX.
(Operational)
Number Of TRX Value obtained from the radio parameter Number_Of_TRX from RNP.
(Planned)
Number Of TCH Value obtained from the radio parameter Number_Of_TCH.
Number Of SDCCH Value obtained from the radio parameter Number_Of_SDCCH.
Combined BCCH Value obtained from the radio parameter Combined_BCCH.
Configuration For each time slot n, n = from 0 to 7.
Value of the radio parameter TRX.channelConfTSn
Frequency Frequency for TRX #n is computed as Frequencies[TRX.frequencyn]
It can contain multiple values that are displayed comma separated.
FHS ID For each time slot n, n = from 0 to 7.
Value of the radio parameter TRX.fhsTSn_
HSN For each time slot n, n = from 0 to 7.
Value of the radio parameter computed for FHS object given by
TRX.fhsTSn_, get FHS.HSN_
MAIO For each time slot n, n = from 0 to 7.
Value of the radio parameter TRX.maioTSn
Without Hopping Configuration
Number Of TRX Value obtained from the radio parameter Number_Of_TRX.
(Operational)
Number Of TRX Value obtained from the radio parameter Number_Of_TRX from RNP
(Planned)
Number Of TCH Value obtained from the radio parameter Number_Of_TCH
Number Of SDCCH Value obtained from the radio parameter Number_Of_SDCCH
Combined BCCH Value obtained from the radio parameter Combined_BCCH
Configuration For each time slot n, n = from 0 to 7.
Value of the radio parameter TRX.channelConfTSn
Frequency Computed: get Frequencies[ TRX.frequencyn]
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following table lists the Cell 2G object properties neighborhood parameters and
provides a brief description of each parameter.
Table 4-2 Cell 2G object properties neighborhood

Neighborhood Link to display the neighboring cells of the selected Cell2G object.
Operational Name Operational name of the neighboring cell
Planned Name Planned name of the neighboring cell
Operational Serving Operational serving = O, if the cell from the current row is
operational serving for the current cell; nothing otherwise.
Planned Serving Planned serving = P, if the cell from the current row is planned
serving for the current cell; nothing otherwise.
Operational Target Operational target = O, if the cell from the current row is operational
target for the current cell; nothing otherwise
Planned Target Planned target = P, if the cell from the current row is planned target
for the current cell; nothing otherwise.
The following table lists the Cell 2G object properties OMC external view parameters and
provides a brief description of each parameter.
Table 4-3 Cell 2G object properties OMC external view

OMC External View Link to display how the selected Cell2G
is seen by the OMC-Rs where it is
declared as an external cell.
Displayed parameters contain values that
come from these OMC-Rs on this
external cell.
OMC-R OMC-R where the selected cell is seen as
external Value of the radio parameter
LAC LAC Value of the radio parameter
OMCExternalCell.
BCCH BCCHFrequency_ Value of the radio
parameter
BCC OMCExternalCell.BCC_ Value of the
radio parameter
NCC OMCExternalCell.NCC_ Value of the
radio parameter
Cell Type CELLTYPE Value of the radio parameter
Frequency Range OMCExternalCell.frequencyRange_
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-3 Cell 2G object properties OMC external view (continued)

Cell_Reselect_Offset Value of the radio parameter
CELL_RESELECT _OFFSET
EN_BI_BAND_MS Value of the radio parameter
EN_BI_BAND_MS(n)
EN_OUTGOING_ GPRS_REDIR Value of the radio parameter
EN_OUTGOING_ GPRS_REDIR
EN_SOLSA Value of the radio parameter EN_SOLSA
FREELEVEL_DR Value of the radio parameter
FREELEVEL_DR
GPRS_HCS_THR Value of the radio parameter
GPRS_HCS_THR
GPRS_MS_TXPWR_ MAX_CCH_1800 Value of the radio parameter GPRS_MS_
TXPWR_MAX_ CCH_1800
GPRS_MS_TXPWR_ MAX_CCH_900 Value of the radio parameter GPRS_MS_
TXPWR_MAX_ CCH_900
GPRS_PENALTY_ TIME (n) Value of the radio parameter
GPRS_PENALTY_ TIME(n)
GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS Value of the radio parameter
GPRS_PRIORITY_ CLASS
GPRS_RESELECTTION_ OFFSET (n) Value of the Radio parameter
GPRS_RESELECTION_ OFFSET(n)
GPRS_RXLEV_ ACESS_MIN Value of the radio parameter
GPRS_RXLEV_ ACCESS_MIN
GPRS_TEMPORARY_ OFFSET (n) Value of the radio parameter
GPRS_TEMPORARY_ OFFSET(n)
L_RXL_DR Value of the radio parameter
L_RXLEV_NCELL_ DR
MS_TXPWR_ MAX_1800 Value of the radio parameter
MS_TXPWR_ MAX_1800
MS_TXPWR_ MAX_900 Value of the radio parameter
MS_TXPWR_ MAX_900
MS_TXPWR_MAX_ CCH_1800 Value of the radio parameter
MS_TXPWR_ MAX_CCH_1800
MS_TXPWR_MAX_ CCH_900 Value of the radio parameter
MS_TXPWR_ MAX_CCH_900
NC_REPORTING_ PERIOD_T Value of the radio parameter
NC_REPORTING_ PERIOD_T
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-3 Cell 2G object properties OMC external view (continued)

NETWORK_CONTROL_ ORDER Value of the radio parameter
NETWORK_ CONTROL_ORDER
PENALTY_TIME Value of the radio parameter
PENALTY_TIME
RX_LEV_ ACCESS_MIN Value of the radio parameter RX_LEV_
ACCESS_MIN
RX_LEV_MIN Value of the radio parameter
RX_LEV_MIN
Note: You can configure the list of OMC External View Parameters and obtain them
from the ExternalOmcCell.csv file.
The following figure shows an example of network properties.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Procedure 4-1: Add associated network objects
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-1: Add associated network objects

Use the following process to add associated network objects such as reverse adjacencies
and neighboring cells to the topology.
Note: The reverse adjacencies menu is available also for W-CDMA and LTE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 While in the Adjacency mode:

Select the necessary adjacencies, right click and select Add Reverse Adjacencies, OR
From the menu bar, select Topology -> Add Reverse Adjacencies.
Result: The resulting reverse adjacencies are added to the selection (soft-deleted
adjacencies must not be considered when retrieving the list of adjacencies). The tree
can be expanded, but it is not scrolled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 While in the Cell mode, select the necessary cells, then right click and select one of the
following options.
To Do
Add the target cells of the previously selected Perform one of the following options:
cells to the selection Add Target Cells, OR
From the menu bar, select Topology ->
Add Target Cells.
Add the serving cells of the previously Perform one of the following options:
selected cells to the selection Add Serving Cells, OR
Add Serving Cells.
Add both target and serving cells of the Perform one of the following options:
previously selected cells are added to the Add Neighboring Cells, OR
selection
Add Neighboring Cells.
Result: The resulting cells are added to the selection and the tree can be expanded, but
it is not scrolled.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Use network object class
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use network object class

Note: For GSM, only Cell class is available.
Network cell class is not available for WiMAX and LTE.
Definition
Cell class is a parameter that describes the geographic environment and predicted traffic
of cells.
A cell class is associated with each cell through the RNP interface.
It is used by the NPO as:
Filtering criteria for logical parameter reference values and rules
Optimization method of the network.
A new tab is added in the Topology Classification panel: Cell class.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Classification
The NPO manages two different cell classes:
Planned cell class - this value comes from RNP
Operational cell class - this value is either chosen in NPO or comes from the OMC-R
(when cell class is supported in the OMC-R, for example, in the W-CDMA).
Besides the two values (planned and operational), the NPO manages an additional flag
allowing i to remember if the Operational cell class was set to the Planned value or not.
Alcatel-Lucent provides the following predefined and non-modifiable set of cell classes,
known as system cell classes:
Rural
Suburban
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Urban
Dense urban
Indoor.
System cell classes cannot be viewed, modified, or deleted using the Network Object
Class Editor.
In order to correspond to their own optimization methods, the optimizer may define
additional customer cell classes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Procedure 4-2: Use network object class editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-2: Use network object class editor

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 4-2.1: Open network object class editor (p. 4-26).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 4-2.2: Create network object class (p. 4-28).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 4-2.3: Edit network object class (p. 4-29).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Procedure 4-2.4: Delete network object class (p. 4-30).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Procedure 4-2.1: Open network object class editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-2.1: Open network object class editor

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select a network object.

Result: The network object is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform one of the following actions

From the menu bar, select Topology -> Network Object Class..., OR
Right click and select Network Object Class..., OR
Press Ctrl+L.
Result: The Network Object Class Editor opens.
The Network Object Class Tree contains the customer defined network object classes,
classified on their system network object classes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Procedure 4-2.1: Open network object class editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Network Object Class Properties panel is used to display and edit the properties
of the selected network object class.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Procedure 4-2.2: Create network object class
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-2.2: Create network object class

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the appropriate network object and Procedure 4-2.1: Open network object class
editor (p. 4-26).
Result: The object is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on .
Result: A new window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Fill in the following fields.
Field Name Description

Name Name of the network object class.
Default value: <NetworkObject_Class>_<owner>_n
where<owner> is the owner of the network object class, and n is an
incremental number to define a unique name.
Description Operator description for network objects class.
Mode List of applicable modes.
Typical modes for 2G are: BSC, Cell, Adjacency, TRX, Traffic Zone.
Typical modes for 3G are: RNC, Cell, Adjacency.
System Class List of System defined network object classes for the object type for whom
customer network object class is being created.
By default, this is set to the first value in the list.
Result: The parameters are defined.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on .
Result: The following confirmation message appears:
Are you sure you want to create Network Object Class
<NetworkObjectClassName> ?
When maximum number of network object classes are reached the operator is notified
about it. The maximum number is a configurable value for each object type and by
default it is set to 64.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Procedure 4-2.3: Edit network object class
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-2.3: Edit network object class

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
editor (p. 4-26).
Result: The object is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on .
Result: The Network Object Class Properties panel appears in editable mode. The
network object class name is grayed and noneditable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Edit the values as appropriate.

Result: The new values are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on .
Result: The updates are performed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Procedure 4-2.4: Delete network object class
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-2.4: Delete network object class

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
editor (p. 4-26).
Note: Multiple network object classes can be selected for removal.
Result: The object(s) is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on .
Are you sure you want to delete Network Object Class
<NetworkObjectClassName> ?
The selected network object class is deleted.
If the deleted network object class was used in a Rule, Diagnosis, Working Zone,
THL, or any Reference Value definition, or was associated with a network object, then
the deletion is rejected and an error message is shown.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Procedure 4-3: Assign operational network object class
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-3: Assign operational network object class

The MUSE_NPO_ASSIGN_CELL_CLASS FAD must be installed for the Class
Assignment option to be enabled.
The following rules apply.
If Then
If the planned network object class is selected The cell is allocated with the newly imported
for a certain cell, with the INDOOR value network object class (URBAN for this
for example, AND example).
An RNP project is imported that has for the
same cell a different cell class, for example,
URBAN.
If a system or customer network object class is The cell is allocated with the initial network
selected for a certain cell, with the INDOOR object class (INDOOR for this example).
value for example, AND
An RNP project is imported that has for the
same cell a different cell class, for example,
URBAN.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the appropriate cell(s), then:

Right click and select Network Object Class Assignment, OR
From the menu bar, select Topology -> Network Object Class Assignment.
Result: A list of the current system and customer network object classes appears in
alphabetical order. If the selected network object(s) is a planned object(s) (coming
from RNP), then the list contains an additional option: planned.
If multiple network objects are selected and they are all currently assigned the same
network object class, this appears as checked in the list. The same holds true for a
single network object.
If multiple network objects are selected and they have different network object
classes, no network object class appears as checked.
In the case of a planned network object class, this does not appear as checked in the
sub-list, but its planned value does (e.g INDOOR).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Procedure 4-3: Assign operational network object class
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the appropriate network object class to assign.

Result: The network object class is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Yes.
Are you sure you want to change the Network Object Class to <New_
Network_Object_Class> ?
The new network object class is assigned. At the next preview of the sub-menu of
network object classes, it will appear as checked.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
5 Use object zone
5
Overview
Purpose
This section describes how to manipulate objects as a group with objects zones.
Contents
Presentation 5-1
Procedure 5-1: Compute object zone 5-6
Display object zone properties 5-6
Procedure 5-2: Use object zone editor 5-10
Presentation
Note: The MUSE_OBJECT_ZONE_LICENSE must be installed for the Object
Zone Editor to be displayed.
Definitions
An object zone describes a set of network objects of the same type, filtered by a set of
filters. The operator can define, for example, an Object Zone containing all cells having a
call-drop of 3% or more.
The filters are dynamically applied to the current Working Zone, in order to obtain the list
of objects contained in the zone. This list of objects is therefore dynamic and depends on
the opened Working Zone.
The operation to apply filters defined in an object zone to the current Working Zone is
called computation of the object zone. Object Zones can be computed only when required
(i.e. when used), on user demand, or during Analysis Desktop initialization (auto compute
property). When an object zone is computed (whatever the reason for this computation),
its name is updated to display the number of objects contained in the zone (in parenthesis
after the object zone name).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use object zone Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
An object type is associated with object zones to indicate which type of objects is the
result of its computation. For example, an object zone containing cells is called a Cell
Zone. A 2G Cell Zone is an ObjectZone(2G Cell).
If an object zone contains as a filter another object zone, it is called a sub-object zone.
Whenever the parent object zone criteria are changed, the changes are also inherited by
the sub-object zone (i.e. criteria are not copied in the sub-object zone, but a reference to
the parent object zone is kept).
If an object zone contains as a filter criteria a Working Zone, it does not become a
sub-object zone and the Working Zone criteria is not copied (a reference to the Working
Zone is kept).
An object zone can be manipulated as a standard network object. It can be used, for
example, as the topology dimension of an execute view or execute report operation.
Depending on the installed technology plug, some modes can be Zone Modes containing
only Object Zones of a certain type (in GSM, for example, Cell Zone, Traffic Zone and
TRX Zone are dedicated modes). A generic Object Zone mode can also be used and, in
that case, it can contain Object Zones of different types.
For the Traffic Zone mode, the NPO generates one Object Zone (of TRX type) for each
Traffic Zone of each cell. The Traffic Zone mode displays these zones as described below.
Example:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Filtering
A list of pre-defined topology filters is associated with each mode. It is possible to apply
all the filters of a mode on any Topology Classification of the concerned mode.
Filters can also be used to restrict the list of displayed objects, by using additional criteria
such as only GPRS.
The operator can apply a filter on any available Topology Classification of the mode, as
follows:
The criteria defined in the filter are then applied to the chosen classification and this
classification is updated, displaying only the filtered objects
If a filtered nonleaf object has no child, it is also hidden
The No Filter option can be used to remove any filter applied to a classification
Applying a filter on a Topology Classification does not change the other Topology
Classifications.
Whenever some objects are dropped on a filtered classification, if some of the dropped
objects are not visible due to the applied filter, then the user is informed and asked
whether to remove the filter or to ignore the non visible objects.
The following criteria may be used to filter a set of objects:
QoS criteria, to filter, for example, objects with a bad Call Drop or a low Call Success
Parameter (Logical and Design) criteria, to filter, for example, objects of a particular
frequency band or class
Topological criteria, to filter, for example, cells of a particular BSS
Explicit designation, to focus, for example, on specific cells of high interest
Free field criteria, to filter, for example, cells according to free fields.
For each type of criteria defined above, you must select a Reference Period and a
Reference Date to define how to apply the criteria.
The following comparison operators can be used as filtering criteria:
>
>=
<
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
<=
=
!= (<>)
CONTAINS
DOES_NOT_CONTAIN
LIKE (foe is like 'f*' but not like 'f*e*o')
MUSE specific comparison operators such as 'IsGreen()'
User-defined comparison operators.
Operator Description Example

CONTAINS The operator takes as argument a list Filter criteria on CELL2G otype is:
of values separated by comma. P:(Class CONTAINS
Filter using CONTAINS will return {'RURAL','URBAN'})
all elements whose its value matches It will return all CELL2G objects
to one of the value provided in the having the value of the parameter
list. "Class" equal to 'RURAL' or equal to
'URBAN'.
DOES_NOT_ The operator takes as argument a list Filter criteria on CELL2G otype is:
CONTAIN of values separated by comma. P:(Class DOES_NOT_CONTAIN
Filter using DOES_NOT_CONTAIN {'RURAL','URBAN'})
will return all elements whose its It will return all CELL2G objects
value does not match to any value having the value of the parameter
provided in the list. "Class" which is not equal to 'RURAL'
nor to 'URBAN'.
LIKE The operator takes as argument a Filter criteria on CELL2G otype is:
string, that can have wild character P:(Class LIKE '%URBAN%')
'%'.
It will return all CELL2G objects
Filter using LIKE will return all having the the value of the parameter
elements whose the value contains "Class", containing the string
the provided string. 'URBAN'. (so it can return
DENSE_URBAN and URBAN for
example).
Criteria can also be combined in a filter using the following operators:

AND
OR
Not
Parenthesis.
The following mathematical operations can be included in the filtering formula:
+
-
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
*
/
% (Modulo)
Example: to filter cells for which I:(Call_Drop_Radio / Call_Drop_BSS > 2).
When defining a filter for objects of type A, it is possible to use criteria of objects of type
B if there is a topological relation between A and B.
It is then possible to filter all cells of a particular BSC or all cells having a particular type
of Traffic Zone. When using descending topology links, the result can be more than one
(i.e. one object has only one father but can have many children). In this case, a particular
topology operator must be used, such as at_least_one_child or all_children.
Examples:
Cell filter to have only cells with a call_drop (fictional indicator name) higher than
3%:
I:(Call_Drop > 3), where I stands for Indicator.
Cell filter to have only cells of BSC1:
Filter on BSC and then: T:(OFN = 'BSC1'), where T stands for topology attributes.
Cell filter to have only cells having only GSM 1800 Traffic Zones:
Filter on Traffic Zone with All Children selected and then P:(InternalCell.frequencyR-
ange__TZ = 'GSM1800'), where P stands for Parameter.
Define a filter criteria using CONTAINS and DOES_NOT_CONTAIN operators:
P:(azimuthAntennaAngle>5) AND P:(cellClass CONTAINS *{*'URBAN'*}*)
P:(azimuthAntennaAngle>5) AND P:(cellClass DOES_NOT_CONTAIN
*{*'URBAN'*}*)
QoS for object zone

The object zone can be dragged and dropped in the viewer. In this case, the object zone
behaves as a single object.
Spatial aggregation is used to calculate the indicator value over the object zone.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use object zone Procedure 5-1: Compute object zone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 5-1: Compute object zone

Object zones that are auto computed can be recomputed in the same manner as described
below. Computation of an object zone also takes into consideration the soft-deleted
network objects.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select an object zone in the object zone tree.

Result: The object zone is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform one of the following:

Right click and select Compute, OR
From the menu, select Topology -> Compute Object Zone.
Result: The Analysis Desktop computes the object zone and the object zone tree is
updated to indicate the number of objects contained in the zone in parenthesis after its
name.
If Include numerical errors (NErr) is unchecked, then the computation of the
Object Zone excludes objects for which a criteria of the Object Zone cannot be
computed (returns the NErr value because of a division by zero).
Examples:
Call drop > 5% and Include NErr unchecked: the OZ contains all cells that have
a call drop greater than 5%.
Call drop > 5% and Include NErr checked: the OZ contains all cells that have a
call drop greater than 5% as well as cells for which call drop cannot be computed
(value = NErr).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Display object zone properties

The following figure shows the display object zone properties.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use object zone Display object zone properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to the following tables for a list of the parameters and their properties.

Name Name of the Object Zone
Owner Creator of the Object Zone
Created Date when the object zone was created
Modified Date when the object zone was last updated
System Yes, if the object zone is a System Object
Zone
No, otherwise.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Access rights Public or Private
Visible Yes, if this object zone is visible to operators.
No, if this object zone is not visible to
operators other than the Administrator and its
owner.
Auto-Compute Yes if the Object Zone must be automatically
computed when a user session opens
Description Operator description for the object zone
Object Type Type of objects contained in the Object Zone.
Families Table of associated family and sub-families of
the counter:
Family
The family to which this object zone
belongs
Sub-Family Depth 1
The sub-family to which this object zone
belongs
Sub-Family Depth 2
The sub-sub-family to which this object
zone belongs
Sub-Family Depth 3
The sub-sub-sub-family to which this
object zone belongs
Sub-Family Depth 4
The sub-sub-sub-sub-family to which this
object zone belongs.
Object Zone Filter Tree A TAB spaced tree that describes the filter
that is applied to create the object Zone. Each
node of the tree contains the filter details (for
example, for Filters, the Filter Name,
Formula, Reference Period, Absolute Flag and
Reference Date). For Working Zones and
Object Zones, the node contains the zone
names. Each node may contain topology or
function objects. Such objects are shown as
hyperlinks so that clicking on the link displays
the objects details.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following properties apply for the Object Properties window.

Dialog Box <Object name> Properties
A title specifying the object for which the
properties are displayed.
Title Bar Buttons Buttons appearing in upper-right-hand corner
of title bar.
Resizable Resizes the dialog box.
Properties panel Properties panel where the properties are
displayed.
Previous Page Displays the previously displayed object's
properties.
Next Page Displays the previously displayed object's
Properties displayed before pressing the Back
button.
Snapshot Launches a snap shot window which is exact
copy of the Properties window without any
buttons.
Previous Object Displays the properties of the previous object
to the current selected object in tree. A tool tip
appears when mouse is over this icon.
Next Object Displays the properties of the next object to
the current selected object in tree. A tool tip
appears when mouse is over this icon.
Close (default selected button) Closes the Properties window.
Edit Opens the object editor for the object.
The following Object Properties window characteristics apply.

Always on top The window is always on top and cannot be
minimized.
Modal The modal windows block the other GUI
components until the window is closed.
Multi instance Multiple instances of same window can be
opened.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use object zone Procedure 5-2: Use object zone editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 5-2: Use object zone editor

Object zone operations tool bar
The following tool bar icons are available for the object zone operations.
The following table gives a brief description of the object zone operations tool bar icons.
Icon Description
Add Union
Add Intersection
Add Exclusion
Remove Operation
Clear Criteria
Status
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 5-2.1: Open object zone editor (p. 5-11).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 5-2.2: Create object zone (p. 5-12).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 5-2.3: Create object zone by copy (p. 5-19).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Procedure 5-2.4: Create object zone interactively (p. 5-20).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Procedure 5-2.5: Edit object zone (p. 5-21).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Procedure 5-2.6: Delete object zone (p. 5-22).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use object zone Procedure 5-2.1: Open object zone editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 5-2.1: Open object zone editor

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Open the Analysis Desktop.

Result: The Alcatel-Lucent Analysis Desktop window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select one of the following options:

In the Alcatel-Lucent Analysis Desktop window, click on the icon, OR
In the Analysis Desktop main window, select Topology -> Object Zone..., OR
Press Ctrl+B.
Result: The Object Zone Editor window opens.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use object zone Procedure 5-2.2: Create object zone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 5-2.2: Create object zone

When creating Object Zones, use only operational values for parameters.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Object Zone Editor window, click on .

Result: The Object Zone Editor appears with default values and editable fields.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Fill in the appropriate fields, as described in the following table.

Name Name of the Object Zone to be created.
Owner User who is creating the Object Zone.
This field is read-only.
Created Date when the Object Zone was created.
Modified Date when the Object Zone was last modified,
in the case of an Object Zone update.
Access Rights Access rights for Public or Private.
Object Type Type of objects contained in the Object Zone.
A list of types is possible.
Auto-Compute True if the Object Zone must automatically be
computed when a user session opens.
False, otherwise.
Include NErr Allows to choose whether numerical errors
(NErr) must be included or not in the object
zone (when the object zone is computed).
Visible Yes, if this Object Zone is visible to operators.
No, if this Object Zone is not visible to
operators other than the Administrator and its
owner.
System True if the object zone is a System Object
Zone thus it cannot be modified or deleted
except for certain fields (Family, Subfamilies)
only by the Administrator.
False, otherwise.
Description Text box to be filled in with operator
description for the current object zone.
Family The family to which this object zone belongs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Sub-Family Depth The sub-family to which this object zone
belongs.
Sub-Sub-Family Depth The sub-sub-family to which this object zone
belongs.
Sub-Sub-Sub-Family Depth The sub-sub-sub-family to which this object
zone belongs.
Sub-Sub-Sub-Sub-Family Depth The sub-sub-sub-sub-family to which this
object zone belongs.
Object Zone Filter Tree Tree composed of FilterTreeNodes describing
the filter formula.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Families panel, type the family to which this object zone belongs.
Result: The family is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In the Sub-Family Depth, type the sub-family to which this object zone belongs.
Result: The sub-family is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 In the Object Zone Filter Tree, the following options apply.
Option Trees
Filter The trees available under the Filter tab are:
QoS indicator
Design Parameter (design primitives
included)
Logical Parameter
Topology Parameter
Free Field Parameter.
Object Zone The trees available under the Object Zones
tab are the Object Zones.
Working Zone The trees available under the Working Zones
tab are the Working Zones.
Check the appropriate option between Filter, Object Zone, or Working Zone.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: If you import free fields from the NPO Administration page while in the
Analysis Desktop the Object Zone Editor is used, you must refresh the free fields tree
in order to see and work with the imported free fields. For more details about the
import of free fields, refer to the NPO Administration User Guide document, to
Import free fields using GUI.
Depending on your choice, drag and drop from the right panel:
The appropriate filtering criteria for Filter
A referenced Object Zone for Object Zone
A referenced Working Zone for Working Zone.
The following operations apply.
Operation Click on
Union, intersection, exclusion
Delete an operation Select it and click on
Delete a criteria for Filter
The following comparison operators can be used:

>
>=
<
<=
=
!= (<>)
CONTAINS
DOES_NOT_CONTAIN
Unitary NPO specific operators such as 'IsGreen()'.
The following mathematical operations can also be used in the operands:
+
-
*
/
Numeric constants
The status of the object zone criteria is shown in the icon.
Icon Color Criteria

Green All the nodes are checked and are valid.
Orange One or more nodes is not checked.
Red One or more nodes has the Criteria is not valid status.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For Filter, the following parameters apply.
Table 5-1 Filtering Object Zone

Topology Object to Filter By default, the Filter is applied on the objects
of the type of the Object Zone.
Filters are used to change the objects on which
the filter are applied. It is possible to apply the
filter on upper or lower topology levels
compared to the Object Zone's type.
When referring to lower topology level, the
user must precise if the filter is considered as
true if all_children fulfill the condition or if
at_least_one child fulfills it.
Topology Reference Period Period that is used when taking into account a
Topology criteria while computing the filter
(can be Daily, Weekly or Monthly).
Topology Reference Date Date that is used when taking into account a
Topology criteria while computing the object
zone.
The available values depend on the chosen
Topology Reference Period.
If the Topology Reference Period is Daily, the
Reference Date can be:
Yesterday
An explicit date (yesterday or earlier only)
A relative date (today x, x being more than
1).
If the Topology Reference Period is Weekly,
the Reference Date can be:
Last week
An explicit week (last week or earlier
only)
A relative week (current week x, x being
more than 1).
If the Topology Reference Period is Monthly,
Last month
An explicit month (last month or earlier
only)
A relative month (current month x, x being
more than 1).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-1 Filtering Object Zone (continued)

QoS Reference Period Period that is used when taking into account a
QoS criteria while computing the filter (can be
Daily, Weekly or Monthly).
QoS Reference Date Date that is used when taking into account a
QoS criteria while computing the object zone.
QoS Reference Period.
If the QoS Reference Date is Daily, the
Yesterday
1).
If the QoS Reference Date is Weekly, the
Last week
only)
more than 1).
If the QoS Reference Date is Monthly, the
Last month
only)
more than 1).
Parameter Reference Period Period that is used when taking into account a
Parameter criteria while computing the filter
(can be Daily, Weekly or Monthly).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-1 Filtering Object Zone (continued)

Parameter Reference Date Date that is used when taking into account a
Parameter criteria while computing the object
zone.
Parameter Reference Period.
If the Parameter Reference Period is Daily, the
Yesterday
1).
If the Parameter Reference Period is Weekly,
Last week
only)
more than 1).
If the Parameter Reference Period is Monthly,
Last month
only)
more than 1).
Filter Formula The filter formula can contain binary operators
(And, Or), unitary operators (Not), parenthesis
to define the order in which formula should be
evaluated, and Criteria.
For more information, refer to Filtering (p. 5-3).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click on .
Result: The following confirmation popup window appears:
Are you sure you want to create object zone <object_zone_name> ?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Click on Yes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Object Zone is created and the tree in the Object Zone mode is refreshed.
If a POD mode A is also present in the Object Zone editor, the topology tree of the
Object Zone editor will display the same objects that are present in this POD mode A
(in the Analysis Desktop main window) at the opening of the Object Zone editor.
If an object is added / suppressed in a POD mode of the Analysis Desktop main
window, trigger the Refresh option to apply the same change(s) in the topology tree
of the editor.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use object zone Procedure 5-2.3: Create object zone by copy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 5-2.3: Create object zone by copy

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Object Zone Editor, click on .

Result: The Properties panel appears with the default name and properties of the
selected object zone. The value of the Access Rights field is Private by default,
regardless of the value from the copied object zone.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform all the necessary updates.

For the name of the copied object zone, use the following format:
<oldname_Copy_n>
Only operational values of parameters must be used inside object zones.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Apply.
Result: A confirmation window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In the confirmation window, click on OK.

Result: The object zone is created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use object zone Procedure 5-2.4: Create object zone interactively
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 5-2.4: Create object zone interactively

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the appropriate cells from the Topology browser, right click and select Create
Object Zone....
Result: The Enter Object Zone Name window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Type the appropriate name for the object zone, then click on OK.
Result: The new object zone is created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use object zone Procedure 5-2.5: Edit object zone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 5-2.5: Edit object zone

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Object Zone Editor, click on .

Result: The Object Properties panel appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Edit the appropriate values.

The Name field is restricted.
Only operational values of parameters must be used inside object zones.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Apply.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In the confirmation window, click on OK.

Result: The object zone is edited.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use object zone Procedure 5-2.6: Delete object zone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 5-2.6: Delete object zone

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Object Zone Editor, select the Object Zone(s) to be deleted.

Result: The Object Zone(s) are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on .
Result: A deletion confirmation window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the deletion confirmation window, click on OK.

Result: The object zone(s) are deleted.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
6 6 se topology
U
classifications
Overview
Purpose
This section describes how to manipulate Network Objects within topology
classifications.
Contents
Presentation 6-2
Procedure 6-1: Open topology classification editor 6-3
Topology Classifications containing Parameters 6-3
Topology Classifications based on Parent or Related objects 6-4
Topology Classifications based on Free Fields 6-5
Topology Classifications based on Topology Parameters 6-6
Procedure 6-2: Create topology classification 6-8
Procedure 6-3: Create topology classification by copy 6-11
Procedure 6-4: Edit topology classification 6-12
Procedure 6-5: Apply filter on topology classification 6-13
Procedure 6-6: Delete topology classification 6-14
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use topology classifications Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Presentation
The Topology Classification defines how Network Objects are classified in a tree
structure, depending on the selected mode.
Topology Classifications are specific to the used technology.
Topology Classifications can be:
System, as defined by Alcatel-Lucent
Customer, when defined by the user (see Procedure 6-2: Create topology
classification (p. 6-8) or Procedure 6-3: Create topology classification by copy
(p. 6-11)).
Note: If parameters are not loaded for all topology objects, there can be different
number of objects in topology classifications for a certain mode. Also, if one of the
OMCs is undeclared, the same situation may appear (the objects of that OMC will no
longer be displayed in the OMC classification for example).
The correct number of objects appears in the All classification of any mode.
The network objects of a mode can be classified according to their values of selected
parameters and/or according to their parent or related objects and/or according to their
values of topology parameters and /or free fields.
The following figure presents a cell topology classification based on parameter
Frequency_Range.
The cells are displayed in the corresponding classification according to their value of the
parameter(s) selected for building the classification. To allow to immediately see which
parameter(s) is (are) used for the topology classification, the parameter label
(Frequency_Range) is displayed between parenthesis after the parameter value of the
classification node, for instance: EGSM900 (Frequency_Range).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use topology classifications Procedure 6-1: Open topology classification editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 6-1: Open topology classification editor

The topology classification editor enables the user to create new classifications for
displaying the topology objects of a mode.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

In the Analysis Desktop main window, select Topology -> Topology Classification...,
OR
Right click on a Topology classification tab, select Topology Classification..., OR
Press Ctrl+T.
Result: The Topology Classification Editor window opens.
The topology classification tree on the left contains tree of topology classifications
objects for all standards and modes except the MultiNET mode.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Topology Classifications containing Parameters

Each node in a topology tree classification based on a parameter is formed using:
<parameter value> (<Parameter Display Name>)
Each node label contains the Parameter name in addition to the parameter values as
illustrated in the figure below:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use topology classifications Topology Classifications containing Parameters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You can create a topology classification containing parameters using the Procedure 6-2:
Create topology classification (p. 6-8).
Topology Classifications based on Parent or Related objects

Each node in a topology tree involving a parent/related object classification is formed
using: <Object user label> (<Object Mode/Type>)
Each node label contains the corresponding mode/object type (same label as the one used
in the Topology Classification editor) in addition to the object user label as illustrated in
the figure below:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use topology classifications Topology Classifications based on Parent or Related objects
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You can create a topology classification based on parent or related objects using the
Procedure 6-2: Create topology classification (p. 6-8).
Topology Classifications based on Free Fields

Each node in a topology tree involving a Free Field classification is formed using: <Free
Field Value> (<Free Field label>)
Each node label contains the corresponding Free Field label (same label as the one used
in the Free Field tab of the Topology Classification editor) in addition to the free field
value as illustrated in the figure below:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use topology classifications Topology Classifications based on Free Fields
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You can create a topology classification based on free fields using the Procedure 6-2:
Create topology classification (p. 6-8).
Topology Classifications based on Topology Parameters

Each node in a topology tree involving a Topo Param must now be formed using: <Topo
param value> (<Topo Param label>)
Each node label contains the corresponding Topo Param label (same label as the one used
in the Topo Param tab of the Topology Classification editor) in addition to the topo param
value as illustrated in the figure below:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use topology classifications Topology Classifications based on Topology Parameters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You can create a topology classification based on topology parameters using the
Procedure 6-2: Create topology classification (p. 6-8).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use topology classifications Procedure 6-2: Create topology classification
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 6-2: Create topology classification

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Topology Classification Editor window, click on the icon.

Result: The properties panel (in the middle of the Topology Classification Editor) is
displayed with default values and editable fields
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Field Description Default Value

Name
Name Name of the topology classification to be created. Topology_
<owner> _n
where <owner> is
the owner of the
topology
classification and n
is an increment.
Owner User who is creating the topology classification. The username you
This field is read-only. logged in the NPO
application.
Created Date of topology classification creation.
Modi- Date of topology classification last update.
fied This field is read-only.
Access Access rights for Public or Private Private.
Rights If the new topology classification is set to Public, the other
users are notified of its availability as soon as it is created.
Mode Mode for the newly created topology classification. The active Mode
object type when the
Topology
Classification Editor
was started.
System True, if this topology classification is a System one - thus it
cannot be modified or deleted except certain fields (Visible)
only by the Administrator.
Grayed, otherwise.
Descrip- Text box to be filled in with operator description for the
tion current topology classification.
In the Classification Definition panel, define the list of classification criteria which give
the levels to be displayed in the classification.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Drag the required object attributes and topology objects from the right panel, and drop
them to the topology classification tree. The drop is based on:
Relations and attributes of objects
Relations of parent child.
Dropping object attributes and topology objects on a node makes them parent of that
node. If a drop is not allowed, the cursor shows the icon.
Validation occurs when dragging, therefore the example tree is immediately updated.
If you import free fields from the NPO Administration page while in the Analysis
Desktop the Topology Classification Editor is used, you must refresh the free fields tree in
order to see and work with the imported free fields. For more details about the import of
free fields, refer to the NPO Administration User Guide document, to Import free fields
using GUI.
The maximum number of allowed levels in a topology classification is set by default to
six.
When defining the levels of the desired classifications, the following rules must be
respected:
The first level cannot be changed. It is always the Working Zone.
All intermediate levels can be Topology Objects or Object Attributes
Leaves are always the Object Type of the mode for which the topology classification
is defined
Topology Objects or Object Attributes cannot be used twice in the same Topology
Classification (i.e. not possible to define RNC->Cell->RNC).
A child object cannot be dropped over a parent object.
The resulting tree has collapsible and expandable nodes containing example data.
The user determines for each defined level (except for the first and the last levels) if the
associated level is displayed or not in the classification by checking the checkbox in front
of the considered level. If the checkbox is unchecked, the considered level is hidden in
the classification. If the (n) level is hidden in the classification, then in the upper level
(n-1), the (n+1) level objects are displayed grouped by (n) level.
To remove a selected node, click on .
As for all classifications, non-leaves levels are displayed using a (configurable) icon
indicating if the branch is open or not .
Also, the associated icons appear for the dragged objects.
Icon Name
Topology
Logical
Design
Topology Parameters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Icon Name
Free Fields
Result: The topology classification is defined.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on .
Are you sure you want to create topology classification <topology_
classification_name> ?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
To Click on
Create the topology classification Yes
To cancel the creation of the topology Cancel
classification
Result: The new topology classification is created and displayed in the mode. No
filter is associated with this new classification.
If the topology classification is public, other users are notified and they have to
reopen the Analysis Desktop to see this new topology classification.
The new topology classifications can be saved as an implicit User Preference for the
Mode, as well as the new current active topology classification.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use topology classifications Procedure 6-3: Create topology classification by copy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 6-3: Create topology classification by copy

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Topology Classification Editor window, from the left frame, select the topology
classification to copy, then click on .
Result: The new topology classification is created with a default name:
<oldname>_Copy_n, where n is an incremental number to define a unique name.
Access rights are reset to the default values, but you can change them as required.
You can also modify the topology classification properties if required.
The user becomes the owner of the copied topology classification.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Edit the appropriate fields, then click on .

Are you sure you want to create topology classification <topology_
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Yes.
Result: The new topology classification is created and displayed in the mode. No
filter is associated with this new classification.
If the topology classification is public, other users are notified and they have to
reopen the Analysis Desktop to see this new topology classification.
The new topology classification can be saved as an implicit User Preference for the
Mode, as well as the new current active topology classification.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use topology classifications Procedure 6-4: Edit topology classification
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 6-4: Edit topology classification

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the topology classification to modify.

Result: The topology classification is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Topology Classification Editor window, click on .

Result: The Topology Classification Propertiespanel interface appears with the
current attribute values.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Edit the appropriate editable fields.

Only the owner of the topology classification or the Administrator can update its values.
The operator is not allowed to modify the owner of the topology classification.
If the owner of the topology classification is not the one viewing it, the Edit button is
grayed.
Result: The fields are edited.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 To save the changes, click on .

Result: The topology classification is updated. If it is not hidden, the associated
topology tree is refreshed with its previous associated filter, if any.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on Close to close the Topology Classification Editor window.

Result: The Topology Classification Editor window closes.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use topology classifications Procedure 6-5: Apply filter on topology classification
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 6-5: Apply filter on topology classification

The operator can choose one of the available filters associated with a mode and apply it
on a topology classification of the concerned mode.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select a topology classification, right click and choose Select Filter.

Result: A window with the list of existing filters appears. The first item is labeled No
Filter and is used to remove any filter on the classification.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the appropriate pre-defined filter.

Result: The topology tree is refreshed according to the filtered classification.
Note: Only objects that fulfill the filtered criteria are displayed in the topology tree.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use topology classifications Procedure 6-6: Delete topology classification
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 6-6: Delete topology classification

Important!
Only the owner of the selected topology classification or the administrator can
delete a topology classification.
System topology classification cannot be deleted but the user can hide a system
topology classification, refer to Procedure 6-2: Create topology classification
(p. 6-8), to the Classification Definition panel.
There are at least two topology classifications for the mode and it is not possible
to remove all classifications of a mode.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the topology classification to delete.

Result: The classification is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the Topology Classification Editor window, click on .

Are you sure you want to delete topology classification <topology_
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If Click on
Only one topology classification is selected to Yes
be deleted
Multiple topology classifications are selected Yes to all
to be deleted
Result: The topology classification(s) is / are deleted from the mode.

If the deleted topology classification is public, other users are notified about the
deletion but the deleted topology classification will be removed only when they
reopen the Analysis Desktop.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
7 7 se function
U
classifications
Overview
Purpose
This section describes how to manipulate functions within the function classifications.
Contents
Presentation 7-1
Procedure 7-1: Open function classification editor 7-2
Procedure 7-2: Create function classification 7-3
Procedure 7-3: Create function classification by copy 7-6
Procedure 7-4: Edit function classification 7-7
Procedure 7-5: Delete function classification 7-8
Presentation
The Function Classification defines how functions are classified in a tree structure. It is
not dependant on the used technology.
Function Classifications can be:
System, as defined by Alcatel-Lucent
Customer, when defined by the user (see Procedure 7-2: Create function
classification (p. 7-3) or Procedure 7-3: Create function classification by copy
(p. 7-6)).
In the Analysis Desktop, the Function Classification Trees display only:
Public and owned private objects
Visible objects.
The Administrator and the owner can see though all private objects. They can also
visualize the non-visible objects, but using a particular graphical style and only in the
Object Editors trees (not in Analysis Desktop main function trees).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use function classifications Procedure 7-1: Open function classification editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 7-1: Open function classification editor

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

In the Analysis Desktop main window, select Data -> Function Classification..., OR
Right click on a function tab and select Function Classification..., OR
Press Ctrl+U.
Result: The Topology Classification Editor window opens.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use function classifications Procedure 7-2: Create function classification
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 7-2: Create function classification

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Function Classification Editor window, click on .

Result: A new window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name
Name Name of the function classification to be created. Function_
<owner> _n
where <owner> is
the owner of the
function
classification.
Owner User who is creating the function classification. The username you
application.
Created Date of function classification creation.
Modi- Date of function classification last update.
fied This field is read-only.
Rights If the new function classification is set to Public, the other
users are notified of its availability as soon as it is created.
Mode Mode for the newly created function classification. The active Mode
object type when the
Function
Classification Editor
was started.
Function Dropdown list containing all available function types (i.e. all Current active
Type available for selected standard including the non-visible function type on
ones) except Tuning, Event, Free Fields. The leaf node for function browser.
the function classification are of this type.
Visible Checked, if this function classification is visible to Checked.
operators.
Unchecked, if this function classification is not visible to
operators other than the Administrator and the owner.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name
System True, if this function classification is a System one and
therefore cannot be modified or deleted except certain fields
(Visible) only by the Administrator.
Grayed, otherwise.
tion current function classification.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Classification Definition panel, define the list of classification criteria which gives
the levels to be displayed in the classification. For this, drag the required functions from
the right panel, and drop them to the function classification tree.
Function attributes cannot be used twice in the same function classification.
If the Family attribute is chosen to classify the functions, then it must be at the lowest
level of the classification definition. The Family attribute cannot be dropped between
other function attributes.
If a function classification tree contains the Family attribute, the function classification
editor displays all the levels of family and sub-family.
Note: The following function types cannot be created or modified in the function
classification editor:
Tuning
Event
Free fields.
Dropping them on a node makes them parent of that node. If a drop is not allowed, the
cursor shows that .
Validation occurs when dragging , therefore the example tree is immediately updated.
The maximum number of allowed levels in a function classification is set by default to
six.
The resulting tree has collapsible and expandable nodes containing example data.
To remove a selected node, click on .
As for all classifications, non-leaves levels are displayed using a (configurable) icon
indicating if the branch is open or not .
Result: As for all classifications, non-leaves levels are displayed using a
(configurable) icon indicating if the branch is open or not .
The Example Tree in the right frame of the Classification Definition panel shows a
replica of the classification levels that are being defined. The tree is updated every
time the classification level tree is updated.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on .
Are you sure you want to create function classification <function_
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on Yes.
Result: The new function classification is created and displayed in the Function
Classification tabs. No filter is associated with this new classification.
If the function classification is public, other users are notified and they have to
manually refresh the tree.
The new function classifications can be saved as an implicit User Preference for the
Mode, as well as the new current active function classification.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use function classifications Procedure 7-3: Create function classification by copy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 7-3: Create function classification by copy

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Function Classification Editor window, from the left frame, select the function
classification to copy, then click on .
Result: The new function classification is created with a default name:
You can also modify the function classification properties if required.
The user becomes the owner of the function classification.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Are you sure you want to create function classification <function_
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Yes.
Result: The new function classification is created. No filter is associated with this
new classification.
If the function classification is public, other users are notified and they have to
manually refresh the tree.
The new function classification can be saved as an implicit User Preference for the
Mode, as well as the new current active function classification.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use function classifications Procedure 7-4: Edit function classification
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 7-4: Edit function classification

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Open the function classification to modify.

Result: The Function Classification Editor window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Function Classification Editor window, click on .

Result: The Function Classification Properties panel interface appears with the
current attribute values.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Only the owner of the function classification or the Administrator can update its values.
The operator is not allowed to modify the owner of the function classification.
If the owner of the function classification is not the one viewing it, the Edit button is
grayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The function classification is updated. If it is not hidden, the associated
function tree is refreshed with its previous associated filter, if any.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on Close to close the Function Classification Editor window.

Result: The function classification is defined.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use function classifications Procedure 7-5: Delete function classification
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 7-5: Delete function classification

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the function classification to delete.

Result: The classification is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Function Classification Editor window, click on , OR
Select Edit -> Delete from the tool bar, OR
Press the Delete button on the keyboard.
Are you sure you want to delete function classification <function_
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Click on
Delete only one selected function classification Yes
Delete multiple selected function classifications Yes to all
Result: The function classification(s) is / are deleted from the mode.

If the deleted function classification is public, other users are notified about the
deletion and they must manually refresh their mode.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
8 Use working zone
8
Overview
Purpose
This section describes how to manage the Working Zone editor. It describes how to
create, create by copy, edit and delete a Working Zone.
Contents
Presentation 8-1
Procedure 8-1: Open working zone editor 8-4
Procedure 8-2: Create working zone 8-5
Procedure 8-3: Create working zone by copy 8-10
Procedure 8-4: Edit working zone 8-11
Procedure 8-5: Delete working zone 8-12
Procedure 8-6: Create sub-working zones 8-13
Procedure 8-7: Change current working zone 8-22
Presentation
Note: The MUSE_WORKING_ZONE license must be installed for the Working
Zone Editor to be displayed.
The Working Zone Manager allows the optimizer to define a specific subset of cells in the
network as a personal working zone.
It is also defined by a set of filters dynamically applied to the database whenever required
(when opening the Working Zone). Therefore, the set of network elements retrieved
through the filters may vary as the operational network changes in the database.
To compute a Working Zone, the list of objects contained in the zone for each standard is
computed and the results are merged into one single zone.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use working zone Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If a Working Zone contains as a filter another Working Zone, it is called a Sub-Working
Zone. Such Working Zones inherit the filters of their parent and whenever the parent
Working Zone criteria are changed, the Sub-Working Zone criteria are also updated
(when opened).
The Working Zone is also used to manage secured access to some parts of the network.
When defining a Working Zone, the administrator can restrict its access to a limited set of
operators. Only the administrator can create public Working Zones. An OAD identifier is
automatically associated with each public Working Zone.
The Global Working Zone is a system Working Zone that contains the entire network.
Regular operators can only restrict a Working Zone they can access. They cannot create
Working Zones that are not Sub-Working Zones. These Sub-Working Zones have the
same security access as their reference Working Zone (the one from which they were
created), sharing the same OAD identifier. Sub-Working Zones created by users can only
be private.
Working zones having their visible flag set to false are hidden in the working zone view
displayed at Analysis Desktop starting and change working view (except for
Administrator), but are visible in working zone Editor (for the Administrator and their
owner only).
Depending on the pre-defined number of cells, Working Zones are classified in two
categories:
Standard Working Zones, containing less than 2000 cells and all modes
Large Working Zones, containing more than 2000 cells. In this case, not all modes are
available (for example, Adjacency Mode).
For Adjacency Mode to be available, you must set the WorkingZonesAllowed
parameter for ADJ to true, from the following file:
/alcatel/muse/technologies/GSM/QoS/metadata/MaatQueryMetadata.xml
To change the limit of 2000 cells for Standard Working Zones, you must modify
the MAX_CORE_OBJECT_COUNT parameter, from the following file:
/alcatel/muse/MUSE_MAAT/topology/rsc/com/alcatel/muse/maat/topology/config/
maatTopo.cfg
This change requires a stop / start NPO from Process Monitoring page in order to be
taken into account in NPO, refer to NPO Platform User Guide document.
Important! Changing these parameters is not under Alcatel-Lucent responsibility.
Putting higher values then the values tested in Alcatel-Lucent labs may cause higher
response time or even request that do not answer.
Each technology can specify the modes available for Standard or Large Working Zones.
The modes that were defined as not available in Large Working Zones (because their
number of objects in a working zone is bigger than the pre-defined threshold) become
accessible when working in Large Working Zone by populating them on-demand (up to a
given maximum number objects). It is called POD mode. For more information, refer to
Chapter 21, POD mode.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use working zone Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To update the number of cells that can be monitored in a working zone, refer to the NPO
Administration User Guide document, to Modify Working Zone Dimension.
Working zone operations tool bar

The following tool bar icons are available for the working zone operations.
The following table gives a brief description of the working zone operations tool bar
icons.
Icon Description
Add Union
Add Intersection
Add Exclusion
Remove Operation
Clear Criteria
Status
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use working zone Procedure 8-1: Open working zone editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 8-1: Open working zone editor

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Open the Alcatel-Lucent Analysis Desktop.

Result: The Alcatel-Lucent Analysis Desktop window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

In the Analysis Desktop main window, select Topology -> Working Zone..., OR
Press Ctrl+Z.
Result: The Working Zone Editor window opens.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use working zone Procedure 8-2: Create working zone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 8-2: Create working zone

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Working Zone Editor window, click on .

Result: The Working Zone Editor appears with default values and editable fields.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name Name of the Working Zone to be created.
Owner User who is creating the Working Zone.
Created Date when the working zone was created.
Modified Date when the working zone was last modified, in the case of
a working zone update.
Access Rights Access rights can be:
Public, when the action is done by admin or user with
administration rights
Private, when the action is done by normal user.
QoS requirement QoS Requirement associated with the working zone.
Possible values:
Low
Medium
High.
Secured Possible values:
Yes
No.
OAD This field is only used if the working zone is secured, and it is
automatically filled in.
Visible Yes, if this working zone is visible to operators.
No, if this working zone is not visible to operators other than
the Administrator and the owner.
Parent Working Zone Left empty in the case of Working Zone.
Name of Parent Working Zone in the case of Sub-Working
Zone.
Description Text box to be filled in with operator description for the
current working zone.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the Secured option was given to the working zone, the Users panel becomes
available.
To give access to one or several users to the created working zone, select them from
the Users without access list and click on . This includes them in the Users with
access list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Manage Layer panel, select one of the following options.
To Do
Add new Background / CCA layers Perform the following steps:
1. Click on Add.
2. Select the appropriate imported layer.
3. Choose the background or the CCA type.
4. Click on OK.
If no layer is loaded, a default tree structure
with four nodes (without the root node) are
displayed in the layer manager.
If no layers are associated with the working
zone and no layers are saved in the user
preferences, a default world map is loaded.
Remove an existing Background / CCA layer Select it and click on Remove.
from the Layer List
Order an existing layer up or down in the Click on Move Up or Move Down.
Layer List The Layers in the top of the list are rendered
on the top in the cartography viewport.
The order of layer in the layer manager must
always be:
Thematic Layer
Network Objects
CCA
Backgrounds
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The created Layer List is the list of layers to download at the start of the
application.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In the Working Zone Filter Tree, the following options apply.
Filter Trees
Design Parameter
Logical Parameter
Free Field Parameter
Topology Parameter
Operators.
Check the appropriate option between Filter or Working Zone .

Note: If you import free fields from the NPO Administration page while in the
Analysis Desktop the Working Zone Editor is used, you must refresh the free fields
tree in order to see and work with the imported free fields. For more details about the
import of free fields, refer to the NPO Administration User Guide document, to
Import free fields using GUI.
Depending on your choice, add by a drag and drop operation from the right panel:
The appropriate filtering criteria for Filter; refer to Filtering (p. 5-3) and to Table
5-1, Filtering Object Zone (p. 5-15).
A referenced Working Zone, for Working Zone.
The following operations apply:
Union
Intersection
Exclusion.
To Click on
Delete an operation
The allowed operators are: >, <, >=, <=, =, !=, contains, doesn't contain, like. Operands
can also contain mathematical operations (+, -, *, / , numeric constants).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unitary NPO Specific Operators such as IsGreen can also be used.
Operator Description Example

CONTAINS The operator takes as argument a list Filter criteria on CELL2G otype is:
of values separated by comma. P:(Class CONTAINS
Filter using CONTAINS will return {'RURAL','URBAN'})
all elements whose its value matches It will return all CELL2G objects
to one of the value provided in the having the value of the parameter
list. "Class" equal to 'RURAL' or equal to
'URBAN'.
DOES_NOT_ The operator takes as argument a list Filter criteria on CELL2G otype is:
CONTAIN of values separated by comma. P:(Class DOES_NOT_CONTAIN
Filter using DOES_NOT_CONTAIN {'RURAL','URBAN'})
will return all elements whose its It will return all CELL2G objects
value does not match to any value having the value of the parameter
provided in the list. "Class" which is not equal to 'RURAL'
nor to 'URBAN'.
LIKE The operator takes as argument a Filter criteria on CELL2G otype is:
string, that can have wild character P:(Class LIKE '%URBAN%')
'%'.
It will return all CELL2G objects
Filter using LIKE will return all having the the value of the parameter
elements whose the value contains "Class", containing the string
the provided string. 'URBAN'. (so it can return
DENSE_URBAN and URBAN for
example).
Result: The status of the object zone criteria is shown in the icon.
Icon Criteria
Color
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on .
Are you sure you want to create working zone <working_zone_name> ?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click on Yes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Working Zone is created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use working zone Procedure 8-3: Create working zone by copy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 8-3: Create working zone by copy

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select a working zone to copy, then click on .

Result: The Working Zone Properties panel appears with the default name and the
editable properties panel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Type a name and title.

The format for the name is <old name>_Copy_n, where n is incremented to find a
unique name (n can be 1, 2, 3...).
Result: While copying the properties, the Operator list is added to the Properties
panel, in the case of a Working Zone.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on .
Result: The new working zone is created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use working zone Procedure 8-4: Edit working zone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 8-4: Edit working zone

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click on .
Result: The Working Zone Properties panel appears. All fields except for the name
can be edited.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Edit the required fields with the appropriate values.

Two restrictions apply:
A Sub Working Zone cannot be changed into a Working Zone
The Operator List is not available during the edit operation.
Note: The Operator List is available and could be updated only by the administrator.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on .
Result: The Working Zone is edited.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use working zone Procedure 8-5: Delete working zone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 8-5: Delete working zone

Important! You cannot delete a working zone if a sub-working zone exists under it.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the Working Zone to be deleted and click on .

Result: The Working Zone is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on OK to confirm the deletion.

Result: The Working Zone is deleted.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use working zone Procedure 8-6: Create sub-working zones
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 8-6: Create sub-working zones

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 8-6.1: Create sub-working zone (p. 8-14).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 8-6.3: Create sub-working zone from topology objects list (p. 8-19).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 8-6.4: Create and open sub-working zone (p. 8-20).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Procedure 8-6.5: Create sub-working zone by copy (p. 8-21).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use working zone Procedure 8-6.1: Create sub-working zone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 8-6.1: Create sub-working zone

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Working Zone Editor window, click on .

Result: The Working Zone Editor appears with default values and editable fields.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name Name of the Working Zone to be created.
Owner User who is creating the Working Zone.
Created Date when the working zone was created.
Modified Date when the working zone was last modified, in the case of
a working zone update.
Access Rights Private
QoS requirement QoS Requirement associated with the working zone.
Possible values:
Low
Medium
High.
Secured Possible values:
Yes
No.
OAD This field is only used if the working zone is secured, and it is
automatically filled in.
Visible Yes, if this working zone is visible to operators.
No, if this working zone is not visible to operators other than
the Administrator and the owner.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Parent Working Zone Left empty in the case of Working Zone.
Name of Parent Working Zone in the case of Sub-Working
Zone.
From the dropdown list, add a reference to the Parent
Working Zone.
When computing the Sub-Working Zone, the resulting filter to
be used is:
Filter of Parent Working Zone INTERSECTION Filter of
Working Zone.
Description Text box to be filled in with operator description for the
current working zone.
Figure 8-1 Parent Working Zone

If the Secured option was given to the working zone, the Users panel becomes
available.
To give access to one or several users to the created working zone, select them from
the Users without access list and click on . This includes them in the Users with
access list.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Manage Layer panel, select one of the following options.
To Do
Add new Background / CCA layers Perform the following steps:
1. Click on Add.
2. Select the appropriate imported layer.
3. Choose the background or the CCA type.
4. Click on OK.
If no layer is loaded, a default tree structure
with four nodes (without the root node) are
displayed in the layer manager.
If no layers are associated with the working
zone and no layers are saved in the user
preferences, a default world map is loaded.
To remove an existing Background / CCA Select it and click on Remove.
layer from the Layer List
To order an existing layer up or down in the Click on Move Up or Move Down.
Layer List The Layers in the top of the list are rendered
on the top in the cartography viewport.
The order of layer in the layer manager must
always be:
Thematic Layer
Network Objects
CCA
Backgrounds.
Result: The created Layer List is the list of layers to download at the start of the
application.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In the Working Zone Filter Tree, the following options apply.
Filter Trees
Design Parameter
Logical Parameter
Free Field Parameter
Topology Parameter
Operators.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Check the appropriate option between Filter or Working Zone .
Depending on your choice, add by a drag and drop operation from the right panel:
The appropriate filtering criteria for Filter; refer to Filtering (p. 5-3) and to Table
5-1, Filtering Object Zone (p. 5-15).
A referenced Working Zone, for Working Zone.
The following operations apply:
Union
Intersection
Exclusion.
To Click on
Delete an operation
The allowed operators are: >, <, >=, <=, =, !=, contains, doesn't contain, like. Operands
can also contain mathematical operations (+, -, *, / , numeric constants).
Unitary NPO Specific Operators such as IsGreen can also be used.
Result: The status of the object zone criteria is shown in the .
Icon Criteria
Color
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on .
Are you sure you want to create working zone <working_zone_name> ?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click on Yes.
Result: The Working Zone is created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use working zone Procedure 8-6.2: Create sub-working zone from object zone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 8-6.2: Create sub-working zone from object zone

Note: The Create Sub-Working Zone from Object Zone is only available for
Core-Object Zones. (i.e. Cell3G Zone for W-CDMA, Cell2G Zone for GSM, CellLTE
Zone for LTE).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select an Object Zone in the Topology browser.

Result: The Object Zone is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right click on it and select Create Sub-Working Zone....

Result: The Enter Working Zone Name window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Type a name for the Sub-Working Zone, and click on OK.

Result: A progress window appears.
In the progress window, click on Cancel if you want to cancel the operation.
The Create working zone window appears with the message:
Working Zone name_of_the_working_zone successfully created
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In the Create working zone window, click on OK.

Result: A new Sub-Working Zone is created with the following default properties:
The Parent Working Zone is the current open Working Zone
Access is set to Private
Filtering criteria, except for the non-applicable criteria, is copied from the selected
Object Zone.
If the Object Zone contains even one QoS criteria, a warning appears indicating that it
is not possible to create a Sub-Working Zone from that Object Zone.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use working zone Procedure 8-6.3: Create sub-working zone from topology
objects list
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 8-6.3: Create sub-working zone from topology

objects list
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select a list of Topology Objects in the Topology browser.

Result: The list of Topology Objects is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right click on the list and select Create Sub-Working Zone....

Result: The Enter Working Zone Name window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: A progress window appears.
In the progress window, click on Cancel if you want to cancel the operation.
The Create working zone window appears with the message:
Working Zone name_of_the_working_zone successfully created
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In the Create working zone window, click on OK.

Filtering criteria, except for the non-applicable criteria, is copied from the selected
Object Zone.
If the Object Zone contains even one QoS criteria, a warning appears indicating that it
is not possible to create a Sub-Working Zone from that Object Zone.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use working zone Procedure 8-6.4: Create and open sub-working zone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 8-6.4: Create and open sub-working zone

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select one or more Topology Objects or an Object Zone in the Topology browser.
Result: The Topology Objects are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right click on the list and select Create and Open Sub-Working Zone....
Result: The Create and Open Sub-Working Zone window appears with a message
indicating that the newly created working zone will be opened after creation and the
change cannot be canceled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Filtering criteria is defined using the object list source of the operation or is copied
from the selected Object Zone, except for the non-applicable criteria.
If the Object Zone contains even one QoS criteria, a warning appears indicating
that it is not possible to create a Sub-Working Zone from that Object Zone.
Once the Working Zone is created, it is automatically opened.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use working zone Procedure 8-6.5: Create sub-working zone by copy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 8-6.5: Create sub-working zone by copy

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select a sub-working zone to copy, then click on

Result: The Working Zone Properties panel appears with the default name and the
editable properties panel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Type a name and a title.

The format for the name is <old name>_Copy_n, where n is incremented to find a
unique name (n can be 1, 2, 3...).
Result: While copying the properties, the Operator list is added to the Properties
panel, in the case of a Sub-Working Zone.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on .
Result: The Confirm Working Zone Creation window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on Yes.
Result: The sub-working zone is created at the same level as the copied sub-working
zone, and inherits the filters of its parent.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use working zone Procedure 8-7: Change current working zone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 8-7: Change current working zone

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select Analysis Desktop -> Change Working Zone...

Result: The Select Working Zone window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the appropriate working zone, then click on Open.

Result: The Working Zone window appears with the message:
Are you sure you want to change the current Working Zone? Change
working zone request cannot be canceled
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on OK.
Result: The selected working zone is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
9 9 se counters and
U
indicators
Overview
Purpose
This section describes how to manage counters and indicators.
Contents
Presentation 9-1
Procedure 9-1: Display and manage counter properties and descriptions 9-46
Procedure 9-2: Display and manage indicator properties and descriptions 9-53
Procedure 9-3: Propagate counters and indicators 9-63
Procedure 9-4: Create busy hour reference indicator 9-64
Procedure 9-5: Create indicator value at busy hour 9-66
Procedure 9-6: Display counter and indicator values 9-68
Procedure 9-7: Display type 110 counters 9-69
Procedure 9-8: Find indicator from counter 9-72
Procedure 9-9: Use indicator editor 9-73
Presentation
Note: The MUSE_QOS_<TECHNO>_LICENSE must be installed, so that the
administrator can declare QoS data sources for a given technology (GSM, W-CDMA,
LTE).
The MUSE_QOS_INDICATOR_CREATION_LICENSE must be installed to be
able to create or edit indicators.
If the MUSE_QOS_HISTORY_LICENSE is not installed, then the history of the
QoS Data is limited to one week.
To see the necessary FADs to create / edit / delete stored or calculated indicators, refer
to Tasks in the system, to QoS tasks for NPO section, from User Administration
Handbook document.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Definition
Counters are retrieved from the NPO and used as building blocks in the formation of
indicators.
An Indicator is an Optimization Application view of a network property.
The indicator is computed from performance measurements, counters values, other
indicators, or any other available network parameter values, such as radio parameters.
An indicator is defined on Availability Domains that consist of sets of Network Objects
and period types. An indicator value can be calculated for the specified Network Objects
and for the possible period types only. An indicator has no meaning for Network Objects
and / or period types that are not specified in its Availability Domain.
An indicator is consolidated. Consolidation consists of normalization, and optionally, of
aggregation (spatial or temporal).
An indicator can be stored. For stored indicators, the storage duration can be configured.
Indicator Type Description

Basic Indicator Indicator calculated directly from the counters, or from the counters and the
parameters, using a formula dependent on the release.
Calculated Indicator calculated on basic or other calculated indicators, or on
Indicator parameters, using a formula independent of the equipment release with the
same topology level (network object type) and periodicity.
Telecom Indicator A basic or calculated indicator, with a telecom definition; i.e. related to a
precise telecom procedure (call drop).
Presentation Represents a value that can be displayed on the analysis desktop.
Indicator Several presentation indicators can be associated with a single telecom
indicator. In this case, several entries are present in the functions list of the
Analysis Desktop. This is typically the case when several temporal
aggregations are defined.
Temporal A presentation indicator based on telecom indicators. Its value is computed
Aggregation at higher temporal level: day, week, month.
Indicator
Visible Indicator A presentation indicator that has the visible flag set to true.
Reference Presentation indicator used to calculate the busy hour.
Indicator
Customer Indicator (basic or calculated) created by the customer.
Indicator
System Indicator Indicator (basic or calculated) delivered by Alcatel-Lucent.
Temporary Customer calculated indicator whose lifetime is limited to the operator
Indicator session (it is deleted when exiting the Analysis Desktop).
When created, it can only be added interactively to view template and
cannot be saved to a view template. Stored temporal aggregations cannot
be added to an indicator already created as temporary.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Indicator Type Description

Reliability Indicator that provides information about loss of QoS data.
Indicator
Topology Indicator that presents the number of topology objects from a given type
Indicator per day.
Basic / calculated indicators

Note: The system proposes by default a calculated indicator, and the operator must
explicitly override the default to create a basic indicator.
Note: If one creation/update/deletion operation on basic/calculated indicators is
already in progress on the server (trigger by the same user or a different user), the
following message is displayed:
Unable to create a new Indicator: Concurrent indicator
management already in progress, please retry later.
This is mainly the case when operation are already in progress on stored indicators, as
these operations are longer than for calculated indicators.
Basic indicators
A basic indicator is an indicator calculated directly from the counters or from the counters
and the parameters, using a formula dependent on the release.
The following indicators can be basic:
Basic indicator alone
Stored aggregation of a temporal aggregation indicator.
Note: Basic indicators are always stored, but only a limited number of basic indicators
is supported.
For stored indicators, the storage duration can be configured.
When creating / editing a basic indicator, the system shows the list of available counters /
parameters and available functions.
Once a counter is selected:
Only counters of same release, PM type, source and reporting elements are available
Only parameters and counters of the same release and with the same source element
are available.
The availability domain for the basic indicator regards:
The temporal part of the availability domain
If the counters are only reported daily, then the period starts at Daily, otherwise it
starts at Hour.
The topology part of the availability domain
The availability domain by default contains the source network objects of the counter
used in the formula.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The availability domain for the basic indicator, if the indicator has a non-empty
aggregation function, is based on:
Counters only, as it is extended to a high level in the hierarchy (temporal and
spatial). It is done for all possible levels; it is not possible to select several levels
only.
If a spatial aggregation method is defined, then the topology part is extended to all
objects belonging to the spatial aggregation path defined by the indicator group.
Counters and parameters, as it is extended to a high level only in the temporal
hierarchy.
The topology part of the availability domain cannot be extended as parameters do
not have any spatial aggregation method.
If a stored temporal aggregation is defined by a:
Basic indicator, the availability domain for the temporal part is extended to Daily /
Weekly / Monthly for all the objects belonging to the availability domain of the basic
indicator
Calculated indicator, the availability domain for the temporal part is extended to Daily
/ Weekly / Monthly for all the objects belonging to the availability domain of the
calculated indicator.
Calculated indicators
A calculated indicator is an indicator calculated on basic or other calculated indicators, or
on parameters, using a formula independent of the equipment release with the same
topology level (network object type) and periodicity.
Calculated indicators can be:
Classical (without any particular aggregation)
With stored temporal aggregation function
With multiple spatial levels, also called complex indicator level 1, or change topology
level
This is a calculated indicator using a formula that mixes indicators at different
topology levels, such as TRX, CELL, BSC, Network.
Example: if an indicator formula is CALL_DROP_DIST_SUP = CALL_DROP /
sup(CALL_DROP), then to calculate this indicator at TRX level, the system does:
CALL_DROP_DIST_SUPTRX = CALL_DROPTRX / CALL_DROPCELL
Two functions are possible.
ObjSup(Ind) Takes the value of the indicator Ind at the

spatial level n+1
ObjSupSel(Ind, ObjType) Takes the value of the indicator Ind at the
spatial level defined by the ObjectType.
With spatial aggregation function, also called complex indicator level 2.

This is a calculated indicator with an aggregation function used over a zone, such as
Cell Zone, TRX Zone, etc.
Example: RTCH_TRAFFIC_OFFER_TOTAL = [Sigma ]ErlangB(channelcell)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A classical calculated indicator would be: RTCH_TRAFFIC_OFFER_TOTAL =
ErlangB([Sigma ]channelcell)
Example
An indicator defined as Call_drop = Call_success / Call_Attempt is calculated differently
if it is classical, or if it has a stored temporal aggregation.
For classical calculated indicator Call_drophourly = Call_successhourly /

Call_Attempthourly
Call_dropdaily = Call_successdaily /
Call_Attemptdaily
Call_dropweekly = Call_successweekly /
Call_Attemptweekly
Call_dropmonthly = Call_successmonthly /
Call_Attemptmonthly.
For indicator with stored temporal aggregation Call_drophourly = Call_successhourly /
(for example, MAX) Call_Attempthourly
Call_dropdaily = MAXall hours
(Call_successhourly / Call_Attempthourly)
Call_dropweekly = MAXall days of the week
(Call_successdaily / Call_Attemptdaily)
Call_dropmonthly = MAXall days of the
month (Call_successdaily / Call_
Attemptdaily).
See also Aggregation (p. 9-22).

Note: Calculated indicators are not stored in the database unless they have an
associated stored temporal aggregation.
The availability domain for the calculated indicator (and calculated temporal
aggregation), is based on:
Indicators, as it is the intersection of the availability domain of all the referenced basic
indicators, of the sampling indicator and the reliability indicator
Parameters, as it is the intersection of the availability domain of all referenced basic
indicators and the availability domain of the parameter. The availability domain of a
parameter is the object on which the parameter is based, extended to a high level in
the temporal hierarchy. The rule used to compute a parameter during a period is to
return the last value of the period (even if the value of the parameter is modified
during the required period).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 9-1 Example availability domain
Note: When using advanced operators such as OBJSUP, OBJINF in the formula of
complex indicators, the Availability Domain must be manually determined (manually
uncheck the non supported periodicities).
Example: For a complex indicator defined as Call_drop / ObjSup(Call_drop), the CZ
and Network should not be part of the availability domain.
Scalar / vector / matrix / axis indicators

The following indicator types are available:
Scalar, corresponding to all mono-valued (non vector or matrix) indicators
Vector, corresponding to an indicator defined in one dimension with an associated
axis indicator. It can be manipulated through the Analysis Desktop or through
dedicated QoS reports (distribution report)
Matrix, corresponding to an indicator defined in two dimensions, and each dimension
is associated with an axis indicator. It can be manipulated through the Analysis
Desktop or through dedicated QoS reports (distribution report)
In GSM, vector and matrix indicators are used to display RMS (Radio Measurement
Statistics).
Axis, associated with vector and matrix indicators. They cannot be manipulated
directly by the Analysis Desktop. They are manipulated by the indicator manager. The
properties of an axis indicator can be displayed by navigation through the properties
of a vector indicator or a matrix indicator.
Indicator group
The indicator group has only one source. A source is a unique combination of PM type,
that collects network elements and source network elements for a dedicated release.
Each indicator group is stored in a different table in the database. In the data warehouse,
each indicator group corresponds to a different table.
All the indicators of the same group have the same spatial aggregation path.
Counter attributes
The following tables describe the content of a counter dictionary.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Header
Content Mandatory Display Comments

Only
Name Y Y Dictionary name
Version Y Y Version
Date N Y Publishing date
Author N Y Publishing responsible name (team or person)
Description N Y Free comment (changes log or comments)
Domains

Only
Name Y Y Name
For each domain, list of the sub-domains1
(optional)
Name Y Y Sub-domain name
For each sub-domain1, list of the sub-domains2
(optional)
(optional)
(optional)
Releases

Only
Technology Y N Standard name (GSM, LTE, W-CDMA - ASCII)
Supplier Y N Supplier name (ASCII)
Name Y N Release name (ASCII)
Version Y Y Release version (ASCII)
Description N Y Free comment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Counters

Only
Reference Y N Unique counter reference (ASCII)
Long name Y N Unique long counter name (mnemonic)
Description N Y Counter description
Source network Y Y Type of object (RNC, NB, BS, CELLLTE)
object supporting the counter (ASCII)
Collecting Y Y Type of object (RNC, NB, BS, eNodeB)
network object reporting the counter (ASCII)
PM type N N If that information is not provided, it is set with
the same value that Collecting network
object. In GSM case, a particular data type
(110, 180) is provided. (ASCII)
Unit Y Y Unit of the counter (%, db, Events)
Precision Y Y Number of significant digit. The '%' may be
concatenated to the precision using the '-' as
separator, and in this case the value of indicator
has to be also * 100 for display.
Default RP N Y Default permanent reporting period
For report, the default granularity period is day.
Algorithm type N Y Method used to compute the counter
(asynchronous cumulative, synchronous
cumulative, sampling)
Algorithm info N Y Sampling period in the case of sampling
algorithm type. Previously called Sampling
period.
Sampling Period N Y Value of the sampling period when the
algorithm type is sampling.
Load Map N N Counter value = PM value * constant. This field
Formula describes the value of the constant, (by default
the constant is 1).
Consolidation Y N Normalization method (Sum, Average, Max,
Method Min).
Interpolation Y N Default interpolation method (No, Zero, linear).
Method
Domain name Y Y Refer to a (sub-)domain defined in Domains
Definition section.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Structure Type: Scalar

Only
Value Type Y N Counter type (Boolean, Integer, float, string)
Structure Type: Vector

Note: This section is not applicable for W-CDMA and LTE.

Only
Value Type Y N Counter type (Integer, float)
Size Y Y Max vector size (<= 2000)
Axis counter N N Associated axis counter reference name
Structure Type: Matrix


Only
ValueType Y N Counter type (Integer, float)
XSize Y Y Max X matrix size (<= 2000)
YSize Y Y Max Y matrix size (<= 25)
XAxis counter N N Associated axis counter reference name
YAxis counter N N Associated axis counter reference name
Structure Type: Axis


Only
ValueType Y N Counter type (Integer, float)
SizeMax Y N Max leh (<= 2000)
Choice between Dependent Columns or the three other fields
Dependent N N Indicates whether the columns displayed must
Columns be attached or not.
FirstColumn N N Informs whether the first column includes the
BoundaryIn- first value of the axis indicator or not. Not
cluded present if FirstValue is INFINITY or NONE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Only
LastColumn N N Informs whether the last column includes the
BoundaryIn- last value of the axis indicator or not. Not
cluded present if LastValue is INFINITY or NONE.
PreviousColumn N N Informs whether the last value of the previous
BoundaryIn- column is included or not.
cluded
Telecom families

Only
Name Y Y Family name
Order Y Y Number to order the families between
themselves
List of telecom sub-Family1 Definition (optional)
Name N Y Sub-family name
Order N Y Ordering number
List of the counters, the same counter may be present in several (sub-) families
Counter name Y Y Counter reference name (counter belonging to
the (sub-) family)
Indicator attributes
The following tables describe the content of an indicator dictionary.
Header

only
Name Y Y Dictionary name
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

only
Type Y N System or Customer dictionary
Version Y Y Version
Date N Y Publishing date
Author N Y Publishing responsible name (team or
person)
Description N Y Free comment (changes log or
comments)
importMode N N Provides the mode of importing the
indicator dictionary.
Possible values:
CountersMapping - all counters
will be visible in the Analysis
Desktop
RestrictedMapping - only the
counters having a mapping one to
one with indicators, are visible.
The default value is RestrictedMap-
ping.
Release

only
Technology Y N Standard name (GSM, LTE, W-CDMA -
ASCII)
Supplier Y N Supplier name (ASCII) (It must have
less than 30 characters, with 6
significant characters).
Name Y N Release name (ASCII) (It must have less
than 30 characters, with 6 significant
characters).
Version Y Y Release version (ASCII) (It must have
less than 30 characters, with 6
significant characters).
Description N Y Free comment (It must have less than
2000 characters, with 6 significant
characters).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Indicator group

only
Name Y N Name of the indicator group (QoS, HO,
HOO) (ASCII)
Spatial Aggregation Path Y N Describes the spatial aggregation path
for the indicator group.
The dropdown list must provide the lists
of object types, containing the source
network objects, in a hierarchical order.
Optional choice between nHourlyLevel and DailyLevel or nothing
nHourlyLevel N N Value in minutes of the collecting
period.
DailyLevel N N Flag indicating if the indicator of the
group are available on all temporal level
(dailyLevel = false) or only on daily to
monthly temporal level (dailyLevel =
true). The default is dailyLevel = false.
specificSpatialAggrega- N N The spatially consolidation is allowed
tion only for the objects satisfying the
condition (<systemParameterName>
[=|<>] Value) provided by this
parameter.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Telecom indicators
Section Content Mandatory Display Comments

only
Telecom Long name Y N Unique telecom indicator long
Indicator name (ASCII) (It must have at
Definition most 100 characters.)
Reference Y N Unique telecom indicator
reference (ASCII) (It must have
less than 27 characters.)
Description N Y Indicator description (It must have
less than 4000 characters.)
Unit Y Y Unit of the indicator (%, db)
Upper is fault Y N This flag indicates whether the
quality is better when the indicator
value is higher or the opposite
(quality is better when the value is
lower).
TrendSupported N N This flag shows if the indicator
supports or not the Trend
Prediction features. Only scalar
indicator can have this flag set to
True.
The default value of the flag is
False.
Structure Type: ValueType Y N Indicator type (Integer, float,
Scalar boolean, string(128))
Vector boolean)
Size Y Y Max vector size (<= 2000)
Axis indicator Y N Associated axis indicator long
name
Matrix boolean)
XSize Y Y Max X matrix size (<= 2000)
YSize Y Y Max Y matrix size (<= 25)
XAxis indicator Y N Associated axis indicator long
name
YAxis indicator Y N Associated axis indicator long
name
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

only
Axis boolean)
SizeMax Y N Max leh (<= 2000)
Display N Y When set that attribute means that
the axis value corresponds to a
particular object and that this value
must be replaced at display level
by the object label (for example:
frequency or neighbor).
FirstValue N N MEASURED (default),
INFINITY, NONE or value
LastValue N N MEASURED (default),
INFINITY, NONE or value
Choice between Dependent columns or the three other fields
Dependent Y N Indicates whether the columns
Columns displayed must be attached or not.
FirstColumn Y N Informs whether the first column
BoundaryIn- includes the first value of the axis
cluded indicator or not. Not present if
FirstValue is INFINITY or NONE.
LastColumn Y N Informs whether the last column
BoundaryIn- includes the last value of the axis
cluded indicator or not. Not present if
LastValue is INFINITY or NONE.
PreviousColumn Y N Informs whether the last value of
BoundaryIn- the previous column is included or
cluded not.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

only
Basic indicator First Y N Interpolation method (No, Zero,
Interpolation None, linear)
Method
First Method N N Mandatory in the case of Padding
Parameter interpolation function as first
interpolation method. Provide the
padding value for the first
interpolation method.
Second N N Second interpolation method (No,
interpolation Zero, None, linear).
Method
Second Method N N Mandatory in the case of Padding
Parameter interpolation function as second
interpolation method. Provide the
padding value for the second
interpolation method.
Consolidation Y N Consolidation method (Sum,
Method Count, Average, Min, Max). Note
that in the case of average counter,
it may be necessary to provide also
a counter representing the
weighting factor to perform
indicator consolidations.
Interpol change Y N Boolean (if false then only the
Allowed default interpolation method can
be used)
Group Y N Refer to an indicator group defined
in the Indicator group
(p. 9-6) section.
The group must have a name (less
than 10 characters), and a spatial
aggregation path that includes the
object type of the source network
objects of the counters used in the
formula in a hierarchical order.
Spatial N N Method used to perform the spatial
Aggregation aggregation. Note that in the case
of average counter, it may be
necessary to provide also a counter
representing the weighting factor
to perform indicator
consolidations.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

only
CounterFor- Technology Y N Standard name (GSM, W-CDMA -
mula ASCII)
Supplier Y N Supplier name (ASCII)
Release Y N Release name (ASCII)
Spatial N N Method to be used to perform
Aggregation on spatial aggregation to n+1 level at
Loading loading time.
Possible values:
Sum
Avg
Count
Min
Max
None (default).
Counters Y N Reference counter reference name
Formula based formula
Calculated Formula Y N Telecom indicator long name
indicator based formula.
Presentation indicator

only
Availability domain Y Y Telecom indicator availability domain. It
is the list of object types (RNC, NB, BS)
at each temporal level where the
indicator is available.
Precision Y Y Number of significant digit. The '%' may
be concatenated to the precision using
the '-' as separator, and in this case the
value of indicator has to be also * 100
for display.
Sampling Indicator N Y Sampling indicator long name
Threshold Values N N Threshold values for that telecom
indicator for each sensitivity (Low,
Medium, High)
Sampling Values N N Sampling values for that telecom
indicator for each sensitivity (Low,
Medium, High)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

only
Reliability indicator N N Reliability indicator long name
AccessRight N N Indicate the access right of the indicator
(PUBLIC or PRIVATE).
isVisible N N Boolean: TRUE if the indicator is
visible in the Analysis Desktop. Default
value: TRUE. Note that if the indicator
is present in none of the defined
families, this flag is forced to FALSE (at
the import time) whatever the dictionary
value (a warning is logged in that case to
point out the potential inconsistency).
Temporal aggregation

only
Long name N Y Unique indicator long name
(ASCII). Empty if it is the same
as the telecom indicator one.
Reference N N Reference extension of the
Extension temporal aggregation. This
extension has to be merged with
the reference of the telecom
indicator (ASCII).
Description N Y Description of the temporal
Extension aggregation. This description
replaces the description of the
telecom indicator.
Availability domain Y Y Telecom indicator availability
domain. It is the list of object
types (RNC, NB, BS) at each
temporal level where the
indicator is available.
Precision Y Y Number of significant digit. The
'%' may be concatenated to the
precision using the '-' as
separator, and in this case the
value of indicator has to be also *
100 for display.
Sampling Indicator N Y Sampling indicator long name
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

only
Threshold Values N N Threshold values for that telecom
indicator for each sensitivity
(Low, Medium, High)
Sampling Values N N Sampling values for that telecom
indicator for each sensitivity
(Low, Medium, High)
Reliability indicator N N Reliability indicator long name
AccessRight N N Indicate the access right of the
indicator (PUBLIC or
PRIVATE).
isVisible N N Boolean: TRUE if the indicator is
visible in the Analysis Desktop.
Default value: TRUE. Note that
if the indicator is present in none
of the defined families, this flag
is forced to FALSE (at the import
time) whatever the dictionary
value (a warning is logged in that
case to point out the potential
inconsistency).
Stored Temporal Y Y Function used to perform
Temporal aggregation method temporal aggregation (from
Aggregation Normalized table to Daily, or
weekly or Monthly).
Relevant hour N All hours or working hours. By
default the value is All hours.
Allow computing consolidation
only for relevant hours.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

only
Group Y N Refer to an indicator group
defined in the section indicator
groups.
In case of basic indicators:
the dropdown list is the same
as the groups list of basic
indicators
In case of calculated
indicators: the dropdown list
contains all the groups whose
first/lowest objects of the
spatial aggregation path are
equal to the lowest object
type of the Availability
Domain of the calculated
indicator (without taking into
account the ObjectZone and
TrafficZone).
Busy hour indicator N N Long name of the indicator used
as reference indicator to compute
the busy hour. This field may be
empty (ASCII).
Calculated Formula Y N Formula (of telecom indicators
Temporal basic, calculated, temporal
Aggregation aggregation long names) used to
compute the temporal
aggregation of a calculated
indicator.
Telecom family

only
Name Y Y Family name
Order Y Y Number to order the families between
themselves
List of telecom sub-Family1 Definition (optional).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

only
List of the indicators, the same indicator may be present in several (sub-) families.
Indicator name Y Y Indicator long name (indicator
belonging to the (sub-) family)
Consolidation
Indicator consolidation is used to normalize and optionally to aggregate QoS data inside
the data warehouse.
Aggregation and normalization apply only on indicators.
It is possible to calculate multiple temporal aggregation from the same indicator at a raw
level.
The scheduler launches the consolidation scripts every night. If the previous day
consolidation is not finished, the system waits for the completion of the ongoing loading
of files, before launching the consolidation for the current day. If any files are missing
(not in the exchange directory), the consolidation starts anyway.
The administrator can manually launch the consolidation if they find out that there is
recovered data that has not been consolidated.
The consolidation scripts include:
Data normalization, whereby normalized indicator tables are computed using the
default normalization methods
Data aggregation, whereby aggregated tables are computed using normalized
indicators and aggregation methods.
The obtained indicator data is aggregated spatially (static aggregation) and then
temporally (daily, weekly, and monthly aggregations). Daily aggregation is always
performed; weekly and monthly are only performed on the first day of the week or of
the month.
NPO consolidates daily data using the time zone configured on the NPO server.
To view the Consolidation Follow Up, refer to Procedure 2-9: View consolidation follow
up (p. 2-54).
Normalization
Normalization consists of adapting basic indicator values for display purposes, for
indicator formula calculations, or for aggregation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
It comprises the following processes.
Process Description
Interpolation To automatically complete the missing values.
There are six customizable interpolation methods:
None
Only the existing values are used (no interpolation).
Only OK value
When a display period is not fully available, a NULL value is
provided for that displayed period.
Extend
Only the existing values are used and they are extended to the
wanted displayed period.
Zero
All the missing periods are set to the zero value.
Linear
The missing values are replaced by a linear interpolation between
the previous known value and the next known value.
Padding
All the missing periods are set to a padding value. This is zero by
default, but can be configurable through the Padding parameter.
Period alignment To set the same measurement period for all measurement data involved
(time shift) in the aggregation or formula calculation (for example 4H, 1H, 15mn).
Synchronization of To set the same beginning / end dates for aggregation or formula
measurement data calculation.
The following figures present various combinations of cumulative counters.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Aggregation
Indicators can be aggregated whenever requested.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
There are two types of aggregation.
Temporal Aggregation Containing summarizing data of one network element

into one value that defines the parent in the period
hierarchy.
Example: aggregation of raw data to daily data.
When the indicator is defined, it is possible to have
several aggregation functions; in this case, there are
several linked indicators.
Two types of temporal aggregation can be defined:
Stored Aggregation
Calculated Aggregation
Calculated temporal aggregation can be used to avoid
having too much stored temporal aggregation when it
is possible to calculate it using other indicators.
Possible temporal aggregations are: SUM, MIN, MAX,
BH, 3DAV,...
For Temporal Aggregation execution at hourly level the
result is the value of the telecom indicator at hourly level.
Spatial Aggregation Containing the summarizing data of several network
elements into one value that defines the parent in the
network hierarchy.
Example: aggregation of cell data to BSC data.
The spatial aggregation is always done on the normalized
data, before the temporal aggregation.
Possible spatial aggregations are:

MIN
MAX
SUM
AVG.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Example aggregation
Consider that RTCH_CONG indicator has two aggregation functions: TOT and MAX.
MAX aggregation automatically produces an indicator called RTCH_CONG_MAX.
RTCH_CONG_MAX has the same counter formula as RTCH_CONG. It is computed
each night based on RTCH_CONG as the raw level, and not during PM loading.
RTCH_CONG_MAX is potentially available at hourly level.
If the administrator removes this level from its availability domain, the following occurs:
A telecom indicator, called RTCH_CONG
A temporal aggregation, called RTCH_CONG
A temporal aggregation, called RTCH_CONG_MAX.
When browsing the functions in the Analysis Desktop, you can see both temporal
aggregations: RTCH_CONG and RTCH_CONG_MAX, as they are considered
presentation indicators. When displaying the indicator documentation, there is a main
entry for the telecom indicator RTCH_CONG and two sub-entries for the two temporal
aggregations.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Busy hour
Using the hourly consolidated data:
The busy hour reference (busy hour position) is used to retrieve the per-day
position (the hour of the day) when a reference indicator reaches its maximum value
(00:00 00:59 = 0, 01:00 01:59 = 1).
The indicator value at busy hour is used to return the value of an indicator, at the
busy hour of a reference indicator (usually not the same).
This is not correlated to the maximum value of that indicator.
The example below tries to get the call drop rate when the call number is maximum,
and:
Busy hour reference is call number
Indicator value at busy hour is call drop rate.
Depending on the value of the reference indicator upper_is_fault flag, it may be

necessary to search for the minimum value instead of the maximum:
Upper_is_fault = true => BH_max
Upper_is_fault = false => BH_min.
Busy hour option in the execution context is available only for a few modes (or none) as
defined per technology.
In the Execution Context window, by putting the mouse over the Busy Hour periodicity,
a tooltip details the indicator name set as the busy hour indicator (see the example below).
The Fixed Busy Hour choice in the execution context consists in a list of constant hours
from 00 to 23.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To execute the functions on that particular fixed hour, you can select fixed busy hour in
the Execution Context window.
If a Fixed Busy Hour is chosen as periodicity, the resulting busy hour is constant along all
dates of the observation period.
In the Execution Context window, for Fixed Busy Hour, the date appears as defined in
the user preferences followed by <fixed busy hour value>.
Busy hour can either be computed dynamically by the system (when the busy hour option
is checked in execution context), it can also be computed during consolidation and stored.
When computing a busy hour on an object zone, the reference indicator is first calculated
on the object zone, the maximum value is taken, and then the indicator is computed as the
busy hour value.
Example:
Cell1 traffic: 16H => 10, 17H => 8, 18H=>0
Cell2 traffic: 16H => 0, 17H => 8, 18H=>10
Related to this example, in the case of:
Busy Hour / Object Zone execute view: If you calculate indicator call_drop at the
busy hour of this object zone, the maximum traffic of Cell1+Cell2 is at 17H, so the
result will be call_drop( 17H,cell1)+call_drop(17H,cell2)
Busy Hour stored aggregation the busy hour is calculated for each cells and stored.
For Cell1, the system store call_drop(16H), for cell2 it store call_drop(18H), this
would correspond to an indicator call_drop_bh.
It is also possible to calculate object zone on call_drop_bh.
Daily average value
The objective of Daily Average Value computation is to get an average busy hour value
for a given period (several days).
The algorithm is called nDAV, n being the number of reference days for the average
computation.
In NPO, nDAV is usually computed for a week or a month using the following criteria:
A number of reference days is selected (for instance n=3 or n=5).
The per day busy hour value is computed and the n days where the reference indicator
reaches its maximum values are selected.
The indicator value is the average of the indicator for those n busy hours.
3DAV Example
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PM data purge
As soon as the consolidation is completed, the data whose storage duration has expired is
purged / removed from NPO data warehouse.
This is done for performance and storage space reasons, and depends on the configured
storage durations. The minimum purge granularity is the day.
The following table provides an illustration of the default size of each partition and their
storage duration.
Table Type Storage Duration

Raw 32 days
Normalized 32 days
Daily From 3 to 14 months
Weekly From 3 to 36 months
Monthly From 3 to 36 months
For more information, refer to the NPO Administration Handbook document, to:
Check Default Storage Duration
Configure Indicator Storage Duration
Configure Parameter Storage Duration
Configure availability and inventory management data storage duration.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reliability
Note: This feature is not applicable for W-CDMA and LTE.
The value of the reliability indicator informs the operator about loss of QoS data.
The reliability indicators detect:
Lost objects - If any object is lost, the number of the observed objects is lower than
the number of the expected objects
Lost periods - If any period is lost, the observed time is lower than the expected time.
Indicators are always displayed, even if some data may be missing. The reliability
indicates if the displayed value is reliable (TRUE) or not (FALSE).
Therefore, the displayed value for an indicator can be:
Correct, whereby the reliability is TRUE
Partially correct (on a limited domain), whereby the reliability is FALSE
Wrong, whereby the reliability is FALSE.
The reliability indicator is associated with one or several indicators, through the
Reliability Indicator field; refer to Procedure 9-9.2: Create indicator (p. 9-75).
The reliability indicator is associated with one or several indicators, through the
Reliability Indicator field; refer to Procedure 9-9.2: Create indicator (p. 9-75).
The QoS loss of data may occur on:
Current Network exploitation operations (reset)
Some software problems or operator commands such as board reset may reset the
counter values on one or several boards. In this case, the equipment cannot provide
the counter values associated with these boards for the entire PM period. The
concerned counters are put to NULL. When a problem occurs on some equipment (for
example, on the MFS) and all the counters are NULL, then a specific flag is set to
active in the PM file to indicate that there are no available counters in the PM file.
QoS files transfer problems.
Due to different problems (BSC / MFS or OMC-R failure), some PM files can be lost.
Also, PM files that arrive too late to be processed by the different aggregation scripts
performed once a night, are considered as lost.
Note: The following rules apply:
The reliability indicator is not developed for the adjacency object
The Alcatel-Lucent reliability indicator is not developed for QoS indicators based
on RIM-NACC counters (RIM-NACC = RAN Information Management -
Network Assisted Cell Change)
The displayed value for an indicator can be good and reliability false when an
object is added, removed or migrated.
Threshold and sampling

When creating an indicator, you can associate thresholds and sampling to it.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Thresholds are used for highlighting QoS values. This is done using colors in a view or
report, in order to quickly see which values are critical, major, etc. (see Highlight in
view (p. 18-83)).
The indicators for which thresholds are defined are also used when creating warning
reports. In this way, the report results may be filtered according to the set thresholds (see
Warning reports (p. 19-6)).
Three alert thresholds corresponding to three QoS requirement levels can be defined for
each QoS indicator: red, orange, and yellow, each having three definable sensitivities. See
Procedure 3-5: Set QoS requirement (p. 3-33) to change the requirement level.
If the value of the reference indicator upper_is_fault is:
TRUE, min color is green and max color is red
FALSE, min color is red and max color is green.
If the upper_is_fault of the sampling indicator is:
TRUE, then the threshold is not taken into consideration if the sampling indicator is
below the sampling value
FALSE, then the threshold is not taken into consideration if the sampling indicator is
above the sampling value.
Figure 9-2 Threshold and sampling for Call_Drop_Rate indicator
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 9-3 Threshold and sampling for Call_Success_Rate indicator
For example, for call_drop_rate:

The red threshold is 4% for the high sensitivity
The sampling indicator is RTCH_success_end
The sampling value is 100.
If the value of RTCH_success_end is less than 100, the threshold is never computed.
Therefore, the goal of the sampling is to avoid triggering the threshold when there are too
few calls to have any meaningful statistics.
The following icons are attached to the indicators having or not threshold:
Indicators with threshold and/or sampling and associated diagnosis:
Indicators with threshold and/or sampling and no associated diagnosis: .
The threshold and sampling of an indicator are customizable, in order to adapt their
values to the operator's expertise. See Procedure 9-9.5: Edit indicator threshold /
sampling values (p. 9-86).
Indicator formula operands

The following formula operands are allowed
Basic operators
+, -, *, /
Cross type operators
++, --, **, / /
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Mathematical functions
EXP, EXP10, LN, LOG, SQR, SQRT, INT, ROUND, ABS, COS, SIN, TAN, FACT,
MOD
Short Name Scenarios

name
EXP Natural exponent If x = 1 EXP(1) = 2.7183
This function is valid for all real numbers.
EXP10 Decimal exponent If x = -3 EXP10(-3) = 0.001
LN Natural logarithm If x = 1, Ln(1) = 0
If x = 3, Ln(3) = 1.097
This function is not valid for x = 0.
LOG Decimal logarithm If x = 2, LOG(2) = 0.3010
If x =10, LOG(10) = 1
This function is not valid for x = 0.
SQR Square If x = 5.5, SQR(5.5) = 30.25
If x =10, SQR(x)= 100
This function is valid only if x > 0.
SQRT Positive square root If x =225, SQRT(225) = 15
If x =60.84, SQRT(60.84)= 7.8
INT Integer Value If x =4.57, INT(4.57) = 4
If x =4.89, INT(4.89) = 4
ROUND Round Integer Value If x =4.57, ROUND(4.57) = 4
If x =4.89, ROUND(4.89) = 5
ABS Absolute Value If x = -14.5, ABS( -14.5) = 14.5
If x =45.1, ABS(45.1) = 45
COS Cosine If x =13.5, COS(45) = 0.5949
If x =0, COS(0) = 1
SIN Sine If x =25, SIN(25) = -0.1323
If x =0, SIN(0) = 0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

name
TAN Tangential If x =0.7853, TAN(0.7853) = 1
If x =0, TAN(0) = 0
FACT Factorial If x =8, FACT(8) = 40320
This function is valid only if x > 0
MOD Modulo If x =7, n = 2 MOD(7,2) = 1
If x =8.3, n = 3.4 MOD(8.3,3.4) = 1.5
This function is valid only if x,n > 0.
Logical functions
ISNULL, ISDIV0, NOT, AND, OR, =, >, <, >=, <=, <>, LIKE, TO_BOOLEAN

name
AND Standard logical If X -> 5, Y-> 5 X AND Y ->TRUE.
AND This function is only valid for same data types.
OR Standard logical OR If X-> 1, Y->0 X OR Y -> TRUE. If X-> 0, Y->0 X OR Y
-> FALSE.
This function is only valid for same data types.
NOT Standard logical If X-> 0, NOT X ->TRUE
NOT
= = This assigns the values to variables, X= 5
This function assigns value for variables with constants and
variables.
<> <> If X-> JDK, Y->JAVA X <> Y -> FALSE.
< < If X-> 5, Y-> 7 X <> Y -> TRUE.
> > If X-> 9, Y-> 7 X > Y -> TRUE.
<= <= If X-> 5, Y-> 7 X <= Y -> TRUE.
>= >= If X-> 3, Y-> 7 X >= Y -> FALSE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

name
LIKE Like test If X-> Solaris, M-> Sol X LIKE M% -> TRUE.
Allows to perform a search based on a pattern, rather than
specifying exactly what is desired or spell out a range.
This function is only valid for same data types. The used
wildcard is %.
IsNUL Test NULL value If X-> 0 IsNUL X -> TRUE
This function is valid for Boolean Arguments.
IsDiv0 Test the dived by If X-> division by zero result IsDiv0 X -> TRUE
zero This function is only valid for real numbers.
Specific functions
NZ, NV, TDIV0, TDIV, IF, TIME_MEASURED, DYNAMICROLLUP
Short name Name Scenarios

NZ Null to Zero If x -> scalar value (other than indicator) NZ (
x ) fails.
If x -> indicator (of null value)
NZ ( x ) returns zero.
NV Null to Value If x-> indicator (of null value),v->specific
value NV ( x, v ) returns v.
If x-> indicator (not null value),v->specific
value NV ( x, v ) returns x.
TDIV Divided with a If d= 0, TDIV ( x, d, v ) returns v
test on If d<> 0, TDIV ( x, d, v ) returns x / d
Denominator
COUNT_ABOVE(x) Count values It returns the number of children objects for
above which an indicator formula is strictly above
another indicator formula.
Count_above(<children object type>', <first
indicator formula>, <second indicator
formula>)
COUNT_BELOW(x) Count values It returns the number of children objects for
below which an indicator formula is strictly below
another indicator formula.
Count_below(<children object type>', <first
indicator formula>, <second indicator
formula>)
IF If condition If t-> TRUE IF (t, v1, v2) returns v1
If t-> FALSE IF (t, v1, v2) returns v2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

HOURLY_VALUE(ind, Get indicator It returns the value of an indicator or an
h) value for hour n indicator formula at a given plain hour of a
day.
It is only available at Daily periodicity. If it is
used inside an indicator, the availability
domain is automatically updated to keep only
applicable periodicities.
Hourly_Value(<indicator formula>, <position
indicator> or constant)
TIMESHIFT(ind, n) Get indicator It returns the value of an indicator or an
value with a time indicator formula at the execution context
shift (+ / - n periodicity but with a shift in the past or the
periods) future.
Timeshift(<indicator value>, n)
DYNAMICROLLUP(ind, Perform spatial It returns the value of an indicator or an
spatialAggregation) aggregation at indicator formula with the spatial aggregation
the execution computed at the execution context periodicity
(if spatial aggregation is needed).
The creation of temporal aggregation on top of
indicator using the DynamicRollup operator is
not allowed.
DynamicRollup(<indicatorFormula>,
<spatialAggregationMethod>)
Statistical functions
The following statistical functions apply:
OFFERED
OFFERED_ERLANGC
OFFERED_POISSON
OFFERED_REQUIRED
OFFERED_REQ_ERLANGC
OFFERED_REQ_POISSON
GOS
GOS_ERLANGC
GOS_POISSON
OFFERED functions indicate the offered traffic according to the Erlang B law. The used
argument is the number of channels and GoS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Conversion functions

TO_WATT(d) Converts from dB It converts a dB (respective dBm) value into Watts
(respective dBm) to (respective mWatts).
Watts (respective TO_WATT(<indicator value>)
mWatts)
TO_DB(w) Converts from Watts It converts a Watt (respective mWatt) value into
(respective mWatts) dB(respective dBm).
to dB (respective TO_DB(<indicator value>)
dBm)
Gauss error functions

name
ERF Gauss Error ERF(<indicator value>)
Function When the results of a series of measurements are described
by a normal distribution with standard deviation and
expected value 0, then is the probability that the error
of a single measurement lies between a and +a.
ERFC Complementary ERFC(<indicator value>)=1 ERF(<indicator value>)
Error Function
To scalar functions
V_INDEX, V_MAXIMUM, V_MINIMUM, V_TOTAL, V_AVERAGE,
V_MAX_INDEX, M_MAXIMUM, M_MINIMUM, M_TOTAL, M_AVERAGE
To vector functions
VECTOR, ARRAY, REVERSE
MAXIMUM_COL
MINIMUM_COL,
TOTAL_COL,
AVERAGE _COL,
MAXIMUM_ROW,
MINIMUM_ROW,
TOTAL_ROW
AVERAGE_ROW
CUMUL
CUMUL_REVERSE,
SUMPRODUCT_COL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SUMPRODUCT_ROW
INTERVAL
MIDDLE
MIDDLE_POS
MIDDLE_LEV
V_ROUND
V_IF
M_ROW_INDEX
SUMPRODUCT_COLN
SUMPRODUCT_ROWN
To matrix functions
MATRIX, MATRIX_COL, MATRIX_ROW, ARRAY_COL, ARRAY_ROW,
V_PRODUCT, M_PRODUCT, CUMUL_COLS, CUMUL_ROWS, CUMUL_REVER-
SE_COLS, CUMUL_REVERSE_ROWS, REVERSE_COL, REVERSE_ROW,
TRANSPOSE, M_ROUND, M_IF
Short name Name Type Scenarios

+ + Vector, Matrix If Vector-> V,Matrix ->M
- - V * NULL = NULL
* * V + NULL = NULL
/ / V - NULL = NULL
V/V=V
M * NULL = NULL
M + NULL = NULL
M - NULL = NULL
M/M=M
The mathematical operation on
matrix are possible on matrices of
the same dimension. When the
mathematical operation is applied on
matrices of different dimensions,
then the output is NULL.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

AND AND Vector, Matrix If Vector-> V, Matrix ->M,
OR OR Boolean->b
NOT NOT V AND NULL = NULL
V AND b = V
M AND NULL = NULL
M AND b = M
b is a boolean expression, not
simply a boolean value.
IF If Vector, Matrix If Vector-> V1,V2, Matrix
->M1,M2, Boolean->b
IF (b,V1,V2) returns V1 if b=true
otherwise V2.
IF (b,M1,M2) returns M1 if b=true
otherwise M2.
Vector Create a vector Vector If Vector-> V, Scalar ->b, Leh of
from a scalar vector -> n Vector(b,n) -> V
Array Create a vector Vector If Array-> A, Scalar ->b, No. of
from a scalar elements-> n Array (b,n) -> A
list
Matrix Create a matrix Matrix S->Scalar, m,n ->Matrix dimension
from a scalar Matrix(S,m,n)->M
Matrix_Col Create a matrix Vector, Matrix If Vector-> V, n ->Matrix dimension
from a vector Matrix_Col(V,n)->M
Matrix_Row Create a matrix Vector, Matrix If Vector-> V, n ->Matrix dimension
from a vector Matrix_Row(V,n)->M
Array_Col Create a matrix Vector, Matrix If No. of Vector-> Vs
from a vector Array_Col(Vs)->M
list
Array_Row Create a matrix Vector, Matrix If No. of Vector-> Vs
from a vector Array_Row(Vs)->M
list
V_Index Returns the Vector If Vector-> V, S->Scalar,I->index
scalar V_Index(V,i)->S
corresponding
to the index
Maximum Returns the Vector, Matrix Maximum(V) -> S
maximum value Maximum(M) -> S
of the vector or
the matrix
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Minimum Returns the Vector, Matrix Minimum(V) -> S
minimum value Minimum(M) -> S
of the vector or
the matrix
Total Returns the sum Vector, Matrix Total(V) -> S
of all value of Total(M) -> S
the vector or the
matrix
Average Returns the Vector, Matrix Average(V) -> S
average of all Average(M) -> S
values of the
vector or the
matrix
V_Max_Index Returns the Vector V_Max_Index(v) -> i
index of the
maximum value
Maximum_Col Returns the Vector, Matrix Maximum_Col(M) -> V
maximum row
value in a
column vector
Maximum_Row Returns the Vector, Matrix Maximum_Row(M) -> V
maximum
column value in
a row vector
Minimum_Col Returns the Vector, Matrix Minimum_Col(M) -> V
minimum row
value in a
column vector
Minimum_Row Returns the Vector, Matrix Minimum_Row(M) -> V
minimum
column value in
a row vector
Total_Col Returns the sum Vector, Matrix Total_Col(M) -> V
row value in a
column vector
Total_Row Returns the sum Vector, Matrix Total_Row(M) -> V
column value in
a row vector
Average_Col Returns the Vector, Matrix Average_Col(M) -> V
average row
value in a
column vector
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Average_Row Returns the Vector, Matrix Average_Row(M) -> V
average column
value in a row
vector
V_Product Returns the Vector, Matrix V_Product(M) -> V
vector product
M_Product Returns the Vector, Matrix M_Product(M) -> V
matrix product
Cumul Cumul the Vector Cumul(V) -> V
values in the
vector
(increase)
Cumul_Cols Cumul the row Matrix Cumul_Cols(M) -> M
values in the
matrix
(increase)
Cumul_Rows Cumul the Matrix Cumul_Rows(M) -> M
column values
in the matrix
(increase)
Cumul_Reverse Cumul the Matrix Cumul_Reverse(V) -> V
values in the
vector
(decrease)
Cumul_Reverse_ Cumul the row Matrix Cumul_Reverse_Cols(M) -> M
Cols values in the
matrix
(decrease)
Cumul_Reverse_ Cumul the Matrix Cumul_Reverse_Rows(M) -> M
Rows column values
in the matrix
(decrease)
SumProduct_Col Sum of the Vector, Matrix SumProduct_Col(M,V) -> V
product of a
matrix with a
row (column in
result)
SumProduct_Row Sum of product Vector, Matrix SumProduct_Row(M,V) -> V
of matrix row
(column in
result)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

SumProduct_ColN Sum of the Vector, Matrix SumProduct_ColN(M) -> V
product of a
matrix with a
column (row in
result)
SumProduct_ Sum of product Vector, Matrix SumProduct_RowN(M) -> V
RowN of matrix
column (row in
result)
Interval Returns the Vector Interval(V) -> V
interval between
two continues
values
Middle Returns the Vector Middle(V) -> V
middle of two
continues values
Middle_POS Returns the Vector Middle_POS(V) -> V
'positive' middle
of two
continues values
Middle_LEV Returns the Vector Middle_LEV(V) -> V
'level' middle of
two continues
values
Round Returns the Vector, Matrix Round(V) -> V
round of value Round(M) -> M
in vector or
matrix
Round_Sup Returns the Vector, Matrix Round_Sup (V) -> V
superior round Round_Sup (M) -> M
of value in
vector or matrix
Round_Inf Returns the Vector, Matrix Round_Inf(V) -> V
inferior round Round_Inf (M) -> M
of value in
vector or matrix
Reverse Returns the Vector Reverse(V) -> V
reverse vector
Reverse_Col Returns the Matrix Reverse_Col(M) -> M
reverse row
matrix
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reverse_Row Returns the Matrix Reverse_Row(M) -> M
reverse column
matrix
Transpose Returns the Matrix Transpose(M) -> M
transpose matrix
Aggregation functions

COUNT Count Counts the number of present values
SUM Sum Sums the present values
AVG Average Computes the average of the present values
MAX Maximum Returns the maximum of the present values
MIN Minimum Returns the minimum of the present values
DBAVG Average for dB / Computes the average value of the present values in
dBm values Db or Dbm (managing an intermediate conversion to
Watts or mWatts)
MEDIAN Median Computes the median of the present values
STDDEV Standard Deviation Computes the standard deviation of the present values
VARIANCE Variance Computes the variance of the present values
PERCEN- Percentile Computes the k-percentile of the present values. k must
TILE(k) be provided (0-100) as a part of the indicator
definition.
COUNT_ Count interpolated It returns the missing data ratio as consolidated value.
MISSING elements The resulting value is divided by 24 at the Daily
periodicity, by 7 at the Weekly periodicity and by the
number of days for the month at Monthly periodicity.
It is only allowed for indicators using the count present
consolidation method.
It is supported only for the temporal aggregations.
COUNT_ Count reported It sum the duration of each available data and compute
PRESENT elements the ratio with the display period to get the consolidated
value. The resulting value is divided by 24 at the Daily
periodicity, by 7 at the Weekly periodicity and by the
number of days for the month at Monthly periodicity.
It is only allowed for indicators using the count
missing consolidation method.
It is supported only for the temporal aggregations.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Topology complex functions
To compute an indicator the indicators of a given topology object are generally used. This
topology object corresponds to the one selected by the user. For some complex indicators,
this basic behavior is not applicable and the formula may request to use indicators coming
from related objects. MUSE supports to use indicators coming from objects that are above
or below the current object inside the topology and part of the used indicator availability
domain.
Function Description
ObjSupp(indicator or formula) This function allows retrieving the indicator
value on the direct upper object (belonging to
the availability domain). If there is no upper
objects, then an empty result is returned.
ObjSuppSpecific(indicator or formula, object This function allows retrieving the indicator
type) value on an upper object (belonging to the
availability domain) of a given type.
ObjInf(indicator or formula, aggregation type) This function returns an aggregated value
computed from indicators on the object zone
contained objects.
ObjSelected(indicator or formula, relation This function allows retrieving the indicator
path) value on a relatedobject (belonging to the
availability domain).
ObjSelection This function selects an indicator or a formula
among three according the object type:
formulaB: Indicator or formula used for
object types below the specific object type
formulaE: Indicator or formula used for
object type equal to the specific object
type
formulaA: Indicator or formula used for
object types above the specific object type
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Topology counting indicators Those indicators are composed of a single
function call, any of the three functions below
can be used:
OBJECT_COUNT(<object_type>)
CHILDREN_COUNT(<children_type>)
CHILDREN_COUNT()
The indicators defined using the
OBJECT_COUNT function are by default
available on every object type and daily levels
because OBJECT_COUNT simply returns the
number of objects for a given type at a given
date.
CHILDREN_COUNT functions are available
only on every object type and daily levels
because they return the number of children for
a given object on a given date.
Their spatial aggregation method is SUM,
interpolation method is PREVIOUS.
Log counting indicators A single function call is used:
LOG_COUNT(<filtering expression>').
LOG_COUNT function are available on every
object type and daily levels because
LOG_COUNT simply returns the number of
logs matching a filter on a given date. Their
spatial aggregation method is SUM,
interpolation method is PADDING(0).
The function call: LOG_COUNT_
REC('<object type>',<filtering expression>'),
counts log occurrences over a period
recursively on children and parents.
The functions LOG_COUNT and
LOG_COUNT_REC cannot be used in
WiMAX.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm counting indicators The function call: ALARM_
COUNT(<filtering expression>'), allows
counting active alarms over a period.
The indicators - defined using the
ALARM_COUNT function - are available on
every object type and daily levels because
ALARM_COUNT simply returns the number
of alarms matching a filter on a given date.
Such an indicator returns information about
the number of active alarms for each period
inside a time interval.
The filtering expression allows filtering on:
The object type
The event type
The severity
The probable cause
The specific problem
The friendly name.
Their spatial aggregation method is SUM,
interpolation method is PADDING(0).
The function call: ALARM_COUNT_
R(<filtering expression>'), allows counting
raised alarms over a period.
The function call: ALARM_COUNT_
counts alarm occurrences over a period
recursively on objects, children and parents.
The function call: ALARM_COUNT_R_
counts alarm occurrences over a period (raised
alarms only) recursively on objects, children
and parents.
The functions ALARM_COUNT,
ALARM_COUNT_R, ALARM_COUNT_
REC and ALARM_COUNT_R_REC cannot
be used in WiMAX.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm outage indicator Similar to alarm counting indicators but it
sums the alarm outage time (clear time event
time) instead of simply counting alarms.
The function call: ALARM_
OUTAGE(<filtering expression>'), allows
computing the disturbance (number of
seconds) caused by the active alarms.
The function call:ALARM_OUTAGE_
R(<filtering expression>'), allows computing
the disturbance (number of seconds) caused by
the raised alarms.
The function call:ALARM_OUTAGE_
estimates alarm outage over a period
recursively on objects, children and parents.
The function call:ALARM_OUTAGE_R_
estimates alarm outage over a period (raised
alarms only) recursively on objects, children
and parents.
The functions ALARM_OUTAGE,
ALARM_OUTAGE_R, ALARM_OUTAGE_
REC and ALARM_OUTAGE_R_REC cannot
be used in WiMAX.
Alarm Cut-off indicators -
For boolean expressions:

Parenthesis: ( , ) have to be used
Braces: { , } are not supported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-1: Display and manage counter properties and
descriptions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 9-1: Display and manage counter properties and

descriptions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do

object.
should appear).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on .
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
descriptions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
2. Click on .

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
The following figures provide an example of the Counter Properties window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
descriptions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
descriptions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
General parameters
Parameter Description Mandatory Read-Only

Name
Reference Unique reference of the counter Yes Yes
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
descriptions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name
Supported Name - The release name of the counter Yes Yes
Release Technology - The release technology of
Information the counter
Supplier - The release supplier of the
counter
Version - The supported release version
Release description - The supported
release description.
Description Description of the counter Yes Yes
Source Source network object associated with Yes Yes
Network the counter.
Object
Collecting Type of network object reporting the Yes Yes
Network counter
Object
PM Type Data Type (type 110, 180) must match Yes Yes
with indicator PM Type
Value Type Type of counter value (integer, float, Yes Yes
boolean, string)
Counter Type Type of counter (Scalar, Vector, Matrix, Yes Yes
Axis)
Unit Unit of the counter (%, db, Events, ...) Yes Yes
Precision Precision of the value at the display. Yes Yes
Must be power of 10
Default Default permanent reporting period Yes Yes
Reporting
Period
Algorithm Algorithm type describes the method Yes Yes
Type used to compute the counter
(asynchronous cumulative,
synchronous cumulative, sampling, ...)
Algorithm Algorithm info gives details on the Yes Yes
Info algorithm used for counter calculation
Sampling Value of the sampling period when the Yes Yes
Period algorithm type is sampling
Load map Counter value = PM value * constant. Yes Yes
formula This field describes the value of the
constant, (by default the constant is 1).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
descriptions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name
Consolidation Type of normalization (Sum, Average, Yes Yes
method Max, Min, ...)
Interpolation Default type of interpolation (No, Zero, Yes Yes
method (First, linear, ...)
Second)
Domain Domain name of the counter Yes Yes
Name
Families Table of associated family and No Yes
sub-families of the counter:
Family - The family to which this
counter belongs
Sub-Family Depth 1 - The
sub-family to which this counter
belongs
sub-sub-family to which this
counter belongs
sub-sub-sub-family to which this
counter belongs
sub-sub-sub-sub-family to which
this counter belongs.
Dictionary Name - Name of the counter dictionary Yes Yes
Information Version - Version of the counter
dictionary
Date - Publishing Date of the counter
dictionary
Auth - Author of the counter dictionary
Description - Description of the counter
dictionary.
Vector counter additional parameters

Name
Size Max size of the vector. Yes Yes
Axis Counter The axis counter reference name. Yes Yes
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
descriptions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Matrix counter additional parameters

Name
Size (X) Max size of the X for the matrix. Yes Yes
Size (Y) Max size of the Y for the matrix. Yes Yes
X Axis The X axis counter reference name Yes Yes
Counter
Y Axis The Y axis counter reference name Yes Yes
Counter
Axis counter additional parameters

Name
Size Max size of the axis No Yes
Dependent Indicates whether the column displayed No Yes
Columns in HMI must be attached or not.
First Column Informs the HMI whether the first No Yes
Boundary column includes the first value of the
Included axis indicator or not.
Last Column Informs the HMI whether the last No Yes
Boundary column includes the last value of the
Included axis indicator or not.
Previous Informs the HMI whether the last value No Yes
Column of the previous column is included or
Boundary not.
Included
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-2: Display and manage indicator properties and
descriptions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 9-2: Display and manage indicator properties and

descriptions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do

object.
should appear).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on .
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
descriptions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
2. Click on .

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
The following figures provide an example of the Indicator Properties window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
descriptions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
descriptions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
General parameters
Parameter Name Description Mandatory Read-Only

Name Name of the indicator Yes Yes
For stored and calculated temporal
aggregations, the Name parameter
is empty if it is the same as the
telecom indicator name.
Reference Unique reference of the indicator Yes Yes
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
descriptions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Owner Operator who created the indicator Yes Yes
Description Description of the indicator Yes Yes
Upper is fault Flag for quality of indicator Yes Yes
This flag indicates whether the
quality is better when the indicator
value is higher or the quality is better
when the indicator value is lower.
Value Type Indicator value type (integer, float, Yes Yes
Boolean, string)
Indicator Type Indicator type (Scalar, Vector, Yes Yes
Matrix, Axis)
Access Right Accessibility of the indicator (Public Yes Yes
or Private)
Unit Unit of the indicator Yes Yes
Temporary Whether the indicator is a temporary Yes Yes
indicator or not.
If the Temporary check box is
selected, then the indicator is
removed from NPO when its owner
exits from its session.
Indicator Formula Formula to calculate the indicator Yes
Each indicator involved in the
formula is a hyperlink - you can click
on it to display the property window
of this indicator. You can decide to
display the indicator properties in the
same window or in a new window
(See the description of Default
behavior for hyperlinks, from Table
26-1, General user preferences
parameters (p. 26-4)).
This parameter is available only for
calculated indicators.
Basic Indicator The corresponding indicator formula Yes
Formula translated with basic indicators
Each of the basic indicator present in
the formula is represented as a
hyperlink. Click on the hyperlink to
display the property window of the
corresponding basic indicator.
This parameter is available only for
calculated indicators.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
descriptions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Dictionary Name - Name of the indicator Yes
Information dictionary.
Version - Version of the indicator
dictionary.
Date - Publishing Date of the
Author - Author of the indicator
dictionary.
Description - Description of the
Trend Prediction Whether Trend Prediction is Yes, when the Yes
Supported supported or not indicator is a
scalar type
only.
Precision Precision of the value. Must be a Yes Yes
power of 10
Visible TRUE if the indicator is visible in Yes Yes
the Analysis Desktop
Reliability Indicator Name of the indicator used as Yes Yes
reliability indicator
For more information, refer to
Reliability (p. 9-28).
Sampling Indicator Name of the indicator used as Yes Yes
sampling indicator
For more information, refer to
Threshold and sampling (p. 9-28).
Families Table of associated family and No Yes
sub-families of the indicator:
Family - The family to which
this indicator belongs
sub-family to which this
indicator belongs
sub-sub-family to which this
indicator belongs
sub-sub-sub-family to which this
indicator belongs
sub-sub-sub-sub-family to which
this indicator belongs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
descriptions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Availability Domain Availability Domain of the indicator. Yes Yes
It is the list of object type at each
temporal level where the indicator is
available.
Threshold and A graphic representing the threshold Yes Yes
Severity Graph and severity
Threshold Values Threshold values of the indicator for No No
each sensitivity:
Low
Medium
High.
Sampling Values Sampling values of the indicator for No No
each sensitivity:
Low
Medium
High.
Basic indicator additional parameters

Name
First Type of interpolation. Yes Yes
Interpolation
Method
First Padding Provide the padding value if the first No Yes
Value interpolation method is Padding
Supports A flag specifying if interpolation change is Yes Yes
Dynamic allowed or not.
Interpolation
Second Type of interpolation. No Yes
Interpolation
Method
Second Provide the padding value if the second No Yes
Padding interpolation method is Padding
Value
Group Name of the indicator group. Yes Yes
Consolida- Consolidation method (sum, Count, Yes Yes
tion Method Average, Min, Max, None).
Spatial Operation used to perform the spatial Yes Yes
Aggregation aggregation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
descriptions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name
Supported Technology - The release technology of the Yes Yes
Release indicator.
Information Supplier - The release supplier of the Yes Yes
(Multiple indicator.
information
in the case of Name - The release name of the indicator. Yes Yes
Basic Version - The supported release version. Yes Yes
Indicators)
Description - The supported release Yes Yes
description.
Aggregation on loading - Method to be No Yes
used to perform spatial aggregation to n+1
level at loading time.
Possible values:
Sum
Avg
Count
Min
Max
None (default).
When loading time aggregation is used for
an indicator, that indicator is placed in a
derived indicator group (same name +
_sal).
Indicator formula defined with counters. Yes Yes
Stored and calculated temporal aggregations additional common parameters

Name
Reference Reference extension of the temporal No No
Extension aggregation. This extension has to be
merged with the reference of the telecom
indicator.
Description Description of the temporal aggregation. No Yes
Extension This description replaces the description
of the telecom indicator.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
descriptions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Stored temporal aggregations additional parameters

Name
Group Group to which the indicator belongs. Yes Yes
Temporal Function used to perform temporal Yes Yes
Aggregation aggregation (from Normalized table to
Method Daily, or weekly or Monthly).
Relevant All hours or working hours. By default the Yes No
Hour value is All hours. Allow computing
consolidation only for relevant hours.
Busy Hour Long name of the indicator used as No No
Indicator reference indicator to compute the busy
hour.
Calculated temporal aggregation additional parameters

Name
Formula Formula (of telecom indicators basic, Yes No
calculated, temporal aggregation long
names) used to compute the temporal
aggregation of a calculated indicator.
Axis indicator additional parameters

Name
Size Maximum size Yes Yes
Display Whether the axis indicator is to be Yes Yes
displayed as label as it is
First Value First value of the axis indicator Yes Yes
Possible values:
Measured (default value)
Infinity
None
Value
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
descriptions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name
Last Value Last value of the axis indicator Yes Yes
Possible values:
Measured (default value)
Infinity
None
Value
Dependent Indicates whether the displayed columns Yes No
Columns must be attached or not.
FirstColumn Informs whether the first column includes Yes No
BoundaryIn- the first value of the axis indicator or not.
cluded Not present if FirstValue is INFINITY or
NONE.
LastColumn Informs whether the last column includes Yes No
BoundaryIn- the last value of the axis indicator or not.
cluded Not present if LastValue is INFINITY or
NONE.
PreviousCol- Informs whether the last value of the Yes No
umn previous column is included or not.
BoundaryIn-
cluded
Vector indicator additional parameters

Name
Size Maximum size Yes Yes
Axis Associated axis indicator long name Yes Yes
indicator
Matrix indicator additional parameters

Name
Size (x * y) Maximum x and y axis size Yes Yes
Axis X Axis Indicator for X Axis Yes Yes
Axis Y Axis Indicator for Y Axis Yes Yes
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-3: Propagate counters and indicators
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 9-3: Propagate counters and indicators

You can propagate as follows.
Counters to: Indicators This retrieves all indicators

using, directly or indirectly,
the selected counters in their
formula.
Indicators to: Counter This retrieves all used
counters, directly or
indirectly, in the selected
indicators formula.
View Template This retrieves all view
templates using the selected
indicators in their tabular list.
Diagnosis This retrieves all diagnosis for
which the indicator is their
trigger.
THL This retrieves all Thematic
Layers Templates referencing
the selected indicators.
Use the following procedure to propagate the selected item to the corresponding function
tree.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click on the item to propagate.

Result: If it is a leaf node, it is selected. If it is a nonleaf node, all items under that
node are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Drag the selected item and drop it to required function tab. The mouse pointer changes to
.
Result: Depending on how the parameter Display time before a tab is raised and
made active is set as a user preference, the target counter tree:
Is automatically displayed
You have to switch to the target counter tree to view it.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-4: Create busy hour reference indicator
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 9-4: Create busy hour reference indicator

The following procedure shows how to create a busy hour reference indicator with a
maximum stored temporal aggregation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Open the Indicator Editor window; refer to Procedure 9-9.1: Open indicator editor
(p. 9-74).
Result: The Indicator Editor window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If Then
You want to create an indicator Click on Create.
The Indicator Type popup window opens.
In the Indicator Type window, select the type of the
indicator and click on OK.
You want to copy an indicator Click on Copy.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Define the Reference and Name.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check Calculated.
Result: The parameter is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Uncheck Temporary Indicator to enable the Stored option from the New Temporal
Aggregation panel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click on New Temporal Aggregation.

Result: A popup window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Create a MAX stored temporal aggregation for the calculated reference indicator:
Check the Stored radio button
For the Temporal Aggregation Method, select Maximum.
Note: This reference indicator can be used to create BH stored temporal aggregations
at Daily, Weekly, Monthly periodicities for any kind of indicator (stored or
calculated).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-4: Create busy hour reference indicator
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The stored temporal aggregation for the calculated reference indicator is
defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Type the Reference (three characters maximum) and the full Name.
Note: It is recommended to use MAX as Reference value.
Result: The Reference and Name are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Select the Group for spatial aggregation.

Result: The Group is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Define the Unit, Precision and Percentage as adequate for display.

Note: The Presentation check box may be unchecked in particular if the indicator is
copied from an existing indicator. In this case, the indicator with the usual aggregation
(not BH) does not appear in indicators trees.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Click on Apply.
Result: The indicator with Busy Hour will be available the next day, after the
automatic consolidation of the day.
Note: If the BH reference indicator takes several times the same value during the
day, the first one is considered as the Busy Hour.
For more information refer to Procedure 9-9.2: Create indicator (p. 9-75) and Busy
hour (p. 9-25).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-5: Create indicator value at busy hour
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 9-5: Create indicator value at busy hour

The following procedure shows how to create a telecom indicator with a busy hour stored
temporal aggregation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Open the Indicator Editor window; refer to Procedure 9-9.1: Open indicator editor
(p. 9-74).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If Then
You want to create an indicator Click on Create.
The Indicator Type popup window opens.
In the Indicator Type window, select the type of the
indicator and click on OK.
You want to copy an indicator Click on Copy.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Define the Reference and Name.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check Calculated.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Uncheck Temporary Indicator to enable the Stored option from the New Temporal
Aggregation panel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click on New Temporal Aggregation.

Result: A popup window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Create a BH stored temporal aggregation for the calculated reference indicator:

Check the Stored radio button
For the Temporal Aggregation Method, select BusyHour.
Note: This reference indicator can be used to create BH stored temporal aggregations
at Daily, Weekly, Monthly periodicities for any kind of indicator (stored or
calculated).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-5: Create indicator value at busy hour
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The stored temporal aggregation for the calculated reference indicator is
defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Type the Reference (three characters maximum) and the full Name.
Note: It is recommended to use BH as Reference value.
Result: The Reference and Name are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Select the Group for spatial aggregation.

Result: The Group is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Define the Unit, Precision and Percentage as adequate for display.

Note: The Presentation check box may be unchecked in particular if the indicator is
copied from an existing indicator. In this case, the indicator with the usual aggregation
(not BH) does not appear in indicators trees.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Declare an indicator reference containing a MAX Temporal Aggregation indicator in the

Busy Hour Indicator (refer to Procedure 9-4: Create busy hour reference indicator
(p. 9-64)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Click on Apply.
Result: The indicator with Busy Hour will be available the next day, after the
automatic consolidation of the day.
Note: If the BH reference indicator takes several times the same value during the
day, the first one is considered as the Busy Hour.
For more information refer to Procedure 9-9.2: Create indicator (p. 9-75) and Busy
hour (p. 9-25).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-6: Display counter and indicator values
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 9-6: Display counter and indicator values

Indicators are classified as:
Basic / calculated indicators (p. 9-3)
Scalar / vector / matrix / axis indicators (p. 9-6).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the counter or indicator.

Result: The required counter or indicator is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the appropriate network object(s).

Result: The appropriate network object(s) are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Execute the selected items in a view.

Result: The associated values are displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-7: Display type 110 counters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 9-7: Display type 110 counters

Note: This section is applicable only for GSM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the appropriate cell.

Result: The cell is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right click on the selected cell and select Display type 110 counters....
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Properties page of the PM 110 type counters related to the selected cell
appears.
Parameter Name Description Mandatory Read-only

Mode Name Name of the Mode Yes Yes
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter Name Description Mandatory Read-only

Cell ID The ID of the cell Yes Yes
provided in the URL
(<MCC>-<MNC>-
<LAC>-<CI>)
Cell Label Label of the cell Yes Yes
Start Time Start time of the PM Yes Yes
counter
End Time End time of the PM Yes Yes
counter
Execution Table This table contains - -
the execution results
for an execute view
of all the counters
related to the
selected cell and its
corresponding mode
network objects for
which the execution
is carried out.
The following
parameters compose
the Execution Table:
Counter
Name -
Name of the
Counters for
the Selected
network
object
Long Name
- Long name
of the
counter
Network
object - The
network
objects of
the selected
mode related
to the
selected cell.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-8: Find indicator from counter
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 9-8: Find indicator from counter

To find an indicator that refers only to the chosen counter from its formula, proceed with
the following steps. To retrieve all the indicators which contain in their formula, directly
or indirectly, a chosen counter, refer to Procedure 9-3: Propagate counters and
indicators (p. 9-63).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the indicator tree, right click and select Find Indicator from Counter.
Result: The Search Indicator by Counter Name window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Type the full reference name of the counter by which the indicator tree is searched, then
click on Search.
Result: If any node is already selected in the indicator tree when the search is
triggered, then the first indicator after the selected node referring only to the specified
counter in its formula, is selected in the indicator tree.
If no node is already selected in the indicator tree when this search is triggered, then
the first indicator referring only to the specified counter in its formula, is selected in
the indicator tree.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-9: Use indicator editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 9-9: Use indicator editor

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 9-9.1: Open indicator editor (p. 9-74).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 9-9.2: Create indicator (p. 9-75).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 9-9.3: Create customer indicator by copy (p. 9-84).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Procedure 9-9.4: Edit customer indicator (p. 9-85).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Procedure 9-9.5: Edit indicator threshold / sampling values (p. 9-86).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Procedure 9-9.6: Delete indicator (p. 9-87).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Procedure 9-9.7: Export indicator (p. 9-88).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Procedure 9-9.8: Continue in background option (p. 9-89).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-9.1: Open indicator editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 9-9.1: Open indicator editor

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

In the Alcatel-Lucent Analysis Desktop window, click on the , OR
In the Alcatel-Lucent Analysis Desktop window, in the right frame, in the Indicator
tab, right click on any displayed indicator and select Indicator, OR
In the Analysis Desktop main window, select Data -> Indicators, OR

Press Ctrl+N.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-9.2: Create indicator
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 9-9.2: Create indicator

Note: Alcatel-Lucent recommendation is to create only calculated indicators.
The system proposes by default a calculated indicator, and the operator must
explicitly override the default to create a basic indicator.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Indicator Editor window, click on .

Result: The Indicator Type window opens.
On the right panel, the system shows:
Available indicators sorted by structure type and then by family, both visible and
non-visible can be selected
Available parameters sorted by family / sub-family
Available counters
Available operators which can be used to define a formula.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the appropriate Indicator Type (Scalar, Vector, Matrix, Axis), then click on
OK, OR
Double click on the appropriate Indicator Type.
Result: The property editor appears with default values and editable fields.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Field Name Description Default Value

Reference Reference of the indicator to be created.
For Presentation Indicator, it is the reference of the
telecom indicator.
For Temporal Aggregation, it is Indicator.Reference
+ TemporalAggregation.ReferenceExtension
Name Name of the indicator to be created.
Dictionary Name of the dictionary to which the indicator
belongs.
The dictionary is identified by the name and the
owner. System and customer dictionary may share
the same name.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Field Name Description Default Value

Owner User who is creating the indicator. The username
This field is read-only you logged in
the NPO
application.
Description Text box to be filled in with operator description for
the current indicator.
Severity Vs Value Flag indicating whether the quality is better when The flag is set to
the indicator value is higher or the opposite (quality indicate the
is better when the value is lower) quality is better
when the
indicator value is
higher
Value Type Indicator value type: Float
Float - corresponding to 32 bit floating point
number
Integer - the maximum number of digit is 12
Boolean - only for display, not calculation.
The conversion is done in the following way:
From Float to Integer: round to the nearest value
From Float to Boolean: 0 is converted to
FALSE, and everything else is converted to
TRUE.
Access Rights Access rights for Public or Private Private.
Unit Indicator value measurement unit.
Select from the dropdown list the appropriate unit,
based on the units of the already present indicators.
The administrator can also create his own units.
The indicator is multiplied by 100 if % unit is used.
For the indicator of Scalar type, you can choose the Supports Trend Prediction option. For
more information regarding the Trend Prediction option, refer to Trend predictions
(p. 3-30).
Result: The telecom parameters of the indicator are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Create a Calculated Indicator:

Click on the Calculated radio button
In the Formula field, type the formula to use.
To do so, drag from the right panel the appropriate indicators and the necessary
operators / functions (refer to Indicator formula operands (p. 9-30)), and drop them
in the Formula field.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on Check Formula to verify the typed formula.

If it is incorrect, an error message appears indicating the cause of the error: syntax
error, unknown formula and / or indicators. Correct it until it is valid.
To make this calculated indicator a temporary one, select Temporary Indicator, if not
already selected. By default, the Temporary Indicator option is checked, but its
default value can be modified from the User Preferences -> General window.
Temporary Indicators can only be private. They have a life-duration limited to the
current user session, and are automatically deleted when the Analysis Desktop is
stopped.
In case the calculated indicator has stored temporal aggregations, then the indicator
cannot be converted to a temporary indicator.
Result: The parameters of the calculated indicator are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Note: Creation of stored indicator by 2 different users on the same time is not
possible.
Create a Basic (Stored) Indicator:
Click on the Basic (Stored) radio button.
The system checks if the maximum number of customer stored indicators is reached.
If yes, the operation is rejected; if no, you can continue.
Add the first and second interpolation methods. If Padding is selected, add the
padding number in the Pad Value field
Choose to have (or not) dynamic interpolation, using the
Support Dynamic Interpolation button. Refer to Interpolation (p. 3-27) and
Views / reports user preferences (p. 26-5).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Add the appropriate Consolidation Method, by choosing one of the following: Sum,
Count, Average, Maximum, Minimum, COUNT_PRESENT, COUNT_MISSING
Add the appropriate Spatial Aggregation, by choosing one of the following: Sum,
Count, Average, Maximum, Minimum, DBAVG, MEDIAN, STDDEV, VARIANCE,
PERCENTILE, None
Add an indicator group.
You can either:
Select a predefined compatible group (with the same PM type, source, and
collecting network element) from the dropdown list group
The predefined dropdown list contains only the groups with the spatial
aggregation path which includes the source network object(s) of the counter used
in the formula, in a hierarchical order.
Create your own group:
Click on Add Group. The Add Group window opens.
Type the appropriate indicator group name.
Select the Spatial Aggregation Path from the dropdown list, which includes the
object types of the source network objects of the counters used in the formula.
Click on OK to associate the spatial aggregation path with the newly created
indicator group.
Check Daily Group check box if you want the groups to be daily. The Availability
Domain selected for the group in the Presentation Indicator panel does not
contain any H selected.
You must add at least one and a maximum of five Indicator Formulas:
Choose the Technology, Supplier, Release, Spatial Aggregation, then add the
indicator formula in the Formula field. See Basic indicators (p. 9-3) for the
allowed elements in formula.
To check the validity of a basic indicator formula, select the formula row, right
click on it and select Check Formula.
If it is incorrect, an error message appears indicating the cause of the error: syntax
error, unknown formula and / or indicators. Correct it until it is valid.
If a division by zero occurs, then a NULL value is put in the database.
Basic Indicators can have multiple formulae associated per technology. Depending
on the number of available technologies, formulas can be added.
Right click on the Formula field and select Add. This adds a row at the end of the
table for indicator formula.
To remove a row in the Formula field, right click on it and select Remove.
Result: The parameters of the basic indicator are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If required, select the Presentation check box and add an associated presentation
indicator (it is possible to perform this step only once, this is the default choice for a
calculated indicator).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Presentation is:
In the case of basic indicators, set as unchecked and one stored temporal indicator is
added
In the case of calculated indicators, added with no temporal indicators.
Perform the following:
1. Choose the unit, and the precision to which the indicator be rounded up.
2. Choose a Percentage display (or not).
3. Choose whether the presentation indicator is Visible (or not).
4. Add a reliability indicator.
5. The system computes and displays the availability domain. If necessary, deselect
some part of it, but ensure it is not empty. Also, you can select/unselect all
periodicities of a row or all object types of a column, by clicking on the column / row
header.
Result: The parameters of the presentation indicator are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 If required, add a Temporal Aggregation by clicking on New Temporal Aggregation (this

step can be done several times, and it is the default choice for a basic indicator).
Enter the following parameters:

Type the Reference Extension and Name of the temporal aggregation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Name field may be left empty if there is only one temporal aggregation and no
presentation; in this case the temporal aggregation appears with the same name as the
indicator.
Type the Description Extension
Choose the unit, and the precision to which the indicator be rounded up
Choose a Percentage display (or not)
Choose whether the Temporal Aggregation is Visible (or not)
Select between Stored and Calculated temporal aggregation. The default choice is
calculated.
For stored temporal aggregation, the system checks whether the maximum number of
customer stored indicators is reached (for stored aggregation only)
If yes, the operation is rejected; if no, perform the following:
Choose a temporal aggregation function
To create a busy hour reference indicator with a maximum stored temporal
aggregation, refer to Procedure 9-4: Create busy hour reference indicator
(p. 9-64).
Choose the relevant hours for the aggregation: all hours or just working hours
If required, add a reliability indicator
In case you choose as reliability indicator a system indicator, backward
compatibility will not be supported.
Add an indicator group. Perform one of the following options.
Select a predefined compatible group With the same PM type, and collecting
network element, from the dropdown list
group.
The predefined dropdown list contains
only the groups with the spatial
aggregation path which includes the
source network object(s) of the counter
used in the formula, in a hierarchical
order.
Create your own group Click on Add Group.
The Add Group window opens.
Type the appropriate indicator group
name.
Select the Spatial Aggregation Path from
the dropdown list, which includes the
object types of the source network objects
of the counters used in the formula.
Click on OK to associate the spatial
aggregation path with the newly created
indicator group.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For calculated temporal aggregation, perform the following:
Add a formula that calculates the indicator. The same possibilities exist as for the
formula of calculated indicator.
If required, add a reliability indicator.
The system computes the availability domain. If necessary, deselect some parts of
it, but ensure it is not empty. Also, you can select/unselect all periodicities of a
row or all object types of a column, by clicking on the column / row header.
Result: The parameters for the temporal aggregation of the indicator are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 If required, add the appropriate Families.

An indicator can belong to a family and sub-family hierarchy. Up to four depths of
sub-family are currently supported. An indicator can belong to more than one family and
it is also possible that the indicator does not belong to any family. Such indicators are
visible only to the administrator and the owner.
Select or type a family and subsequently the sub-families of the family are listed. The
same behavior is followed for all four levels of sub-families.
To add a new family, right click on an existing family, and select Add Family. A new row
is created and you can select from the list, or type the appropriate new family.
To remove an existing family, right click on an existing family, and select Remove
Family. The row is deleted from the Families table.
Result: The indicator families and sub-families are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 If required, add Threshold and Sampling.

The following configurations are possible:
Both threshold and sampling are available
Either threshold or sampling is available
Neither threshold nor sampling is available.
When thresholds are enabled:
The thresholds / sampling table appears with thresholds columns, and you can enter
the values for each severity
The threshold graph appears as per Severity vs Value field.
When changing the severity value, its associated image (Severity Graph and
Threshold Graph) is also be changed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When sampling is enabled:

The thresholds / sampling table appears with the sampling column and you can enter
the values for each severity
The Sampling Indicator field appears and you can add the sampling indicator for
sampling
Indicators can be dragged and dropped into the Sampling Indicator field.
Result: The parameters for the thresholds and sampling of the indicator are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Click on to save changes.

Result: The Analysis Desktop verifies all mandatory parameters, checks the formula
syntax, and checks that the availability domain is not empty.
When all verified data is correct, a confirmation message asks whether the indicator is
to be saved or not.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Click on Yes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: A progress window appears and the Continue in Background button is
available, refer to Procedure 9-9.8: Continue in background option (p. 9-89).
The indicator is created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-9.3: Create customer indicator by copy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 9-9.3: Create customer indicator by copy

Indicators that are referencing at least one hidden indicator (no presentation / no temporal
aggregation) cannot be copied.
Laser indicators cannot be created by copy.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Indicator Editor window, select the indicator from which to create a copy.
Result: The indicator is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on .
Result: The Indicator Properties panel appears with a default name and editable
properties panel.
The name of the copied indicator respects the <oldname>_copy_n format, where n
is a number.
To have a new name instead of <oldname>_copy_n, you have to modify the name
in temporal aggregation indicator panel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Update all required editable fields.

For reliability indicator, refer to Procedure 9-9.2: Create indicator (p. 9-75).
Result: The fields are edited.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on .
Result: A confirmation message appears, asking if you want to create the indicator.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on Yes.
The customer indicator is created by copy.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-9.4: Edit customer indicator
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 9-9.4: Edit customer indicator

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Indicator Editor window, select the indicator to modify.

For reliability indicator, refer to Procedure 9-9.2: Create indicator (p. 9-75).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on
Result: The Indicator Properties panel appears with editable fields except for the
name.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Modify the fields as required.

To update the Availability Domain:
Click first on Check Formula. This recomputes the Availability Domain and sets its
default values.
Update the appropriate values by deselecting the unnecessary parts. Also, you can
select/unselect all periodicities of a row or all object types of a column, by clicking on
the column / row header.
Result: The fields are modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on .
Result: A confirmation message appears, asking if you want to create the indicator.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on Yes.
The customer indicator is edited.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-9.5: Edit indicator threshold / sampling values
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 9-9.5: Edit indicator threshold / sampling values

The threshold / sampling values can be modified for system and customer indicators of
scalar type.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Indicator Editor window, select the indicator to modify.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on
Result: The current threshold and sampling values along with other indicator
properties are displayed in the Threshold & Sampling panel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Modify as required the sensitivity of the threshold / sampling values.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on .
Result: The modified indicator threshold / sampling value parameters are updated.
The modified threshold / sampling values are stored in the customer indicator
dictionary.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-9.6: Delete indicator
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 9-9.6: Delete indicator

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the indicator.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

In the Indicator Editor window, click on , OR
In the Alcatel-Lucent Analysis Desktop window, from the menu bar, select Edit ->
Delete, OR
Press Delete on the keyboard.
Result: The indicator is ready to be deleted.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on OK to confirm the deletion.

Result: The confirmation of deletion checks that the indicator is not referenced by
another indicator, such as in the formula of another indicator, or as a Sampling,
Reliability, Axis, or Busy Hour Indicator for another indicator, or is a part of an
existing view template.
The indicator is deleted.
Note: If the operation takes more then 2 seconds, a progress window appears and the
Continue in Background button is available, refer to Procedure 9-9.8: Continue in
background option (p. 9-89).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-9.7: Export indicator
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 9-9.7: Export indicator

This export allows to share between different NPOs some customer indicators.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select one or more indicators from the indicator tree of the Indicator editor.
Result: The indicator(s) is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the Indicator Editor window, click on .

Note: If only system indicators are selected, the Export button is disabled.
Result: If the current selection of indicators contains some system indicators, a
warning dialog is displayed listing all the selected system indicators and explains that
they will not be exported.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on OK in the warning dialog.

Result: The Save window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Browse for the location to save the indicator(s) and give the appropriate File Name.
Click on Save.
Export is done successfully.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on OK.
Result: The selected indicators are exported in an xml customer indicators dictionary
containing only the selection and all the customer indicators involved in the definition
of the selected indicators (in a recursive manner). The file is exported in the location
defined in the previous step.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
The exported file can be re-imported on another system at the same plug installation level
(same system dictionaries) using NPO Import/Export Management web pages. Refer to
NPO Administration User Guide document, to Import QoS dictionary using GUI
procedure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-9.8: Continue in background option
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 9-9.8: Continue in background option

If the creation of the indicator takes more than 2 seconds , a progress bar is displayed to
the user with the option Continue in background.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Open the Indicator Editor. Please refer to Procedure 9-9: Use indicator editor
(p. 9-73) to create/copy/edit or delete indicator.
Result: The Indicator Type window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Indicator Editor click on Apply.

Result: The Confirm Indicator Creation window appears with the message:
Are you sure you want to create indicator <indicator_name>?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Yes.
Result: A progress window appears with the button Continue in background.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on Continue in background.

Result: The Continue operation in background window appears displaying the
following message:
If you validate your choice, you'll have to check the
operation status in the Notification Window:
- if the status is OK, then please press Cancel in the editor
before starting any other operation.
- if the status is NOK, please fix any mistake and press
Apply again to retry your operation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
If Then
You click on OK The following message appears:
While the procesing is on-going, you can use all
Analysis Desktop features but you should avoid
using the Indicator Editor
(user@serveripaddress). If you want to use it
anyway, please press Cancel before starting any
new operation. But in such a case, if the on-
going operation fails, then all the associated
inputs will be lost.
Click on OK.
The Indicator Editor window reappears.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-9.8: Continue in background option
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If Then
You click on Cancel The operation continues in background.
Result: The Indicator Editor window reappears.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
10
Overview
Purpose
This section describes how to manage radio parameters.
Contents
Presentation 10-1
Display logical / design parameter properties 10-3
Procedure 10-1: Display parameters 10-9
Procedure 10-2: Propagate parameters 10-10
Manage parameters 10-10
Presentation
Note: The MUSE_PARAM_<TECHNO>_LICENSE must be installed so that the
administrator can create parameters for a given technology (GSM, W-CDMA. LTE).
If the MUSE_PARAM_HISTORY_LICENSE is not installed, then the history of
the parameters is not kept.
Radio parameters are used as follows.
Parameter Description
Tuning (for example, changing parameters) The NPO allows you to:
Display parameters
Compare parameters between cells
Show the history, in particular to correlate
it with QoS variation
Compare with planned value
Compare with referenced value
Perform tuning.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Manage parameters Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
QoS interpretation and reporting Parameters are taken into account when
comparing cells, object zones, and
classifications between themselves.
Radio parameters are used for QoS interpretation and reporting. Parameters are taken into
account when comparing cells, object zones, and classifications between themselves.
Parameters are also taken into account (for example the number of TRX) when computing
some indicators.
Two types of parameters are defined:
Design parameters, that define the radio network architecture in term of coverage and
mobility capability
Design parameters can have the following values:
An operational value that is in use in the network. The value is retrieved from the
OMC-R
A planned value.
Design parameters can have four sub-levels in the family hierarchy.
For W-CDMA and LTE, the design parameters are not available.
Logical parameters, also called telecom algorithm parameters, used to optimize the
telecom behavior.
Logical parameter can have the following values:
An operational value that is in use in the network. The value is retrieved from the
OMC-R
A historical value that results from the value of the operational parameter in the
past
A forecast value that results from a tuning session and is used to change values in
the network
A reference value which is the default value of a parameter for a given network
object. This value depends on the network object configuration, i.e. values of
other parameters (for example, for GSM cells, on the cell type and cell class:
urban, rural, number of TRX)
A planed value coming from the planning tool.
Logical parameters can have four sub-levels in the family hierarchy.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Manage parameters Display logical / design parameter properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Display logical / design parameter properties

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 10-1 Example logical parameter properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 10-2 Example design parameters properties
The properties of Design and Logical Parameters are as follows.
Parameter Description MandatoryRead-

Name Only
Name Name of the parameter Yes Yes
Reference Unique reference of the parameter Yes Yes
Name
Formula Parameter formulae No Yes
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name Only
Type Type of the Parameter Yes Yes
Can be: True / Computed / Free Field.
Description Description of the parameter Yes Yes
Default Value Default Value of the Parameter No Yes
Data Type Parameter data type (integer, enum, string, float, boolean, Yes Yes
array of <type>)
Min Minimum value of the parameter No Yes
Max Maximum value of the parameter No Yes
Unit Unit of the parameter Yes Yes
Availability Availability Domain of the parameter, It is the list of Yes Yes
Domain object type at each temporal level where the parameter is
available.
Step Step of the parameter. No Yes
Planned Parameter is planned or not. No Yes
Cell Zone criteria for Cell Zone No Yes
criteria
Outaged Parameter is outaged or not. No Yes
Visible Parameter is visible or not. No Yes
Technology Set of name value pairs for a parameter of a technology. No Yes
Specific
Attributes
Reference Displays the reference value conditions and the Yes Yes
Values corresponding reference values. It contains one table per
release.
If there is no reference value defined for a given
parameter and a given release, then the table is replaced
by: No reference values defined for release <release>.
Supported Supported Release Technology - The release technology Yes Yes
Release of the parameter
Information Supported Release Supplier - The release supplier of the
parameter
Supported Release Name - The release name of the
parameter
Supported Release Version - The supported release
version
Supported Release Description - The supported release
description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name Only
Dictionary Dictionary Name - Name of the parameter dictionary Yes Yes
Information Dictionary Version - Version of the parameter dictionary
Dictionary Date - Publishing Date of the parameter
dictionary
Dictionary Auth - Author of the parameter dictionary
Dictionary Desc - Description of the parameter dictionary
Families Table of associated family and sub-families of the No Yes
indicator:
Family - The family to which this parameter belongs
Sub-Family Depth 1 - The sub-family to which this
parameter belongs
Sub-Family Depth 2 - The sub-sub-family to which
this parameter belongs
Sub-Family Depth 3 - The sub-sub-sub-family to
which this parameter belongs
Sub-Family Depth 4 - The sub-sub-sub-sub-family to
which this parameter belongs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Manage parameters Procedure 10-1: Display parameters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 10-1: Display parameters

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To display the values of the parameters, select them and the appropriate network object(s)
Result: The required objects are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Execute them in a view.

Result: The required objects are executed in a view.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 You can customize the way parameters are displayed, by changing the user preferences.
Refer to Procedure 26-1: Configure user preferences (p. 26-2).
Result: The parameters are configured.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Manage parameters Procedure 10-2: Propagate parameters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 10-2: Propagate parameters

You can propagate both design and logical parameters to:
View Template
This retrieves all View Templates referencing the selected parameters in their tabular
list.
Rules
This retrieves all Rules using the selected parameters in their definition.
THL
This retrieves all Thematic Layer Templates referencing the selected parameters.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click on the item to propagate.

node are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Drag the selected parameter and drop it to required function tab. The mouse pointer
changes to
Result: Depending on how the parameter Display time before a tab is raised and
made active is set as a user preference, the target counter tree:
Is automatically displayed, or
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Manage parameters
Import parameter dictionary
Parameter dictionaries describe all the supported parameters for the managed network
objects. They are specific for each managed technology and release.
For more information about importing parameter dictionaries into the NPO data
warehouse, refer to the NPO Administration User Guide document, to Import parameters
dictionary using GUI.
Load parameter data

The parameters data of the whole network is loaded each night, or each time the
administrator wants to take into account a new configuration of the network.
For more information, refer to the NPO Administration User Guide document, to Load
radio parameters.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Manage parameters Manage parameters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter historical data purge
For performance and storage space reasons, a regular data purge of the oldest historical
values is performed.
The purge process is launched every night after the daily import of operational values. It
deletes every history records that contain a date older of a specified number of days than
the current date.
See PM data purge (p. 9-27).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Manage parameters Manage parameters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
11
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the use of reference values.
Contents
Presentation 11-1
Procedure 11-1: Compare different reference values 11-8
Procedure 11-2: Create user defined reference values 11-10
Presentation
Note: The MUSE_PARAM_HISTORY_LICENSE must be installed, so that the
history of parameters is kept.
Definition
Reference values are Excel files that express the default value that a parameter for a given
network object should have.
These values depend on the network object configuration, i.e. values of other parameters
(for example, for GSM cells, on the cell type and cell class: urban, rural, number of
TRX).
Alcatel-Lucent publishes reference values for the parameters of its equipment. Some
operators directly use Alcatel-Lucent reference values, others change them to better suit
their needs.
Note: For W-CDMA, the customer can create some, but no reference values from
Alcatel-Lucent.
Reference values are not available for LTE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use reference values Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Characteristics
A parameter dictionary can contain only one reference values Excel files.
The file is mono-release, unlike rules files that are multi-releases.
The .xls reference values file can contain several sheets: each sheet contains reference
values for one type of object or relation.
Each sheet contains:
A list of a parameters for a given object type
For one type of objects, several sheets can be created and parameters can be grouped
as wished by the operator, but one sheet contains only reference values for one object
type.
Each parameter can have a ParamVersionInfo for a given release and a given object
type. The Parameter Version Info describes the parameter and the object on which the
parameter is applied.
A list of criteria that defines the conditions when the reference value apply
The reference values themselves.
On the fields, some parameters may be changed for local optimization (tuning).
That is why the reference value is composed of:
A minimum value - the tuning should not go below this value
A maximum value - the tuning should not go above this value
A reference value - this should be the value used when the cell was created.
Note: The layout used by Excel (font, bold, italic, cell colors, cell border, comments)
has no impact on NPO.
File header
Each sheet of the .xls reference values contains a header in the following form:
1 <Parameter name 1> <Parameter value 1>

3 <Comment>
n Start
The header is contained in the first two columns (A and B).

For each line, the header contains either:
A parameter name in column A and the parameter value in column B, or
a comment, that can be any string from column A, that is not a known parameter.
Parameter names are case insensitive. If a parameter name is present several times, only
the first occurrence is taken into account.
Comments are ignored.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The header stops when column A contains the keyword start (case insensitive).
Some parameters are only meaningful on the first sheet; others are defined on each sheet.
Table 11-1 Description of Parameters from the Reference Values Header
Name Description Mandatory

Scope
Dictio- Dictionary name or technology standard Yes Apply to the file.
nary as defined in the Parameters dictionary. Present only in first sheet.
Author Author's name No Apply to the file.
Present only in first sheet.
Date Document date No Apply to the file.
Present only in first sheet.
Supplier Supplier type: Yes Apply to the sheet.
Standard
Alcatel-Lucent
Customer.
The same supplier can be used in several
sheets.
Type Type of the network object the rule is Yes Apply to the sheet.
applied on, as defined in the topology
metadata. (e.g. CELL2G).
The same type can be used in several
sheets.
Column header
Below the rule file header, the first two lines contain the columns header.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the two lines of the columns header, column A contains the header for the column
containing parameter names (e.g. the label 'Parameters').
Columns B, C and D contain the header for the default values columns (e.g. label
'Default' on the first line and labels 'min' 'ref' and 'max' on the second line). Theses
headers are only for presentation purposes.
Starting at column E, cells are grouped three by three: for minimum, reference and
maximum value. For each group, the first line contains a criteria expression, that must
match the grammar described in Expression grammar (p. 11-5). The second line is only
for presentation purpose (labels 'min' 'ref' and 'max').
Figure 11-1 Example of Columns Header for Reference Values File
Reference values data

After the columns header, the next lines contain the reference values data, one set of
reference values for a given parameter per line.
Columns A, B, C and D define the following:
Column Description Mandatory

A The parameter name (e.g. A_LEV_HO). Yes
B Default minimum value (only numerical values). No
C Default Reference value. No
D Default maximum value (only numerical values). No
All following columns are grouped three by three, and contain the following:
Column Description Mandatory

E Minimum Reference value for the corresponding criteria No
(only numerical values).
F Reference value for the corresponding criteria. No
G Maximum Reference value for the corresponding criteria No
(only numerical values).
The following rules apply:

If a minimum value is given then a maximum value must be given (and vice-versa)
If minimum and maximum values are given, the reference value must be given
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the reference value is given but the minimum and maximum are empty it means
that, if the criteria matches, the parameter has no minimum and maximum values.
If the three are empty it means that, even if the criteria matches, it is not taken into
account and the next criteria (on the left) is checked. The default reference values
(minimum, maximum or the three) can be empty, in this case, nothing is returned.
Reference values evaluation

The evaluation of criteria starts with the right most one first, and then criteria is evaluated
from right to left until one is matched. If none matches, the default values are used.
The criteria in the .xls file is evaluated starting with the Reference value (min, max and
reference value).
A next Reference value is linked to it, containing the criteria to evaluate if the first one is
false and the associated minimum, maximum and reference values. The default Reference
value is the last one (not linked to a next Reference value) if the criteria expression is
empty; otherwise it means that the parameter does not have default values.
Expression grammar
The following grammar is used to check reference values and rules expressions.
Tokens
Whitespace <<[ /t/n/r]+>> %ignore%

Number <<[0-9]+>>
Identifier <<[a-zA-Z][a-zA-Z0-9$#_]*>>
RelationSel <<[SsTt]:>>
S for Source, T for Target
TopoSel <<[a-zA-Z][a-zA-Z0-9$#_]*:>>
Dot .
Comma ,
Left Parenthesis (
Round brackets are only supported for numerical
expressions.
Right Parenthesis )
expressions.
Colon :
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Square brackets are not supported.
Basic operators
Plus +
Minus -
Multiply *
Divide /
Boolean / logical functions
NOT NOT
AND AND
AND is evaluated before OR condition.
OR OR
Note: Do not use any kind of brackets (round or square) for the logical evaluation.
Expression functions
EQ =
NE <>
LT <
LE <=
GE >=
GT >
LIKE LIKE
BETWEEN BETWEEN
Productions
BooleanExpr [NOT] BooleanTerm [BooleanExprRest] ;

BooleanExprRest AND BooleanExpr | OR BooleanExpr ;
BooleanTerm [" BooleanExpr "] | Expression RelationalOperator Expression |
BETWEEN Expression AND Expression | StringComparator
PTEXT;
RelationalOperator EQ | NE | LT | LE | GE | GT ;
StringComparator LIKE | EQ;
Expression Term [ExpressionRest] ;
ExpressionRest + Expression | - Expression ;
Term Factor [TermRest] ;
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TermRest * Term | / Term ;

Factor Atom | ( Expression );
Atom Numerical | Parameter ;
Parameter [TOPOSEL|RELATIONSEL]IDENTIFIER;
Numerical [-]NUMBER[.NUMBER] ;
Examples
(((IFBAND1+1)*2)-2) / (IFBAND2-IFBAND2+2) = IFBAND1
(IFBAND1*2) / 2 = IFBAND1 AND IFBAND1 <> IFBAND2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use reference values Procedure 11-1: Compare different reference values
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 11-1: Compare different reference values

You can troubleshoot for parameter related problems by comparing their current
Operational values against their Reference values to see which values were changed from
the default values.
Note: For W-CDMA, only one reference value per parameter is possible.
Reference Values are not available for LTE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the appropriate network elements (e.g.: BSCells) and Design parameters, then:
Drag and drop them in the Tabular / Graphical Viewer, or
From the menu bar, select View -> Execute View... or
Press Ctrl+Q.
Result: The Execution Context window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Enter the appropriate information, as presented in Execution context (p. 3-19), selecting
Hour periodicity, the appropriate Date and Time.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Execute to execute the view.

Result: The values related to the dropped objects are displayed in the Executed
Tabular / Graphical Viewer.
If you chose Then

One parameter A 2D table appears, displaying the following
values in the header:
Planned
Min Reference
Reference
Max Reference
ORV
Chosen Date(s)
Operational.
More than one parameter 3D table appears, displaying the following
values in the first column header, and the
parameters in the second column header:
Planned
Min Reference
Reference
Max Reference
ORV
Chosen Date(s)
Operational.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use reference values Procedure 11-1: Compare different reference values
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For the Parameter Reference values, Min Reference values and Max Reference values, a
tool tip is available on the displayed value, providing the related value selection criterion
from the associated dictionary.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Show legend (p. 18-85).

Result: The Legend window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 In the Legend window, in the Parameter Comparison frame, choose to compare the
appropriate Source and Target values (e.g.: All values to Reference, or values before and
after a migration or upgrade).
Result: A window opens, displaying the comparison.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Procedure 18-3.10: Rotate / inverse axis of view (p. 18-71) to filter by parameter.
Result: Parameter names are now positioned in the rows of the table, while the
network elements (cells) are in the columns.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 In the Legend window, choose to hide the OK values by selecting the Hide checkbox for
green color.
Result: The remaining values are those for which at least one cell the value is not
equal to the default value.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use reference values Procedure 11-2: Create user defined reference values
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 11-2: Create user defined reference values

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Export an existing file.

Refer to the NPO Administration User Guide document, to Export parameter reference
values using GUI.
Result: The file is exported.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Edit the file.

Result: The file is edited.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Import the file to the NPO.

Refer to the NPO Administration User Guide document, to Import parameter reference
values using GUI.
Result: The file is imported.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Note: To delete a file, refer to the NPO Administration User Guide document, to
Delete parameter reference values using GUI.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
12 12 operator reference
Use
values (ORV)
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the use of operator network reference values.
Contents
Presentation 12-1
Procedure 12-1: Save as operator reference 12-4
Import / update / export / delete user defined operator reference values 12-5
Presentation
Note: The MUSE_OPERATOR_REF_VALUES_LICENSE must be installed.
Definition
The Operator Reference Values allow the operator defining explicit reference values for
all object instances as well as defining also a Reference Topology (including the number
of cells, the number of adjacencies, the number of TRX per cell, and so on).
The ORV data can be populated by set of CSV files delivered into a zip archive file.
ORV parameter dictionary file structure

The ORV parameter file dictionary is a XML file describing lists of parameters used as
Operator Reference per object type. The dictionary is linked to a technology. Only one
dictionary per technology is possible.
The content of the dictionary file format is:
Note: In the Type column, a U means that Unicode characters are accepted. The other
attributes have restrictions: they can be used as column names or table names in
Oracle tables (dates, number, Boolean) and must respect some constraints.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use operator reference values (ORV) Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure provides an example of the ORV parameter dictionary for GSM.
To download some examples of the ORV parameter dictionary files, refer to Procedure
28-1: Download NPO example files (p. 28-2).
ORV data file structure

The ORV data file is a CSV file format with ; as separator. One file is delivered per object
type. All the files are delivered in a zip archive file imported with the Import / Export
Management page, see Import ORV data using GUI in the NPO Administration User
Guide.
The naming rule of the csv files is: ORV<techno><object type>.csv. The naming rule of
the archive file is free.
The content of the file format is:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use operator reference values (ORV) Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The first line defines the columns present in the file.

One line defines the ORV data for one network object.
If no value exists for a parameter then blank (;;) is put in the data file.
It is not necessary to have, in the data CSV file, all the parameters defined in the
dictionary. In that case only the delta mode import is possible. The import mode is
selected in the administration GUI while launching the import.
To import in non-delta mode, all the parameters defined in the current version of the
dictionary must be present in CSV files.
To download some examples of the ORV data files, refer to Procedure 28-1: Download
NPO example files (p. 28-2).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use operator reference values (ORV) Procedure 12-1: Save as operator reference
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 12-1: Save as operator reference

This feature allows the user to decide that the parameters defined in the ORV parameter
list have to be considered as the Operator Reference. The ORV parameter list is created
by the ORV dictionary import or update manually ORV parameter list, see Import
operator reference values parameter dictionary using GUI, Import operator reference
values parameter dictionary using command line and Manually update operator reference
values parameter list using GUI in the NPO Administration User Guide.
When the user selects some network objects and chooses Save as Operator Reference, the
operational value of parameters defined in ORV parameter list of the selected objects are
saved in ORV data. Only object types which have parameters in ORV parameter list, will
have a record in ORV data.
Example: If there is no parameter of BSC in ORV parameter list, the save as ORV on
BSC objects will have no impact.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select one or several network objects from the Topology browser, then:
Right click and select Save as Operator Reference, OR
From the menu bar, select Topology ->Save as Operator Reference.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on Yes.
Result: All the values of design and logical parameters of the selected objects become
Operator Network Reference values. They replace previous existing Operator
Network reference values for this object if they exist.
A notification is generated in the system indicating that a new ORV data is saved in
the database for the selected object.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use operator reference values (ORV) Import / update / export / delete user defined operator
reference values
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Import / update / export / delete user defined operator

reference values
For more information about managing ORVs, refer to the NPO Administration User
Guide, to:
Import Operator Reference Values Parameter Dictionary
Manually update operator reference values parameter list using GUI
Export Operator Reference Values Parameter Dictionary
Delete Operator Reference Values Parameter Dictionary.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use operator reference values (ORV) Import / update / export / delete user defined operator
reference values
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
13 Use rules
13
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the use of rules.
Contents
Presentation 13-1
Display Rule Properties 13-10
Procedure 13-1: Execute rules 13-13
Procedure 13-2: Create user defined rules 13-14
Presentation
Note: The MUSE_CUSTOMER_RULES_LICENSE must be installed, so that the
rules where the supplier is customer can be imported and exported.
Definition
Rules are Excel files that express the dependency between two or more parameters of a
given object, and are stored in the Oracle database.
To indicate when a rule is applicable, conditions and expressions on other parameters are
defined inside it.
Classification
Depending on their supplier, three types of rules are defined.
Standard rules Provided by Alcatel-Lucent, and are related to

the standard itself, regardless of the firm
producing the equipment (e.g. GSM rules as
defined by the standard).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use rules Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent rules Provided by Alcatel-Lucent, and are related to

Alcatel-Lucent equipment.
Customer rules Rules defined by the operator (Import / export
of customer rules are subject to the
MUSE_CUSTOMER_RULES_LICENSE).
Depending on their type, rules can be:

System rules are the expression of a dependency between object parameters, as they
appear in standardization documents
Expert rules are rules that results from experience.
Characteristics
A parameter dictionary can contain several rule Excel files, but a file contains rules for
only one dictionary.
The .xls rule file can contain several sheets: each sheet contains rules for a given
dictionary, a given supplier, and a given object type.
A rule file can be:
Multi-type, one type per sheet, but types can also be split into several files
Multi-supplier (e.g. one sheet for Standard rules and one sheet for Alcatel-Lucent
rules), but rules from different supplier types can also be split into several files
Multi-release (unlike reference values files that are mono-release).
The name of a rule file is unique for a dictionary and object type.
Rules can be checked:
On objects in the Analysis Desktop
When applying a Tuning Session.
File header
Each sheet of the .xls rule contains a header in the following form.

3 <Comment>
n Start
The header is contained in the first two columns (A and B).

For each line, the header contains either:
A parameter name in column A and the parameter value in column B, or
A comment, that can be any string from column A, that is not a known parameter.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter names are case insensitive. If a parameter name is present several times, only
the first occurrence is taken into account.
Comments are ignored.
The header stops when column A contains the keyword start (case insensitive).
Figure 13-1 Example rule header
Some parameters are only meaningful on the first sheet; others are defined on each sheet.
Table 13-1 Description of parameters from rules header
Name Description Mandatory Scope

Dictionary Dictionary name or technology Yes Apply to the file.
standard as defined in the Parameters Present only in
dictionary. first sheet.
Author Author's name No Apply to the file.
Present only in
first sheet.
Date Document date No Apply to the file.
Present only in
first sheet.
Supplier Supplier type: Yes Apply to the sheet.
Standard
Alcatel-Lucent
Customer.
The same supplier can be used in
several sheets.
Type Type of the network object the rule is Yes Apply to the sheet.
applied on, as defined in the topology
metadata. (e.g. CELL2G).
The same type can be used in several
sheets.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Column header
Below the rule file header, the first two lines contain the columns header.
The first eight columns (from A to H) contain the names of the rule attributes.
The names contained in the header cells are not important themselves, it is only the order
of the columns that counts.
The rules attributes are defined in the following order:
Name
Rule Type
Severity
Visible
Function
Rule Expression
Description
Rule Condition.
The next columns (starting with column I) define additional conditional parameters for
rules.
The first line contains a variable set of merged cells. Each set has a variable number of
merged cells. It contains an object parameter name, for example for GSM,
CELL_CLASS. The number of sets itself is not limited.
On the second line, for each set of merged cells, for example, for each object parameter,
each individual cell contains a parameter value, for example, URBAN, SUBURBAN, etc.
Each column represents a specific condition on an object parameter value, of the form
<parameter name>='<parameter value>, for example for GSM,
CELL_TYPE='CONCENTRIC'.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 13-2 Example of column header for rules file
Rule data
After the columns header, the next lines contain the rule data, one rule per line.
The first eight columns (from A to H) contain the following rule attributes:
Description Mandatory
The name of the rule. Yes
It must be unique among all rules.
The type of the rule (e.g. System or Expert), it can actually be any free text. No
The rule severity. A value among (case insensitive): Yes
ERROR
WARNING
The visibility: if any text is present, (e.g. X) it means true. No
(default is
false)
The function, i.e. the family and subfamilies in the form: No
<family> / <subfamily1><subfamily2><subfamily3><subfamily4>.
The number of sub-families can be from zero to four. The family itself is optional.
The description of the rule. No
The rule expression. It must validate the grammar given in the Annex. Yes
The rule condition that defines when the rule applies. It must validate the grammar No
given in the Annex.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 13-3 Example first column rules data
The next columns (starting with column I) define additional conditional parameters for
rules.
Depending on the Columns header, each cell corresponds to a specific condition on a
parameter value (e.g.for GSM: CELL_CLASS = 'CONCENTRIC'). If the cell contains
any text (for example, X) it means that the condition must be applied for the rule.
Figure 13-4 Example last column rules data
For each rule, a cross in a cell means that the conditional parameter must have the
corresponding value to make the rule applicable.
If some cells are checked for several values of the same parameter the rule applies if the
conditional parameter have one of the checked values.
If a condition (and specific conditional parameters) is false for an object, it means that the
rule cannot be applied on that object, and the rule result is N/A (and not true or false,
whatever the rule expression value for that object).
Rule expressions and conditions are formulas containing references to parameters of the
network object. It can also contain selectors to use parameters of a child or a parent
object, or to use parameters of the source or target objects in the case of relations
(adjacencies).
Example for LTE:
S:CLASS = URBAN (S for Source)
T:CLASS = URBAN (T for Target)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Example for GSM and W-CDMA:
BSC:Release = XYZ
S:CELL_CLASS = URBAN (S for Source)
T:CELL_CLASS = URBAN(T for Target)
In the same way, hard coded conditional parameters (for example for GSM ,
CELL_CLASS, RELEASE) must match the parameter expressions defined in the
grammar. They may also use selectors like S:CELL_CLASS, i.e. the parameter
CELL_CLASS of the source cell.
Rule evaluation
When executing a view that contains rules, the parameter values from the rules conditions
and expressions are evaluated with operational, historical, planned, or forecast values
depending on the view execution context. The execution context is set in the same way as
for views containing parameters.
The temporal part of the availability domain (list of periodicity) is fixed and is common
to all rules; it is configurable in a configuration file.
The spatial part of the availability domain of a rule is the associated object type of the
rule (e.g. CELL2G).
The availability domain of a rule is not computed from availability domain of parameters
used in the rule. This means that if the user chooses an execution context that is not valid
for one of the parameters, the result of the rule is N/A.
When checking a tuning session, the parameter values from the rules conditions and
expressions are evaluated with operational or forecast values, depending on the given
tuning session.
In both cases, the evaluation of the rule may involve getting parameter values of other
related objects (operational or forecast when checking a tuning session, operational or
historical when executing a rules view, in the same execution context).
The criteria in the .xls file is evaluated from right to left.
A rule cannot be checked on an object (the rule result is N / A) if:
The rule condition (and specific conditional parameters) is false for that object
At least one parameter used in the rule expression has no value for that object in the
given execution context
The rule condition or rule expression cannot be evaluated (e.g. division by zero or
comparison between numeric and nonnumeric values). In this case, a warning must be
logged.
Depending on the Severity value, the following icons are defined.
Rule Icon Name Icon Description

OK The rule expression is true on that object.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Rule Icon Name Icon Description

Warning The rule expression is false on that object, and
the rule type is Warning.
Error The rule expression is false on that object, and
the rule type is Error.
Not Applicable The rule condition is not fulfilled.
Highlighting
The operator can highlight the view based on rules results.
This case is an extension of the Highlight in view case.
Criteria Color
Rule result is N / A Black
Rule result is true Green
Rule result is false and the rule is of type Warning Orange
Rule result is false and the rule is of type Error Red
Expression grammar
The following grammar is used to check reference values and rules expressions.
Tokens
Whitespace <<[ /t/n/r]+>> %ignore%

Number <<[0-9]+>>
Identifier <<[a-zA-Z][a-zA-Z0-9$#\.\\\*_-]*>>
RelationSel <<[SsTt]:>>
S for Source, T for Target
TopoSel <<[a-zA-Z][a-zA-Z0-9$#_]*:>>
Dot .
Comma ,
Left Parenthesis (
expressions.
Right Parenthesis )
expressions.
Colon :
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Square brackets are not supported.
Basic operators
Plus +
Minus -
Multiply *
Divide /
Boolean / logical functions
NOT NOT
AND AND
AND is evaluated before OR condition.
OR OR
Note: Do not use any kind of brackets (round or square) for the logical evaluation.
Expression functions
EQ =
NE <>
LT <
LE <=
GE >=
GT >
LIKE LIKE
BETWEEN BETWEEN
Productions
BooleanExpr [NOT] BooleanTerm [BooleanExprRest] ;

BooleanExprRest AND BooleanExpr | OR BooleanExpr ;
BooleanTerm [" BooleanExpr "] | Expression RelationalOperator Expression |
BETWEEN Expression AND Expression | StringComparator
PTEXT;
RelationalOperator EQ | NE | LT | LE | GE | GT ;
StringComparator LIKE | EQ;
Expression Term [ExpressionRest] ;
ExpressionRest + Expression | - Expression ;
Term Factor [TermRest] ;
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TermRest * Term | / Term ;

Factor Atom | ( Expression );
Atom Numerical | Parameter ;
Parameter [TOPOSEL|RELATIONSEL]IDENTIFIER;
Numerical [-]NUMBER[.NUMBER] ;
Examples
(((IFBAND1+1)*2)-2) / (IFBAND2-IFBAND2+2) = IFBAND1
(IFBAND1*2) / 2 = IFBAND1 AND IFBAND1 <> IFBAND2
Display Rule Properties

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use rules Display Rule Properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name Only
Name Name of the Rule Yes Yes
Rule Type Rule Type (Expert / System) Yes Yes
Severity Severity (Error / Warning) Yes Yes
Visible Visibility (Yes / No) No Yes
Description Description of rhe rule Yes Yes
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use rules Display Rule Properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name Only
Supplier Standard / Alcatel-Lucent / Customer Yes Yes
Type Object type (e.g. Cell2G) Yes Yes
Comments Free comment Yes Yes
Dictionary Name of the file it is imported from Yes Yes
Information Author
Date of creation
Families Associated family and sub-families of the rule. No Yes
Rules Rule Expression Yes Yes
Condition Rule Condition (Boolean expression, it includes also the No Yes
specific conditional parameters hard coded in the
imported file, like CELL_CLASS='URBAN')
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use rules Procedure 13-1: Execute rules
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 13-1: Execute rules

The execution and representation of views containing rules is done in the same way as for
the views containing parameters, except that rules cannot be added to a graphic.
Rules can be mixed with other data in views.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the network object(s), and the rules or view(s) containing the rule(s), then drag and
drop them in the Tabular / Graphical Viewer.
Note that rules can be applied only on operational values.
Result: The Execution Context window appears. Enter the appropriate information,
as presented in Execution context (p. 3-19).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: Rules are evaluated (see Rule evaluation (p. 13-7)). The evaluation of the
rules may involve getting parameters values of other related objects (with the same
execution context).
The executed view with rules appears depending on the selected number of network
objects and rules, in a new tab of the tabular view.
Figure 13-5 Example executed rules
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use rules Procedure 13-2: Create user defined rules
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 13-2: Create user defined rules

Note: When importing rules, the malformed rules are indicated in the log
corresponding to the import operation. If malformed rules are present, they must be
corrected or deleted, then the rules file to be imported again. If malformed rules are
nevertheless imported, they are stored in the NPO database. So, when exporting the
rules dictionary, they are still present allowing the user to correct them. These
malformed rules are not available in the Analysis Desktop.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Export an existing rule.

Refer to the NPO Administration User Guide document, to Export parameter rules using
GUI.
Result: The rule is exported.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Edit the rule.

Result: The rule is edited.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Import the rule to the NPO.

Refer to the NPO Administration User Guide document, to Import parameter rules using
GUI.
Result: The rule is imported.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Note: To delete a rule, refer to the NPO Administration User Guide document, to
Delete parameter rules using GUI.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
14 Use events
14
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the use of events.
Contents
Presentation 14-1
Display event properties 14-4
Procedure 14-1: Display events 14-7
Procedure 14-2: Display event synthesis 14-16
Presentation
Events are correlated to the QoS evolution of the network and show when key
information of a cell is changed.
Events are defined per technology (GSM, W-CDMA, LTE). The events definitions
contain a unique name, an availability domain, and a family.
The family attribute represents the method that is used to compute the event. Two families
are defined: parameter (modification of current or planned parameter, e.g identifier, BSC,
frequency) and topology (object creation / deletion, e.g Move BTS).
Events can be:
base events available (only) at the corresponding level where they have occurred
aggregated events (raised when similar event is raised for at least one sub-object)
that enables to show at upper topology level that an event has occurred for one or
several objects.
It is possible to have more than one aggregation for a given base event (e.g.
aggregated events at BSC and BTS levels for a Cell 2G base event).
Internal events are defined on historicized network configuration data, such as logical /
design parameter modifications and / or topology modifications to detect significant
changes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use events Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Events may be displayed:
On a synthetic view like a dashboard where each event is represented by a graphical
symbol
In reports or in a dedicated tabular view.
Note: Only the following events are available for W-CDMA: cell, adjacency, network
element creation / deletion.
Only Events for which the Visible property is set to True are displayed for any user.
NonVisible events are displayed only for the Administrator.
A predefined set of events per technology is defined by Alcatel-Lucent. These are called
system events and cannot be updated or deleted by the user.
Aggregated events permit event happening at lower topology levels being visible at upper
topology levels (for example, showing at BSC level if some events have been raised at
corresponding CELL2G level).
The following table of icons contains the system icons provided by Alcatel-Lucent.
Depending on the technology, they are displayed or not (BCCH / BSIC Changes is a
GSM event for instance).
Event Icon Event Name Event Type

Adjacency changes Normal
Adjacency parameter changes Normal
BCCH / BSIC Changes Normal
Cell Capacity Changes Normal
Cell Creation Normal
Cell Deletion Normal
Cell Type Changes Normal
Frequency Changes Normal
Logical Parameter Changes Normal
Planned Logical Parameter Changes Normal
Design Parameter Changes Normal
Planned Design Parameter Changes Normal
Release Changes Normal
Topology Changes Normal
Adjacency changes Aggregated
Adjacency parameter changes Aggregated
BCCH / BSIC Changes Aggregated
Cell Capacity Changes Aggregated
Cell Creation Aggregated
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Event Icon Event Name Event Type

Cell Deletion Aggregated
Cell Type Changes Aggregated
Frequency Changes Aggregated
Logical Parameter Changes Aggregated
Planned Logical Parameter Changes Aggregated
Design Parameter Changes Aggregated
Planned Design Parameter Changes Aggregated
Release Changes Aggregated
Topology Changes Aggregated
ALL_EVENTS All Events including the
Aggregated Events
Events are displayed classified by technology.

Example:
Example of aggregated events:

In the following example, the Cell Type Changes and Logical Parameter Changes
events are defined as aggregated events at an upper topology level (assumes that the base
level is CELL2G and upper level is BTS) then for BTS mode, the Events tab displays:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Display event properties

The following figure shows the Event Properties window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use events Display event properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name Name of the Event
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use events Display event properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Event Type Event Type
Values: Topology / Parameter
Event Description A short description of the event type.
Ascii Display Resource String used to represent the event within text format documents.
Graphical Display Icon resource identifier, used by the Analysis Desktop.
Resource
Dictionary Information Technology Technology for the event.
Values: GSM / W-CDMA / LTE.
Release Release for the event.
Version Version of the technology.
Date Date the event dictionary was loaded.
Author Author of the event dictionary.
Description Details about event dictionary.
Event Information Event Type Operation on the network object for which the event
is fired.
It is for topology events.
Event Parameter Name of the event parameter.
It is for parameter events.
Release Release of the event.
Display Difference
For parameter events, defines the way the differences between the
new value and the previous value are displayed from the following:
NONE, NEW, REMOVED, NEW_AND_REMOVED.
Availability Domain Availability domain for the event, it is by
default daily for all events.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use events Procedure 14-1: Display events
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 14-1: Display events

Events are displayed in executed views, tabular mode only. Graphical mode is not
supported for executed views that contain only events.
An executed event in tabular mode displays a synthesis of all occurrences of events for
one or several objects, and one or several days. The resulting executed view contains a list
of icons for each result cell.
A base event is displayed in the Events tab of the object type mode where it is
defined.
An aggregated event is displayed in the Events tab of the aggregation object type
mode.
When there is no data available for a table cell in such a view, nothing appears in that cell.
The execution and representation of views containing events is done in the same way as
for the views containing parameters, except that events cannot be added to a graphic.
Events can be mixed with other data in views.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 14-1.1: Execute Events (p. 14-8).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 14-1.2: Open events details window (p. 14-9).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 14-1.3: Legend for events (p. 14-11).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Procedure 14-1.4: Use tabular mode for executed event (p. 14-12).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Procedure 14-1.5: Use tabular mode for standard view: multi-object comparison
(p. 14-13).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Procedure 14-1.6: Use tabular mode for standard view: mono-object evolution
(p. 14-14).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Procedure 14-1.7: Use tabular mode for standard view: multi-object evolution
(p. 14-15).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use events Procedure 14-1.1: Execute Events
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 14-1.1: Execute Events

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the network object(s), and the event(s) or view(s) containing the event(s), then drag
and drop them in the Executed View browser.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Enter the appropriate information, as presented in Execution context (p. 3-19).

For a multi-object comparison view, only Day periodicity is available.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The executed view with event(s) appears depending on the selected number of
network objects and event(s), in a new tab of the tabular view.
The cells display a synthesis of all event occurrences where each event type is
represented by an icon. If no event occurs for any of the selected objects on a given
date, then nothing appears.
Executing All Events includes all the normal and aggregated events.
Figure 14-1 Example executed events
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use events Procedure 14-1.2: Open events details window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 14-1.2: Open events details window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the event in the executed view.

Result: The event is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the menu, select View -> Event Details, OR
Double click on the selected event, OR
Right click and select Event Details.
Result: The Event Details is displayed.
Button Description
Name
Propagate To propagate the selected lines (CTRL+A to select all the lines) in the
function and object trees.
The parameters are propagated in design, logical trees depending on the
selection and in the tuning tree when the parameters are tunable.
The object on which the detail is opened is propagated in the
corresponding object tree.
Close To close the Event Details window.
Help To go to the online help for the current window.
In case of aggregated events, the detail window is as follows:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use events Procedure 14-1.2: Open events details window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This window contains the list of sub-objects of Object 1 that have raised the event and
the corresponding event at object type level. The Propagate button permits to
propagate the objects of the selected lines in the corresponding topology object tree.
In case of multiple events in a single view table cell, with normal and aggregated
events, the detail window will have the two tabs:
The first tab is the current existing one
The second tab is the new view with sub-objects.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use events Procedure 14-1.3: Legend for events
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 14-1.3: Legend for events

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select one or more events in the executed view.

Result: The events are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the menu bar, select View -> Legend, OR
Right click and select Show Legend.
Result: The legends appear.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use events Procedure 14-1.4: Use tabular mode for executed event
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 14-1.4: Use tabular mode for executed event

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the appropriate network objects.

Result: The network objects are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select ALL_EVENTS.
Note: For a multi-object comparison view, in the Execution Context window, the
evolution must be chosen for only one date.
Result: The matrix representation of the view is:
The rows represent the network objects
The event cells contain an icon representing the event if one or more occurrences
of the event exist; they are empty otherwise.
represented by an icon.
The columns define the dates.
Figure 14-2 All events executed view
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use events Procedure 14-1.5: Use tabular mode for standard view:
multi-object comparison
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 14-1.5: Use tabular mode for standard view:

multi-object comparison
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select one or more network objects.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select one or more events.

For a multi-object comparison view, in the Execution Context window, the evolution
must be chosen for only one date.
of the event exist; they are empty otherwise.
represented by an icon.
The columns define the events.
Figure 14-3 Multi-object comparison view
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
mono-object evolution
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

mono-object evolution
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select one network object.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select one or more events.

For a mono-object comparison view, in the in the Execution Context window, the
evolution must be chosen between two selected dates.
The rows represent the events
of the event exist, they are empty otherwise
The columns define dates.
Figure 14-4 Mono-object evolution view
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
multi-object evolution
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

multi-object evolution
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select one or more network objects.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select one event.

For a multi-object evolution view, in the Execution Context window, the evolution must
be chosen between two selected dates.
The columns define dates.
Figure 14-5 Multi-object evolution view
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use events Procedure 14-2: Display event synthesis
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 14-2: Display event synthesis

In a Mono-Object Evolution View with Day periodicity that contains only standard
indicators and / or parameters, the user can trigger the display of an event synthesis for
the given network object.
The Event Synthesis can be triggered in both tabular and graphical mode.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 14-2.1: Display event synthesis in tabular mode (p. 14-17).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 14-2.2: Display event synthesis in graphical mode (p. 14-19).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use events Procedure 14-2.1: Display event synthesis in tabular mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 14-2.1: Display event synthesis in tabular mode

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Procedure 18-4.1: Open executed view (p. 18-76) and click on the Execution
Context tab, OR
Select one or several network object(s) and one or several function(s), then drag and
drop them in the Tabular Viewer.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Execution Context window, click on the Options tab.

Result: The Options panel opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Options panel, select the Display Event Synthesis checkbox.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on:
Update View, in case of executed view, OR
Execute, in case of drag and drop mechanism.
.
Result: An additional row is added at the bottom of the tabular view:
The cells of this row contain an x if an event occurrence exists for the given day
and the given network object.
You can then view details about it in two modes:
By double clicking on X, or
By right clicking on X and selecting Event Details.
This is applicable for any type of event that applies for the selected type of object.
If there is no event occurrence, the cell is filled with N/A or an empty value
according to the user preferences; see Views / reports user preferences (p. 26-5).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use events Procedure 14-2.1: Display event synthesis in tabular mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 14-6 Event synthesis in tabular mode of mono-object evolution view
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use events Procedure 14-2.2: Display event synthesis in graphical mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 14-2.2: Display event synthesis in graphical mode

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Procedure 18-4.1: Open executed view (p. 18-76) and click on the Execution
Context tab, OR
Select one or several network object(s) and one or several function(s), then drag and
drop them in the Graphical Viewer.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Execution Context window, click on the Options tab.

Result: The Options panel opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Options panel, select the Display Event Synthesis checkbox.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on:
Update View, if it was used an executed view
Execute, if it was used the drag and drop mechanism.
Result: The event synthesis appears below the regular graph in the form of a bar
divided in cells. This is also called one-line-event.
Each cell represents a day and is aligned on the day boundaries of the X-axis of the
graph above it.
If an event occurred on the given day, the cell is colored in blue. Otherwise, the cell is
not colored.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use events Procedure 14-2.2: Display event synthesis in graphical mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
15 Use free fields
15
Overview
Purpose
This section presents an overview of free fields.
Contents
Presentation 15-1
Display free field properties 15-4
Manage free fields 15-6
Procedure 15-1: Execute free fields 15-7
Presentation
Definition
For each customer object type, a set of additional free fields can be defined. Then, an
object can be associated with a set of free fields values.
Free fields can be generalized for all network objects, but are basically used with the
cells.
They can be displayed as design parameters, used in criteria for working zone, object
zone and in classification.
Free Fields are displayed in alphabetic order and no user-defined classification can be
created for them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use free fields Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 15-1 Example free fields function tab
Free fields file format

The format is composed of three parts:
Header
Label
Value.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Free fields file header
The header part is the first line of the file.
For the specific case of GSM cells, the header is composed as below:
FREE FIELD;<optional comment>
For generic cases, the header is composed as below:
FREE FIELD;<optional comment>;<TYPE>
where <TYPE> is the type of objects contained in the file.
Example: FREE FIELD;CELL3G
Example in the case of W-CDMA: FREE FIELD;RNC
Free fields file label
For the specific case of GSM cells:
The second line defines the used external IDs and the names of free fields.
There are two ways of identifying cells with two different configurations of external IDs:
MCC / MNC / CI configuration
In a CI configuration, the label part is composed of the keywords (CELL_MCC,
CELL_MNC, CELL_ID) followed by free fields name, separated by semicolons:
CELL_MCC;CELL_MNC;CELL_ID;<name1>;<name2>; etc
Example: CELL_MCC;CELL_MNC;CELL_ID;Address; ZIP_Code
MCC / MNC / LAC / CI configuration
In a LACCI configuration, the label part is composed of the keywords (CELL_MCC,
CELL_MNC, LAC_ID, CELL_ID) followed by the free fields name, separated by
semicolons:
CELL_MCC;CELL_MNC;LAC_ID;CELL_ID;<name1>;<name2>; etc
Example: CELL_MCC;CELL_MNC;LAC_ID;CELL_ID;Address;ZIP_Code
The external IDs of GSM cells is constructed from this information.
For generic cases, the header is composed as below:
The second line is composed of the keyword OEXID followed by the names of the free
fields, separated by semicolons.
The label part is composed of the name of the type, followed by the free fields name,
separated by semicolons:
OEXID;<name1>;<name2>; etc
Example: OEXID;Address;ZIP_Code
Example in the case of W-CDMA: OEXID;town;color
Free fields file value
The other lines of the free fields file form the value part. Each line describes the values of
free fields for one cell.
For the specific case of GSM Cells:
The line is introduced by the cell identifiers followed by values of free fields, separated
by semicolons:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
<MCC>;<MNC>;[<LAC_ID>];<CI>;<val1>;<val2>; etc
The LAC_ID is contained depending on if it is present or not in the label part.
In case the MNC is on 2 digits, you must pad MNC on 3 digits by putting an F
character as prefix for MNC, in all external IDs where MNC is used. For example, if
MNC is 01, then all external IDs using MNC will contain it as F01. For example, if
MCC=230, MNC=01, LAC=100, CI=7 then cell's external ID will be 230/F01/100/7.
Note that the number of values must be equal to the number of labels declared in label
part.
Empty lines are skipped with no warning. The last line is read even if it does not end with
a carriage return.
Example:
2;3;12450;4 Main Street;92000
5;3;13200;3 Downtown blvd;06000
For generic cases:
The line is introduced by the object external identifier followed by the values of the free
fields, separated by semicolons:
<OEXID>;<val1>;<val2>; etc
Note that the number of values must be equal to the number of labels declared in the label
part.
Empty lines are skipped with no warning. The last line is read even if it does not end with
a carriage return.
Example:
000001 / 000005;4 Main Street;92000
000001 / 000006;3 Downtown blvd;06000
Example in the case of W-CDMA:
RNC2005;Nantes;Yellow
RNC_112;Rennes;Red
Display free field properties

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use free fields Display free field properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following table provides an overview of the parameters and their corresponding
descriptions.

Name Name of the free field. Yes Yes
Description Description of Cell. Yes Yes
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use free fields Manage free fields
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Manage free fields

Refer to NPO Administration User Guide for more information about the management of
free fields:
To import the free fields refer to Import free fields using GUI section from NPO
Administration User Guide
To load the free fields refer to Load free fields using command line section from NPO
Administration User Guide
To delete one or several free fields, re-import a new file with the structure removed.
Refer to Import free fields using GUI section from NPO Administration User Guide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use free fields Procedure 15-1: Execute free fields
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 15-1: Execute free fields

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the appropriate cell(s) and the free field(s), then drag and drop them in the
Executed View browser.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The executed view with free field(s) appears depending on the selected
number of network objects and free field(s), in a new tab of the tabular view.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use free fields Procedure 15-1: Execute free fields
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
16 Use user note
16
Overview
Purpose
This section describes how to use user notes.
Contents
Presentation 16-1
Display user note 16-2
Procedure 16-1: Create user note 16-3
Procedure 16-2: Edit user note 16-4
Procedure 16-3: Delete user note 16-5
Presentation
User notes are user defined comments associated with topology objects (network objects
or object zones) and functions.
User Notes are visible to all users and are clearly visible in topology or function trees, and
are indicated by a yellow icon which is attached to the object.
One or several user notes can be associated per one or several objects.
All users can see the user notes, but only those having the corresponding FAD can modify
or delete them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use user note Display user note
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Display user note

If a topology object / function has a user note already assigned to it then the user note
icon is shown in the network object or function tree, marked with a yellow icon.
To display an existing user note attached to a cell, pass the mouse over the user note icon
corresponding to the object. The comment appears as a tool-tip.
Figure 16-1 Example user note
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use user note Procedure 16-1: Create user note
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 16-1: Create user note

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Right click on the appropriate topology object(s) (network object or object zone) or
function(s), and select User Note -> Add..., OR
From the menu bar, select Topology / Data -> User Note -> Add....
Result: The User Note window opens.
The Owner and Date of Last Update properties are automatically added by the NPO in
the user note.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Type the comment (as free text) and the select one of the following options.
Note: The cell user note message is limited at 4096 characters. The text area is
scrollable if the contents of the user note are large.
If Click on
You selected one object Apply
You selected several objects and you want to Apply to Current Object
apply a same or different text for one object
You selected several objects and you want to Apply to All Objects
apply a same or different text for all objects
Result: A notification of user note addition is sent to all connected users.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use user note Procedure 16-2: Edit user note
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 16-2: Edit user note

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right click on the appropriate topology object(s) (network object or object zone) or
function(s) that has a user note attached, and select User Note -> Edit....
Result: The Edit User Note window opens with the previous user note content
selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Type the appropriate comment, then click on OK.

Result: The comment is refreshed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use user note Procedure 16-3: Delete user note
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 16-3: Delete user note

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select one or several topology objects (network objects or object zones) or one or several
functions that have a user note.
Note: You can select multiple user notes for removal.
Result: The required objects or functions are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right click and select User Note -> Remove.

Result: A deletion confirmation message appears:
Do you want to remove the selected User Note(s)?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Yes.
Result: The user note is removed and a notification of user note deletion is sent to all
connected users.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use user note Procedure 16-3: Delete user note
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
17 Use favorites
17
Overview
Purpose
This section describes how to use favorites.
Contents
Presentation 17-1
Procedure 17-1: Select favorite function 17-3
Procedure 17-2: Add a function to favorite functions 17-4
Procedure 17-3: Create group to add favorites 17-6
Procedure 17-4: Rename group of favorites 17-7
Procedure 17-5: Delete favorite / group of favorites 17-9
Procedure 17-6: Organize favorites 17-10
Procedure 17-7: Move favorite / group of favorites to folder 17-12
Procedure 17-8: Import favorites 17-13
Procedure 17-9: Export favorites 17-15
Presentation
For a friendlier and quicker navigation to the user preferred functions, they can be added
to favorite list of functions. Thus, when a function is defined as being a favorite function,
it can be quickly retrieved from the popup menu, instead of having to search for it in the
function tree.
Groups and sub-groups of favorites can be defined for a better customizing. There is one
list of groups / sub-groups / favorite functions per Function Type per Mode (i.e. Favorite
Indicators for Cell 3G, Favorite Indicators for RNC, Favorites Logical Parameter for Cell
3G, etc).
The favorites definition - including groups and sub-groups, is dedicated to one user (not
shared between users).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use favorites Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The list of groups and sub-groups is unique for each mode and function type. The same
Favorite function can be added to different groups and sub-groups.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use favorites Procedure 17-1: Select favorite function
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 17-1: Select favorite function

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right click on the function tree.

Result: A popup menu containing the Favorites option appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Navigate through the Favorites popups list of favorites, and select the desired favorite
function to display.
Result: When a favorite function is selected any prior selections on the function tree
are maintained only if Add favorite to current selection is set as true in the user
preferences; otherwise the selections are lost and the tree is scrolled down to the
selected favorite function.
The Whole Group selection contains all the favorites under the group.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use favorites Procedure 17-2: Add a function to favorite functions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 17-2: Add a function to favorite functions

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the required function(s) from the function browser.

Result: The function(s) are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the menu bar, select Data -> Favorites -> Add to..., OR
Right click and select Favorites -> Add to....
Result: The Add to Favorites window appears.
If several functions are selected, the first selected function appears in the Favorite
Name field. By placing the mouse over the Favorite Name field, the names of the
functions are displayed in a tool tip.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use favorites Procedure 17-2: Add a function to favorite functions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Classify the favorite function(s) in the appropriate hierarchy.

You can:
Select one of the existing groups or sub-groups displayed in the Favorites hierarchy
field, OR
Define and organize your own groups and sub-groups containing the function(s).
Refer to Procedure 17-3: Create group to add favorites (p. 17-6) and Procedure
17-6: Organize favorites (p. 17-10).
Result: The functions are classified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on OK.
Result: The function(s) is (are) added as favorite function(s), in the selected group or
sub-group of favorites.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use favorites Procedure 17-3: Create group to add favorites
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 17-3: Create group to add favorites

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Add to Favorites or Organize Favorites window, select a group under the new
group / sub-group to be created.
Result: By default the root node (i.e. Favorites) is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on Create Group.

Result: The Create New Group window appears.
In the case of sub-groups, this window only opens if the sub-group is within the
maximum number of permitted sub-groups. Up to four levels of sub-groups can be
created (4 is a configurable value).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Group Name field, type the name of the group / sub-group to be created.
The group name must be unique, and the sub-group name must be unique within the
group.
Result: The group or sub-group name is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on OK.
Result: The Favorites tree is updated and the new group / sub-group is selected.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use favorites Procedure 17-4: Rename group of favorites
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 17-4: Rename group of favorites

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Add to Favorites or Organize Favorites window, select a group to rename.

Result: The group is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click on Rename or
Right click and select Rename, OR
Press F2.
Result: The current name of the group is highlighted and becomes editable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Type the new name of the group.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use favorites Procedure 17-4: Rename group of favorites
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The name of the group is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Press Enter or click outside the name tag.

Result: If unique, the new name is saved.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use favorites Procedure 17-5: Delete favorite / group of favorites
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 17-5: Delete favorite / group of favorites

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Add to Favorites or Organize Favorites window, select a favorite / group to

delete, then click on Delete.
Result: A confirmation message appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on Yes.
Result: The favorite / group / sub-group of favorites is deleted. in the case of a group
removal, all the favorite functions it contained are also deleted.
The favorites tree is refreshed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use favorites Procedure 17-6: Organize favorites
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 17-6: Organize favorites

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the required function(s) from the function browser.

Result: The functions are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the menu bar, select Data -> Favorites -> Oganize....
Result: The Organize Favorites window appears.
The displayed favorites are those of the current mode and Function Type (active
function tree).
The Mode field displays the mode for which the organize favorites opens. On mode
navigation, the first function tab of the mode is activated. You can change the mode
by selecting a different mode from the list. Only modes of the active standard and
only the visible modes are displayed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use favorites Procedure 17-6: Organize favorites
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Function Tabs contains all the functions of the selected mode. Only the visible
tabs on the function browser are displayed. By changing the function tab, the favorites
of that function are loaded and the function tab from which organize favorites is
called appears.
The Favorites Hierarchy tree displays favorites organized by group and sub-group.
The tree is scrollable vertically and horizontally.
The following actions are available from this window:
Procedure 17-3: Create group to add favorites (p. 17-6)
Procedure 17-4: Rename group of favorites (p. 17-7)
Procedure 17-5: Delete favorite / group of favorites (p. 17-9)
Procedure 17-7: Move favorite / group of favorites to folder (p. 17-12)
Procedure 17-8: Import favorites (p. 17-13)
Procedure 17-9: Export favorites (p. 17-15).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use favorites Procedure 17-7: Move favorite / group of favorites to folder
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 17-7: Move favorite / group of favorites to folder

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Organize Favorites window, select the favorite / group to move.

Result: The required favorite or group is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Drag and drop it to the appropriate group.

Result: During the dragging process, if the favorite / group to move is incompatible
with the target group, the mouse pointer changes to . This may happen in the case
of a parent folder being dropped in a child folder, or if the source and destination
folders are the same.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Continue the dragging process to an appropriate group, where the mouse pointer is .
Result: The favorite / group is moved.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use favorites Procedure 17-8: Import favorites
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 17-8: Import favorites

Favorites can also be added in NPO by importing them from an xml file.
The exported file to be imported has no associated owner, so any user can import
favorites exported by another user.
If the active mode and the mode in the imported file are not the same, then the import is
only possible for the functions whose availability domain contains the active modes
object type.
Favorites defined for a Non Zone mode can be imported also for the corresponding Zone
mode (i.e. Favorite Indicators defined on 3G Cell can be imported in 3G Cell Zone
mode).
Favorites defined for a Zone mode can be imported also for the corresponding Non Zone
mode (i.e. Favorite Indicators defined on 3G Cell Zone can be imported in 3G Cell
mode).
When importing favorites, the existing favorites are merged with the imported ones.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Organize Favorites window, click on Import.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use favorites Procedure 17-8: Import favorites
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Import Favorites window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Browse for the favorites .xml file to import, then click on Import.
Result: The file is imported.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use favorites Procedure 17-9: Export favorites
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 17-9: Export favorites

The exported favorite must contain the mode and function type for which the .xml file is
exported.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Organize Favorites window, click on Export.

Result: The Export Favorites window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Browse for a location to export the selected favorite, then click on Export.
Result: The favorite is exported in .xml format. Its corresponding mode and function
types are also saved in the .xml file.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Use favorites Procedure 17-9: Export favorites
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
18 Views
18
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the management of view templates. It describes how to create, edit,
display, and delete a view template.
Contents
Presentation 18-2
Display view properties 18-11
Procedure 18-1: View template editor 18-21
Procedure 18-2: Execute view 18-42
Procedure 18-3: Edit executed view interactively 18-53
Procedure 18-4: Edit executed view using dialog box 18-75
Use executed view 18-79
Highlight in view 18-83
Show legend 18-85
Sort 18-89
Filter in view 18-90
Hide / unhide rows / columns / repeated values 18-95
Change view display type 18-98
Resize 18-98
Procedure 18-5: Copy to system clipboard 18-99
Copy executed view 18-99
Duplicate executed view 18-99
Procedure 18-6: Rename executed view 18-100
Procedure 18-7: Save executed view as template 18-101
Close executed view(s) 18-101
Procedure 18-8: Export executed views 18-103
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 18-9: Execute diagnosis in an executed view 18-107

Manage axis 18-107
Presentation
Definition
View enables the user to display results coming from any analysis service (e.g. functions)
in a tabular way or graphical way. A view contains the network objects, functions, and
execution context (period, interval, sampling, interpolation, reliability options). The limit
for the number of functions inside a view is 500.
A view template defines a set of indicators / parameters.
A view can be created:
By selecting network objects and view templates, then executing them on an
execution context (period, interval, sampling, interpolation, reliability), or
Interactively, by selecting network objects and indicators / counters / parameters /
events / rules / synthetic diagnosis, then dragging and dropping them into a viewer
browser.
Only the Equipment view cannot be created interactively.
The default limit for the maximum objects in a view in the view browser is 5000.
A view is also known as an Executed View and appears in the View Viewer.
The default limit for the maximum number of views, both executed and in progress
executions, in the report browser is 20.
To change Modify
The limit of 5000 objects Modify the following parameters:
The analysis.desktop.objects.views.limit
parameter from the following file:
/alcatel/muse/MUSEADWEBSTART/webapps/AD/rsc/com/
alcatel/muse/usm/config/ad_param.cfg
The MAXSIZE parameter from the following file:
/alcatel/muse/MUSE_MAAT/qos/rsc/com/alcatel/muse/
maat/qos/QoSResource.cfg
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To change Modify
The limit of 20 views in the Modify the following parameters:
view browser (both executed The
and in progress executions) analysis.desktop.views.inside.report.limit
The MAX_TABLE_GRAPH_TABS parameter from the
following file:
The MAX_VIEW_TEMPLATE_SIZE parameter from the
following file:
The limit of 20 views inside Modify the MAX_VIEW_TEMPLATE_SIZE parameter from the
the report following file:
The limit of 500 functions Modify the following parameters:
inside a view The
analysis.desktop.functions.inside.view.limit
The MAX_GRAPH_DATA_LIMIT parameter from the
following file:
In order for the updates to be taken into account in Analysis Desktop, the Analysis
Desktop must be closed, then re-opened.
Classification
The views can be displayed in one of the following modes.
Mode Definition
Tabular Displays the exact values of analysis services outputs in a table.
Graphical Displays analysis outputs with curves and histograms.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Four types of views are defined:
Standard
Vector
Matrix
Equipment.
Apart from the specific case of Equipment, views can also be grouped into four types of
evolution and comparison:
Mono-Object Evolution View
Multi-Object Evolution View
Multi-Object Comparison View
Mono-Object Distribution View.
Note: Mono-Object Distribution Views are not available in WiMAX.
In the following table, the Number of Objects refers to the number of network objects
used when creating the executed view. The Period Covered refers to the date(s) entered in
the execution context when creating the executed view.
Type Number of Period Covered View Constraints

Objects
Mono-Object One An interval Multiple standard indicators,
Evolution View counters, parameters, events,
rules, synthetic diagnosis
The matrix representation of
the view is:
The rows represent the
parameters
The columns define
Planned, Reference,
historical evolution,
Operational, and forecast
values according to what
the user chose to display
in the view template or
user preferences.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Objects
Multi-Object Many An interval One standard indicator,
Evolution View counter, parameter, rule,
event, synthetic diagnosis
The matrix representation of
the view is:
network objects
The columns define
Planned, Reference,
historical evolution,
Operational, and forecast
values according to what
the user chose to display
in the view template or
user preferences.
Multi-Object Many One date / An interval Multiple standard indicators,
Comparison View counters, parameters, events,
rules, synthetic diagnosis
The view has three
dimensions. The values
displayed in the view are:
Planned, Min Reference,
Reference, Max
Reference,ORV, Chosen
Date(s), Operational.
By default, the matrix
representation of the view is:
network objects
The columns define
parameters and date(s).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Objects
Mono-object One One date Vector and / or matrix
Distribution View indicators
The vector view is like the
standard indicator view
except that a dimension is
lost; the x-axis contains the
values of the x-axis
indicator. The view can only
be executed on one date and
network object.
The vector view contains
matrix indicator values for
both axis x and axis y
indicators.
Tabular and graphical modes

There are two types of modes defined for the views.
Mode Definition
Table mode, with all attached functions The table mode displays values of analysis
services outputs.
Optional rows and columns (such as Total,
Weight, Average and Order) may be displayed
in tabular views (depending on the choices
made at view template definition time).
Graphic mode, if the graphic representation is The graphical mode is defined from a subset
defined in the view template. of functions defined in the tabular mode.
The graphic mode displays analysis outputs
with curves, histograms with scales and
legend.
Only one mode appears at a time for each view. Indicators or Parameters may have
different graphical properties (legend) according to the mode used.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-1 Differences of view template indicator properties depending on mode
The following figure provides an example of the differences between table and graphic
modes for a view template.
Graphical and tabular view title format

The following title format is automatically filled in at view execution:
<Title as defined in view template> ' <'Equipment (N='Top N Value')
'Equipment View Class': 'Equipment View Type'' if Equipment view> <'-
' Alarm Criterion' ' if Equipment view of alarm> <object type> <':
'object tree label if single object>'-'<'Trend from' if Trend> <from
date and time depending on periodicity> <'to' to date and time
depending on periodicity> <'('periodicity if one of specified
cases')'> '('<Working Zone: Working Zone Name - QoS Requirement>')
'<' (Interpolation)' if not default> <'(Sampling)' if true>
<'(Reliability)' if true> <'('Type of Result')' if Equipment view>
<'('Time Range Type')' if Equipment view>
The used font style is bold, and the font size is Default Size.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Below the daily periodicity, the timestamp are displayed using the user time
zone and above or at the daily periodicity, the day / week / month timestamp are those
corresponding to NPO time zone.
Standard view template

Standard view templates contain standard indicators and / or parameters.
The graphics for the standard view templates are 2D.
See also Display standard view properties (p. 18-11).
Vector view template

Vector view templates contain vector indicators all of which have the same axis indicator.
The graphics for the vector view templates are 2D.
See also Display vector view properties (p. 18-13).
Matrix view template

Matrix view templates contain one matrix indicator which has two axis indicators.
The graphics for the matrix view template are 3D.
See also Display matrix view properties (p. 18-15).
Matrix distribution images
The following matrix distribution images are available:
Figure 18-2 Matrix view templates with grid without independent columns
Figure 18-3 Matrix view templates without grid with independent columns
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-4 Matrix view templates without grid without independent columns
Figure 18-5 Matrix view templates with grid without independent columns
Figure 18-6 Matrix view templates with grid with independent columns
Interval values
The interval values entered by the user are rounded according to the nbAfterPoint
attribute of the matrix indicator. This rounded value is the one used and displayed for the
interval bound, and not the input value.
Per default, min and max values are set to 0. If min or max changes, the corresponding
value is changed in the distribution scale, without changing colors, and other interval
values are updated according to the interval distribution function.
The update of min / max values is done:
In the distribution scale when modifying their values in static sections
In static sections when changing theirs values in the distribution scale.
In static distributed QoS views, interval values are written in black in the view legend.
Switching from Dynamic distribution mode to Static distribution mode and vice versa
does not change the number of steps or the colors of the distribution scale:
If the user changes the mode from custom distribution to linear / exponential /
logarithmic mode, a confirmation message appears to prevent the lost of previous
interval values
If the user changes any distribution value, the interval distribution becomes the
custom mode.
Equipment view template

Equipment view templates contain the top N of alarms, logs or basic unavailability.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The top N is generated according to a defined attribute of items. For instance, the top 1 of
alarms counts the highest number of items with the same value for this attribute.
Note: The values of the alarms in the Alarm Filters panel are case sensitive and must
be written exactly as they appear in NUART. For example, the Probable Cause for an
alarm in NUART is written as X721-performanceDegraded, then in View Template
Editor it must be written with the exact same characters in the Value field.
The graphics for the equipment view templates are 2D.
See also Display equipment view properties (p. 18-17).
Extension and restriction of availability domain

The availability domain can be managed by extending it or restricting it in views and
reports, for the following cases:
Create / Create By Copy View Template
Edit View Template
Edit View Template From Executed View by Dialog Box
Execute View(s)
Create / Create By Copy Report Template
Edit Report Template
Edit Report Template From Executed Report by Dialog Box
Executed View Modification in Report by Dialog Box
Execute Report(s).
Click on the appropriate checkbox to extend / restrict the availability domain.

For a warning report, if the filtering / sorting indicator is not available, the availability
domain cannot be extended.
If you try to add a function to a view, or interactively a view to a report, whose
availability domain is restricted, then the drop cursor indicates that the operation is not
allowed.
If the final availability domain was restricted to no longer be available on an object and
period, for example BSC as object and Day as periodicity, then this view / report cannot
be executed on BSC with Day periodicity.
By default all domains are restricted for a new equipment view.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following table gives the description of visibility of the Availability Domain:
Icon Object Visibility Description

Light Blue background Original availability domain (AND) where the
with black x. user can make restrictions.
Light Blue background The user can make extensions (OR).
with no x.
Light Blue background User made extensions.
with blue x.
Light Orange background User made restrictions.
with black x.
Blue x with no Inactive Extensions.
background color.
Light Orange background Inactive Restrictions.
with no x.
White background with User removed Inactive Extensions.
light gray x.
Light Gray background User removed Inactive Restrictions.
with no x.
No background color and User cannot extend or restrict.
no x.
Display view properties

Display standard view properties
The figures below provide an example of the Properties window of a standard view. For
more information about parameters, refer to Procedure 18-1.2: Create view template
(p. 18-23).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Display view properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-7 Example of standard view properties window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Display vector view properties

The figures below provide an example of the Properties window of a vector view. For
(p. 18-23).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-8 Example of vector view properties window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Display matrix view properties

The figures below provide an example of the Properties window of a matrix view. For
(p. 18-23).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-9 Example of matrix view properties window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Display equipment view properties

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The figures below provide an example of the Properties window of an equipment view.
For more information about parameters, refer to Procedure 18-1.2: Create view
template (p. 18-23).
Figure 18-10 Example of equipment view properties window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-1: View template editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 18-1: View template editor

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 18-1.1: Open view template editor (p. 18-22).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 18-1.2: Create view template (p. 18-23).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 18-1.3: Create view template by copy (p. 18-36).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Procedure 18-1.4: Edit view template (p. 18-37).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Procedure 18-1.5: Delete view template (p. 18-39).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Procedure 18-1.6: Export view template (p. 18-40).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-1.1: Open view template editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 18-1.1: Open view template editor

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click on the , OR
In the right frame, in the View tab, right click on any displayed report and select View
Template, OR
In the Analysis Desktop window, click on Data -> View Templates..., OR
Press Ctrl+E.
Result: The View Template Editor window opens.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-1.2: Create view template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 18-1.2: Create view template

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the View Template Editor window, click on .

Result: The View Template Type window opens, listing four view template types:
Standard
Vector
Matrix
Equipment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the appropriate view template type and click on OK, or
Double click on the appropriate view template type.
Result: The View Template Editor appears with default values and editable fields.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name
Name Name of the view template to be created. ViewTemplate_
<owner> _n
where<owner> is the
owner of the view
template.
Owner User who is creating the view template. The username you
This field is read-only logged in the NPO
application.
Created Date when the view template was created.
Modi- Date when the view template was last modified, in the case
fied of a view template update.
System True, if this view template is a System view template - thus
it cannot be modified or deleted except certain fields
(Visible) only by the Administrator.
Grayed, otherwise.
Avail- Availability Domain is the view template availability both
ability spatial and temporal. It is derived from availability domain
Domain of the indicators used in the view template.
It is created dynamically.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name
Rights
Title Title of the view template. New
Families If no family is added, then the view is not visible in the
function tree.
A table containing the families and sub-families to which the
view template can belong. There can be a maximum of four
sub-levels for each family.
To add a new family, right click in the Families panel
and select Add Family.
The pre-defined family values are: Connection,
DashBoard, DHT, GPRS, GSM, Handover, LCS, QoS,
RAB, Radio Measurement, RMS, SMS, Traffic,
Select an existing User Family, or edit your own Family.
In the next column, type the appropriate sub-family.
To remove an existing family, right click in the in the
Families panel and select Remove Family. All its
corresponding sub-families are automatically deleted.
If no family is added, then the view is not visible in the
function tree.
tion current view template.
Pre- The display type to view the results: tabular, graphical, or as Graphical or Tabular,
ferred user preference. according to user's
Display preference settings.
Type
Visible Checked: if you want the view template to be visible in the Checked
View Template Tree.
Unchecked: if you want the view template to be invisible in
the View Template Tree, except for the Administrator.
Filtering The indicator to be used for filtering when executing this
Indicator view in a warning report.
for This is one of the indicators from the tabular view indicators
Warning that has a threshold defined.
Sorting The indicator used for sorting when executing this view in a
Indicator warning report.
for Grayed when there is no Filtering Indicator for warning.
Warning
Sorting Indicates if the sorting indicator for warning is sorted in Best / Worst
Direc- ascending, descending or Best / Worst order, taking into
tion account the gravity sense (UpperIsFault).
Grayed when there is no sorting indicator for warning.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name
Optional This panel is only available for standard and equipment
Rows view templates.
Optional rows may be displayed in tabular views. Their
values can be:
Order, to display an addition row giving the order
number of every data column
Total, to display an additional row giving the total
number (sum of every row data) for every data column
Weight, to display an addition row giving the weight in
percentage for every data column
Average, to display an additional row giving the average
value (arithmetic mean) for every data column.
Optional This panel is only available for standard and equipment
Columns view templates.
Optional rows may be displayed in tabular views. Their
values can be:
Order, to display an addition row giving the order
number of every data column
Total, to display an additional row giving the total
number (sum of every row data) for every data column
Weight, to display an addition row giving the weight in
percentage for every data column
Average, to display an additional row giving the average
value (arithmetic mean) for every data column.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Depending on the type of view to create, perform one of the following options:
Create standard view (p. 18-26)
Create vector view (p. 18-28)
Create matrix view (p. 18-30)
Create equipment view (p. 18-32).
Result: The view is created accordingly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on .
Are you sure you want to create view template <view_template_name> ?.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click on Yes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The view is created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Create standard view

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Drag and drop as appropriate the following objects from the right frame in the Tabular
View:
Indicators
The indicators are filtered when creating a view template depending on their type:
For a standard view template, axis, vector and matrix indicators are not allowed
For a vector view template, only vector indicators are allowed
For a matrix view template, only matrix indicators are allowed.
Regardless of the type of view template, temporary indicators can only be added when
editing a view interactively.
Counters
Counters can only be added when editing a view interactively. They cannot be mixed
with any other type of object.
Design Parameters
Logical Parameters
Rules
Events
Free Fields
Synthetic Diagnosis.
Result: The availability domain is updated automatically depending on the
availability domain of the indicators, counters and parameters.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Primary Graphic, in the Tabular View, drag and drop the required objects.
Select the appropriate graphic Type.
For the Min and Max Y-Axis, leave Computed, or type the required values.
The Primary Graphic is not mandatory. If used, the axis for this graph appears on the left
side. The indicators / parameters chosen for this view are a subset of those in the tabular
view, without overlapping those in the secondary view, and all having the same units.
Parameters can only be added to the graphic depending on their type. Only number types
can be added. Parameters with multiple values cannot be added.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: When dropping a function in the Primary Graphic list, it is automatically
added in the Tabular View list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Secondary Graphic, Tabular View, drag and drop the required objects, other than
the ones used for Primary Graphic.
The Secondary Graphic is not mandatory too. If used, the axis for this graph appears on
the right side. The indicators / parameters chosen for this view are a subset of those in the
tabular view, without overlapping those in the primary view, and all having the same
units.
Result: When dropping a function in the Secondary Graphic list, it is automatically
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Drag and drop in the Filtering Indicator for warning the indicator to be used for filtering
when executing this view in a warning report.
This is one of the indicators from the Tabular view indicators that has a threshold defined
( or icons associated).
Result: The indicator parameters are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Drag and drop in the Sorting Indicator for warning the indicator to be used for sorting
when executing this view in a warning report.
This is one of the indicators from the Tabular view indicators.
Note: Filtering and Sorting Indicators for Warning Reports must be available on the
whole extended part of the view template availability domain, otherwise the view
template cannot be created and an error message appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Choose from the Sorting Direction the sorting indicator for warning (ascending,
descending or Best / Worst order). This takes into account the gravity sense
(UpperIsFault).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 In the Parameter Attributes field, select the type of values to display for all the parameters
in the view template (tabular and graphical modes):
Display Choice
Choose the type of values for parameters to display for all the parameters in the view
template for tabular and graphical modes. These override the choices in the user
preferences. At least one type has to be chosen if parameters are included in the view.
The following values are available.
Value Description
Operational Displays operational values.
Planned Displays planned values.
Min Reference Displays minimum reference values.
Reference Displays reference values.
Reference values are available only for
operational objects and not for soft-deleted
objects.
Max Reference Displays maximum reference values.
Forecast Displays forecast values of the tuning
sessions that will be selected in the
Execution Context.
Historical Displays historical values.
Operator Reference Displays operator reference values.
Value Change
If the Value Change option is checked, the source and target options are not valid.
Source
This parameter is used as the default comparison type for highlighting in the view.
Target
This parameter is used as the default comparison type for highlighting in the view.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Create vector view

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Drag and drop as appropriate the following objects from the right frame in the Tabular
View:
Indicators
The indicators are filtered when creating a view template depending on their type:
For a standard view template, axis, vector and matrix indicators are not allowed
For a vector view template, only vector indicators are allowed
For a matrix view template, only matrix indicators are allowed.
Regardless of the type of view template, temporary indicators can only be added when
editing a view interactively.
Counters
Counters can only be added when editing a view interactively. They cannot be mixed
with any other type of object.
Design Parameters
Logical Parameters
Rules
Events
Free Fields
Synthetic Diagnosis.
Result: The availability domain is updated automatically depending on the
availability domain of the indicators, counters and parameters.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Primary Graphic, in the Tabular View, drag and drop the required objects.
The Primary Graphic is not mandatory. If used, the axis for this graph appears on the left
side. The indicators / parameters chosen for this view are a subset of those in the tabular
view, without overlapping those in the secondary view, and all having the same units.
Result: When dropping a function in the Primary Graphic list, it is automatically
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Secondary Graphic, Tabular View, drag and drop the required objects, other than
the ones used for Primary Graphic.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Secondary Graphic is not mandatory too. If used, the axis for this graph appears on
the right side. The indicators / parameters chosen for this view are a subset of those in the
tabular view, without overlapping those in the primary view, and all having the same
units.
Result: When dropping a function in the Secondary Graphic list, it is automatically
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Drag and drop the appropriate indicator in the Axis Indicator.

There is just one axis indicator for a vector view template.
Result: The indicator is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Set the required values for:

Axis Indicator Name
The axis indicator name of the vector indicators in the tabular section. All vector
indicators must have the same axis indicator.
Legend
The legend for the axis indicator
Units
The units for the axis indicator
Reverse
True or False. If True, then Reverse the display of the Axis Indicator.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Create matrix view

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Drag and drop in the Matrix Indicator the appropriate indicator. There is only one Matrix
indicator per view.
Result: This automatically adds its two axis indicators.
For the X and Y-Axis Indicators of the Matrix Indicator, set as appropriate the:
Axis Indicator - the axis indicator name as specified on the added matrix indicator
Legend - the legend for each of the axis indicators
Units - the units for each of the axis indicators
Reverse - True or False. If True, then Reverse the display of the Axis Indicator.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Distribution Scale, add the following:

Inclusion scale
Color - color for Interval
User can change the color or can choose to automatically color all Intervals.
Min - minimum value for the range of this interval step
The first Min value may be None to correspond to negative infinity.
Max - maximum value for the range of this interval step
The last Max value may be None to correspond to positive infinity.
Min Inclusion - included or not
The inclusion of the Min value must be specified, for example, [2, 4] or ]2, 4]
showing that 2 is included in the first case and not included in the second case.
Max Inclusion - included or not.
The inclusion of the Max value must be specified, for example, [2, 4] or [2, 4[
showing that 4 is included in the first case and not included in the second case.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 For the Boundary parameters, choose either Dynamic or Static.

If Static is chosen, you may set Min and Max values. By default Min and Max are set to
0.
If you modify the Min value, then the Min of the first Interval Step is set to this value and
vice versa.
If you modify the Max value, then the Max of the last Interval Step is set to this value and
vice versa.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 For Interval Distribution, set the following:

Interval Distribution: Linear, Logarithmic, Exponential or Custom
Custom is only possible with Static Bound Determination.
Number of Intervals - the number of Interval steps needs to be listed and be editable.
If the number of Steps is modified in the table, this number must be updated and vice
versa.
Show Grid - Yes or No.
When set to Yes, draws a grid. Otherwise it does not.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create equipment view
Note: The availability domain for an equipment view contains a set of object types
and a set of periodicities.
In Basic Unavailability case, the availability domain contains only one object type
and it is automatically updated depending on the selected basic unavailability type.
For W-CDMA technology, if you choose Total outage as the basic unavailability type,
only the object type that have Total outage kind of basic unavailability will be
selected in the availability domain.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 For the Equipment View Type, select the appropriate type of equipment view template
from the following values:
Alarm
Basic Unavailability
Log.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Graphics panel, select the appropriate graphic Type.

The possible values are:
Bar Chart
Continuous Line.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Time Range Type field, select the target time range type for Top N computation.
Unavailability Relevant Hours,
Unavailability Non Relevant Hours
24 Hours.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Choose the appropriate Preferred Date Display Type.

Visible, for an Equipment view with the details made visible for all the dates in the
chosen period
The intermediary totals for every date of the period appears.
Hidden, for an Equipment view with the details made hidden for all the dates in the
chosen period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Only the global Top N result for the considered period appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 In the Type of Result field, select the type of information on which the Top N
computation is based.
Number of Occurrences
Time.
The time is displayed in:
Graphical mode: in seconds
Tabular mode: in days / hours / minutes / seconds. The exact format is:
<nb of days>d <nb of hours>h <nb of minutes>m <nb of
seconds>s
For example: 3d 4h12m10s
If the computed time is less than one day, then the day part is not displayed and so
on.
For instance: time = 6.5 hours is displayed as 6h30m0s; time = 12 seconds is
displayed as 12s.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Select the appropriate Basic Unavailability Type from the available dropdown list.
For instance, for GSM standard, the list of possible values is GSM and GPRS, but this
must be generic at Analysis Desktop level.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Select the appropriate Alarm Criterion from the available dropdown list.
Optionally, in the Alarm Filters panel, add the appropriate:
Attribute, by selecting it from the available dropdown list
Operator, by selecting it from the available dropdown list
Value
Define the value by:
Selecting it from the available dropdown list with possible values in the case of
Attribute (Event Type , Perceived Severity , Probable Cause and Specific
Problem)
Double clicking in the Value row and typing the required criterion value for the
selected alarm in the case of Attribute (Friendly Name).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Select between:
All to get all available considered values (and not only the top N values)
Top N to get the top N values selection. This is the default value.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 If is the case, select the Top N Value representing the number of items to be displayed in
the Equipment view.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Select the appropriate value for Among Network Object:

Yes, to get a Top N where the classification computation is based on the pairs
(Network Object instance, Top N item)
In this case, the corresponding object instance label is used as a prefix for every row
header label (which basically corresponds to a top N item instance) of the resulting
view.
No, otherwise (global Top N item classification, whatever the related network object
instance).
Example:
Object / Alarm Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 3

C1 1 9 8
C2 3 11 12
C3 7 35 4
Total 11 55 24
Result: Considering the above input data, the result is:

If Among Network Object = No
55 and 24 are respectively the Top 1 and Top 2 values
Alarm 2 and Alarm 3 are respectively the Top 1 and Top 2 alarm item
instances.
If Among Network Object = Yes
35 and 12 are respectively the Top 1 and Top 2 values
C3-Alarm 2 and C2-Alarm 3 are respectively the Top 1 and Top 2 alarm item
instances.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 To have an additional graphic view, select the Graphic Mode checkbox.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If you need only a tabular view, deselect it.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Select the Grouped by Dependency check box if you want that Basic Unavailability to
be grouped by Dependency for counting.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Select the Include Children check box, when equipment view type is Alarm or Log, if
you want to include children in the count / outage request.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Select the appropriate value for Selection Filter:

Active Alarms, that counts the number of alarms raised only
Raised Alarms, that counts the number of all active alarms.
Optionally, in the Alarm Filters panel, add the appropriate:
Attribute, by selecting it from the available dropdown list
Operator, by selecting it from the available dropdown list
Value
Define the value by:
Selecting it from the available dropdown list with possible values in the case of
Attribute (Event Type , Perceived Severity , Probable Cause and Specific
Problem)
Double clicking in the Value row and typing the required criterion value for the
selected alarm in the case of Attribute (Friendly Name).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-1.3: Create view template by copy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 18-1.3: Create view template by copy

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the View Template Editor window, select the view to copy, then click on .
Result: The view is copied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 The user can choose to either copy by duplicating only the view template (thus linking to
the existing view templates) or by also duplicating the related view templates.
Result: The new view template is created with a default name:
The View Template Properties window is filled with the existing values, except for
the name and owner.
The user becomes the owner of the view template.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The new view is created and the function tree is refreshed.
If the view is public, other users are notified and they have to manually refresh the
tree.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-1.4: Edit view template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 18-1.4: Edit view template

The operator can edit the existing view by adding / removing one / more objects
(indicators, counters, design / logical parameters, rules, events, free fields, synthetic
diagnosis), or by changing the existing view data.
A view cannot be edited if the modification impacts its current use.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Open the view to modify.

Result: The view opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the View Template Editor window, click on .

Result: The property editor displays the View Template Properties panel interface.
The current attribute values of the selected view are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Only the owner of the view or the Administrator can update its values. The name of the
view can also be updated.
The operator is not allowed to modify the view template owner.
If the owner of the view is not the one viewing it, the Edit button is grayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 To add new functions, drag them from the right frame in the Tabular View panel.
In the case of an initial 2D view with multiple dates and network objects, if adding new
functions, the view is interactively changed into 3D type.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 To set existing object(s) in the graphical representation, select it (them) in the Tabular
View and drag and drop them to the Primary / Secondary Graphic panels.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click on OK in the confirmation window, then click on Close to close the View Template
Editor window.
Result: The changes are saved.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 To remove a view template or a comment zone, select it, right click and select Remove.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-1.4: Edit view template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The view template or comment zone is removed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 To reorder the view templates or comment zones in the report:

Use the Up / Down arrows, or
Right click and select as appropriate:
Move to first position
Move to last position
Move up
Move down.
Result: The view templates or comment zones are reordered.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 To save the changes, click on OK.

Result: If the edited view is public then other users are notified that the view template
is modified.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-1.5: Delete view template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 18-1.5: Delete view template

A view cannot be deleted if it is part of a report.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the view to delete.

Result: The view is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

In the View Template Editor window, click on , OR
In the Alcatel-Lucent Analysis Desktop window, from the menu bar, select Edit ->
Delete, OR
Press the Delete on the keyboard.
Are you sure you want to delete view template <view_name> ?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If only one view is selected to be deleted, click on Yes.

If multiple views are selected to be deleted, click on Yes to All.
Result: The view(s) is deleted from the operator function tree.
If the deleted view template is public, other users are notified about the deletion and
they must manually refresh their function tree.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-1.6: Export view template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 18-1.6: Export view template

This export allows to share between different NPOs some customer view templates.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select one or more view templates from the view template tree of the View Template
editor.
Result: The view template(s) is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the View Template Editor window, click on .

Note: If only system view templates are selected in the view template tree of View
Template editor, the Export button is disabled.
Result: If the current selection of view templates contains some system view
templates, a warning dialog is displayed listing all the selected system view templates
and explains that they will not be exported.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Browse for the location to save the view(s) and give the appropriate File Name.
Click on Save.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on OK.
Result: The selected templates are exported in an xml report dictionary containing
only the selection. The file is exported in the location defined in the previous step.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
NPO Administration User Guide document, to Import reports dictionary using GUI
procedure.
If some of the exported view templates are referencing customer objects, like indicators,
rules or free fields, a warning dialog is displayed indicating that the exported view
templates may not be imported on another system if the embedded customer objects are
not also exported and imported on the other system before the import of these view
templates.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-1.6: Export view template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The warning dialog also lists all the concerned customer objects and a Propagate button
is available to allow propagating them into the corresponding functions trees. Then, from
the corresponding function tree, the user can open the corresponding editor (by a right
click) and export these customer functions.
Refer to:
NPO Administration User Guide document, to Export QoS dictionary using GUI
NPO Administration User Guide document, to Import parameter rules using GUI
NPO Administration User Guide document, to Import free fields using GUI
Note: When a multi selection is done in a function tree of the Analysis Desktop and
the corresponding editor is opened from that tree (by a right click), the complete
selection is propagated in the editor (not only the first object).
Only the first object of the selection remains detailed in the edition part of the editor
window (as when doing a multi-selection directly in the left tree of an object editor).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-2: Execute view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 18-2: Execute view

You can view the values of Network Objects / Indicators / Counters / Parameters / Rules /
Events / Free Fields / Diagnosis / THL Templates by executing them in views.
For information about the procedure Refer to

to execute
Counters / indicators / parameters / view As below.
templates
Rules Procedure 13-1: Execute rules (p. 13-13)
Events Procedure 14-1.1: Execute Events (p. 14-8)
Free Fields Procedure 15-1: Execute free fields (p. 15-7)
Diagnosis scenario Procedure 22-4: Execute diagnosis in detailed
mode (p. 22-11)
THL template Procedure 24-4: Execute THL (p. 24-86)
View in MultiNET Mode Procedure 20-2: Execute view / report in
MultiNET mode (p. 20-7)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the network elements and the counters / indicators / parameters / view templates,
then:
Drag and drop them in the Tabular / Graphical Viewer, OR
Select from the menu bar View -> Execute View..., OR
Press Ctrl+Q.
Note: The QoS Counters / Diagnosis cannot be mixed with any other type of objects
that can be put in a view template. Vector and Matrix View Templates cannot contain
anything else than Vector and Matrix Indicators.
Result: The values related to the dropped objects are displayed in the Tabular /
Graphical Viewer.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 The Execution Context window appears. Enter the appropriate information, as presented
in Execution context (p. 3-19).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The NPO checks if the start time provided is older than the oldest date stored
in the NPO. In this case, an error message appears.
This message indicates that a view at 1/2 hour periodicity cannot be executed before
the oldest start time allowed
This message is the same as for other periodicities.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: When executing a view with indicators, if the Nerr value appears for a cell,
this indicates a numeric error due to a miscalculation of an indicator (for example,
when dividing by zero).
If the executed view is empty, the title of the view appears and, in place of the report
area, a message is written, explaining that no data is available for the view:
No data is available for the request
Depending on the selected number of network objects and indicators or counters, you
can have many types of executed views; refer to Examples of executed views
(p. 18-44).
In the tabular view, numerical values are aligned on the right side of the table cells.
When the executed view embeds indicator functions, the related basic indicator
formula is available for every displayed indicator through a tool tip triggered on
indicator label.
In case of a request which takes more time, the Execute View in Progress window
appears before the executed view is displayed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 To execute other tasks while the request for the current view is in progress, click on
Run in background from the Execute View in Progress window.
Result: The On-going tab is created in the View browser. This is an empty tab which
displays a moving bar showing the submitted request is in progress.
If the view execution will generate multiple executed views, an On-going tab is
created for each view.
When a result is received by the Analysis Desktop, the on-going icon is removed
and the progress bar is replaced by the view content.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 To cancel the requested view, right - click on the On-going tab and click on Close.
Result: The Cancel Confirmation window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 In the Cancel Confirmation window, click on Yes.

Result: The in-progress request for the view / views is canceled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 To schedule the view, refer to Procedure 19-5: Schedule reports (p. 19-60).
Result: The view is scheduled.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Examples of executed views

Examples of executed views in tabular mode
The following figures provide examples of the possible resulting tables for the executed
view in tabular mode.
Figure 18-11 Mono-object evolution view with counters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-12 Multi-object comparison with indicators
Figure 18-13 Multi-object comparison view with parameters
Figure 18-14 Multi-object evolution with multiple network objects, one counter
and several dates
Figure 18-15 Multi-counters, one object evolution with raw counters
Figure 18-16 Indicator view, multiple network objects, one indicator, several dates
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-17 Indicator view, one network object, multiple indicators, several
dates
Figure 18-18 Indicator view, multiple network objects, multiple indicators, one
date
Figure 18-19 Indicator view, multiple network objects, multiple indicators, several
dates
Figure 18-20 Vector view
Figure 18-21 Matrix view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-22 Equipment view with Preferred Date Display Type=Visible and Among
Network Objects No with N=10 and Top N Item = Alarm-Specific
Problem
Examples of executed views in graphical mode

The following figures provide examples of the possible resulting tables for the executed
view in graphical mode.
Figure 18-23 Mono-object evolution view with counters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-24 Multi-object evolution view
Figure 18-25 Multi-object comparison view with indicators
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-26 Multiple network object, multiple indicators, several dates
Figure 18-27 Vector view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-28 Matrix view with static bound out-of range values
In the above figure min and max values in the Legend panel with black color font
indicate that the Bound Distribution type is Static in the executed view. The user can also
select individual colored cell that will be highlighted with invert color rectangle in the
colored cell and the value of the cell appears in the Last Selected Value.
Figure 18-29 Equipment view with visible dates example (N=4, Top N Item=Alarm
Perceived Severity, Among Network Objects=No)
Raw Counters Graphical Display

The user is allowed to display the graphical view for counters in raw periodicity of a
maximum of 7 days.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The graphical view divides all the data by the smallest raw periodicity time (or the
smallest difference between starting RP times) so that the data can be equally compared.
The following example shows how to divide the data using raw periodicity:
Figure 18-30 Equipment view with visible dates example (N=4, Top N Item=Alarm
The following figure shows the data that is used to create the graphial mode. The values
are adjusted to the smallest raw periodicity.
For example, in the table above the smallest raw periodicity is 15 min. So the value 100
of Cell A for the first counter RTCH_request (GTCAHRQN) is divided such that its raw
periodicity is 15 min thus 100 / 4 = 25. Likewise, RTCH_request (GTCAHRQN) for Cell
B is divided by 2 to go from an raw periodicity of 30 min to an RP of 15 min.
Figure 18-31 Equipment view with Visible Dates Example (N=4, Top N Item=Alarm
The graphs for raw counters are as follows:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-32 Raw graphical display for one counter, multi-object evolution
Figure 18-33 Raw graphical display for multi-counter, one object evolution
The counters are displayed showing the same values and associated duration as in the
original data.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3: Edit executed view interactively
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 18-3: Edit executed view interactively

The user can change the display properties that appear in the executed view interactively.
The update appears directly on the displayed executed view.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 18-3.1: Edit title (p. 18-54).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 18-3.2: Add network objects / indicators / counters / parameters / rules /

events / free fields / diagnoses (p. 18-55).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 18-3.3: Remove network objects / indicators / counters / parameters / rules /

events / free fields / diagnoses (p. 18-56).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Procedure 18-3.4: Roll up / drill down temporally (p. 18-57).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Procedure 18-3.5: Roll up / drill down spatially (p. 18-61).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Procedure 18-3.6: Direct spatial - temporal drill down (p. 18-65).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Procedure 18-3.7: Cursor facilities in graphical view (p. 18-66).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Procedure 18-3.8: Zoom in / out / rectangular for graphical view (p. 18-68).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Procedure 18-3.9: Change scale format in graphical view (p. 18-70).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Procedure 18-3.10: Rotate / inverse axis of view (p. 18-71).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Procedure 18-3.11: Propagate selection to network object / function trees in view

(p. 18-72).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Procedure 18-3.12: Refresh view (p. 18-73).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3.1: Edit title
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 18-3.1: Edit title

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the tabular or graphical view, double click on the view title.

Result: The title becomes editable. You can change only the real title part (as in the
view template) and not the additional information (ie. execution context information).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Press Enter or change the focus.

Result: The new value of the title is accepted.
If you press Esc, the old value appears and the title field is grayed.
Example: The following figure shows the behavior of editing a title in the executed
view.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3.2: Add network objects / indicators /
counters / parameters / rules / events / free fields /
diagnoses
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 18-3.2: Add network objects / indicators / counters

/ parameters / rules / events / free fields / diagnoses
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the network objects / indicators / counters / parameters / rules / events / free fields /
diagnoses to add.
Result: The network elements are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Add the selected network objects to the view browser using Ctrl and drag and drop
(depending on the user preferences).
Result: Depending on the user preferences, the selected items are added to the
executed view, or a new view is created. The same Execution context (p. 3-19) is
used for the new items.
If indicators / counters / parameters are added to a graphic view, they are added to the
primary or secondary one (and tabular) depending on their units. If their units are not
those in the graphics, they are just added to the tabular.
If a vector indicator is added to a vector view template, it is added as the last
indicator.
If a matrix indicator is added to a matrix view, the current matrix indicator is replaced
by the new one since there is only one matrix indicator per view. The corresponding X
and Y axis indicators are then updated based on the new matrix indicator.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3.3: Remove network objects / indicators /
diagnoses
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 18-3.3: Remove network objects / indicators /

diagnoses
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select from the topology tree the network objects / indicators / counters / parameters /
rules / events / free fields / diagnoses to remove.
Result: The network elements are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Press Ctrl and drag and drop (depending on the user preferences).
Result: Depending on the user preferences, the selected items are removed from the
current view or in a new view. The same Execution context (p. 3-19) is used for the
remaining items.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3.4: Roll up / drill down temporally
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 18-3.4: Roll up / drill down temporally

This feature allows the user to Roll Up / Drill Down temporally in the executed view.
As a prerequisite, the executed view must already exist in the tabular / graphical viewer.
The temporal roll up / drill down can be in:
Standard mode
The Roll Up / Drill Down in standard mode implicitly takes into account the dates and
times involved in the current selection, to directly reduce the scope of the temporal
roll up or drill down accordingly. If the selection is composed of a discontinuous set
of dates and times, the earliest and latest dates and times are kept to define the new
temporal scope. If no selection is done, the start and end date and time of the executed
view are taken into account.
If nothing is selected in the view, or if the selection is not significant in the current
context, the temporal roll up / drill down is achieved on the whole temporal scope.
Advanced mode
The Roll Up / Drill Down in advanced mode opens the Advanced Rollup/DrillDown
window, enabling you to redefine the targeted temporal roll up or drill down.
To Roll Up Do
Standard mode Perform one of the following options:
From the tool bar, select View -> Temporal Scope -> Roll Up,
OR
Click on the icon from the view tool bar, OR
Right click on the view title area and select Temporal Scope ->
Roll Up.
Advanced mode Perform one of the following options:
From the tool bar, select View -> Temporal Scope ->Advanced
Roll Up, OR
Advanced Roll Up.
To Drill Down Do
From the tool bar, select View -> Temporal Scope -> Drill Down,
OR
Drill Down.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Drill Down Do
From the tool bar, select View -> Temporal Scope ->Advanced
Drill Down, OR
Advanced Drill Down.
The Advanced Rollup/DrillDown window is composed of the following information:

Temporal Scope - Start and End dates and times involved in the current selection are
presented. If the selection is composed of a discontinuous set of dates and times, the
earliest and latest dates and times are kept to define the new temporal scope. This
scope can never exceed the original observation interval of the considered view
(i.e.Min. possible date/time = start date/time of the view execution context, Max.
possible date/time = end date/time of the view execution context).
Target Periodicity - Based on the current Availability Domain, a drop-down list of
available periodicities is included, to select the target periodicity, enabling to skip
some intermediary ones. Whatever the selected periodicity is, the target temporal
scope (observation interval) is based on the above temporal scope.
Spatial Scope - The list of network objects of the view involved in the current
selection. According to the current roll up / drill down, you are able to remove or add
objects to the PreferredList, through the use of the AvailableList, containing all
the objects of the view. The Select All option, using the CTRL+A shortcut, is available
in these lists.
Target Topology Level - This parameter is read-only. By default, the current network
object type is selected.
Table 18-1 Parameters of the Advanced Rollup/DrillDown window
Parameter Description Mandatory Read-

Name Only
Temporal Scope
Start Date for the start of interval Yes No
Starting Hour Hour for the start of interval No No
Starting Minute Minute for the start of interval No No
End Date for the end of interval No No
Ending Hour Hour for the end of interval or for a single No No
date time when multiple network objects and
functions are selected
Ending Minute Minute for the end of interval or for a single No No
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 18-1 Parameters of the Advanced Rollup/DrillDown window (continued)

Name Only
Target Based on current Availability Domain, a Yes No
Periodicity drop-down list of available periodicities is
included, to select the target periodicity,
enabling you to skip some intermediary ones.
Spatial Scope
AvailableList Contains the network objects of the executed Yes Yes
view
PreferredList Contains the selected network objects for the Yes No
execution
To move a network object from the
AvailableList panel to the PreferredList
panel, use the Add button.
To remove a network object from the
PreferredList panel, use the Remove button.
Target Topology For temporally Roll up / Drill down, the Yes Yes
Level Target Topology Level option is inactive.
The interval on the view changes according to the temporal availability. Depending on the
user preferences, the data is updated either in the executed view or in a new view.
Below day periodicities such as: 4Hr, 1/2Hr, 1/4Hr, RAW etc. are treated as Hourly. If the
user rolls up from one of these periodicities, it is the same as rolling up from Hour.
Drilling down from Day always goes to Hour, if it is available, and not to one of the other
day periodicities described below:
The default sequence of roll up is: 5 Minutes->Quarter Hour->Half
Hour->Hour->Two Hour->Three Hour->Four Hour->Six Hour->Eight
Hour->Day->Week->Month
The default sequence of drill down is: Month->Week->Day->Eight Hour->Six
Hour->Four Hour->Three Hour->Two Hour->Hour->Half Hour->Quarter Hour->5
Minutes.
Temporal Roll Up and Drill Down below Hour periodicity are also available for counters.
If any filter is active on the current view, the Roll Up or Drill Down is always performed
on the actual data (invisible data is also taken into account, filtering is ignored).
Example:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cells are displayed on a Day basis and the current availability domain of the executed
view is as indicated in the following table.
Hour Day Week Month

Network X
RNC X
Cell X X
Adjacency X X
If you Roll Up from Day, the new period will be Month and not Week, because Cells are
not available on Week but are on Month. You cannot Drill Down because Cells are not
available on Hour.
You can choose to Roll Up or Drill Down, in Standard mode, only some rows / columns.
Select the rows / columns and:
Right click and select Temporal Scope-> Roll Up or Drill Down, OR
From the tool bar, select View -> Temporal Scope -> Roll Up or Drill Down, OR
Click on the Roll Up icon or on Drill Down icon from the view tool bar.
If the columns / rows are sorted and are not in a contiguous order and then selected for
roll up / drill down, the start and end dates considered will be the oldest and newest
selected dates respectively.
Temporal Roll Up / Drill down by sub-selection is not possible in 3D views when the
dates are present in the top level header as it is not possible to select them.
Note: For Temporal Drill Down from daily value for stored / calculated temporal
aggregation indicator (e.g. BH, MAX, MIN, AVG), the NPO will display the value of
the telecom indicator at hourly level.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3.5: Roll up / drill down spatially
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 18-3.5: Roll up / drill down spatially

This feature allows the user to interactively Roll Up / Drill Down spatially in an executed
view, and add or remove network objects.
For this, the executed view must already exist in the tabular / graphical viewer.
The spatial roll up / drill down can be in:
Standard mode
In tabular view, the standard mode implicitly takes the network objects involved in the
current selection, if any, to directly reduce the scope of the spatial roll up or drill
down accordingly. If nothing is selected, or if the selection is not significant in the
current context, takes all the network objects present in the view.
In graphical view, network object selection is not possible, so spatial roll up / drill
down in standard mode triggers for all network objects present in the current executed
view.
As there is no network object selection possible in the graphical mode, a spatial roll
up / drill down in Standard Mode triggered from a graphical executed view simply
achieves the operation on the whole scope.
Advanced mode
The Roll up / Drill down in Advanced Mode opens an intermediary dialog enabling to
refine the targeted spatial roll-up or drill down.
A spatial roll-up/drill-down in Advanced Mode triggered from a graphical executed
view opens the related dialog with, by default, both the original view temporal and
spatial scopes. You are able to change the same editable parameters as in the tabular
mode.
To Roll Up Do
From the tool bar, select View -> Spatial Scope -> Roll Up,
OR
Right click on the view title area and select Spatial Scope ->
Roll Up.
From the tool bar, select View -> Spatial Scope ->Advanced
Roll Up, OR
Advanced Roll Up.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Drill Down Do
From the tool bar, elect View -> Spatial Scope -> Drill Down,
OR
Drill Down.
From the tool bar, select View -> Spatial Scope ->Advanced
Drill Down, OR
The Advanced Rollup/DrillDown window is composed of the following information:

Temporal Scope - Start and End dates and times involved in the current selection are
presented. If the selection is composed of a discontinuous set of dates and times, the
earliest and latest dates and times are kept to define the new temporal scope. This
scope can never exceed the original observation interval of the considered view
(i.e.Min. possible date/time = start date/time of the view execution context, Max.
possible date/time = end date/time of the view execution context).
Target Periodicity - This parameter is read-only. by default, the current periodicity is
selected.
Spatial Scope - The list of network objects of the view involved in the current
selection. According to the current roll up / drill down, you are able to remove or add
objects to the PreferredList, through the use of the AvailableList, containing all
the objects of the view. The Select All option, using the CTRL+A shortcut, is available
in these lists.
Target Topology Level - Based on the current Availability Domain, a drop-down list
enables you to select a different topology level and perform a spatial Roll-Up /
Drill-down at the same time (in the same direction, up or down), based on the above
spatial scope (network objects list).

Name Only
Temporal Scope
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name Only
Target For spatial Roll up / Drill down, this option is Yes Yes
Periodicity inactive.
Spatial Scope
view
execution
Target Topology Based on current Availability Domain, a Yes No
Level drop-down list is included, to select a
different topology level and perform a spatial
Roll-Up / Drill-down at the same time (in the
same direction, up or down), based on the
above spatial scope (network objects list).
The network objects in the view change depending on the spatial availability.
The interval on the view changes depending on the spatial availability. The data is
updated either in the executed view or in a new view, according to the user preferences.
When rolling up or drilling down to a relation, the relations that have the current network
object as the source are used; i.e. if the current object is Cell1 and the user drills-down to
Adjacency, then all the Adjacencies that have Cell1 as the source are displayed in the
resulting view.
When triggering a Drill Down for a mono-object evolution or a mono-object distribution
view, then views are generated as when executing them.
If any filter is active on the current view, the Roll Up or Drill Down is always performed
on the actual data (invisible data is also taken into account, filtering is ignored).
Example:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cells are displayed on a Week basis and the current availability domain of the executed
view is:
Hour Day Week Month

Network X
RNC X X
Cell X
Adjacency X X X
If you Roll up from Cell, the new network object will be Network and not RNC, because
there is no RNC on Week but Network is available on Week periodicity.
If you Drill down from Cell, the new network objects will be all the outgoing Adjacencies
for all the Cells because Adjacencies are available on Week periodicity.
You can choose to Roll Up or Drill Down, in Standard mode, only some rows / columns.
Select the rows / columns and:
Right click and select Spatial Scope-> Roll Up or Drill Down, OR
From the tool bar, select View -> Spatial Scope -> Roll Up or Drill Down, OR
Click on the Roll Up icon or on Drill Down icon from the view tool bar.
Spatial Roll Up / Drill down by sub-selection is not possible in 3D views when the
network objects are present in the top level header as it is not possible to select them.
When triggering a Roll Up or Drill Down in the context of a Working Zone, the Roll Up
or Drill Down is achieved inside the associated Working Zone topology.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3.6: Direct spatial - temporal drill down
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 18-3.6: Direct spatial - temporal drill down

The direct spatial - temporal drill down is available only for a selected cell from the
tabular view. When the cell is selected, the icon becomes active in the view tool bar.
By direct spatial - temporal drill down, the following are performed on the function
associated to the current selection:
A spatial drill-down to the next sub-network objects, relatively to the network object
of the current selection
A temporal drill-down to the next sub-periodicity, relatively to the date / time of the
current selection.
Perform one of the following options:
To Do
Achieve a direct spatial - temporal drill From the tool bar, select the icon.
down on the selected cell
Achieve a direct spatial - temporal drill Right click on the cell and select Direct
down on the selected cell Spatial-Temporal Drill-Down.
The data is updated either in the executed view or in a new view, depending on the
user preferences.
If there is no available topological sub-level, then the direct drill down will not be
spatial, but only temporal.
If there is no available periodicity sub-level, then the direct drill down will not be
temporal, but only spatial.
If the selected cell is already at the lowest spatial and temporal level, the function is
not accessible and the direct spatial-temporal drill down cannot be performed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3.7: Cursor facilities in graphical view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 18-3.7: Cursor facilities in graphical view
To Do
Use the cursor facilities Perform one of the following options:
From the tool bar, select the cursor icon, OR
From the menu bar, select View -> Cursor Mode.
Display the values on the axis Move the cursor over the view area.
Change the mouse cursor A vertical bar is always shown in the graphical display. By
moving it, the mouse cursor changes. The values for the
cursor area are shown at the current cursor location, like
on a tool tip. These values are also displayed in the legend.
Show grid lines Perform one of the following options:
Click on the icon from the view tool bar, then select
Display Grid Lines, and click again on , OR
From the menu bar, select View -> Cursor Mode
Choices -> Display Grid Lines.
Show the values at cursor Perform one of the following options:
Click on the icon from the view tool bar, then select
Display Value at Cursor, and click again on , OR
From the menu bar, select View -> Cursor Mode
Choices -> Display Value at Cursor.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3.7: Cursor facilities in graphical view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure shows the cursor facilities in graphical view.
In the case of reports, the vertical bars on executed views are synchronized.
Synchronizing the vertical bars causes the views to scroll when necessary of the value
in one view is not visible in another view.
When using the cursor in graphical mode and then switching to tabular mode, the
corresponding row / column gets automatically selected and visible. The tabular view
is scrolled if necessary to display the selected column.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3.8: Zoom in / out / rectangular for graphical
view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 18-3.8: Zoom in / out / rectangular for graphical

view
To Do
Zoom in Perform one of the following:
Select View -> Zoom In (+) from the menu bar, OR
Press the Ctrl key and move the mouse wheel down.
This magnifies the view on the graph.
Zoom out Perform one of the following:
Select View -> Zoom Out (-) from the menu bar, OR
Press the Ctrl key and move the mouse wheel up.
This reduces the size of the graph in the view.
Zoom in rectangular mode Perform one of the following:
Select View -> Zoom Mode from the menu bar
This allows you to draw a rectangle on the displayed chart
in order to define the area on which the zoom is directly
achieved.
Reset to the original size Perform one of the following:
Right click in the view and select Reset Graphic, OR
Select View -> Reset Graphic from the menu bar.
The data is zoomed on X-Axis only.

The tool bar buttons trigger a zoom action automatically centered on the visible area. For
example, if the entire graph displays data from 0H to 24H, and the current visible area is
only from 8H to 12H, if you click on:
, the view displays data from 9H to 11H
, the view displays data from 6H to 14 H.
The Ctrl key and mouse wheel combination enables to zoom centered on where the
mouse pointer is located. If the mouse pointer is on top of a graphical view, when Ctrl
key and mouse wheel is used, the view graphs will get zoomed in or out according to the
mouse wheel direction.
To activate the zoom mode, click on the icon, then drag the mouse pointer on the chart
to directly define the targeted X-Axis subarea on which to focus.
The following figure shows an example of zooming in rectangular mode.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3.8: Zoom in / out / rectangular for graphical
view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-34 Zoom in rectangular mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3.9: Change scale format in graphical view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 18-3.9: Change scale format in graphical view
To Do
Choose a different display scale Perform one of the following options:
for the Y-Axis of the primary Right click in the view and select Scale -> Primary
graph
From the menu bar, select View -> Scale -> Primary
The following list appears, enabling to choose a different
display scale for the primary graph:
None
Hundreds
Thousands
Millions
Billions
Trillions.
Choose a different display scale Perform one of the following options:
for the Y-Axis of the secondary Right click in the view and select Scale -> Secondary
graph
From the menu bar, select View -> Scale -> Secondary
The following list appears, enabling to choose a different
display scale for the secondary graph:
None
Hundreds
Thousands
Millions
Billions
Trillions.
According to the chosen scale, the Y-Axis tick labels values are displayed respectively
literally ( None), divided by: 100 ( Hundreds), 1 000 ( Thousands), 1 000 000 (
Millions), 1 000 000 000 ( Billions) or 1 000 000 000 000 ( Trillions).
By default, the used scale is None.
This feature is also available for Vector Views and the executed views from a report.
In case of 3D Views, a selected scale applies to all the 2D graphs of the 3D View.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3.10: Rotate / inverse axis of view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 18-3.10: Rotate / inverse axis of view

To Do
Rotate / inverse the axis of a view Click on the icon from the view tool bar.
Rotate / inverse the axis of a view Select View -> Inverse axis from the menu bar.
In a graphical view, the axis are inversed. In a Tabular view, the rows are inversed with
the columns.
This is applicable also to 3D Views.
For example, if the indicators are on the horizontal axis and the cells are on the vertical
axis, when the user chooses to inverse the axis, the indicators are displayed on the vertical
axis and the cells are displayed on the horizontal axis.
Once inversed, if the view is then updated (interactive modification or view update from
the executed view properties dialog) the axes are kept in the same inversed state.
Note: To export the graphical view after rotation, for the excel format the graphic is
not exported with the rotated axis. For the pdf and html format the export is done with
the rotated axis.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3.11: Propagate selection to network object /
function trees in view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 18-3.11: Propagate selection to network object /

function trees in view
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click on icon from the view tool bar, OR
Right click in the view and select Propagate, OR
From the menu tool bar, select View -> Propagate Selection.
Result: The propagate option is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select as appropriate:
Propagate All
Propagate All Network Objects
Propagate All Functions
Propagation Selected Network Objects, for the tabular view only
Propagate Selected Functions, for the tabular view only.
Result: The Network Objects are propagated to the corresponding modes active
topology trees / classifications and to the active basket of MultiNET mode.
If a mode cannot accept some types of objects to be dropped on it, a warning appears
and the cursor is updated during the drag and drop operation, when the cursor is on
top of a node in the modes tree or is above a tab. The definition of the types of objects
that can be dropped to another mode is done in a metadata file (
MaatQueryMetadata.xml file).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3.12: Refresh view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 18-3.12: Refresh view

For a view, there are two types of refresh:
Manual refresh, by the user
Automatic refresh, by the application.
To Do
Refresh the view manually Click on the icon from the view tool bar.
For Comparison views, having only Start Date / Time
entered in the execution context, the latest available data is
included in the From Date / Time field in order to
manually refresh the view.
For Evolution views, the From Date / Time field is
unchanged.
To start the automatic refresh of a Click on the icon from the view tool bar.
view
The latest available data is included:

The To Date / Time field is retrieved from the execution context used when executing
the view
The To Date / Time field is updated to include the latest available data.
The icon is enabled when:
The periodicity is below a day (5 min, 15min, 30min, 1H, 2H, ..., 8H)
The observation period includes current day.
In all other cases (Day / Week / Month / BH / Trend periodicities, no current day), the
icon is disabled.
The icon is visible only when:
In all other cases (Day / Week / Month / BH / Trend periodicities, no current day), the
icon is invisible.
For both manual and automatic refresh, the view is re-executed with the new dates / times
and the new resulting executed view replaces the previous one. The Highlighting,
Rotation and / or Axis Management, Display Values at Cursor Button State and Grid
Lines Button State options are kept unchanged, while Filter, Selection and Row / Column
Resizing are lost.
A manual refresh can be achieved between two automatic refresh requests, as long as the
previous refresh is ended.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3.12: Refresh view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For Evolution views and reports, the From Date/Time field is unchanged, while the To
Date/Time field is updated using the same algorithm as the one used when you click on
Default Date in the Execution Context window. If the new To Date/Time value is on
the next day (i.e. midnight crossing while automatic refresh is active), then the Start
Date/Time field is also updated (increased by one day).
For instance, if current day is January, 13th and initial start/end dates were: 12/01:05h to
13/01:08h; the view / report will be updated every hour until start/end becomes 12/01:05h
to 13/01:23h. The next update will lead to 13/01:05h to 14/01:00h.
In case the updated Start date after midnight crossing, would be in the future, the hour
part is forced to 0h00.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-4: Edit executed view using dialog box
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 18-4: Edit executed view using dialog box

The following tasks describe how to edit the executed view using the dialog box.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 18-4.1: Open executed view (p. 18-76).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 18-4.2: Edit view template properties (p. 18-77).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 18-4.3: Edit view execution context (p. 18-78).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Procedure 18-4.4: Edit view spatial scope (p. 18-79).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-4.1: Open executed view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 18-4.1: Open executed view

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To open an executed view:

Right click in the executed view from the executed view area, and select Executed
View..., OR
Double click on one of the values from the executed view, OR
From the tool bar, select View -> Executed View....
Result: The Executed View Properties window opens, displaying three menu tabs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the menu tabs from the Executed View Properties window:
View Template Properties
You can Procedure 18-4.2: Edit view template properties (p. 18-77).
Execution Context
You can Procedure 18-4.3: Edit view execution context (p. 18-78). For more
information, refer to Execution context (p. 3-19).
Spatial Scope.
You can Procedure 18-4.4: Edit view spatial scope (p. 18-79).
Result: The menu tabs are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Executed View Properties window, use the following buttons:
Button Name Used to...

Edit View Template Launch the view template editor.
You can change the view template properties. Refer to Procedure
18-1.4: Edit view template (p. 18-37).
After applying the changes in the view template editor, the view is
refreshed.
Update View Update the performed changes to the current view.
Create View Create a new view with the performed changes.
Close Close the view.
Help Open the Help -Edit Executed View window.
Result: The view is updated / created / closed as required.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-4.2: Edit view template properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 18-4.2: Edit view template properties

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the Executed View Properties window, select the View Template Properties tab
Result: The View Template Properties panel appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on Edit View Template.

Result: The View Template Editor window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Change as appropriate the view template properties.

Result: The view template properties are updated.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Choose the appropriate action and click on the corresponding button.
Action Button
Apply the changes made on the current view Update View
Create a new view with the performed changes Create View
Result: The executed view is refreshed.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-4.3: Edit view execution context
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 18-4.3: Edit view execution context

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the Executed View Properties window, select the Execution Context tab.
Result: The Execution Context panel appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Update as appropriate the displayed fields.

Result: The displayed fields are updated accordingly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Action Button
Result: The tabular / graphical viewer displays the values with the new data.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-4.4: Edit view spatial scope
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 18-4.4: Edit view spatial scope

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the Executed View Properties window, select the Spatial Scope tab.
Result: The Spatial Scope panel appears, displaying the list of the included network
objects.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 To:
Add network objects from the spatial scope, select them and drop them to the view
panel
Remove network objects from the spatial scope, right click on them and select Delete.
Result: The selected network objects are added / removed.
Note: The modification of the network objects affects the availability domain. If the
availability domain is empty, an error message appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Action Button
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Use executed view

Tool bar
The following tool bar icons are available for the executed view.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Use executed view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following table gives a brief description of the executed view tool bar icons.
Icon Description
(p. 18-73).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Icon Description
(p. 18-73)
The Automatic Refresh icon is
visible only when:
The periodicity is below a day
(5 min, 15min, 30min, 1H, 2H,
..., 8H)
The observation period
includes current day.
In all the other cases, this button is
invisible.
Change view display type
(p. 18-98).
Procedure 18-3.11: Propagate
selection to network object /
function trees in view (p. 18-72).
Procedure 18-7: Save executed
view as template (p. 18-101).
Procedure 18-8: Export executed
views (p. 18-103).
Procedure 18-3.5: Roll up / drill
down spatially (p. 18-61).
down spatially (p. 18-61).
down temporally (p. 18-57).
down temporally (p. 18-57).
Show legend (p. 18-85).
Procedure 18-3.6: Direct spatial -
temporal drill down (p. 18-65).
Highlight in view (p. 18-83).
Procedure 18-3.10: Rotate /
inverse axis of view (p. 18-71).
Remove filter(s) (p. 18-91).
Filter Repeated Value(s) - Filter
not yet applied
Filter Repeated Value(s) - Filter
already applied
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Icon Description
Show Filter List - Filter not yet
applied
Show Filter List - Filter already
applied
Show Manage axis (p. 18-107).
Zooms in on the graphic of the
selected view.
Zooms out on the graphic of the
selected view.
Zoom mode.
View Options.
If the Executed View window is too small, up and down arrows are displayed to navigate
among the executed view related icons, as seen in the figure below.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Highlight in view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Highlight in view
Highlighting is applicable on all functions except for counters and events.
To trigger the highlighting:
Click on icon from the view tool bar, OR
Select an item in the executed view, right click and select Select -> No Threshold /
Correct / Minor / Major / Critical / Sampling, OR
From the tool bar, select View -> Highlighting (On / Off).
The cell background of the QoS indicator values are colored according to the QoS
indicators thresholds, to show the most significant information.
The following table presents highlighting criteria and description.
Table 18-3 Example of Highlighting Colors (UpperIsFault = true for Indicators)
Function Criteria Color Description

Indicators Reliability Italic Reliability test is wrong.
Indicators Sampling Grey The associated sampling value is too low
for a value test.
Indicators No threshold Default The indicator does not have a threshold.
background
color
Parameters Impossible to Default Impossible to test because, for example:
test parameter background Reference cannot be compared
values color against Reference, or
Impossible to test because of
inexistent values, for example the
comparison is against Planned
values, but the parameter has no
planned values.
Rules Rule result is Default Rule result is N / A
N/A background
color
Synthetic Unknown Default Diagnosis result is unknown
Diagnosis result background
color
Indicators Correct Green QoS is less (or greater) than the yellow
threshold (depending on UpperIsFault)
Parameters Equal values Green The parameter values are equal.
Synthetic Result Green Diagnosis result is nopbfound
Diagnosis nopbfound
Rules True Green Rule result is true.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 18-3 Example of Highlighting Colors (UpperIsFault = true for Indicators)
(continued)
Function Criteria Color Description

Indicators Minor Yellow QoS is between the yellow and orange
threshold threshold
values
Comparison with Parameter Yellow The parameter values are in the reference
Reference values in bounds.
Parameters reference
bounds
Comparison with Parameter Yellow The parameter values are in the <target>
Operational, values in list when the parameter contains a list.
Operator <target> list.
Reference,
Forecast, or
Planned
Parameters
Indicators Major Orange QoS is between the orange and red
threshold
Parameters Value Change Orange Value changes between current date and
previous date, or between operational
value and last date (i.e. the last before
operational value).
Rules False, warning Orange Rule result is false and the rule is of type
rule Warning
Indicators Critical Red QoS is greater (or less) than the red
threshold (depending on UpperIsFault)
Comparison with Parameter Red The parameter values are out of
Reference values out of reference bounds.
Parameters reference
bounds
Comparison Parameter Red The parameter values are not equal
against values not
Operational, equal
Operator
Reference,
Forecast, or
Planned
Parameters
Synthetic Result Red Diagnosis result is pbfound
Diagnosis pbfound
Rules False, Error in Red Rule result is false and the rule is of type
rule. Error.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You must take into account the following criteria for highlighting:
When Sampling is set and Upper_is_fault flag is set to FALSE for the sampling
indicator and the value of the sampling indicator is smaller than the sampling value
defined in the indicator, then values are displayed in gray if Reliability is not set or set
but not wrong.
If there is no value for the reliability indicator, or there is no reliability indicator, then
it is as if reliability was not chosen.
If any filter is active on the tabular view inducing invisible rows or columns, the
highlighting synthesis is computed only on visible values basis.
The Standard View optional rows and columns (Total, Weight, Order, Average) cannot
be highlighted.
The synthesis and operations on the synthesis can be performed on the rows, columns
or both.
If any filter is active on the tabular view including invisible rows or columns, the
highlighting synthesis is computed only on the visible values.
Show legend
To show the legend for a view:
Right click in the view, then select Show Legend..., OR
From the tool bar, select View -> Legend....
The Legend window appears in a detailed or synthetic mode. This window is not modal
and opens only in one instance.
The following figure shows a detailed Legend window, displaying the list of colors and
their meanings.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Show legend
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the detailed Legend window displayed above, you can switch to a synthetic Legend
window by pressing the Synthetic button. A smaller resized synthetic Legend window
appears, composed only of the Hide, Select and Color columns and the Detailed button,
by which you can switch back to the detailed Legend window.
The following figure shows a synthetic Legend window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Show legend
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hide Hide / unhide rows in the tabular view, based on the selected criteria.
There is one checkbox per highlight criteria / color. You can hide more
than one color type.
Select When Select is chosen, then those rows / columns with the synthesis color
in the header are selected in the tabular view.
There is a checkbox per highlight criteria / color. You can select more than
one color type.
Criteria Short description of the criteria for coloring the table cells.
Color Color (or font style) associated with the criteria of highlighting.
Value Change Select / deselect the Value Change option.
Source Choose the default comparison type for highlighting in the view.
Target Choose the default comparison type for highlighting in the view.
Synthetic / Toggle between detailed and synthetic display modes.
Detailed When the Legend window is in detailed mode, all the parameters of the
widow are visible and the button text appears as Synthetic.
When the Legend window is in synthetic mode, the button text appears as
Detailed and the following parameters do not appear anymore:
The Criteria description
The Parameter Comparison configuration area
The Sampling and Reliability rows
The Events Legend, Close and Help buttons.
Events Legend For each event type appears the Event Symbol and the Event Description.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Show legend
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Help Display the contextual help.
Close Close / hide the legend.
To set a color for the rows / columns in the view, select their header, then in the Legend
window, click on the Select button corresponding to the required color.
In the user preferences, the default value for Select is the column. Therefore, when
pressing Select in the Legend window, all the chosen columns (and only columns),
header included, are selected.
The selection from Legend changes automatically when you have items in the view
highlighted, and then you select the critical values. See the example in the following
snapshots:
Figure 18-35 Selected values highlighted in view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Show legend
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-36 Highlighting changes when critical values are selected in legend
Sort
The sorting feature is implemented very similar to the sorting implemented in Windows
Explorer.
To change the sorting direction inside the executed view:
Double click on a row / column header.
The sorted row / column is indicated with:
An up arrow - when sorted in ascending order (Example: or
A down arrow - when sorted in descending order (Example: or
If you double click on another column, then that column is sorted in ascending order.
OR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Sort
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on the row / column header, then right click and select Sort -> Ascending /
Descending as appropriate, OR
From the tool bar, select View -> Sort -> Row / Column -> Ascending / Descending
as appropriate.
If a row / column is no longer sorted, the arrow is removed.
Filter in view
The operator can choose what information to be or not to be displayed using filters.
Filtering impacts the tabular and graphical executed view.
Add filter (table)
Add a filter in the tabular view:
1. Select the row / column header, then:
Right click and select Custom Filter, OR

From the tool bar, select as appropriate View -> Filter -> Filter Row / Filter
Column.
The Custom AutoFilter window opens.
2. Set the appropriate filtering criteria.
Equals =
Does not equal !=
Is greater than >
Is greater than or equal to >=
Is less than <
Is less than or equal to <=
Begins with
Does not begin with
Ends with
Does not end with
Contains
Does not contain
The * wildcard character is supported.
Filtering can be done depending on:
Highlighting: based on the highlighted indicator values
Selected rows or columns: by filtering a date, a network object, or an analysis
function.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Filter in view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The filter is applied only to unhidden rows / columns. A row that is hidden on or prior
to applying the filter criteria remains hidden when the filter is applied / removed.
The filtered row or column header is shown in italics.
When a filtering criteria is applied on a column and the operator tries to apply
filtering on another column then the intersection of filtered values are displayed.
3. Click on OK.
Remove filter(s)
Perform one of the following options.
To Remove Do
One filter Right click on the filtered column and select
Clear Filter.
All filters Perform one of the following options
Select Clear All Filters, OR
Click on the icon from the view tool
bar, OR
From the tool bar, select View -> Clear
Filters.
Filter list
To show all the applied filters in the executed viewer, perform one of the following
options:
Right click in the executed view and select Filter List..., OR
Select View -> Filter List... from the tool bar, OR
Click as appropriate on or from the view tool bar.
The Filter List window appears, displaying the list of applied filters (different from
Repeated Values Filter) associated with the current tabular view.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Manage the filter list:

1. Perform one of the following options.
To Do
Remove the selected applied filter(s) Remove
Remove all applied filter(s) Remove All
Activate / deactivate all applied filter(s). Deactivate All
2. Click on OK.
Filter on period
Note: Filtering on Periods can be applied only in the case of evolution views / reports
and on date columns only.
Filter (hide) periods:
1. In the executed view, select the items below:
One or several days of the week, and / or
One or several hours of the day, and / or
One or several date and time periods (depending on the periodicity), and / or
One or several particular dates and / or times (depending on the periodicity).
2. From the menu tool bar, select View -> Period Filter..., OR right click and select
Period Filter....
The Filtering on Period window appears.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The conditions applied for filtering depend on the periodicity. The period granularity
can only be greater or equal to the current periodicity, as follows:
For Hourly periodicity, all options are available
For Daily periodicity, Hours of Day is disabled
For Weekly and Monthly periodicity, Hours of Day and Days of Week are
disabled.
To hide Do
A single date Check the Date radio button, then select the
appropriate start date and end date
Multiple dates Check the Date radio button, then specify
the required range of dates
A range of dates and times Check the Date and Time radio button, then
specify the required range of dates and times
One or more Days of Week Select the checkbox corresponding to Days
of Week, then select the appropriate days
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To hide Do
One or more hours of the day Select the checkbox corresponding to Hours
of Day, then select the appropriate hours.
Make the appropriate selection, then click on Add.

4. Click on OK.
Top N filter
The Top N filter is available only when at least one numerical value is present in the row /
column selected.
This feature keeps the top (most) or bottom (least) N values, where N is the selectable
number of items to be kept.
1. Select a row or column with one or more numerical value.
2. Perform one of the following options:
Right click and select Top N Filter..., OR
Select View -> Top N Filter....
The Top N Filter window appears.
Parameter Name Description Default Value

Show Column / Row Label of the current column / row N/A
Label cell
Operator Combo box Allows you to select Top / Top
Bottom
Values Allows to select the top / bottom 1
values
The tabular column / row header is marked in italic when a Top N Filter is applied on it.
Note: When only string values are present, this feature is not accessible (greyed).
If there are multiple values satisfying the condition, then all of these values are
shown.
The Top N row / column filter is added in an append mode to the current view filter list.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Hide / unhide rows / columns / repeated values
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hide / unhide rows / columns / repeated values

The following sections describe how to hide / unhide rows, columns, and repeated values.
Hide / unhide rows
Manage rows:
1. Select the row header.
To Do
Hide a row Perform one of the following options:
Right click and select Hide -> Hide
Row, OR
Select View -> Hide -> Hide Row.
Unhide all rows Perform one of the following options:
Right click and select Unhide ->
Unhide all Rows, OR
Select View -> Unhide -> Unhide
All Rows.
Hide / unhide columns

Manage columns:
1. Select the column header.
To Do
Hide a row Perform one of the following options:
Column, OR
Unhide all rows Perform one of the following options:
Unhide All Columns, OR
All Columns.
Hide repeated values

A date row or column can be hidden only if it contains exactly the same values as the
previous one (except for the column header). The repeated values filter has priority over
the other filter types.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hide the repeated values:
1. Select the date rows or columns for the repeated values displayed for a set of dates.
To Do
Hide repeated values Perform one of the following options:
Column, OR
Unhide repeated columns Perform one of the following options:
Unhide All Columns, OR
All Columns.
Click on the icon from the view tool bar.
In 3D Views, the repeated values filter is applied only if the dates are present in the second level
header, while the repeated values are filtered within a Top Level Header.
When this filter is being applied, the current view filter list state is checked. If the filter list is not
empty and is activated, then a warning message appears as shown in the following figure.
3. Click on OK.
When a Non Repeated values filter is being applied, no check is performed on the rest of the filter(s)
applied.
The following figure shows a 3D view with hidden repeated values.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unhide repeated values

Perform one of the following options
Right click and select Unhide -> Unhide Repeated Values, OR
Select View -> Unhide -> Unhide Repeated Values, OR
Click on the icon from the view tool bar.
The repeated values are shown.
The following figure shows a 3D view with unhidden repeated values.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Change view display type
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Change view display type

Change the display type of view:
Select the toggle button from the view tool bar, OR
From the tool bar, select View -> Toggle Display Type (Tabular / Graphical), then
select Tabular or Graphical, as appropriate.
The mode changes from tabular to graphical and vice-versa.
Resize
To resize a row / column, select the line separating the row / column, then drag and drop
the line to the appropriate size.
This only changes the selected row / column, and not all rows / columns.
Double clicking when in between the two columns resizes the left column based on the
size of the data included within the column. Double clicking when in between two rows
resizes the top row based on the size of the data included within the rows.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-5: Copy to system clipboard
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 18-5: Copy to system clipboard

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 An executed view must exist in the tabular / graphical viewer or in the report viewer.
Copy the required data from the table and / or graphical viewer. Selection of only several
rows and columns is possible.
Result: The data is copied into system clipboard in the following formats:
Unformatted text
html
Picture (Enhanced Metafile)
Internal view template format.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If necessary, paste it into a report or another application such as Excel.

Result: The information is copied to the system clipboard.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Copy executed view

Right click on the executed view, and select Copy, OR
From the tool bar, select View -> Copy, OR
Press Ctrl+Shift+C.
A new copy of the executed view is created. The default name of the new view is <old
name>_copy_n, where n is an incremental value to give uniqueness.
If the number of views in the view browser has reached the maximum limit, then a new
copy cannot be created and the user is warned.
Duplicate executed view

Right click on the view name tab, and select Duplicate, OR
Right click in the view (can also be inside an executed report), and select Duplicate,
OR
From the tool bar, select View -> Duplicate.
A new executed view is created with:
A default name:
<oldname>_Copy_n, where n is an incremental number to define a unique name
The values of the duplicated executed view.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-6: Rename executed view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 18-6: Rename executed view

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Right click on the view name tab, and select Rename, OR
Right click in the view (can also be inside an executed report), and select Rename,
OR
From the tool bar, select View -> Rename.
Result: The Rename View window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Type the new name of the view, then click on OK.

Result: The executed view is saved taking into account the new name.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-7: Save executed view as template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 18-7: Save executed view as template

If the executed view is modified and not saved, it is marked with * as needing to be
saved.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Right click on the executed view and select Save as Template..., OR
From the tool bar, select View -> Save as Template..., OR
Press Ctrl+S.
Result: The Save View Template window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Type the view template name, then click on OK.

Result: The executed view is saved as template.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Close executed view(s)

To Do
Close an executed view Perform one of the following options:
Right click on the view name tab, and select Close, OR
Right click on the view, and select Close, OR
From the tool bar, select View -> Close.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Close executed view(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Close all executed views Perform one of the following options:
Right click on the view name tab, and select Close, OR
From the tool bar, select View -> Close, OR
Only the completed executions are closed. The On-going tabs for
the executions which are in progress, remain open.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-8: Export executed views
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 18-8: Export executed views

There is a limitation when exporting views in Excel to worksheets containing a
maximum of 65,536 rows and 256 columns.
In the case of a worksheet containing more than 256 columns, a workaround is to use
the Transpose function from Excel in the view from Analysis Desktop, which will
return a horizontal range of cells, then export it using the Export -> Display option.
To export a graphical view in Excel, the Excel security level must be set to low or
medium.
For example, in Excel 2002 / 2003, set the following:
From the menu bar, select Tools -> Macro -> Security...
The Security window opens.
In the Security Level tab, check Medium or Low, then click on OK.
In Excel 2007, set the following:
Click on the Office Button from the top left corner of the Microsoft Excel
window.
A drop-down list appears.
Click on Excel Options from the bottom of the drop-down list.
The Excel Options window opens.
From the left panel of the Excel Options window, select Trust Center, then click
on Trust Center Settings....
The Trust Center window opens.
From the left panel of the Trust Center window, click on Macro Settings, then
select the Enable all macros (not recommended, potentially dangerous code
can run) option and click on OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 You can export one or several files.
To Do
Export one view Perform one of the following options:
Select the view, then select View ->
Export -> Full... from the tool bar, OR
Select an element in the view, right click
and select Export -> Full....
The original full view is exported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Select the view, then select View ->
Export -> Display... from the tool bar ,
OR
Select an element in the view, right click
and select Export -> Display....
The currently displayed view (ie. with filter
applied on executed view) is exported.
If the view is already in the Executed View
browser, an alternative is to click on the
icon. This triggers an original full view export
(Full Export and not Export Display).
Export several views Perform one of the following options:
Click on the icon, OR
From the tool bar, select View -> Export
All....
All views are exported and gathered in the
same zip file.
This triggers an original full view export (Full
Export and not Export Display).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Export View window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Browse for the location to save the view, give the appropriate File Name, and then select
the appropriate export format:
.xls
.csv
.xml
.html
.pdf
If Export all was selected in the previous step, the export format refers to the files
contained in the .zip file.
Click on Save.
Export is Successful. Do you want to open the exported file?
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Click on
To open the exported file Yes
The file opens in a new window.
If you do not want to open the exported file No
Result: The view is exported to the selected format, keeping the same look as in the
tabular / graphical modes.
For the tabular mode, the rows and columns are in the same positions. Highlighting is
displayed and the same colors are used. The information about the spatial scope and
view template parameters is also displayed.
For the graphical mode, the X-axis and Y-axis have the same data. The same colors
are used. The legend is displayed. Information about the spatial scope and view
template parameters is also displayed.
You can use an Excel Template for the graphical mode. For more information, refer to
the NPO Administration User Guide document, to Import Excel template using GUI.
The view tool bar is not included in the export.
When the executed view embeds indicator functions, the related basic indicator
formula is available for every displayed indicator through a Excel Comment triggered
on indicator label.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-9: Execute diagnosis in an executed view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 18-9: Execute diagnosis in an executed view

This feature displays diagnoses associated with the selected indicator in the executed
view. On selecting the scenario, it is executed in detailed mode.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Create a diagnosis scenario with an indicator as trigger (double click on the indicator).
Refer to the NPO Diagnosis Development User Guide document.
Result: The diagnosis scenario is created.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Execute a view with the indicator used in the trigger.

Result: The view is executed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Highlight the view.

Result: The view is highlighted.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Select a tab cell in the view that is red.

Result: The tab cell is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Select View -> Execute Diagnosis.

Result: All the scenarios that have the indicator as trigger are listed and can be
executed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Manage axis
In 3D Views, this feature allows managing the three dimensions and choosing which
dimensions must be grouped and, for that group, which dimension is on top and which is
on the bottom.
Note: This feature is allowed only for Standard Views, not for Equipment Views,
Vector or Matrix Views. It is also not applicable to views displaying counters using
Raw Periodicity.
Axis Management allows managing the dimensions in the following two ways:
Choose between column grouping and row grouping
Choose the dimensions which are used as the top level headers, second level header
and the non-grouped header.
By default, Columns are grouped and the Time dimension is placed as the top level
column header, the functions at the lower column header level, and network objects as
rows.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Manage axis
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You can choose to change the default values in the 3D Views tab.
The Axis Management dialog can be accessed as follows:
From the tool bar of the executed view, by clicking on the icon, OR
In the executed view, right click and select Axis Management, OR
From the menu bar, select View -> Axis Management.
You can choose to change the placement of the dimensions after the execution of the view
/ report, as shown in the Axis Management window below.
The Axis Management of the views in a report is at the view level and the axes of each
3D view in a report can be managed independently of the other views.
You can select more than one Network Object, more than one Function and more than one
Date.
The result of the multiple selection is a three dimensions table that is displayed using
nested tables.
A nested table is a standard table that has two column (or row) headers instead of one.
For example, the first column header is for the dates and there are as many columns as
selected functions.
The double header is always used for columns and never for lines.
The following figures show the two types of nested tables.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Manage axis
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-37 Nested table (double column header)
Figure 18-38 Nested table (double row header)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Manage axis
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
19 Reports
19
Overview
Purpose
This section describes how to manage reports. It describes how to create, edit, display,
delete and execute reports.
Contents
Presentation 19-2
Procedure 19-1: Use report template editor 19-18
Procedure 19-2: Execute reports 19-30
Procedure 19-3: Edit executed report interactively 19-34
Procedure 19-4: Edit executed report using dialog box 19-54
Procedure 19-5: Schedule reports 19-60
Display pending and archived executed reports 19-66
Procedure 19-6: Use job scheduler editor 19-70
Use executed report 19-80
Filter in report 19-82
Highlight in all report views 19-83
Display grid in all report views 19-83
Procedure 19-7: Edit view from executed report template 19-84
Duplicate executed report 19-84
Procedure 19-8: Rename executed report 19-85
Resize automatic views and legends in report 19-85
Synchronize axis management 19-86
Archive reports 19-86
Toggle display type (tabular / graphical) 19-87
Synchronize 3D view graphs 19-87
Synchronize legend resizing 19-88
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-9: Save executed report as template 19-89

Close executed report(s) 19-89
Procedure 19-10: Export executed reports 19-90
Export views from executed report 19-92
Display spatial aggregation in views / reports 19-93
Use static trend prediction in evolution views and reports 19-94
Use dynamic trend prediction in executed views and reports 19-96
Presentation
Note: The MUSE_REPORT_TEMPLATE_CREATION_LICENSE must be installed for the
reports creation.
The MUSE_REPORT_LICENSE must be installed to execute reports.
A report template is composed of a set of view templates. A Report, which is composed of
Views, enables you to display results coming from Indicators / Parameters in View
Templates.
A Report enables you to display results coming from Indicators or Parameters in View
Templates in a tabular way or graphical way. A Report contains the network objects, view
templates and comment zones, and an Execution Context (period, interval, sampling,
interpolation, reliability options). As a report template is composed of view templates, a
report is composed of views. A report is also known as an Executed Report and is
displayed in the Report Viewer.
In a view of the report, it is possible to use three dimensions (a fixed point and two lists):
A list of objects
A list of dates
A list of items (data).
Depending on which dimension is fixed, reports are named differently (evolutions,
comparison, multi-object).
A report template is a formal description of a sequence of graphical representations of
QoS indicator or parameter values. A report template is then used to build from its
definition and for one or several objects (according to the type of report template) a report
that displays indicator or parameter values for the considered date(s). A report template is
mainly composed of one or more view templates and comment zones.
You may customize the report (e.g. define a title, view templates, specify the legend, etc.).
You can save the report as a report template so that the same template can be used to
display any other report generated dynamically from the output of analysis services.
The report template type is required during the creation of the report template and cannot
be changed afterwards. Depending on the type of the QoS report template, different
information is requested to define the report template.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: After one month, all the published views and reports are purged.
There are two types of reports.
Observation Reports
There are four types of observation report types:
Mono-Object Evolution Report
Multi-Object Evolution Report
Multi-Object Comparison Report
Mono-Object Distribution Report.
The following table presents the types of observation reports. Number of Objects refers to
the number of network objects used when creating the executed report. You can select a
maximum number of 250 objects.
The Covered Period refers to the date(s) entered in the Execution Context when creating
the executed report.
Report Type Number of Covered Period View Constraints

Objects
Mono-Object Evolution One An interval None
Multi-Object Evolution Many An interval Only one standard
indicator or
parameter per view
Multi-Object Comparison Many One date None
Mono-Object Distribution One One date Vector and / or
matrix views
Warning Reports
For both observation and warning reports, you can select a maximum number of 250
objects.
To change the limit of 250 objects, you must modify the analysis.desktop.objects.re-
ports.limit parameter from the following file:
/alcatel/muse/MUSEADWEBSTART/webapps/AD/rsc/com/alcatel/muse/usm/config/ad_
param.cfg
To change the limit of 20 reports executed in the reports browser, you must modify the
following parameters:
analysis.desktop.views.inside.report.limit parameter from the following file:
/alcatel/muse/MUSEADWEBSTART/webapps/AD/rsc/com/alcatel/muse/usm/config/
ad_param.cfg
MAX_REPORTS_TAB parameter from the following file:
/alcatel/muse/MUSEADWEBSTART/webapps/AD/rsc/com/alcatel/muse/usm/config/
ad_param.cfg
MAX_EXECUTED_REPORTS parameter from the following file:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
/alcatel/muse/MUSE_MAAT/reports/rsc/com/alcatel/muse/maat/reports/
ReportsResourceFile.cfg
In order for the updates to be taken into account in Analysis Desktop, you must close and
then re-open the Analysis Desktop.
Mono-object evolution report

A mono-object evolution report enables you to display the evolution of standard
indicators or parameters for the selected object between two dates.
The results are displayed in views in 2D graphs. A trend periodicity evolution can be
requested on this type of report.
One network object is selected, and an interval of time is specified. The result is the
following:
Figure 19-1 Mono-object evolution table
Figure 19-2 Example mono-object evolution table
Multi-object evolution report

A multi-object evolution report enables you to display the evolution of standard indicators
or parameters for the selected objects between two dates.
The results appear in two types of views:
As 2D tables and graphs - if only one standard indicator, counter, parameter, rule,
event per view
As 3D nested tables and associated graphs - if more than one standard indicator,
counter, parameter, rule, event per view.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A trend periodicity evolution can be requested on this type of report.
A color and a pattern are automatically set to each network object of the whole report (the
color and pattern set of standard indicator or parameter is ignored since there is only one
standard indicator or parameter per view). All network objects are displayed in the same
order in all views.
Many network objects are selected, and an interval of time is specified. If only one
function in a given view, the result is as shown in the following table.
Figure 19-3 Multi-object evolution table made with an object list
Figure 19-4 Example of multi-object evolution table made with an object list
Multi-object comparison report

A multi-object comparison report enables to compare several standard indicators or
parameters for several objects at a given date.
The results are displayed in views in 2D graphs. Many network objects are selected, and
one date is specified. The result is shown the following table.
Figure 19-5 Multi-object comparison table
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 19-6 Example multi-object comparison table
Mono-object distribution report

Note: This section is applicable only for GSM and W-CDMA.
A mono-object distribution report enables to display specific vector and / or matrix
indicators and associated axis indicators for one object and a given date.
The results are displayed in specific views, in 2D or 3D graphs depending on the chosen
indicator (vector or matrix).
Figure 19-7 Mono-object distribution table - vector view
Figure 19-8 Mono-object distribution table - matrix view
Warning reports
A warning report is a specific report composed of many views in which each view is
filtered according to its filtering indicator and sorted according to its sorting indicator.
Therefore, the objects may be different from one view to another.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The filtering mode is defined at a report level: it is a property of the warning template
report. A warning report can contain only views with a filtering indicator.
You can set the warning parameters to filter the cells according to different criteria. The
criteria may be selected individually or combined:
Best / Worst Best indicates the Good objects, and Worst indicates the Bad objects.
Best is greater if UpperIsFault = false on the filtering indicator.
Worst is greater if UpperIsFault = true on the filtering indicator.
Top N The selection is made by keeping the Top N Best or Top N Worst Values.
Top N Variation The selection is made by keeping the Top N Best or Top N Worst Values
Value of the Absolute or Relative Variation based on the Reference Period.
Filtering on Color The selection is made by comparing the values of the filtering indicator
Value with its associated thresholds, depending on the color choice.
The thresholds are those defined on the filtering indicator.
Filtering on The selection is made by comparing the computed variation to the chosen
Variation Value variation.
The computed variation is the difference between the value of the filtering
indicator's warning date and the value of the reference period for absolute
variation.
For relative variation the absolute variation is divided by the value on the
reference date.
When computing a QoS warning report, two fields Before and After are used to retrieve
the evolution of the filtering indicator for the returned objects around the report date.
Before and After are given in number of periods with respect to the periodicity chosen
when computing the report. This is extra information added to the tabular view and does
not affect the filtering of data chosen for the warning report or the graphical view.
In the tabular view of a warning report, the indicator used for sorting is marked with an
arrow in the table header, to know which indicator was used and in which direction the
sorting occurred. The network objects are sorted according to the sorting indicator as first
sorting criterion. Then the network object friendly name must be used as a second sorting
criterion in order that, if multiple objects have the same value for the sorting indicator,
they are anyway sorted according to their name
Examples
The following example presents the input for threshold and top combinations.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following tables present the threshold output after applying the filtering criteria to the
example above.
Figure 19-9 Warning reports: best value filtering on color
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 19-10 Warning reports: worst value filtering on color
Figure 19-11 Value filtering on variation value
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Specific warning report icons

The following table contains the icons for all the warning report possibilities.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Warning table
The warning table comprises:
The left part, containing the values of standard indicators for the report date
The right part, containing the evolution of the filtering indicator for the period around
the report date, according to the number of periods before and after the report date
specified in the Execution Context.
The values of the filtering indicator in the left and right part are colored according to the
thresholds defined on the standard indicator. Note that for a Top N objects report, it is
possible that all values are black.
If variation is selected, the last column of the left part contains the variation value. The
column is named Relative Variation or Absolute Variation (depending on the report
template definition):
For a relative variation, the value is displayed in percentage and the unit is %
For an absolute variation, the unit of the filtering indicator is the unit of the variation
column.
If sampling checks are selected, only the left part is colored according to the rules defined
in Highlight in view (p. 18-83).
Legend in warning reports
For each of the warning view embedded in a warning report a legend information is
shown as a multi-line tooltip when the mouse is on top of the view title. This legend is a
short description of the report and view parameters.
The following legend for the four different types of Warning reports are available:
Top N Warning View legend: <Top Objects><Best / Worst><Filtering
indicator>
Examples: 5 Best Call_success_rate
Top N variation Warning View legend: <Top Objects><Best /
Worst><Filtering indicator><absolute / relative> variation
(compared to <Reference Period> periods ago)
Examples: 5 Worst Call_success relative variation (compared to 10 periods ago)
Color filtering Warning View legend: <Best / Worst><Filtering
indicator>(<Color filter>)
Examples: Worst Call_drop (Red, Orange)
Variation filtering Warning View legend: <Absolute / Relative><Filtering
indicator> variation <better / worst> than <Variation
value>[%] (compared to <Reference Period> periods ago)
Examples: Absolute Call_drop variation better than 10 (compared to 7 periods ago)
The following figure shows an example of an executed Top N Warning report with the
first view showing legend information.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Warning graphic
Variation, Before, and After on the Reference Period are not displayed on the graphic
view.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Warning for Area Threshold
The following formula must be verified to consider an object in warning:
I warningDate >= value
Figure 19-12 Warning table for area threshold
The following example presents a warning table for area threshold for selected objects
with a Call drop rate > 4% and where RTCH attempts > 1000.
Figure 19-13 Example warning table for area threshold
Warning for Area Variation

The following formulas must be verified to consider an object in alarm:
For an absolute variation:
I warningDate - I referenceDate >= value
For of relative variation:
I warningDate - I referenceDate referenceDate ) / I referenceDate >=
value
The following example presents a warning table for area variation for selected objects
with relative variation of the Call drop rate > 4% between J and J-1 and where RTCH
attempts > 1000.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 19-14 Example warning table for area variation
Execute warning report on trends predictions

Warning reports are used to report topological objects based on filtering conditions,
for instance reporting the 20 cells having the worst call drop rate yesterday
Warning reports on trends allow to project the filtering condition in the future, for
instance reporting the 20 cells that will have the worst call drop rate in 15 days based
on current trend.
How it works:
Warning reports on trend prediction combine two functionalities, warning report on
one side and trend prediction on the other side, and follow the logic of both features.
Creating a warning report on trend follows the same procedure than any warning
report creation, the only specific requirement being that the filtering indicator (in the
related views) must support trends.
Refer to Trend Prediction Supported attribute described in Procedure 9-2: Display
and manage indicator properties and descriptions (p. 9-53).
Once the report has been created, it can be executed as any classical warning report
(on past historical values) or it can be executed (or scheduled) with trend prediction.
This follows the same logic as trend prediction on views:
In execution context options, select the trend option.
Refer to Trend predictions (p. 3-30).
Input the predicted period.
Example:
Considering a reference date D entered in the execution context and a prediction period p.
NPO internally computes the trend view on the [D-2p, D+p] interval for all objects, then
applies the filtering condition on the D+p day, and builds the report only for the top n
objects (at the D+p date).
The following figure shows an executed warning report on Trends Prediction in tabular
mode.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Report title / subtitle format

The following title format is automatically filled in at report execution:
<report type>'-'<title as defined in report template>
For the report title, the used font style is bold, and the font size is Default Size + 2.
The report subtitle format is:
<'Trend from' if Trend> <from date and time depending on periodicity>
<'to' to date and time depending on periodicity>
For the report subtitle, the used font style is normal, and the font size is Default Size.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-1: Use report template editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-1: Use report template editor

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 19-1.1: Open report template editor (p. 19-19).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 19-1.2: Create report template (p. 19-20).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 19-1.3: Create report template by copy (p. 19-24).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Procedure 19-1.4: Edit report template (p. 19-25).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Procedure 19-1.5: Delete report template (p. 19-27).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Procedure 19-1.6: Export report template (p. 19-28).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-1.1: Open report template editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-1.1: Open report template editor

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

In the Alcatel-Lucent Analysis Desktop window, click on the icon, OR
In the Alcatel-Lucent Analysis Desktop window, in the right frame, in the Report
tab, right click on any displayed report and select Report Template, OR
In the Analysis Desktop main window, click on Data -> Report Templates..., OR
Press Ctrl+R.
Result: The Report Template Editor window opens.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-1.2: Create report template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-1.2: Create report template

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Report Template Editor window, click on

Result: The Report Types window appears, listing five report types:
Multi-Object Evolution
Mono-Object Evolution
Multi-Object Comparison
Mono-Object Distribution
Warning.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the appropriate report type and click on OK, OR
Double click on the appropriate report type.
Result: The report template editor appears with default values and editable fields.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Fill in the appropriate fields.

Name
Name Name of the Report template to be created. ReportTemplate_
<owner> _n
where <owner> is the
owner of the report.
Short Short name of the report. Same as Name.
Name
Title Title of the report. New
Owner User who is creating the Report Template. The username you logged
in the NPO application.
Visible Checked: if you want this report template to be visible Checked.
in the Report Tree.
Unchecked: if you want this report template not to be
visible in the Report Tree, except for the Administrator
and the owner.
Rights
tion current report template.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name
System True, if this report template is a System view template -
thus it cannot be modified or deleted except certain
fields (Visible) only by the Administrator.
Grayed, otherwise.
Families A table containing the families and sub-families to User defined according to
which the view template can belong. user's preference settings.
There can be a maximum of four sub-levels for each
family:
To add a new family, right click in the Families
panel and select Add Family.
The pre-defined family values are: Mono-Object
Distribution Report, Mono-Object Evolution
Report, Multi-Object Comparison Report,
Multi-Object Evolution Report, Warning Report,
but you can edit your own Family.
Select an existing User Family, or edit your own
Family.
Depending on the chosen family, the list of
sub-family options is changed. Select or type the
appropriate one.
To remove an existing family, right click in the in
the Families panel and select Remove Family. All
of its corresponding sub-families are automatically
deleted.
If no family is added, then the report is not visible in
the function tree.
View Use to add and visualize templates and comments on
Tem- the current report.
plates To add a view template, drag the required view
template from the right frame to the View Templates
and Comment Zones panel.
Com- This area is an optional feature of the report template,
ment used to add and visualize comments on the current
Zones report.
To add a comment, in the View Templates and
Comment Zones panel, right click and select Add
Comment Zone. In the Add Comment Zone box, add
your comment, then click on OK.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name
Avail- The spatial (ex: Network, Cell2G, Cell3G,
ability RNC, CellZone, BSC, CellLTE, eNodeB) and
Domain temporal (ex: Hourly, Daily, Weekly,
Monthly) availability domain according to the type
of objects and the period. It is derived from the
availability domain of the view templates used in the
report template.
It is created dynamically.
When creating a Warning report, you must take into account the following parameters.
Parameters Description Default

Specific to Value
Warning
Report
Warning The type of warning report to be defined: Top N
Report Type Top N
Top N Variation
Color Filtering
Variation Filtering.
Best / Worst Best meaning the 'Good' objects and Worst meaning the 'Bad' Worst
objects.
Best is greater if UpperIsFault = false on the filtering indicator.
Worst is greater if UpperIsFault = true on the filtering indicator.
Top Objects Number of Top Objects. 0
0 means to use all the objects.
The selection is made either by keeping the:
Top N Best or Top N Worst Values, or
Top N Best or Top N Worst Values of the Absolute or Relative
Variation based on the Reference Period.
Variation Absolute or Relative. Unused
If the variation is used with Top, then the selection is made by
keeping the Top N Best or Top N Worst Values of the Absolute or
Relative Variation based on the Reference Period.
If the filtering uses the Variation Value, the selection is made by
comparing the computed variation to the chosen variation. The
computed variation is the difference between the filtering
indicator's warning date value and the Reference Period's value for
absolute variation.
For relative variation, the absolute variation is divided by the value
on the warning date.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameters Description Default

Specific to Value
Warning
Report
Variation Variation value. 0
Value
Value Filtering The selection is made by comparing the Filtering Indicator's values Red
on Color with its associated thresholds depending on the color choice. Only
Reference The number of periods (determined by the periodicity when 1
Period executing the report) before the report date is used as reference
date.
Its value is used when computing the relative and absolute
variation, and varies between 1 and 31 included.
Before Number of periods before the warning date. This is only for the 4
tabular display and does not affect the filtering or graphic display.
After Number of periods after the warning date. This is only for the 0
tabular display and does not affect the filtering or graphic display.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on .
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on OK.
Result: The report is created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-1.3: Create report template by copy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-1.3: Create report template by copy

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Report Template Editor window, select the report template to be copied, then click
on .
Result: A selection panel opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Choose either to copy by duplicating only the report template (thus linking to the existing
view templates) or to copy by also duplicating related view templates.
Result: The new report template is created with a default name: <oldname>_Copy_n,
where n is an incremental number to define a unique name.
The Report Template Properties window is filled with the existing values, except
for the name and owner.
The user becomes the owner of the report template.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Edit the appropriate fields, then click on

Result: The new report template is created and the report template tree is refreshed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-1.4: Edit report template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-1.4: Edit report template

The user can edit an existing report by changing the existing report template data, or by
adding / removing one / more view templates and / or comment zones.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Open the report to modify.

Result: The report is open.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Report Template Editor window, click on .

Result: The property editor displays the Report Template Properties panel interface.
The current attribute values of the selected report template are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Only the owner of the report can update its values. The name of the report can also be
updated.
If the owner of the report is not the one viewing it, the Edit button is grayed.
Perform the required options.
To Do
Set existing object(s) in the graphical Select it (them) in the Tabular View and drag
representation and drop them to the Primary / Secondary
Graphic panels.
Edit a view in the comment zone Perform the following steps:
1. Right click on the view, and select Edit
View Template.
The View Template Editor window opens.
2. Click on .
3. Edit the appropriate fields, then click on
.
4. Click on OK at the confirmation window,
then click on Close to close the View
Template Editor window.
Add a comment Perform the following steps:
1. In the View Templates and Comment
Zones panel, right click and select Add
Comment Zone.
2. In the Add Comment Zone box, add your
comment, then click on OK.
Remove a view or a comment zone Select it / them, right click and select Remove.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-1.4: Edit report template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Reorder the views or comment zones in the Perform one of the following options:
report Use the Up / Down arrows, OR
Right click and select as appropriate.
Select:
Move to first position
Move to last position
Move up
Move down.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 To save the changes, click on OK.

Result: The report is edited.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-1.5: Delete report template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-1.5: Delete report template

A report cannot be deleted if it is scheduled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the report.

Result: The report is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the Report Template Editor window, click on , OR
Select Edit -> Delete from the tool bar, OR
Press the Delete button on the keyboard.
Are you sure you want to delete report template <report_name> ?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If Click on
Only one report is selected to delete Yes
Multiple reports are selected to delete Yes to all
Result: The report / s is / are deleted from the operator function tree.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-1.6: Export report template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-1.6: Export report template

This export allows to share between different NPOs some customer report templates.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select one or more report templates from the report template tree of the Report Template
editor.
Result: The report template(s) is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the Report Template Editor window, click on .

Note: If only system report templates are selected in the report template tree of Report
Result: If the current selection of report templates contains some system report
templates, a warning dialog is displayed listing all the selected system report
templates and explains that they will not be exported.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Browse for the location to save the report(s) and give the appropriate File Name.
Click on Save.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on OK.
Result: The selected templates are exported in an xml report dictionary containing
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
NPO Administration User Guide document, to Import reports dictionary using GUI
procedure.
If some of the exported report templates are referencing customer objects, like indicators,
rules or free fields, a warning dialog is displayed indicating that the exported report
templates may not be imported on another system if the embedded customer objects are
not also exported and imported on the other system before the import of these report
templates.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-1.6: Export report template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to:
NPO Administration User Guide document, to Import free fields using GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-2: Execute reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-2: Execute reports

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the network element(s) and report template(s) of the same type, then:
Drag and drop them in the report viewer, OR
Select Report -> Execute Report..., OR
Press Ctrl+Shift+R.
The same action applies for network element(s) and:
View templates from the Functions browser
Indicators from the Functions browser.
In this case, the result is a report with one view per indicator.
For example, if 10 cells and four indicators are selected and dropped in the executed
report, four views are created in the executed report.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The NPO checks if the start time provided is older than the oldest date stored
in the NPO. In this case, an error message appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Execute to execute the report.

Result: When executing a report containing a view with indicators, if the Nerr value is
displayed for a cell, this indicates a numeric error due to a miscalculation of an
indicator (for example when dividing by zero).
If the executed report has an entire view empty, the title of the view is displayed and,
in place of the report area, a message is written, explaining that no data is available
for the report:
No data is available for the request
This error message can be avoided in the case of a warning report definition when the
operator has defined the Warning with the default value, by replacing the Top Objects
default value 0, for example, with the value 10:
Warning Report Type: Top N
Worst
Top Objects: 0 -> change it here with value 10
Variation Value: 0.0
Value Filtering on Color: Red Only
Reference Period: 1
Before: 4
After: 0
Depending on the number of network objects selected, the number and the type of
report templates varies, as shown below.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 19-15 Number of reports generated based on report type, number of

network objects, and number of report templates selected
The report viewer displays the executed report to the operator, containing the
following:
The QoS Requirement used when executing the report
The Working Zone used to execute the report
The sub-title for mono-object evolution or mono-object distribution report: the
identifier of the selected object as displayed in tree gadget followed by the begin
date and the end date.
The sub-title for multi-objects comparison and warning report: the object type of
the requested objects followed by the requested date. If one trend is selected for
the report (only for object evolution report), the type of trend is displayed after the
period.
The format of the date depends on the selected period (taking into account user
preferences):
For 1/4 Hour period, the date is displayed as: DD / MM / YYYY-HH:MM
For 1/2 Hour period, the date is displayed as: DD / MM / YYYY-HH:MM
For hour period, the date is displayed as: DD / MM / YYYY -HH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For Day period, the date is displayed as: DD / MM / YYYY
For Week period, the date is displayed as: YYYY-Week NN where NN is the
week number (01 to 53)
For Month period, the date is displayed as: NameOfTheMonth YYYYThe
time format using Week number and Month name is an option and can be
configured at server level ( MUSE_INSTALL file) to provide similar behavior
to complementary applications such as Web Client, Web Publishing.
To enlarge the executed report to window size, double click on its title tab, OR click
on the array from the splitter.
In case of a request which takes more time, the Execute Report in Progress window
appears before the executed report is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 To execute other task while the request for the current report is in progress, click on
Run in background from the Execute Report in Progress window.
Result: The On-going tab is created in the Report browser. This is an empty tab which
displays a moving bar showing the submitted request is in progress.
If the report execution will generate multiple executed reports, an On-going tab is
created for each report.
and the progress bar is replaced by the report content.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 To cancel the requested report, right - click on the On-going tab and click on Close.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The in-progress request for the report / reports is canceled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 To schedule the report, refer to Procedure 19-5: Schedule reports (p. 19-60).
You can execute again a report template that was already executed.
Result: The report is scheduled.
Each time a report is scheduled, a job is created.
In order to manage jobs, there are operations which can be performed from the
Analysis Desktop, from the Administration menu, from both (see the following
table), or from SFTP. Refer also to Procedure 19-6: Use job scheduler editor
(p. 19-70) and to the NPO Administration User Guide, to Manage Job Results.
Job Type ADMIN Analysis Desktop

Create job -
View job result
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Job Type ADMIN Analysis Desktop

Delete job result
Automatically done after the job is
viewed.
Delete job
Schedule job
The job results can be also downloaded through SFTP. All successful job results are
stored upon completion in the SFTP repository under the following directory:
{SFTP_HOME}/NPO_JOBS/<USER_ID>/<DATE>/<File Name>, located on the
same server as NPO.
Where:
{SFTP_HOME} is the home directory of the sftp server, retrieved from the
MUSE_INSTALL file at installation
<USER_ID> is the identifier of the NPO user that scheduled the job
<DATE> is the execution date of the job and
<File Name> is the filename of the job result.
Every day, all files older than 10 days (this is a configurable value retrieved from
MUSE_INSTALL file at installation) are removed from the SFTP repository.
If there is a file name conflict, for example, two or more jobs with the same file name
result, only the first executed file is saved. The format of the file stored in the SFTP
repository is the file format chosen during the scheduling operation.
Note: When stored in the SFTP repository, the files must not have names
containing the : character. This character must be substituted by the #
character.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-3: Edit executed report interactively
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-3: Edit executed report interactively

The user can change the display properties that appear in the executed report interactively.
The update appears directly on the displayed executed report.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 19-3.1: Edit title (p. 19-35).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 19-3.2: Add network objects to report (p. 19-36).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 19-3.3: Add functions to view embedded in report (p. 19-37)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Procedure 19-3.4: Add views to report (p. 19-38).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Procedure 19-3.5: Paste view into report (p. 19-39).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Procedure 19-3.6: Remove network objects from report (p. 19-40).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Procedure 19-3.7: Remove functions from view embedded in report (p. 19-41)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Procedure 19-3.8: Remove views from report (p. 19-42).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Procedure 19-3.9: Roll up / drill down temporally (p. 19-43).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Procedure 19-3.10: Roll up / drill down spatially (p. 19-46).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Procedure 19-3.11: Refresh report (p. 19-50).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Procedure 19-3.12: Propagate report contents to network object / function trees

(p. 19-52).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Procedure 19-3.13: Propagate view selection to network object / function trees from
executed report (p. 19-53).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-3.1: Edit title
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-3.1: Edit title

The title of the executed report is the short name of the report template name. Only in the
case of an executed report from a view, the title is of the following format:
Report_<n>, where n is an incremental number, to define a unique name.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Right click on the title and select Rename, OR
Select the title tab, then select from the menu bar Report -> Rename.
Result: The Report View window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Type the appropriate title of the executed report, then click on OK.
Result: The executed report title is updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-3.2: Add network objects to report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-3.2: Add network objects to report

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the network objects to add.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Add the selected network objects to the report viewer using Ctrl and drag and drop
Result: Depending on the user preferences, the selected network objects are added to
the executed report, or a new report is created. The same Execution Context is used
for the new items. The new report is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-3.3: Add functions to view embedded in
report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-3.3: Add functions to view embedded in report

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the functions to add (for example counters, indicators, parameters, events, rules).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Drag and drop them in the view from the report viewer using Ctrl and drag and drop
Result: The selected functions are added to the same report, no matter what the user
preferences are. The same Execution Context is used for the new items.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-3.4: Add views to report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-3.4: Add views to report

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the appropriate view template(s) from the View Template Tree.
Result: The view template is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Press Ctrl and drag and drop them into the executed report.
Result: Depending on the value set in the Drag & Drop modifier to add field from
Views / reports user preferences (p. 26-5), the key used for the adding procedure
may differ from Ctrl.
During this operation the cursor changes to if the view is compatible with the
executed report.
The selected objects are added to the executed report, or a new report is created if the
Open results in new report on editing field is checked in the Views / reports user
preferences (p. 26-5). The availability domain of the report is checked. The view
templates are executed and the resulting executing views are added to the end of the
report.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-3.5: Paste view into report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-3.5: Paste view into report

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Copy the view from the clipboard using Ctrl+C.

Result: The view is copied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Paste the view into the report viewer using Ctrl + V.

Result: The pasted view is executed.
Depending on the user preferences, the resulting executed view is added at the end of
the report, or as a new report.
You can also copy and paste an unsaved view into the report. If the view type is not
valid for the executed report, an error message is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-3.6: Remove network objects from report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-3.6: Remove network objects from report

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the network objects to remove.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Press Ctrl-Shift and drag and drop (depending on the user preferences).
Result: Depending on the user preferences, the selected items are removed from the
current executed report or in a new report. The same Execution Context is used for the
remaining items.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-3.7: Remove functions from view embedded
in report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-3.7: Remove functions from view embedded in

report
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the functions to remove (for example counters, indicators, parameters, events,
rules).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Press Ctrl - Shift and drag and drop (depending on the user preferences).
Result: The selected items are removed from the current view, without resulting a
new report, no matter what the user preferences are. The same Execution Context is
used for the remaining items.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-3.8: Remove views from report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-3.8: Remove views from report

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the views to remove.

Result: The views are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Press Ctrl-Shift and drag and drop.

Result: Depending on the value set in the Drag & Drop modifier to remove field
from Views / reports user preferences (p. 26-5), the key used for the removing
procedure may differ from Ctrl-Shift.
Depending on the Views / reports user preferences (p. 26-5), the selected views are
removed from the current executed report or in a new report. The same Execution
Context is used for the remaining items.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-3.9: Roll up / drill down temporally
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-3.9: Roll up / drill down temporally

This feature allows the user to Roll Up / Drill Down temporally in the executed report.
The temporal roll up / drill down can be in:
Standard mode
The Roll Up / Drill Down in standard mode implicitly takes into account the dates and
times involved in the current selection, to directly reduce the scope of the temporal
roll up or drill down accordingly. If the selection is composed of a discontinuous set
of dates and times, the earliest and latest dates and times are kept to define the new
temporal scope. If no selection is done, the start and end date and time of the executed
view are taken into account.
Advanced mode
The Roll Up / Drill Down in advanced mode enables you to redefine the targeted
temporal roll up or drill down.
Drill Down temporally facility is also available in each Standard view of a report, except
equipment views and mono-object distribution reports. This feature provides the same
facilities as for the executed views in View browser. Refer to Procedure 18-3.4: Roll up /
drill down temporally (p. 18-57) from Chapter 18, Views.
As a prerequisite, the executed report must already exist in the tabular / graphical report.
For a selected cell in a tabular view from the report, the direct spatial - temporal drill
down is available, providing the same facilities as for the executed views in View
browser. For more details, refer to Procedure 18-3.6: Direct spatial - temporal drill
down (p. 18-65) from Chapter 18, Views.
To Roll up Do
Standard Perform one of the following options:
mode, in the From the tool bar, select Report -> Temporal Scope -> Roll Up, OR
report
Click on the icon from the report tool bar OR
Right click on the report title area and select Temporal Scope -> Roll Up.
Advanced Perform one of the following options:
mode, in the From the tool bar, select Report -> Temporal Scope ->Advanced Roll Up,
report OR
Right click on the report title area and select Temporal Scope ->
Advanced Roll Up.
To Drill down Do
Standard mode, Perform one of the following options:
in the report From the tool bar, select Report -> Temporal Scope -> Drill Down, OR
Right click on the report title area and select Temporal Scope -> Drill
Down.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Drill down Do
mode, in the From the tool bar, select Report -> Temporal Scope ->Advanced Drill
report Down, OR
Right click on the report title area and select Temporal Scope ->
Standard mode, Perform one of the following options:
in an embedded Click on the icon from the view tool bar OR
view
Right click on the view and select Temporal Scope -> Drill Down.
Advanced Right click on the view and select Temporal Scope -> Advanced Drill
mode, in an Down.
embedded view
The Roll Up / Drill-Down in advanced mode opens the Advanced Rollup/DrillDown

window, enabling you to redefine the targeted temporal roll-up or drill down.
In the Advanced Rollup/DrillDown window, fill in the appropriate fields as presented
in the table below.

Name Only
Temporal Scope
Target Based on current Availability Domain, a Yes No
Periodicity drop-down list of available periodicities is
included, to select the target periodicity,
enabling you to skip some intermediary ones.
Spatial Scope
view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name Only
execution
Target Topology For temporally Roll up / Drill down, the Yes Yes
Level Target Topology Level option is inactive.
The interval on the report changes depending on the temporal availability.

For the report, depending on the user preferences, the data is updated either in the
executed report or in a new report.
For a view inside the report, a Multi-Object Evolution report, containing the temporal
drill-down view, is created. The title of the new report explicitly mentions that is
obtained from a drill down on the selected view.
If the maximum number of executed reports is already reached, the Drill Down
operation will not be executed.
The following day periodicities such as 4Hr, 1/2Hr, 1/4Hr, and RAW are treated as
Hourly. If the user rolls up from one of these periodicities, it is the same as rolling up
from Hour. Drilling down from Day always goes to Hour, if it is available, and not to
one of the other day periodicities.
Example:
Cells are displayed on a Day basis and the current availability domain of the executed
report is:
Hour Day Week Month

Network X
RNC X
Cell X X
Adjacency X X
If the user Rolls Up from Day, the new period will be Month and not Week, because
Cells are not available on Week but are on Month.
The user cannot Drill Down because Cells are not available on Hour.
The user can perform a Roll Up or a Drill Down either on the whole currently
displayed period scope (by default) or on the current selected periods scope (selected
rows or columns, if any). If disjoint time periods are selected, the Drill Down or Roll
Up will be performed between the first and the last date.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-3.10: Roll up / drill down spatially
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-3.10: Roll up / drill down spatially

This feature allows the operator to interactively Roll Up / Drill Down spatially in an
executed report, and add or remove network objects.
The spatial roll up / drill down can be in:
Standard mode
In tabular view, the standard mode implicitly takes the network objects involved in the
current selection, if any, to directly reduce the scope of the spatial roll up or drill
down accordingly. If nothing is selected, or if the selection is not significant in the
current context, takes all the network objects present in the view.
In graphical view, network object selection is not possible, so spatial roll up / drill
down in standard mode triggers for all network objects present in the current executed
view.
Advanced mode
The Roll up / Drill down in Advanced Mode opens an intermediary dialog enabling to
refine the targeted spatial roll-up or drill down.
Drill Down spatially facility is also available in each standard view of a report, except
equipment views and mono-object distribution reports.
You can drill down from a view inside:
A warning report
A new warning report is created, whose title explicitly mentions that it is obtained
from a drill down on the selected view.
A non warning report
A new multi-object evolution report is created, whose title explicitly mentions that it
is obtained from a drill down on the selected view.
If the maximum number of executed reports is already reached, the Drill Down operation
will not be executed.
This feature provides the same facilities as for the executed views in View browser. Refer
to Procedure 18-3.5: Roll up / drill down spatially (p. 18-61) from Chapter 18, Views.
For this, the executed report must already exist in the tabular / graphical report.
For a selected cell in a tabular view from the report, the direct spatial - temporal drill
down is available, providing the same facilities as for the executed views in View
browser. For more details, refer to Procedure 18-3.6: Direct spatial - temporal drill
down (p. 18-65) from Chapter 18, Views.
To Roll up Do
mode, in the From the tool bar, select Report -> Spatial Scope -> Roll Up, OR
report
Right click on the report title area and select Spatial Scope -> Roll Up.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Roll up Do
mode, in the From the tool bar, select Report -> Spatial Scope ->Advanced Roll Up,
report OR
Right click on the report title area and select Spatial Scope -> Advanced
Roll Up.
To Drill down Do
mode, in the From the tool bar, select Report -> Spatial Scope -> Drill Down, OR
report
Right click on the report title area and select Spatial Scope -> Drill
Down.
mode, in the From the tool bar, select Report -> Spatial Scope ->Advanced Drill
report Down, OR
Right click on the report title area and select Spatial Scope -> Advanced
Drill Down.
mode, in an Click on the icon from the view tool bar OR
embedded
Right click on the view and select Spatial Scope -> Drill Down.
view
Advanced Right click on the view and select Spatial Scope -> Advanced Drill Down.
mode, in an
embedded
view
The Roll Up / Drill-Down in advanced mode opens the Advanced Rollup/DrillDown

window, enabling you to redefine the targeted temporal roll-up or drill down.
In the Advanced Rollup/DrillDown window, fill in the appropriate fields as presented
in the table below.

Name Only
Temporal Scope
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name Only
Target For spatial Roll up / Drill down, this option is Yes Yes
Periodicity inactive.
Spatial Scope
view
execution
Target Topology Based on current Availability Domain, a Yes No
Level drop-down list is included, to select a
different topology level and perform a spatial
Roll-Up / Drill-down at the same time (in the
same direction, up or down), based on the
above spatial scope (network objects list).
The network objects in the report change depending on the spatial availability.
The interval on the report changes depending on the spatial availability.
For the report, the data is updated either in the same executed report or in a new
report, depending on the user preferences.
To trigger a Roll Up or Drill Down, the Analysis Desktop provides a list of possible
target object types (according to the context: up or down, availability domain etc.) for
selection through a popup menu. It is possible to skip the intermediate levels when
performing a spatial roll Up / drill down.
The user can perform a roll Up or a Drill Down either on the whole currently
displayed objects scope (by default) or on the current selected objects scope (selected
rows or columns, if any).
When rolling-up or drilling-down to a relation, the relations that have the current
network object as the source are used; i.e. if the current object is Cell1 and the user
drills-down to Adjacency, then all the Adjacencies have Cell1 as the source are
displayed in the resulting view.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When triggering a Drill Down for a mono-object evolution or a mono-object
distribution report, then N reports are generated as when executing them.
In the case of a warning report with the Filtering Unavailable Objects option and
consistent criteria, the QoS Availability Indicator must be available in the target
availability domain when rolling-up or drilling-down.
Example:
Cells are displayed on a Week basis and the current availability domain of the
executed report is:
Hour Day Week Month

Network X
RNC X X
Cell X
Adjacency X X X
If the user Rolls-Up from Cell, the new network object will be Network and not RNC,
because there is no RNC on Week but Network is available on Week periodicity.
If the user Drills-Down from Cell, the new network objects will be all the outgoing
Adjacencies for all the Cells because Adjacencies are available on Week periodicity.
When triggering a Roll Up or Drill Down in the context of a Working Zone, the Roll
Up or Drill Down is achieved inside the associated Working Zone topology.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-3.11: Refresh report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-3.11: Refresh report

For a report, there are two types of refresh:
Manual refresh, by the user
Automatic refresh, by the application.
To Do
To refresh Click on the icon from the report tool bar.
the report The latest available data is included:
manually
The To Date / Time field is retrieved from the execution context used when
executing the report
The To Date / Time field is updated to include the latest available data.
The icon is enabled when:
The periodicity is below a day (5 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1H, 2H.
..., 8H)
In all other cases (Day / Week / Month / BH / Trend periodicities, no current
day), this button is disabled.
To start the Click on the icon from the report tool bar.
automatic The latest available data is included:
refresh of a
The To Date / Time field is retrieved from the execution context used when
report
executing the report
The From Date / Time and To Date / Time fields are updated to include the
latest available data.
The icon is visible only when:
Both, manual and automatic refresh, are available only at report tool bar level and not
in the embedded views associated tool bars.
The report is executed with the new dates / times and the new resulting executed
report replaces the previous one.
A manual refresh can be achieved between two automatic refresh requests, as long as
the previous refresh is ended.
Note: For Comparison reports, having only Start Date / Time entered in the execution
context, the latest available data is included in the From Date / Time field in order
to manually refresh the view.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-3.11: Refresh report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For Evolution views and reports, the From Date/Time field is unchanged, while the To
Date/Time field is updated using the same algorithm as the one used when you click on
Default Date in the Execution Context window. If the new To Date/Time value is on
the next day (i.e. midnight crossing while automatic refresh is active), then the Start
Date/Time field is also updated (increased by one day).
For instance, if current day is January, 13th and initial start/end dates were: 12/01:05h to
13/01:08h; the view / report will be updated every hour until start/end becomes 12/01:05h
to 13/01:23h. The next update will lead to 13/01:05h to 14/01:00h.
In case the updated Start date after midnight crossing, would be in the future, the hour
part is forced to 0h00.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-3.12: Propagate report contents to network
object / function trees
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-3.12: Propagate report contents to network

object / function trees
A view topology / function selection from report can be propagated to network objects /
view template trees.
To propagate network objects / view templates from report to the respective tree, perform
one of the following options.
Click on Select
Click on the icon from the report tool bar Select as appropriate:
Propagate All
Propagate All View Templates.
Select Report -> Propagate Selection from Select as appropriate:
the tool bar All
All Network Objects
All View Templates
The network objects / view templates are selected in their respective trees depending
on the options.
The Network Objects are propagated to the corresponding modes active topology
trees / classifications and to the active basket of MultiNET mode.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-3.13: Propagate view selection to network
object / function trees from executed report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-3.13: Propagate view selection to network

object / function trees from executed report
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the view inside an executed report, click on the icon from the view tool bar,
OR
Select Propagate.
Result: A popup select menu appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Propagate All
Propagate All Functions.
Propagate Selected Network Objects, for tabular view only
Propagate Selected Functions, for tabular view only.
Result: The Network Objects are propagated to the corresponding modes active
topology trees / classifications and to the active basket of MultiNET mode.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-4: Edit executed report using dialog box
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-4: Edit executed report using dialog box

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 19-4.1: Open executed report (p. 19-55).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 19-4.2: Edit report template properties (p. 19-57).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 19-4.3: Edit report execution context (p. 19-58).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Procedure 19-4.4: Edit report spatial scope (p. 19-59).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-4.1: Open executed report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-4.1: Open executed report

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Right click on the title of the executed report, and select Executed Report..., OR
Select Report -> Executed Report... from the tool bar.
Result: The Executed Report Properties window appears.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-4.1: Open executed report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 The opened window contains three menu tabs:

Report Template Properties
Execution Context
Spatial Scope.
Select the required task.
Result: For information on how to edit them, refer to:
Procedure 19-4.2: Edit report template properties (p. 19-57)
Procedure 19-4.4: Edit report spatial scope (p. 19-59).
The following table presents the buttons displayed in the Executed Report
Properties window.
Button Name Used to...

Edit Report Launch the report template editor.
Template You can change the report template properties. Refer to Procedure
19-1.4: Edit report template (p. 19-25).
After applying the changes in the report template editor, the report is
refreshed.
Update Report Update the performed changes to the current report.
Create Report Create a new report with the performed changes.
Close Close the report.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-4.2: Edit report template properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-4.2: Edit report template properties

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the Report Template Properties tab.

Result: The Report Template Properties panel is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on Edit Report Template.

Result: The Report Template Editor window opens. Change as appropriate the report
template properties. For more information, refer to Procedure 19-1.4: Edit report
template (p. 19-25).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Click on
Apply the changes made on the current report Update report
Create a new report with the performed Create report
changes
Result: The executed report is refreshed.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-4.3: Edit report execution context
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-4.3: Edit report execution context

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the Execution Context tab.

Result: The Execution Context panel is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Update as appropriate the displayed fields.

For more information, refer to Procedure 19-2: Execute reports (p. 19-30).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Click on
changes
Result: The report viewer displays the resulting executed report.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-4.4: Edit report spatial scope
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-4.4: Edit report spatial scope

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the Spatial Scope tab.

Result: The Spatial Scope panel is displayed, with the list of included network
objects.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Click on
Add network objects from the spatial scope Select them and drop them to the report panel.
Remove network objects from the spatial Right click on them and select Delete.
scope
Result: The modification of the network objects affects the availability domain. If the
availability domain is empty, an error message is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Click on
changes
Result: The report viewer displays the values with the new data.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-5: Schedule reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-5: Schedule reports

Note: The MUSE_SCHEDULING_LICENSE must be installed for the scheduling
of reports.
The user can schedule the execution of reports on a daily, weekly or monthly basis. A
report can also be archived at the point of scheduling.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Execution Context window, click on the To Be Scheduled radio button.

Result: A new panel with three tabs ( Date, General, Repeat) appears, with input to
create a schedule for the report execution.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Date tab, fill in the appropriate fields as presented in the table below.
Name
Execution Date The date at which the scheduled report is executed, i.e. the report result
becomes available at the morning of this date.
The default date is the next day from the current date.
If the report repeats, then this is the first schedule date.
The date can be selected either by using the select bar, or by clicking on
and choosing it from the displayed calendar.
The date format can be configured in the user preference.
From Start date of the observation period for execution, expressed relatively to the
Execution Date in a number of days / weeks / months (according to the
selected periodicity).
Date from which the scheduled execution starts.
The default value is 1 day / week / month before the Execution Date.
At Start time of the observation period for execution.
To End date of the observation period for execution, expressed relatively to the
At End time of the observation period for execution.
The supported time format is hh (00 to 23) mm (00 to 59).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Data tab parameters are defined.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the General tab, fill in the appropriate fields.
Name
Job Title Defines the name of the job. This can be different from the report name.
Default values:
<Report short name>, if one report is selected
MultipleReport, if there are several reports selected
<Report short name>_Repeat or MultipleReport_Repeat, if
one or several report(s) is / are selected and repeat option other than
None is selected.
Owner Defines the owner of the job.
This parameter is read-only.
Working Zone Defines the current Working Zone being used by the current user.
Output Format Defines the output format for the scheduled report.
Possible values:
Analysis Desktop (displayed in Report Viewer), not available in SFTP
location
.xml
.xls
.csv
.html
.pdf
Archive, not available in SFTP location.
For Detailed Diagnosis execution, only the html format is available.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The general parameters are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 To schedule the report on an entire working zone, select Entire Working Zone.
This may be particularly useful when executing a warning report.
Result: If the report is executed on the entire working zone, then the spatial scope
contains all the network objects in the working zone of the same type as the executed
report.
For example, if the report was executed on Cell 3G's in Working Zone A, then the
spatial scope of the executed report are all the Cell 3G's that were in Working Zone A
at the time when the report was executed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 In the Repeat tab, set the appropriate frequency for the scheduled report repetition.
By default, the repeat option is None, so the report is only scheduled once.
Option Parameter Description

Name Name
None - No report repetition is scheduled.
If the repeat option is None, then all the other fields for the rest
of frequency radio buttons are not visible.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name Name
Day Every Specifies the recurrence interval in days.
Default value: 1 Day.
End On Specifies the final date of the repeating report.
Default value: the next possible date after the scheduled date.
If changing the End on date, ensure that it is not less than the
scheduled start date.
Week Every Specifies the recurrence interval in weeks.
Default value: 1 Week.
Repeat On Click on the preferred day(s) of the week when you want the
report to be repeated.
Month Every Specifies the recurrence interval in months.
Default value: 1 Month.
By Select one of the two possible values:
Day, to set a repeating weekday, such as the last Friday of
each month
Date, to set a repeating date in the month, such as the 15th.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Repeat parameters are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click on Execute.
Result: The scheduled reports are executed during the night, after the loading of
consolidation.
A report which is Scheduled and Archived is displayed in the Archived reports list;
refer to Display pending and archived executed reports (p. 19-66).
To view or delete scheduled reports, refer to Procedure 19-6: Use job scheduler
editor (p. 19-70).
The scheduled reports purge computes the overall reports size. If this size is greater
than a configurable threshold, then it will drop oldest reports until the size goes below
the threshold.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Display pending and archived executed reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Display pending and archived executed reports

After a report is scheduled, it can be visualized in two ways.
From the Analysis Desktop

From the menu bar, select Select Jobs -> Display Pending and Archived Executed
Reports..., OR
Press Ctrl+G.
The Pending and Archived Executed Reports window opens, displaying the list of
executed reports.
Select the Pending Reports tab in order to view the executed reports or, in the case of
failure, to acknowledge the error displayed in the Failure Reason field.
To view one or several pending executed reports, select them by checking the
checkbox, then click on Open / Mark as Viewed.
If the scheduled report encounters an error condition during the execution of the
report, this failed job is also listed in the pending executed reports list. A dedicated
column displays the Failure Reason. When you select such a report to view, it is
marked as viewed and it is not displayed anymore next time the dialog box is opened.
All the reports are opened one by one in a sequential order. If the report output is not
Analysis Desktop, then you are first prompted to save the report and then to open it to
view it.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Once a report is saved or viewed in the Analysis Desktop, then it is marked as viewed
and it no longer appears in the list of pending executed reports. If the current Working
Zone is not the Working Zone in which the report was scheduled, then when
displaying the executed report, any objects not belonging to the current Working Zone
are shown as 'unknown'.
Select the Archived tab in order to view the list of archived reports.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select an archive and click on one of the following options.
To Click on
Delete an archive Delete
Open an archive Open
Close the Pending and Archived Executed Close
Reports window
Open the corresponding Online Help page Help
To see and display the Archived reports you must have the MUSE_NPO_REPOR-
T_ARCHIVING FAD.
As the Archived reports are associated with the Working Zone in which they were
executed, they may display only Unknown objects if opened by a user in a completely
different Working Zone.
Each Column of the Archived Reports can be sorted Ascending or Descending.
Only the report owner (archiver) and the administrator can delete an archived report.
The MUSE_NPO_ADMINISTRATE_ARCHIVED_REPORTS FAD allows a
user, having this FAD, to delete any Archived reports. Otherwise, the user can delete
only its own archives.
If the list of archived reports cannot be fetched from the server then error message
appears.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For more information regarding archived reports, refer to Archive reports (p. 19-86).
From the NPO, as described in the NPO Administration User Guide, in Download job results.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-6: Use job scheduler editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-6: Use job scheduler editor

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 19-6.1: Open job scheduler editor (p. 19-71).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 19-6.2: Create job (p. 19-72).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 19-6.3: Create a scheduled job by copy (p. 19-75).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Procedure 19-6.4: Edit scheduled job (p. 19-76).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Procedure 19-6.5: Delete scheduled job (p. 19-77).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Procedure 19-6.6: Display job list (p. 19-78).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-6.1: Open job scheduler editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-6.1: Open job scheduler editor

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select Jobs -> Job Scheduler....
Result: The Job Scheduler window opens.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-6.2: Create job
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-6.2: Create job

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Job Scheduler Editor window, click on .

Result: The Job Scheduler Editor window appears with default values and editable
fields.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name
Job Name Name of the job to be created. Job_<owner> _n
A maximum of 64 characters are allowed. where <owner> is
the owner of the
job, and n is an
incremental number
to define a unique
name
Owner User who is creating the job. The username you
application
Output Defines the output format for the scheduled report. User selected type
Format Possible values:
Analysis Desktop (displayed in Report Viewer)
.xml
.xls
.csv
.scsv
.html
.pdf
Archive.
The Archive output format is available if the user has
MUSE_NPO_REPORT_ARCHIVING FAD.
For Detailed Diagnosis execution, the Analysis Desktop
and html formats are available.
Mode Mode in which the objects should be executed. Core-Object(CELL2G,
CELL3G,
CELLLTE
depends on the
technology)
Functions Names of the reports or diagnosis dragged from the
selection tree.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name
Network Filled from topology tab tree.
Objects The network objects that are part of the scheduled job.
Only when Entire working zone is selected, this parameter
is read-only.
Entire Defines that the job scheduling will be done on the whole Unchecked
working Working Zone.
zone When this is selected, the topology tab in the right side
selection tab pane will be disabled.
Execute The report or diagnosis is published every time it is Unchecked
and executed.
Publish The publish option is also available to jobs that are created
interactively.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the appropriate Periodicity of data for the job execution.

The possibilities for the periodicity depend on the availability domain of the chosen
functions and network object type.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In the Date tab, select the date for which the job must be scheduled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 In the Repeat tab, set the appropriate frequency for the scheduled job repetition.
By default, the repeat option is None, so the job is only scheduled once.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 In the Options tab, select as appropriate.
For Go To
QoS Requirement Procedure 3-5: Set QoS requirement
(p. 3-33)
Sampling Sampling (p. 3-28)
Reliability Reliability (p. 3-28)
Tuning Sessions Select forecast values in tuning sessions
(p. 3-28)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For Go To
Filter for Warning Reports Filter unavailable objects (p. 3-28)
Event Synthesis Event synthesis (p. 3-30)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Drag the appropriate network objects from the topology tab tree (in the right frame) and
drop them in the Network Objects panel.
Result: The network objects are in the Network Objects panel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Drag the appropriate reports or diagnoses from the selection tab tree (in the right frame)
and drop them in the Functions panel.
Result: The reports or diagnoses are in the Functions panel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 For the job to be evaluated for the whole Working Zone, check Entire Working Zone:
Global.
Result: When this is selected, the Topology tab from the right frame is disabled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Click on .
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Click on Yes.
Result: The job is created and is added in the Job Scheduler Tree (in the left frame).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-6.3: Create a scheduled job by copy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-6.3: Create a scheduled job by copy

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Job Scheduler Editor, select the job to copy from the left frame, then click on
.
Result: The Job Scheduler Properties panel appears with the default name and
properties of the selected job.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Define a name for the copied job, using the following format:
<oldname_Copy_n>, where n is an incremental unique number.
Result: The name is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform the appropriate modifications for the new job.

Note: If the execution date from the Date panel is in the past, it is automatically
updated to the date of the following day (same value as when creating a new job).
If the Repeat option is set, the related End On date from the Repeat panel is also
updated accordingly (similar behavior as when creating a new job).
Result: The new parameters are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on Apply.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on Yes.
Result: The scheduled job is created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-6.4: Edit scheduled job
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-6.4: Edit scheduled job

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Job Scheduler Editor, select the job to edit from the left frame, then click on
.
Result: The Job Scheduler Properties panel appears with the default name and
properties of the selected job.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Note: If the execution date from the Date panel is in the past, it is automatically
updated to the date of the following day (same value as when creating a new job).
If the Repeat option is set, the related End On date from the Repeat panel is also
updated accordingly (similar behavior as when creating a new job).
Result: The new parameters are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Apply.
Result: The scheduled job is edited.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-6.5: Delete scheduled job
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-6.5: Delete scheduled job

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Job Scheduler Editor, select the job(s) to be deleted.

Result: The job(s) are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on .
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Yes.
Result: The scheduled job is deleted.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-6.6: Display job list
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-6.6: Display job list

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select Jobs -> Jobs List....
Result: The Jobs List window opens, listing all available jobs.
The Jobs List window shows the following information.
Column Description
Name
Job Name Name of the job.
Owner Owner of the job.
Job Type Type of the job.
The possible types are: Reports, Diagnosis.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-6.6: Display job list
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Column Description
Name
Object Type Type of target object
Object Nb Object number or name of the job, taken from the working zone.
State Current state of the job.
The possible states of the job are: Active, Ended.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the required job and then select one of the following options.
To Do
Update the job list Click on Update.
Edit the current selected job Perform one of the following options:
Right click on the required job(s), then
select Edit from the popup menu, OR
Click on Edit.
The Job Scheduler Editor window opens.
Perform the actions described in
Procedure 19-6.4: Edit scheduled job
(p. 19-76).
Delete the selected job Perform one of the following options:

Right click on the required job(s), then
select Delete from the popup menu, OR
Click on Delete.
In the confirmation window, click on Yes.
Close the Job List window Close
Result: The job list is displayed accordingly.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Use executed report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use executed report

Tool bar
The following tool bar icons are available for the executed report.
The following table gives a brief description of the executed report tool bar icons.
Icon Description
Procedure 19-3.11: Refresh report (p. 19-50)
Procedure 19-3.11: Refresh report (p. 19-50)
The Automatic Refresh icon is visible only when:
The periodicity is below a day (5 min, 15min, 30min, 1H, 2H, ...,
8H)
In all the other cases, this button is invisible.
Procedure 19-9: Save executed report as template (p. 19-89)
Synchronize zooming in report (p. 19-82)
Synchronize cursor / scrolling in report (p. 19-81)
Synchronize axis management (p. 19-86)
Highlight in all report views (p. 19-83)
Display grid in all report views (p. 19-83)
Procedure 19-10: Export executed reports (p. 19-90)
Procedure 19-3.10: Roll up / drill down spatially (p. 19-46)
Procedure 19-3.10: Roll up / drill down spatially (p. 19-46)
Procedure 19-3.9: Roll up / drill down temporally (p. 19-43)
Procedure 19-3.9: Roll up / drill down temporally (p. 19-43)
Resize automatic views and legends in report (p. 19-85)
Archive reports (p. 19-86)
Toggle display type (tabular / graphical) (p. 19-87)
Synchronize 3D view graphs (p. 19-87)
Synchronize legend resizing (p. 19-88)
Procedure 19-3.12: Propagate report contents to network object /
function trees (p. 19-52)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the Executed Report window is too small, left and right arrows are displayed to
navigate among the executed report related icons.
Synchronize cursor / scrolling in report

The icon from the report tool bar has double functionality:
Synchronize cursor, for graphical modes only
Synchronized scrolling of views displayed in tabular mode.
Synchronize cursor in report
The vertical and / or horizontal cursor in a report can be synchronized. When
synchronized, the bar cursors of all graphs belonging to the same report are linked, and
they move in unison.The scroll bar is also linked, so a view is automatically scrolled if
needed. For instance, when moving a synchronized cursor in a non visible area, or
moving the cursor to an X-axis value which is out of the visible area in another view, the
other views are scrolled so that the cursor is always visible and at the same X-axis
location in all the views.
The cursor synchronization is only available when at least 2 views have the same scale. It
is not possible in a warning report.
If one of the synchronized views is in tabular format, the selected column is synchronized
with the vertical bar. If necessary, the tabular view is scrolled to display the selected
column.
For 3D views embedded in the report, synchronizing all graphical views cursors sharing
the same X or Y-Axis data is available. The 3D views having the same top level and
second level headers data dimensions, are synchronized.
Note: The feature is able to synchronize the cursors of some views horizontally and of
some other views vertically at the same time, as long as the same data dimension is
involved.
If a filter is associated to a graphical view from a report, and it is active, then:
The cursor synchronization cannot be used for the view
The view is not impacted by another cursor synchronization on any other view.
Synchronize scrolling in report
When the icon is activated, if a view displayed in tabular mode is scrolled, then all the
other views sharing the same X or Y Axis data are simultaneously scrolled.
The feature is able to synchronize the scrolling of some views horizontally and of other
views vertically at the same time, as long as the same data dimension is involved.
This also applies for 3D / nested tabular views, regarding the Axis management when
scrolling the dual level axis: only the views with the same top level and second level
headers data dimensions will be synchronized.
If active filters are associated to a scrollable view of a report, then:
The other views are not synchronized with the scrolling of this view
The view is not impacted by other view scrolling synchronization.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If all filters associated to an embedded view are deactivated, the synchronize scrolling can
be applied to this view.
Synchronize zooming in report

The zoom fields in all the graphs belonging to the same report can be synchronized.
When zooming is synchronized, the scroll bar is also linked and you can toggle it on and
off.
Zooming synchronization is only available when at least two views have the same scale.
Activate the zoom synchronization:
1. Click on the icon from the report tool bar.
2. Zoom in one of the views that shares the same scale as another one.
The current view and the other views sharing the same scale are zoomed. If the Ctrl key
and mouse wheel combination is used to zoom, then the views synchronized inside the
report, are zoomed in or out, according to the mouse wheel direction.
If active filters are associated to a graphical view from a report, then:
No zoom synchronization is achieved on other graphical views when using the zoom
in this graphical view
The graphical view is not impacted by another zoom synchronization in any other
view.
If all filters associated to an embedded view are deactivated, the synchronize zooming can
be applied to this view.
Filter in report
This feature allows the operator to choose what to be displayed and what not to be
displayed through filters.
Filtering allows showing / hiding of:
Network Objects for a Multi-Object report
Functions, for example hide one indicator
Periods, for example filter Mondays data between 10 / 10 / 2006 to 11 / 10 / 2006,
Filter 00h. This is available only on Mono / Multi Object Evolution reports.
This filtering applies to all the views in the report.
All types of filters which can be applied to views in the Viewer browser can be applied to
views inside a report.
The filtering can be toggled on and off.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Highlight in all report views
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Highlight in all report views

Highlighting can be turned on or off in all the views of an executed report at once.
To trigger the highlighting:
Select View -> Highlighting (On / Off)
Click on the icon from the report tool bar.
The highlighting turns on. Selecting the option again turns the highlighting off.
Display grid in all report views

The grid display can be toggled on or off in all the views of the report at once.
To activate the grid display, click on the icon from the report tool bar.
Grids are displayed in the views of the report.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-7: Edit view from executed report template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-7: Edit view from executed report template

A view can be modified within an executed report. Note that an exception applies: you
cannot modify the spatial scope or Execution Context of an individual view, since these
apply to the entire report.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the report template that contains one or several views to update.
Result: The report template is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right click on the appropriate view and select Executed View....

Result: The Executed View Properties window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 18-4.2: Edit view template properties (p. 18-77)
Procedure 18-4.3: Edit view execution context (p. 18-78)
Procedure 18-4.4: Edit view spatial scope (p. 18-79).
Result: If the view template is modified and not saved, then the executed report is
marked as needing to be saved.
If the view template is modified and saved with the same name, then the report is not
marked as needing to be saved.
If the view template is modified and saved with a new name, then the report is marked
as needing to be saved.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Duplicate executed report

To duplicate an executed report:
Right click on the report name tab, and select Duplicate, OR
Select Report -> Duplicate from the tool bar.
A new executed report is created with:
A default name:
<oldname>_Copy_n, where n is an incremental number to define a unique name
The values of the duplicated executed report.
The new report template contains copies of each view within the report template.
For example, if you have Report A containing View B and View C, when you
duplicate the report, the result is Copy Report A containing Copy View B and Copy
View C. This is useful in the case when you are not the owner of a report and its
corresponding view templates.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-8: Rename executed report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-8: Rename executed report

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Right click on the report name tab, and select Rename, OR
Select Report -> Rename from the tool bar.
Result: The Report View window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Type the new name of the report, then click on OK.

Result: The executed report is saved, taking into account the new name.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Resize automatic views and legends in report

You can choose to automatically resize all views and legends of a report.
Click on the icon from the report tool bar, OR
From Edit -> Preferences -> Views / Reports, select the Default resize of views
inside report checkbox.
The height of every view inside the report is adjusted such that for the views displayed in
Tabular mode, the height of the view should be adjusted such that all lines are visible and
not more. This means that each view can have a different height depending on its content
(i.e. a view displaying 10 indicators is bigger than a view displaying 3 indicators). If a
view is rotated, the height must take care of the real dimension displayed vertically.
Views displayed in graphical mode are displayed using a default height. So if they were
resized earlier, they are resized back to the default height.
Every graphical view legend width is adjusted such that for views displayed in Graphical
mode, the automatic resize updates the legend width up to the maximum requested width
to make the complete legend visible (i.e. the maximum width among all views must be
applied to all views). In other words, legend of all views must have the same width, this
width being the maximum of all legend widths.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Synchronize axis management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Synchronize axis management

Use this feature to synchronize the axis management of the 3D or 2D views embedded in
the report.
Click on the icon from the report tool bar, if that the current view and the other views
to become synchronized according to the new Axis Management configuration ('Group
By', 'A', 'B' and 'C' dimensions become synchronized) or tabular view rotation.
The feature is not accessible (greyed) when there are less than two views in the report.
Refer to Manage axis (p. 18-107) for more information.
Archive reports
You can choose to save an executed report as an archive that can be reopened later.
Select Report -> Archive Report , OR
Right click on the report name tab, and select Archive Report.
The Report Description window opens.
In this window you can fill a free text describing the report to be archived and to confirm
the operation.
The maximum number of Archived Reports can be configured in the design phase.
When archiving a new report, if the maximum number of Archived Reports allowed is
reached, the archive operation is rejected and an error message is displayed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Archive reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Toggle display type (tabular / graphical)

Use this feature to switch all the views of a report to the same mode, alternatively
graphical or tabular.
To change the display type:
Select the toggle button from the report tool bar, OR
From the tool bar, select Report -> Toggle Display Type (Tabular / Graphical).
The feature is not accessible (greyed) when the embedded views have only the tabular
mode that is available (neither primary graph, nor secondary graph).
Synchronize 3D view graphs

Use this feature to synchronize the 3D view graphs for the updation of 3rd Dimension, so
that if the 3rd Dimension of one of the 3D views is changed, all the other 3D views in that
report which has the same dimension available in the dropdown list gets changed in
unison.
If anyone of the 3D view is in tabular mode while changing the 3rd Dimension, the
corresponding graphical view will also get updated once the view is changed to graphical
mode.
Click on the icon from the report tool bar, if you want that the current graphical view
and the other graphical views sharing the same grouping factor type (same dimension
available in the dropdown list) to become synchronized according to the new value.
The feature is not accessible (greyed) when there are less that two 3D views in the report,
with graphical mode with the same grouping factor type.
Note: Embedded 2D views are ignored.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Synchronize legend resizing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Synchronize legend resizing

Use this feature to synchronize the width of the Legend panel of every view in the report.
Click on the icon from the report tool bar, if you want that the current graphical view
legend and the other graphical views legends to be resize with the same chosen width.
The chosen width is the wider one.
The feature is not accessible (greyed) when there are not at least two available graphical
views in the report.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-9: Save executed report as template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-9: Save executed report as template

If the executed report is modified and not saved, it is marked with * as needing to be
saved.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform one of the following options

Right click on the executed report and select Save as Template..., OR
From the tool bar, select Report -> Save as Template..., OR
Press Ctrl+Shift+S.
Result: The Save Report Template window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Type the report template name, then click on OK.

Result: The executed report is saved as template.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Close executed report(s)

To Do
Close one executed report Perform one of the following options
Right click on the report name tab, and
select Close, OR
Select Report -> Close.
Close all executed reports Perform one of the following options
Right click on a report name tab, and
select Close All, OR
Select Report -> Close All, OR
Only the completed executions are closed. The
On-going tabs for the executions which are in
progress, remain open.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-10: Export executed reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 19-10: Export executed reports

Note: The following rules apply:
There is a limitation when exporting reports in Excel to worksheets containing a
maximum of 65,536 rows and 256 columns.
In the case of a worksheet containing more than 256 columns, a workaround is to
use the Transpose function from Excel in the report from the Analysis Desktop,
which will return a horizontal range of cells, then export it using the Export ->
Display option.
To export a report containing graphs in Excel, the Excel security level must be set
to low or medium.
For example, in Excel 2002 / 2003, set the following:
From the menu bar, select Tools -> Macro -> Security....
The Security window opens.
In the Security Level tab, check Medium or Low, then click on OK.
In Excel 2007, set the following:
Click on the Office Button from the top left corner of the Microsoft Excel
window.
A drop-down list appears.
Click on Excel Options from the bottom of the drop-down list.
The Excel Options window opens.
From the left panel of the Excel Options window, select Trust Center, then click
on Trust Center Settings....
The Trust Center window opens.
From the left panel of the Trust Center window, click on Macro Settings, then
select the Enable all macros (not recommended, potentially dangerous code
can run) options and click on OK.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 The user can export one or several files.
To Do
Export one report Perform one of the following options:
Select the report, then select Report ->
Export -> Full... from the tool bar, OR
select an element in the report, right click
and select Export -> Full...
The original full report is exported.
Select the report, then select Report ->
Export -> Display... from the tool bar, OR
select an element in the report, right click
and select Export -> Display...
The currently displayed report (ie. with
filter applied on executed report) is
exported.
If the report is already in the Executed Report
browser, an alternative is to click on the
icon from the Executed Report browser. This
triggers an original full report export (Full
Export several reports Perform one of the following options:
From the tool bar, select Report -> Export
All...
All reports are exported and gathered in the
same zip file.
Result: The Export Report window opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Browse for the location to save the report, give the appropriate File name, then select the
appropriate export format:
.xls
.xml
.csv
.html
.pdf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Save.
Export is Successfull. Do you want to open the exported file?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Open the exported file Click on Yes.
Do not open the exported file Click on No.
Result: The report is exported to selected format, keeping the same look as in the
executed report. The information about the spatial scope, , and report template
parameters is also displayed.
You can use an Excel Template for the graphical mode. For more information, refer to
the NPO Administration User Guide document, to Import Excel template using GUI.
The comment zones are exported as displayed. The reports and comment zones are
exported in the same order as displayed in the executed report.
The report tool bar is not exported.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Export views from executed report

A view can be exported from an executed report.
From the view inside an executed report, perform the steps described in Procedure 18-8:
Export executed views (p. 18-103).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Display spatial aggregation in views / reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Display spatial aggregation in views / reports

To create a view / report with aggregation information, in the Execution Context you have
to choose the Spatial Aggregation option, refer to Spatial aggregation (p. 3-26).
The resulting view / report contains an additional line or column or both (depending on
the view / report type), labeled Aggr.
If the view / report contains a mix of indicators and other type of functions, the
aggregated values will be fulfilled only for indicators.
The aggregation displayed is computed the same way as would an object zone made of all
objects displayed in the view:
For a basic indicator, the value is computed using its spatial aggregation method over
the selected set of objects
For a calculated indicator, each underlying basic indicator is first aggregated spatially,
the formula is then computed using the aggregated values.
The following figures provide examples of spatial aggregation in views / reports.
Figure 19-16 Multi-object evolution report with spatial aggregation option
Figure 19-17 Multi-object evolution view with spatial aggregation option
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Display spatial aggregation in views / reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 19-18 Multi-object comparison view with spatial aggregation option
Use static trend prediction in evolution views and reports

To execute a report on Trends Prediction, the report template must embed at least one
view template that includes a filtering indicator with Trend Prediction Supported attribute
set.
For the report on Trends Prediction, in the Execution Context you have to choose the
trends option.
If Moving Average trend type is selected, you have to define the Window Size. The
maximum allowed value for Window Size is equal with total number of considered
samples (depending on the observation time interval and the selected periodicity).
The Predicted Period can take a value between 0 and ([Moving Average Window
Size] - 1).
In order to compute the moving average the following rules apply:
As long as the number of points is lesser than the Window Size value, then the
average is performed only on the number of available points
When the number of available points is equal to the window size then the average
is performed on the window size.
The Average function rules from Excel apply when calculating the trend.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Use static trend prediction in evolution views and reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If Linear Regression trend type is selected, the Predicted Period can take a value
between 0 and half the number of samples available in the observation interval.
In this case, the NPO performs the following operations:
1. Compute all indicators according to the execution context from the starttime to
endtime+P. For standard indicators NPO should not return data in the future. The
normalization function should not return data for the future
2. Create pseudo-indicators (Trend indicator, only on context of the view execution)
for each indicator having the flag Trend Supported set to true
3. For each Trend Indicator computes the trend from:
Starttime and endtime+P of the execution context. Only the trend indicators have
data in the future
The result of the computed value on step 1
Using the trend type defined in the execution context. Only one type moving
average or linear regression of trend could be defined for a given view.
4. Return to the client executed view that contains:
All indicators with their values from starttime to the current time with data from
current Time to endtime+P set to null and their associated highlighting
Trend indicators from the starttime to the endtime+P of the execution view context
and their associated highlighting.
For example: current time is 13 December 2010 10:00
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Use static trend prediction in evolution views and reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Execute View definition:
1 indicator: GHOOTCGN
Indicator GHOOTCGN has the option TREND.
Execution Context:
Periodicity: Hourly
Starttime from 09th December 2010 00:00 to 13th December 2010 00:00
Predicted period = can be between 0 to 120 (endtime starttime in hour). In the
example the Predicted period is set to 48. it means the endtime become 15th
December 2010 (13th December 2010 00:00 + 48 hour).
The following figure shows an executed report on Trends Prediction in tabular mode.
Use dynamic trend prediction in executed views and reports

The Trend Prediction is dynamically and locally computed and displayed in the Analysis
Desktop view on the observation interval.
To view the Dynamic Trend in an executed view / report:
From the menu bar, select View -> Dynamic Trends, OR
Right click in the view and select Dynamic Trends.
The following window appears.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Use dynamic trend prediction in executed views and reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Dynamic Trends window:

Choose the Trend Type: Linear Regression or Moving Average.
The Available Indicators list displays all the available standard indicators in a view.
The Selected Indicators list is the list of indicators on to see the Dynamic Trends.
Dynamic trends are available only for standard Indicators wherein numeric data is
available (including percentages). Dynamic trends are available even on scalar indicators
that do not support trend prediction (but without possible prediction in this case).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Use dynamic trend prediction in executed views and reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When a view is executed with Trends Prediction, the executed view is modified as
follows:
The tabular views contains additional rows for each of the indicators for which
dynamic trend is requested. The row name becomes: <indicator_name><Trend>
The graphical views contains a new entry in the Legends panel for each of the
indicators for which dynamic trend is executed. Legend name in the graphs is same as
that in tabular mode.
The following figure shows an executed view on Dynamic Trends Prediction in graphical
mode.
Highlighting is not available on dynamic trends.

All filtering in views facilities are available on dynamic trends.
Dynamic Trend information can be exported as any other executed view information.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
20 MultiNET Mode
20
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the MultiNET mode.
Contents
Presentation 20-1
Use MultiNET mode 20-2
Procedure 20-1: Populate MultiNET mode 20-4
Apply filters in MultiNET mode 20-5
Procedure 20-2: Execute view / report in MultiNET mode 20-7
Presentation
The MultiNET mode is a pseudo mode which enables the execution of views, indicators
and reports on a selection composed of objects of various network element types and
object zones.
In MultiNET mode, on the top of the tree area are Basket tabs.
At the beginning of an Analysis Desktop session these tabs show the topology nodes
shown in the previous session. The Topology tree objects which are not available, because
of being deleted or change of working zone after User Preferences were saved in the last
session, are not displayed. The visibility of the soft-deleted objects is based on the user
preference.
There are five Basket tabs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
MultiNET Mode Use MultiNET mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use MultiNET mode

To open MultiNET, click on the tab from the Mode Tabs browser.
The MultiNET mode Basket tab main area is a tree where the objects are simply
classified / grouped per object type.
This tree is composed of:
A root node with the name of the current Working Zone
An intermediary level of nodes that are the object types of current contained objects
The objects themselves, displayed similarly to their original topology tree, with the
same labels and icons.
The function browser for a MultiNET mode has three function tabs: indicators, view
templates and report templates, as described in the following table.
Name Basically Excluding

Indicators All the indicators from all Vector indicators, Matrix
visible modes (including indicators, Axis indicators
Counting indicators)
View templates All the view templates from all Matrix view templates, Vector
visible modes view templates, Equipment
view templates
Report templates All the report templates from all Mono-object Evolution report
visible modes templates, Mono-object
Distribution report templates,
Warning report templates and
every Multi-Object evolution
report template that is embed in
an Equipment view
You can reorder the Basket tabs. Right click on a Basket tab and select Organize Trees.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
MultiNET Mode Use MultiNET mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Organize baskets window is structured in the same way as in Procedure 2-4.10:
Organize function trees (p. 2-29).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
MultiNET Mode Procedure 20-1: Populate MultiNET mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 20-1: Populate MultiNET mode

In the MultiNET mode trees, the object type nodes and the network objects of the same
object type in the MultiNET mode trees are classified alphabetically.
Only network objects or object zones belonging to network object modes or zone modes
for which MultiNET was defined as a compatible target mode in the metadata file (
MaatQueryMetaData.xml file) can be dragged and dropped into MultiNET mode. The
only functions provided for MultiNET mode are indicators, views and reports and the
source modes must also have these functions (indicator, view, report) defined. There must
be at least some indicators, views and reports for which the source mode belongs to their
Availability Domain.
If the selected object is an object zone, in the Basket tab tree is added the object zone
itself, not the network objects forming the object zone. The node tree created corresponds
to the object zone itself, named with the object zone name.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Drag and drop the objects taken from the other modes or basket tabs in the
tab from the Mode Tabs browser.
Result: While dragging and dropping the network objects or object zones, the mouse
pointer changes to .
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Open the MultiNET tab.

Result: The objects are automatically selected in the Basket tab, without changing the
previously existing selection.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Add all network objects included in the object zone

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the object zone in the object zone mode.

Result: The object zone is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Drag and drop it to the cell modes to obtain the cells of the required object zone.
Result: The cells of the required object zone are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Drag and drop these selected cells (in the cell mode) to the MultiNET tab.
Result: The objects are added to the basket tab tree.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
MultiNET Mode Procedure 20-1: Populate MultiNET mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Remove objects
Perform one of the following options if required.
It is not possible to edit or remove a basket tab from the MultiNET.
To Do
Remove the selection from the current basket Right click on a basket and select Remove
From Basket.
Empty the corresponding basket, after a Right click on a basket and select Clear
confirmation from the user Basket.
Remove the deleted object zone (this is not Select Refresh in the basket tab.
done automatically) from the basket tab of the
MultiNET (if this deleted object zone was
present in a basket tab).
Go back to the first level nodes visible and Select Collapse all.
close everything.
Apply filters in MultiNET mode

In the MultiNET mode are available three function filtering options (AND, OR, No
filter), described in table below.
Filter Name Description

AND Filter Displays only the functions for which, the Availability Domain
contains the whole set of the different object types of the basket tab.
OR Filter Displays only the functions for which, the Availability Domain
contains at least one of the different object types of the basket tab.
No Filter Displays all functions for the current function tab available from all
visible modes.
The following figure shows the menu for the topology tree of MultiNET mode.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
MultiNET Mode Apply filters in MultiNET mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
New information appears in the function tab tree footer to inform the user about which
type of filtering is currently applied on the function tree and the Basket tab name from
which the filter is triggered for example: [Filter: AND / Basket 1], [Filter: OR / Basket 2]
or [Filter: No Filter].
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
MultiNET Mode Procedure 20-2: Execute view / report in MultiNET mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 20-2: Execute view / report in MultiNET mode

The principle of Multiple Network Elements Type View / Report execution is similar to
the standard NPO View / Report execution, as described in Procedure 18-2: Execute
view (p. 18-42) and Procedure 19-2: Execute reports (p. 19-30).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select a set of objects from the basket.

Result: The objects are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select a view / report template or a set of indicators.

Result: The view / report template or set of indicators is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Drag and drop the selection into the target viewer.

Result: The Availability Domain, including manual extensions or restrictions, of a
view / report template remains the same during MultiNET execution.
If a selected object candidate for a view / report execution does not belong to the view
/ report template final Availability Domain, then the effective execution is impossible
and an error dialog is raised, explaining that the selected object instance is not
included in the view / report template Availability Domain.
In the MultiNET context, no automatic and dynamic availability domain extension is
performed when a view / report template is dropped in the Executed View / Report
browser.
A MultiNET report execution scheduled job can be edited but with a set of relevant
specific limitations. Scheduling a MultiNET report on entire Working Zone is not
possible.
The temporal Roll Up and Drill Down on a MultiNET View / Report is allowed,
while, the spatial Roll Up and Drill Down is not allowed, unless the objects from the
MultiNET basket belong to the same type.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
MultiNET Mode Procedure 20-2: Execute view / report in MultiNET mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
21 POD mode
21
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the POD (Populated On-Demand) mode.
Contents
Presentation 21-1
Procedure 21-1: Populate POD mode 21-2
Procedure 21-2: Remove Object(s) from POD mode 21-3
Procedure 21-3: Clear a POD mode 21-4
Presentation
The POD mode is a pseudo mode that is available only for Large Working Zones.
This feature provides access to some modes when the number of objects in a working
zone is bigger than a pre-defined threshold (2000 cells).
At the beginning of an Analysis Desktop session the POD mode is empty. You have to
manually request the objects to check using drag and drop (including automatic
propagation).
The content of the topology classification of the POD mode is not persistent from an AD
session to the next AD session.
The topology objects of a POD mode are displayed in a tree.
Only one topology classification is available in a POD mode. This topology classification
is the first one defined in the metadata. It is not possible to create new topology
classifications for a POD mode.
The POD mode can be hidden / unhidden / reordered.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
POD mode Procedure 21-1: Populate POD mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 21-1: Populate POD mode

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Drag and drop the objects taken from the other modes in the POD tab from the Mode Tabs
browser.
Result: While dragging and dropping the network objects or object zones, the mouse
pointer changes to .
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Open the POD tab.

Result: The objects are automatically selected in the POD Mode.
If the dragged and dropped object (either network object or object zone) is already
present in the considered POD tree, it is not added again but is selected in the POD
tree.
If the maximum number of objects allowed for the POD mode is reached while
adding objects in the POD mode:
Remaining (in excess) objects are not added to the POD mode.
A warning message indicates the number of objects that have not been added.
The propagation rules are the same in a Large Working Zone case as in a standard
Working Zone case.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Examples
Examples Description
Example 1 Drag and drop one or several BSC(s) into Adjacency (POD) mode will
retrieve all the related adjacencies from the BSC and add them into the
Adjacency POD mode.
Example 2 Drag and drop one or several BSC(s) into AIC (POD) mode will
retrieve all the AIC of the selected BSCs and add them into the AIC
POD mode.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
POD mode Procedure 21-2: Remove Object(s) from POD mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 21-2: Remove Object(s) from POD mode

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Open the POD tab.

Result: The POD tab opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select one or several objects in the POD mode.

Result: The objects are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Right click and select the Remove option.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on YES.
Result: The selected objects are removed from the POD mode tree.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
POD mode Procedure 21-3: Clear a POD mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 21-3: Clear a POD mode

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Open the POD tab.

Result: The POD tab opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right click and select the Remove All option.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on YES.
Result: All the objects of the POD topology classification tree are removed from the
POD mode tree. The POD mode is empty.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
22 Diagnosis
22
Overview
Purpose
This section describes how to perform diagnosis of QoS problems.
Contents
Presentation 22-2
Display diagnosis scenario properties 22-3
Procedure 22-1: Propagate diagnosis scenario 22-7
Propagate selection between synthetic and detailed report and topology 22-7
classifications
Procedure 22-2: Open diagnosis editor 22-8
Procedure 22-3: Execute diagnosis in synthetic mode 22-9
Procedure 22-4: Execute diagnosis in detailed mode 22-11
Display execution logs 22-14
Procedure 22-5: Edit detailed diagnosis 22-15
Copy diagnosis view to system clipboard 22-19
Procedure 22-6: Schedule executed diagnosis reports 22-20
Display pending executed diagnosis 22-23
Close executed detailed diagnosis 22-24
Procedure 22-7: Export diagnosis 22-25
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Presentation
The operator can trigger diagnosis reports in the following situations:
A QoS indicator crossed a threshold
A QoS indicator is suspected to be faulty, even if no threshold was crossed (it is even
possible that no threshold is associated with the indicator)
An alarm is received.
The operator then executes diagnosis reports to retrieve the cause for an identified QoS
problem, or to check the logical configuration of any topology objects, particularly cells
and adjacencies.
The diagnosis execution results can be viewed as:
A synthetic summary, provided in the Views browser
The synthetic report of the standard diagnosis appears in icon format ( , , OR
).
A node per node detailed report, displayed on demand in the Reports browser.
Detailed diagnosis reports consist of test nodes grouped in a tree, based on causality links.
A detailed diagnosis tree is not limited in size.
The trees start with an observed QoS problem, an alarm or nothing is specified, and go
from node to node to the possible reasons until a root problem cause is found.
See also Procedure 22-4: Execute diagnosis in detailed mode (p. 22-11).
There are system available diagnosis scenarios, but the user can also create their own.
This is done through the Diagnosis Editor, which is based on the Eclipse platform
concepts.
The Eclipse framework is structured around the concept of plugins, and uses PyDev Node
Code Editor.
Diagnosis scenarios consist of test nodes grouped in a tree based on causality links. A link
is oriented from a consequence node to a causal node. A consequence node can have
several causal nodes. The execution of a diagnosis scenario is the process of executing its
causal nodes applied on an execution context.
Refer to the NPO Diagnosis Development User Guide document for more information
about the:
Diagnosis Editor
Scenario Creation
Node Code Update
Introduction in Python.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Display diagnosis scenario properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Display diagnosis scenario properties

Procedure 3-2: Display and edit properties (p. 3-7).
You can also view the Diagnosis Scenario Properties window by clicking in the Detailed
Mode Diagnosis on the See node code hyperlink.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name Only
Name Name of the Diagnosis Scenario Yes Yes
Description Description of the scenario No Yes
Owner Displays the name of the owner for the scenario Yes Yes
System True if this scenario is a System Scenario Yes Yes
Access Access rights for Public or Private Yes Yes
Rights
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name Only
Visible Yes, if this scenario is visible in the Analysis Desktop. No Yes
No, if this scenario is not visible in the Analysis Desktop.
Validated Flag indicating if the user has considered that this scenario No Yes
is correct and executable
Type Scenario type (Diagnosis or Complex rule) Yes Yes
Severity Error or Warning Flag, used to discriminate complex rules Yes Yes
(Tuning checks)
Dictionary Name Name of the scenario dictionary No Yes
Information Version Version of the dictionary. Yes Yes
System Whether it is a system or customer Yes Yes
dictionary.
Date Date the scenario dictionary was Yes Yes
loaded.
Author Author of the scenario dictionary. Yes Yes
Description Details about scenario dictionary. Yes Yes
Families Table of associated family and sub-families of the Yes Yes
scenario:
Family - The family to which this scenario belongs
Sub-Family Depth 1 - The sub-family to which this
scenario belongs
Sub-Family Depth 2 - The sub-sub-family to which
this scenario belongs
Sub-Family Depth 3 - The sub-sub-sub-family to
which this scenario belongs
Sub-Family Depth 4 - The sub-sub-sub-sub-family to
which this scenario belongs.
Availability Availability Domain of the indicator, It is the list of object No Yes
Domain type at each temporal level where the indicator is
available. Yes
Scenario Indicators and parameters associated with the scenario. Yes Yes
Triggers
Node Tree A tree displaying all the nodes associated with the Yes Yes
scenario. in the case of an external scenario node then the
scenario name and node name is given.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name Only
Node Node Name Name of the Node Yes Yes
Information Node Description of the Node Yes Yes
Description
Node (x,y) The X and Y positions of the node Yes Yes
Node Links The node links are: No Yes
Link Rank
Link Cut-Off
Iteration Variable
Iteration List Target Node.
Node Code Node diagnosis code. No Yes
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Procedure 22-1: Propagate diagnosis scenario
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 22-1: Propagate diagnosis scenario

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click on the diagnosis scenario to propagate.

node are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Drag the selected diagnosis scenario and drop it to an indicator function tab.
Result: The mouse pointer changes to .
If you drag it to an incompatible function tab, the mouse pointer changes to .
Depending on how the Display time before a tab is raised and made active
parameter is set as a user preference, the target counter tree:
Is automatically displayed, or
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Propagate selection between synthetic and detailed report

and topology classifications
Refer to Procedure 18-3.11: Propagate selection to network object / function trees in
view (p. 18-72).
The detailed generated report has hyperlinks in the network objects of the execution
context.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Procedure 22-2: Open diagnosis editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 22-2: Open diagnosis editor

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Alcatel-Lucent Analysis Desktop window:

Select Data->Diagnosis..., OR
Click on the icon.
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent Diagnosis Editor window opens.
For more information, refer to the NPO Diagnosis Development User Guide
document, to Diagnosis Editor.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Procedure 22-3: Execute diagnosis in synthetic mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 22-3: Execute diagnosis in synthetic mode

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the appropriate topology objects and diagnosis scenario(s), then drag and drop
them into the Executed View browser.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Enter the appropriate information, as described in Execution context (p. 3-19).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Execute to execute the diagnosis.

Result: The diagnoses associated with the selected reference indicator are displayed in
tabular view only. The default naming format for executed diagnosis in tab is the same
as for views (refer to Graphical and tabular view title format (p. 18-7)).
The executed diagnosis cannot be saved as template.
Figure 22-1 Example view tabular mode - multi-object comparison containing

diagnosis
Depending on the Severity value, the following icons apply.
Icon Description
Correct indicator value, no problem found.
Unknown.
Incorrect indicator value, problem found.
Diagnosis must be triggered.
In case of a request which takes more time, the Execute Diagnosis in Progress
window appears before the executed diagnosis is displayed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Procedure 22-3: Execute diagnosis in synthetic mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 To execute other tasks while the current request is in progress, click on

Run in background from the Execute Diagnosis in Progress window.
Result: The On-going tab is created. This is an empty tab which displays a moving
bar showing the submitted request is in progress.
If the diagnosis execution will generate multiple executed diagnoses, an On-going tab
is created for each diagnosis.
and the progress bar is replaced by the diagnosis content.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 To cancel the requested diagnosis, right - click on the On-going tab and click on Close.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The in-progress request for the diagnosis is canceled.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Procedure 22-4: Execute diagnosis in detailed mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 22-4: Execute diagnosis in detailed mode

The execution of diagnosis in detailed mode can be done in two ways.
Drag and drop into the report browser

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the appropriate topology objects and diagnosis scenario(s), then drag and drop the
objects into the Report browser.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on Execute to execute the diagnosis in detailed mode.

Result: If the availability domain is not empty, the diagnosis is executed in the Report
browser with the number of tabs equal to the number of network object multiplied by
the number of scenarios.
In case of a request which takes more time, the Execute Diagnosis in Progress
window appears before the executed diagnosis is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 To execute other tasks while the current request is in progress, click on

Run in background from the Execute Diagnosis in Progress window.
Result: The On-going tab is created. This is an empty tab which displays a moving
bar showing the submitted request is in progress.
If the diagnosis execution will generate multiple executed diagnoses, an On-going tab
is created for each diagnosis.
and the progress bar is replaced by the diagnosis content.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 To cancel the requested diagnosis, right - click on the On-going tab and click on Close.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The in-progress request for the diagnosis is canceled.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
From executed synthetic diagnosis view with standard indicator with red cell value
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the red data.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The red data is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right click and select Trigger Diagnosis in Detailed Mode from the popup menu, then
select View -> Trigger Diagnosis in Detailed Mode from the menu bar.
Result: The diagnosis is executed from synthetic mode in the detailed mode.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
The detailed generated report is an html page that contains hyperlinks to the network
objects of the execution context. The hyperlinks propagate to the modes and functions.
The title of the detailed diagnosis report is the short name of the diagnosis scenario name.
The following details appear:
Name of the executed diagnosis
Description and context of the triggering elements:
The target network object
The target date
The target period type.
The execution results of the nodes
Each node is detailed in a table containing the following information:
Name of the node
State of the execution
The nodes are colored depending on their status: test failed = red, test passed =
green, unknown = orange.
For each identified cause, the observations and the conclusion are detailed.
Context (iteration list values)
If an iteration variable is used, the local context contains the identifier of the
iterated object. This object identifier and its type permit to generate a hyperlink
that propagates to the mode tree.
Description of the node
Report of the execution
The conclusion contains:
The node report of the root cause node (Report true, Report false and Report
unknown)
The action associated with the root cause node.
Python code of the node (html link using external web interface).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 22-2 Example detailed diagnosis view
To enlarge the executed detailed diagnosis view to window size, double click on its title
tab, or click on the array from the splitter.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Display execution logs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Display execution logs

Select Diagnosis -> Display Execution Logs... from the menu bar.
The Diagnosis Execution Logs window appears, displaying the diagnosis execution logs
with their size and last modified date.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Procedure 22-5: Edit detailed diagnosis
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 22-5: Edit detailed diagnosis

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 22-5.1: Edit detailed diagnosis report (p. 22-16).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 22-5.2: Edit diagnosis execution context (p. 22-18).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 22-5.3: Edit diagnosis spatial scope (p. 22-19).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Procedure 22-5.1: Edit detailed diagnosis report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 22-5.1: Edit detailed diagnosis report

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select a detailed diagnosis report.

Result: The detailed diagnosis report is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the menu bar, select Diagnosis -> Executed Diagnosis.

Result: The execution context dialog with Spatial Scope for the selected diagnosis
report appears.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Procedure 22-5.1: Edit detailed diagnosis report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The open window contains two menu tabs:
Execution context (p. 3-19)
Spatial Scope.
For information on how to edit them, refer to:
Procedure 22-5.2: Edit diagnosis execution context (p. 22-18)
Procedure 22-5.3: Edit diagnosis spatial scope (p. 22-19).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Procedure 22-5.2: Edit diagnosis execution context
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 22-5.2: Edit diagnosis execution context

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the Execution Context tab.

Result: The Execution Context panel appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Update as appropriate the displayed fields. Refer to Execute View, in the Execution
context (p. 3-19).
Result: The diagnosis is executed only for the specific From Date. To Date is not
relevant in this case.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Click on
Apply the changes made on the current view Update Diagnosis View
Create a new view with the performed changes Create Diagnosis View
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Procedure 22-5.3: Edit diagnosis spatial scope
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 22-5.3: Edit diagnosis spatial scope

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the Spatial Scope tab.

Result: The Spatial Scope panel appears, with the list of included network objects.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Remove network objects from the spatial Right click on them and select Delete.
scope
Add network objects from the spatial scope Select them and drop them to the view panel.
Result: The objects are added or deleted.

The modification of the network objects affects the availability domain. If the
availability domain is empty, an error message appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Click on
Apply the changes made on the current view Update Diagnosis View
Create a new view with the performed changes Create Diagnosis View
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Copy diagnosis view to system clipboard

This operation allows the user to select and copy the data from a diagnosis executed view
in the tabular / graphical viewer, and then to paste it in another application like Excel.
Refer to Procedure 18-5: Copy to system clipboard (p. 18-99).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Procedure 22-6: Schedule executed diagnosis reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 22-6: Schedule executed diagnosis reports

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Execution Context window, click on the To Be Scheduled radio button.

Result: A new panel with three tabs ( Date, General, Repeat) appears, with input to
create a schedule for the report execution.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Date tab, fill in the appropriate fields as presented in the table below.
Name
Execution Date The date at which the scheduled report is executed, i.e. the report result
becomes available at the morning of this date.
The default date is the next day from the current date.
If the report repeats, then this is the first schedule date.
The date can be selected either by using the select bar, or by clicking on
and choosing it from the displayed calendar.
The date format can be configured in the user preference.
From Start date of the observation period for execution, expressed relatively to the
Date from which the scheduled execution starts.
At Start time of the observation period for execution.
To End date of the observation period for execution, expressed relatively to the
At End time of the observation period for execution.
The supported time format is hh (00 to 23) mm (00 to 59).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Data tab parameters are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the General tab, fill in the appropriate fields.
Name
Job Title Defines the name of the job. This can be different from the report name.
Default values:
ScheduleDiagnosis, if one diagnosis scenario is selected
ScheduleMultipleDiagnosis, if several diagnosis scenarios are
selected
ScheduleDiagnosis_Repeat or ScheduleMultipleDiagnosis_
Repeat, if one or several diagnosis scenario(s) is / are selected and
repeat option other than None is selected.
Owner Defines the owner of the job.
Working Zone Defines the current Working Zone being used by the current user.
Output Format Defines the output format for the scheduled report.
Possible values:
Analysis Desktop
.html.
Result: The general parameters are defined.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 To schedule the report on an entire working zone, select Entire Working Zone.
This may be particularly useful when executing a warning report.
Result: If the report is executed on the entire working zone, then the spatial scope
contains all the network objects in the working zone of the same type as the executed
report.
For example, if the report was executed on Cell 3G's in Working Zone A, then the
spatial scope of the executed report are all the Cell 3G's that were in Working Zone A
at the time when the report was executed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 In the Repeat tab, set the appropriate frequency for the scheduled report repetition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
By default, the repeat option is None, so the report is only scheduled once.

Name Name
None - No report repetition is scheduled.
If the repeat option is None, then all the other fields for the rest
of frequency radio buttons are not visible.
Day Every Specifies the recurrence interval in days.
Default value: 1 Day.
Week Every Specifies the recurrence interval in weeks.
Default value: 1 Week.
Repeat On Click on the preferred day(s) of the week when you want the
report to be repeated.
Month Every Specifies the recurrence interval in months.
Default value: 1 Month.
By Select one of the two possible values:
Day, to set a repeating weekday, such as the last Friday of
each month
Date, to set a repeating date in the month, such as the 15th.
Result: The Repeat parameters are defined.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click on Execute.
Result: The scheduled reports are executed during the night, after the loading of
consolidation.
A report which is Scheduled and Archived is displayed in the Archived reports list;
refer to Display pending and archived executed reports (p. 19-66).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To view or delete scheduled reports, refer to Procedure 19-6: Use job scheduler
editor (p. 19-70).
The scheduled reports purge computes the overall reports size. If this size is greater
than a configurable threshold, then it will drop oldest reports until the size goes below
the threshold.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Display pending executed diagnosis

After a diagnosis report is executed, it can be visualized in two ways.
From the Analysis Desktop

Select Jobs -> Display Pending Executed Diagnoses... from the menu bar, OR
Click on the icon
The Pending Executed Diagnosis window opens, displaying:
The list of executed Diagnosis reports, OR
In the case of failure, the error shown in the Failure Reason field.
To view one or several pending executed diagnosis reports, select them by checking the
checkbox, then click on OK.
If the scheduled report encounters an error condition during the execution of the report,
this failed job is also listed in the pending executed reports list. A dedicated column
displays the Failure Reason. When you select such a report to view, it is marked as
viewed and it is not displayed anymore next time the dialog box is opened.
All the diagnosis reports are opened one by one in a sequential order. If the diagnosis
report output is not Analysis Desktop, but html, then you are first prompted to save the
executed diagnosis report and then to open it to view it.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Display pending executed diagnosis
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Once a diagnosis report is saved or viewed in the Analysis Desktop, then it is marked as
viewed and it no longer appears in the list of pending executed diagnosis reports. If the
current Working Zone is not the Working Zone in which the diagnosis report was
scheduled, then when displaying the executed diagnosis report, any objects not belonging
to the current Working Zone are shown as 'unknown'.
From the NPO

Refer to the NPO Administration User Guide document, to Download Job Results.
Close executed detailed diagnosis

Close the executed detailed diagnosis as follows.
To Do
Close an executed diagnosis report in detailed Perform one of the following options:
mode Right click on the diagnosis name tab, and
select Close, OR
Select Diagnosis -> Close.
Close all executed diagnosis report in detailed Perform one of the following options:
mode Right click on the diagnosis name tab, and
select Close All, OR
Select Diagnosis -> Close All and click on
Yes at the confirmation message, OR
Only the completed executions are closed. The
On-going tabs for the executions which are in
progress, remain open.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Procedure 22-7: Export diagnosis
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 22-7: Export diagnosis

Diagnosis reports can be exported in .html format, in order to be used with an external
application such as Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel, an html browser, or an email
application.
Note: There is a limitation when exporting diagnosis reports in Excel to worksheets
containing a maximum of 65,536 rows and 256 columns.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 You can export one or several files.
To export Do
One executed diagnosis report Select the report and select Diagnosis ->
Export... from the tool bar.
Several diagnosis Perform one of the following options:
Select Diagnosis -> Export All... from the
tool bar.
All diagnosis are exported and gathered in the
same zip file.
The diagnosis exported are all the diagnosis
that are in the active report browser (if there
are diagnosis in the 2 report browsers, only the
diagnosis belonging to the report browser of
the last report browser which were active (on
which you have clicked, move the mouse) are
exported).
Result: The Export Diagnosis window opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Browse for the location where to save the .html file, then give the appropriate File name.
Result: The file name is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Save.
Export is Successfull. Do you want to open the exported file?
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Procedure 22-7: Export diagnosis
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Click on
Open the exported file Yes
If you do not want to open the exported file No
Result: The diagnosis report is exported to selected format, keeping the same look as
the executed diagnosis.
In the Export all case, all the diagnosis are exported in a .zip file, each diagnosis in
this zip file is in .html format keeping the same look as the executed diagnosis.
The diagnosis tool bar is not exported.
Figure 22-3 Example exported diagnosis report
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
23 Tuning
23
Overview
Purpose
This section describes how to perform tuning for the radio configuration.
Contents
Presentation 23-1
Display tuning operation properties 23-4
Procedure 23-1: Use tuning session manager 23-6
Procedure 23-2: Manage tuning jobs 23-19
Procedure 23-3: Edit tuning session 23-28
Procedure 23-4: Propagate from tuning session 23-62
Procedure 23-5: Manage reference object(s) for tuning 23-66
Procedure 23-6: Manage tuning inhibition of network objects 23-71
Presentation
Note: The feature described in this section is not available for WiMAX.
The MUSE_TUNING_LICENSE license be installed, so that the Tuning menu
appears in the Analysis Desktop.
The user must also have any one of the following FADs to see the Tuning menu item:
MUSE_NPO_TUNING_PREPARATION
MUSE_NPO_ADMINISTRATE_TUNING_SESSIONS
Definitions
After a network optimization session is completed, its results (monitoring QoS indicators,
checking rules on the parameters, executing diagnosis) are used to tune the radio
configuration, in order to correct the network misbehavior.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The optimizer can define radio resource configuration modifications, frequency changes,
neighborhood modifications, add adjacencies, change logical / design parameter values in
a tuning session, which is then applied on the OMC, but it depends on the technology.
The NPO allows you to copy the parameters from a cell into another cells using the
reference cell. Also you are allowed to set a cell as non-tunable cell once this cell is well
tuned.
A Tuning Session can be considered as a template. It contains tuning operations and can
be applied to create a tuning job. The limit for the number of objects for tuning session is
6000.
A Tuning Job is a particular tuning session that is applied at a given date. It contains a
copy of the tuning session used to create it. It is parsed by MAAT Tuning to be split into
different tuning tasks (one per impacted OMC). Many tuning jobs can be created from a
tuning session (one job per application of the tuning session).
A Tuning Task contains all tuning operations that are impacting one particular OMC.
Purge completed tuning job(s)

Each night, the NPO checks if there is any Tuning Job that is:
Completed / failed / partially failed in the last 15 days (pre-defined delay with
configurable value)
Applied but not yet completed / failed / partially failed for more then 15 days
(pre-defined delay with configurable value).
These old, not completed Tuning Jobs are then purged (deleted) from the database.
A notification is sent to all users when a job is purged. If the tuning session of a job is
open and then this job is purged, an error message appears and the Tuning Session
Viewer tab (of the job's tuning session) is closed.
Tuning session life cycle

The common usage of tuning is:
Create a tuning session
Fill the tuning session with:
Parameter Tuning Operations
Topology Object Tuning Operations
Topology Relation Tuning Operations
Frequency Tuning Operations
Advice Tuning Operations.
Check the consistency of all the operations
Apply the tuning session:
A new tuning job is instantiated, and can be applied or scheduled.
After the tuning job is completed / failed / partially failed, it is purged.
On tuning job execution, tuning tasks are instantiated and transferred to the OMC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The tuning tasks are applied, and a notification / result polling is sent to all NPO
clients.
After the tuning tasks are completed / failed, they are purged.
Follow the application of the Tuning Session on the concerned OMC.
For W-CDMA, the NPO generates a workorder which is stored in the WMS under
the following directory:
/opt/nortel/data/cmXML/ScheduledExport.
Then the operator creates a session manager in WMS in order to import this
workorder and to apply it on the NE itself.
For more information, refer to the NPO Administration User Guide document, to
OMC / RNP Data Source Management.
For LTE, the NPO generates a workorder which is stored in the SAM under the
following directory:
/opt/5620sam/server/nms/activation/wo_import.
Then the operator creates a session manager on SAM in order to import this
workorder and to apply it on the NE itself.
For more information, refer to the NPO Administration User Guide document, to
OMC / RNP Data Source Management.
The advanced usage of tuning is:
Select the appropriate network objects and define them as being Reference Objects.
These objects can now be used as templates when tuning other network objects.
Select the appropriate network objects and inhibit all tuning operations for them.
These objects can no longer be tuned.
The available operations depend on ownership and / or status of the tuning sessions:
If a tuning session is scheduled or applied but not yet completed / failed / partially
failed, then it can only be copied
If a tuning session is not owned by the operator (and the operator is not
Administrator), then it can only be copied or opened in read only mode
If a tuning session is owned by the operator (or the operator is the Administrator) and
is created, or completed / failed / partially failed, then it can be opened, copied,
deleted
It is always possible to creation a new tuning session
Deleting a working zone results in the automatic re-parenting of the tuning sessions.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Display tuning operation properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Display tuning operation properties

The Tuning Session and Tuning Job Properties windows are identical for the same
tuning session; only their title is different.

Name Only
Name Name of the Tuning Session Yes No
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Display tuning operation properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name Only
Temporary Flag indicating if the Tuning Session is a temporary copy Yes N/A
or not.
This field is not visible for the user.
Source Reference to the non temporary tuning session from Yes N/A
Tuning which a temporary tuning session is created.
Session ID This field is not visible for the user.
Owner Owner of the Tuning Session Yes Yes
Working Working Zone to which the Tuning Session is linked (i.e. Yes Yes
Zone Working Zone in which the Tuning Session is created).
Purpose Description associated with the Tuning Session No No
Recom- Date when the tuning operations contained in a Tuning No No
mended date Session should be applied on the network
of application
Creation Date Date when the Tuning Session was created Yes Yes
Last Update Date when the Tuning Session was updated Yes Yes
Last Apply Date when the Tuning Session was applied for execution No Yes
Overview Gives an overview of the Tuning Session content. Yes Yes
This overview indicates:
Number of modified object(s) of each object type
(nothing appears if no object of a particular type is
tuned)
Number of created object(s) of each object type
created)
Number of deleted object(s) of each object type
deleted)
Number of each specific Tuning Operation (such as
Frequency Tuning or GPRS Distribution tuning).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-1: Use tuning session manager
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-1: Use tuning session manager

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 23-1.1: Open tuning sessions window (p. 23-7).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 23-1.2: Display tuning session (p. 23-9).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 23-1.3: Create tuning session (p. 23-10).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Procedure 23-1.4: Create tuning session by copy (p. 23-13).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-1.1: Open tuning sessions window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-1.1: Open tuning sessions window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

In the Alcatel-Lucent Analysis Desktop window, from the menu bar, select Tuning ->
Tuning Session..., OR
Press Ctrl+H.
Result: The Tuning Sessions window appears.
Tuning sessions are classified by working zone and are displayed in a tree format.
If the current opened working zone is the Global Working Zone, than all tuning
sessions are displayed. In other words, a tuning session is linked to two working
zones: the one from which it is created, and the Global Working Zone.
Temporary Tuning Sessions are not displayed.
The tuning sessions are classified by working zone and are displayed in a tree format.
Button Description
Name
New Creates a new tuning session.
Open Opens the description of a tuning session in the tuning session viewer. This
includes the properties and tree view of operations.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-1.1: Open tuning sessions window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Button Description
Name
Copy Opens a copy of the selected tuning session in the tuning session viewer.
Delete Deletes the current selected tuning session(s).
Close Closes the Tuning Sessions window. This is the default button.
Help Invoke the online help for the current window. See Access online help
(p. 2-43).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-1.2: Display tuning session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-1.2: Display tuning session

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Press Ctrl+H.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the appropriate tuning session(s), and double click on it or click on Open.
Result: The selected tuning session appears in the right frame.
More than one Tuning Session can be selected at a time to open. In this case, each of
the selected Tuning Sessions opens in a different tab. The maximum number of tabs is
20.
The list of tuning operations contained in the tuning session, as well as the properties
of the tuning session are displayed.
Properties of the opened Tuning Session can now be edited (see Procedure 23-3.3:
Edit tuning session properties (p. 23-36)) and Tuning Operations can be added,
deleted, or modified (see Procedure 23-3: Edit tuning session (p. 23-28)).
In the Tuning Session tree, you can access the Collapse all option. For more
information, refer to Procedure 2-4.1: Collapse all in topology classification
browser (p. 2-17).
To enlarge the tuning session to window size, double click on its title tab, or click on
the array from the splitter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on Close to close the Tuning Sessions window.

Result: The Tuning Sessions window closes.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-1.3: Create tuning session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-1.3: Create tuning session

The following table presents the properties of the tuning session. To modify them, refer to
Procedure 23-3.3: Edit tuning session properties (p. 23-36).
Parameter Description Default Value

Name
Tuning Session Name of the Tuning Session. Tuning_Session_
Name <owner> _<number>
where <owner> is the
owner of the tuning
session.
Creation Date Date when the Tuning Session was created. Current date.
This field is read-only. It is automatically filled in
when the tuning session is saved.
Last Update Date when the Tuning Session was updated. Current date, for new
This field is read-only. It is automatically filled in tuning sessions.
when the tuning session is saved. Last update date, for
modified tuning sessions.
Recommended Indicates the date when the tuning operations Next day.
date of contained in a Tuning Session should be applied
application on the network.
Owner Owner of the Tuning Session. The username you
application.
Working Zone Working Zone to which the Tuning Session is Current Working Zone.
linked (i.e. Working Zone in which the Tuning
Session is created).
Last Apply Date when the Tuning Session was applied for Empty for new tuning
Date execution. sessions.
This field is read-only. Last application date, for
applied tuning sessions.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name
Overview This field is read-only. It is automatically filled in
when the tuning session is saved.
Gives an overview of the Tuning Session content.
It indicates:
Number of modified object(s) of each object
type (nothing appears if no object of a
particular type is tuned)
Number of created object(s) of each object
particular type is created)
Number of deleted object(s) of each object
particular type is deleted)
Number of each specific Tuning Operation
(such as Frequency Tuning or GPRS
Distribution tuning).
Purpose Description associated with the Tuning Session.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Press Ctrl+H.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on New.
Result: A new tab is created with the template of the new tuning session, displaying
the default values of the tuning session properties. The name of the tab is the default
name associated with the new Tuning Session.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 You can now:

Procedure 23-3.9: Create parameter tuning operation(s) (p. 23-42)
Procedure 23-3.10: Create topology relation tuning operation(s) (p. 23-48)
Procedure 23-3.11: Create Frequency Tuning Operation(s) (p. 23-53)
Procedure 23-3.12: Create advice tuning operation(s) (p. 23-57).
Result: The required tuning session is created.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Procedure 23-3.5: Save tuning session (p. 23-38).

Result: The tuning session is saved.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-1.4: Create tuning session by copy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-1.4: Create tuning session by copy

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Press Ctrl+H.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the appropriate tuning session, and click on Copy.

Result: The new tuning session is created with a default name:
The Creation Date is set to the current date, and the Last update and Last Apply Date
are left empty.
All tuning operations contained in the source tuning session are also duplicated in this
new tuning session
The user becomes the owner of the tuning session.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Edit the appropriate properties (refer to Procedure 23-3.3: Edit tuning session properties
(p. 23-36)), and add / modify / delete the required tuning operations (refer to Procedure
23-3: Edit tuning session (p. 23-28)).
Result: The tuning session is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-1.5: Check tuning session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-1.5: Check tuning session

This task performs the following checks:
All tuned objects must be operational objects (except for created objects)
All tuned relations must be between operational objects
No tuned object or relation is inhibited for tuning
Tuned parameter values are contained in the range defined in the Parameter
Dictionary (minimum / maximum)
Tuned parameter values have a correct value (correct type, correct value [step /
enumeration])
All mandatory rules involving at least one tuned parameter are executed and reported
All optional rules involving at least one tuned parameter are executed and reported
Tuned parameter values have a consistent value compared to Reference values (min /
max of the Reference value) and / or are set to the Reference Value itself.
All checks are performed using forecast values defined in the current Tuning Session
when available. If no forecast value is available then the operational value must be
used.
If the tuning session is correct, the following message appears:
No errors / warnings found in Tuning Session.
If one or several of the first six checks mentioned above fail, they are considered as errors
and are displayed.
If any of the last two checks mentioned above fail, they are considered as warnings and
are displayed.
Refer to the NPO Diagnosis Development User Guide document for more explanations
about complex checks.
General check
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Open the Tuning Jobs window.

Result: The Tuning Jobs window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the appropriate tuning session, then:

Click on , OR
Right click and select Check.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Yes.
Result: The tuning session is checked.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-1.5: Check tuning session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Check from open tuning session
You can also check from an open tuning session, as follows:
Click on , OR
From the menu bar, select Tuning -> Tuning Session> Check.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-1.6: Apply tuning session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-1.6: Apply tuning session

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
From the Tuning Jobs window Select the appropriate tuning session, then:
Click on , OR
Right click and select Apply.
A confirmation message appears.
Click on Yes.
From a open tuning session From the open tuning session, then:
Click on , OR
From the menu bar, select Tuning ->
Tuning Session> Apply.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on Yes.
Tuning Job Created: <Tuning_Job_name>
The tuning job name must be unique (Tuning Session name + scheduled date +
applier of Tuning Session + unique ID)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on OK.
Result: The tuning session is created.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

The Last Apply field of the Tuning Session is updated with current date.
Forecast parameters / topology associated with the job are created.
A notification is then sent to other users indicating that a new job is created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-1.6: Apply tuning session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The tuning session job is split into tuning session tasks (one task per impacted OMC-R).
Each task contains the following information for a dedicated OMC-R:
Creation / deletion of forecast objects
Creation of relations:
Relation inside an OMC-R: Only one tuning session task is created for the
dedicated OMC-R
Relation between OMC-Rs, with both OMC-Rs managed by NPO: two tuning
session tasks are created
Relation between OMC-Rs, with one OMC-R not managed by NPO: one tuning
session task is created.
Deletion of relations
Update of parameters.
Note: The same tuning session can be updated and applied several times. For each
application, a different tuning job is instantiated.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-1.7: Delete tuning session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-1.7: Delete tuning session

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Press Ctrl+H.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the tuning session(s) to remove, then click on Delete.

Are you sure you want to delete Tuning Session <tuning_session_name>?
If:
Only one tuning session is selected to be deleted, click on Yes
Multiple tuning sessions are selected to be deleted, click on Yes to All.
The selected tuning session(s) is / are deleted and the Tuning Sessions window is
refreshed.
The existing tuning jobs that were created from that tuning session are not deleted.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-2: Manage tuning jobs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-2: Manage tuning jobs

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 23-2.1: Open tuning jobs window (p. 23-20).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 23-2.2: Change classification in tuning jobs tree (p. 23-23).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 23-2.3: Display existing tuning jobs (p. 23-24).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Procedure 23-2.4: Display tuning job follow up (p. 23-25).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Procedure 23-2.5: Open tuning job(s) (p. 23-26).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Procedure 23-2.6: Compare operational data with operator reference values data
(p. 23-27).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-2.1: Open tuning jobs window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-2.1: Open tuning jobs window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the menu bar, select Tuning -> Tuning Jobs..., OR
Press Ctrl+J.
Result: The Tuning Jobs window appears, displaying two lists.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform the following options as required.
List Description Possible Actions

List 1 The first list shows all The available operations are:
existing Tuning Sessions Procedure 23-1.6: Apply
owned by the user. tuning session (p. 23-16)
It displays the following Procedure 23-1.5: Check
information grouped by tuning session
Working Zone: (p. 23-14).
Working Zone - the
working zone associated
with the Tuning Session
Not editable: or
Tuning Session Name -
name of the tuning
session
Owner - owner of the
tuning session.
List 2 The second list displays all The available operations are:
Tuning Jobs grouped by the Procedure 23-2.4:
status of jobs. The user can Display tuning job
change the classification type follow up (p. 23-25)
to Applier of the Tuning Procedure 23-2.5: Open
Session or Working Zone. The tuning job(s) (p. 23-26).
last classification is stored as
preference.
The following information
appears:
Status - the status of the
job
Modified Tuning Session
- highlights Tuning Jobs
for which their Tuning
Session was modified
since the job was created
Tuning Job Name - the
name of the tuning job
Owner - the owner of the
tuning job.
Table 23-1 Tuning job status icon colors
Tuning Job Status Icon Color

Applied Yellow
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 23-1 Tuning job status icon colors (continued)
Tuning Job Status Icon Color

Created Blue
Partially Failed Orange
Failed Red
Completed OK Green
Table 23-2 Tuning session status icons
Tuning Session Status Icon

Modified since job creation Orange Flag
Not Modified since job creation Green Flag
Result: The Tuning Jobs window is open.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-2.2: Change classification in tuning jobs tree
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-2.2: Change classification in tuning jobs tree

The current classification is disabled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the required tuning job.

Result: The tuning job is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Classify by Applier of Tuning Session
Classify by Status
Classify by Working Zone.
Result: The tuning job tree is updated with the selected classification.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-2.3: Display existing tuning jobs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-2.3: Display existing tuning jobs

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the menu bar, select Tuning -> Tuning Jobs..., OR
Press Ctrl+J.
Result: The Tuning Jobs window appears opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click on , OR
Right click and select Open Tuning Job.
Result: The selected tuning job(s) appears in the right frame, in read only mode.
If multiple tuning jobs are selected, each one opens in a tab. The maximum number of
tabs is 20.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-2.4: Display tuning job follow up
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-2.4: Display tuning job follow up

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click on , OR
Right click and select View Follow up.
Result: The result of the tuning job appears based on the execution in the OMC-Rs.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-2.5: Open tuning job(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-2.5: Open tuning job(s)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right click and select Open Tuning Job.

Result: The tuning job...
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on .
Result: The properties of the selected tuning job open in the Tuning Session Viewer in
read only mode. For each selected tuning job(s), the corresponding tuning session
opens in a different tab.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-2.6: Compare operational data with operator
reference values data
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-2.6: Compare operational data with operator

reference values data
Note: The MUSE_OPERATOR_REF_VALUES_LICENSE must be installed.
This feature allows to compare the current operational network configuration (parameter
values including pseudo-parameters for topology configuration) with the Operator
Reference network configuration.
The comparison is computed by NPO once per day (during the night, after the parameter
loading) but can also be triggered on-demand after new parameter values were loaded.
The comparison is computed at network level. Each time a comparison is computed, the
previous results are deleted.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Alcatel-Lucent Analysis Desktop window, from the menu bar, select Tuning ->
Compare Operational with Operator Reference Values.
Result: The result of the comparison is a set of differences of some parameters for
some network objects between operational data and ORV data.
ORV Data Status Description

If ORV data is NULL (the ORV data was A warning is generated indicating that ORV
never loaded or saved) data is not found.
If ORV data is blank (the ORV data was Nothing is done.
loaded but with no value)
If ORV data is X and operational data is Y Difference X- Y is kept
If ORV data is X and operational data is A warning is generated indicating that
NULL operational data is not found.
If ORV data is X and operational data is A warning is generated indicating that
blank operational data is not significant.
For ORV non-tunable parameters that are An advice is generated.
different to operational parameters
The user can request to display the result of the comparison using the corresponding
menu item.
A tuning session is generated by the system and the comparison results are shown in
the tuning session browser. The Tuning Session contains one parameter tuning
operation for each difference found when comparing the operational network
comparison with the Operator Reference network configuration.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3: Edit tuning session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-3: Edit tuning session

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 23-3.1: Display tuning session operation tree (p. 23-29).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 23-3.2: Display tuning synthesis (p. 23-34).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 23-3.3: Edit tuning session properties (p. 23-36).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Procedure 23-3.4: Show / hide tuning session properties (p. 23-37).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Procedure 23-3.6: Clear tuning session (p. 23-39).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Procedure 23-3.7: Toggle display type (p. 23-40).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Procedure 23-3.8: Close tuning session (p. 23-41).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Procedure 23-3.9: Create parameter tuning operation(s) (p. 23-42).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Procedure 23-3.10: Create topology relation tuning operation(s) (p. 23-48).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Procedure 23-3.11: Create Frequency Tuning Operation(s) (p. 23-53).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Procedure 23-3.12: Create advice tuning operation(s) (p. 23-57).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Procedure 23-3.13: Edit tuning operation(s) (p. 23-59).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Procedure 23-3.14: Copy tuning operation(s) to system clipboard (p. 23-60).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Procedure 23-3.15: Delete tuning operation(s) (p. 23-61).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.1: Display tuning session operation tree
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-3.1: Display tuning session operation tree

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the required tuning session.

Result: The tuning session is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 You can view the tuning session:

In tree format
Grouped by object type
By parameters.
Result: The tuning session is displayed accordingly.
The following example shows a tuning session grouped by object type.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 23-1 Tuning session grouped by object type
Object Type Description

Relation <serving object> <relation direction ->, <-, OR <->>
<target object> (New or Deleted)
Object Name <Object name as displayed in Modes & Functions Tree>
<if New, (New) >
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Object Type Description

Parameter <parameter name as displayed in Modes & Functions Tree>
= <old value> -> <new value> [['Planned', 'Reference
<reference object label>', 'Historical <date>' or
'Reference Value']
If the old value is equal to the new value, the entire tree label is in italics.
The following example shows a tuning session grouped by parameters.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 23-2 Tuning session grouped by parameters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type
Relation <serving object> <relation direction ->, <-, OR <->>
<target object> (New or Deleted)
Parameter <Parameter name as displayed in Modes & Functions Tree>
Object Name <Object name as displayed in Modes & Functions Tree>
<if New, (New) > = <old value> -> <new value>
[['Planned', 'Reference <reference object label>',
'Historical <date>' or 'Reference Value']
If the old value is equal to the new value, the entire tree label is in italics.
The last used display type (grouping by parameter, or grouping by object type) is
saved as an implicit user preferences.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.2: Display tuning synthesis
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-3.2: Display tuning synthesis

Use this task to display a synthesis of tuning operations of a particular type of tuning.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select one or several tuning operations.

Result: The tuning operations are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Right click and select Show Synthesis, OR
From the menu tool bar, select Tuning -> Tuning Operations -> Show Synthesis.
Result: The context of the tuning operation is displayed as one tab per Parameter or
Network Object. In each tab, a table displays one line per Network Object or
Parameter.
Each line displays:
Network Object or Parameter label - the label of the Network Object (as in
Topology trees) or Parameter
Min reference value - the min value as defined in Reference values configuration
Max reference value - the max value as defined in Reference values configuration
Reference value - the reference value as defined in Reference values configuration
Operational value - the operational value
Planned value - the planned value if available, N/Aif not available
Operator Reference Value - the ORV value if available, N/Aif not available
Forecast value - the chosen forecast value if it has already been chosen, empty if
not.
The synthesis is displayed in one of the following two modes:
By Parameter / Object
By Object / Parameter.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.2: Display tuning synthesis
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To edit the displayed tuning synthesis, refer to Procedure 23-3.13: Edit tuning operation(s) (p. 23-59).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.3: Edit tuning session properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-3.3: Edit tuning session properties

If any modification is made on an opened tuning session, it is tagged as modified, and the
* character is added to the name of the tuning session tab.
The same tuning session can be updated several times.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Right click in the properties part of the of the tuning session, and click on Edit, OR
From the tool bar, select Tuning -> Tuning Session -> Edit Properties.
Result: The Tuning Session Properties window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Edit the following fields as required:

Tuning Session Name
Recommended date of application
Purpose.
For more information, refer to Procedure 23-1.3: Create tuning session (p. 23-10).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Apply.
Result: The modifications are applied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The updated properties of the tuning session are saved.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.4: Show / hide tuning session properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-3.4: Show / hide tuning session properties

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Click on
Show tuning session properties
Hide tuning session properties
Result: The tuning session properties are displayed or hidden accordingly.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.5: Save tuning session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-3.5: Save tuning session

Only a tuning session not opened in read-only mode can be saved. The saving can only be
done by the owner or administrator of that tuning session.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click on , OR
From the menu bar, select Tuning -> Tuning Session -> Save, OR
Press Ctrl+Shift+A.
Are you sure you want to save Tuning Session <tuning_session_name>?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Yes.
Result: The tuning session is saved and forecast parameters / topology associated with
the tuning session are created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.6: Clear tuning session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-3.6: Clear tuning session

Clearing the content of a tuning session removes all tuning operations already included in
that Tuning Session. This operation is only possible on tuning sessions not opened in
read-only mode.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Right click in the content of the tuning session, and select Clear, OR
From the menu bar, select Tuning -> Tuning Session -> Clear.
Are you sure you want to clear Tuning Session <tuning_session_name>?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Yes.
Result: All tuning operations that are part of the tuning session are removed and the
tuning session is now empty.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.7: Toggle display type
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-3.7: Toggle display type

For tuning session
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Right click on the tuning session name tab, and select Toggle Display, OR
From the menu tool bar, select Tuning -> Tuning Operations -> Toggle Display.
Result: The content of the tuning session changes to a different classification. The
default is based on objects and can be changed to parameters classification.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
For synthesis table

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Right click on the tuning session name tab, and select Toggle Display, OR
From the menu tool bar, select Tuning -> Tuning Operations -> Toggle Synthesis
Table.
Result: The content of the synthesis table changes to a different classification. The
default is based on objects and can be changed to parameters classification.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.8: Close tuning session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-3.8: Close tuning session

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the required tuning session(s).

Result: The tuning session(s) are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Close one tuning session Perform one of the following options:
Right click on the tuning session name tab,
and select Close, OR
From the tool bar, select Tuning -> Tuning
Session -> Close.
Close all tuning sessions Perform one of the following options:
Right click on the tuning session name tab,
and select Close All, OR
From the tool bar, select Tuning -> Tuning
Session -> Close All.
Result: If the closed tuning session contains not-saved modifications (tab name
contains *), then the user is prompted and can either save the tuning session before
closing it, or confirm closure and lose pending modifications.
If the closed tuning session was a temporary tuning session, then the temporary tuning
session is deleted.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.9: Create parameter tuning operation(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-3.9: Create parameter tuning operation(s)

Use this task to tune the logical or design parameter(s) of Network Object(s) and to store
these settings in a tuning session.
Note: Only parameters for which the Visible property is set to True and that are
tagged as being tunable are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the appropriate:

Network Objects from the topology browser, and
Logical or design parameters from the Functions window, from the Tuning tab.
Result: The Network Objects and parameters are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Drag and drop the selections to the opened tuning session.

Result: The Parameter Tuning window appears.
Figure 23-3 Tuning session window - parameter tuning
The Parameter Tuning Table displays the tuning values of the cells being tuned. The
tuning values include Ref. Min, Ref. Value, Ref. Max, Operational, Planned, and
Forecast values. An arrow icon indicates which line is currently being processed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Parameter Tuning Values are as follows.
Parameter Tuning Value Description

Reference value The tuned parameter is set with the reference
value.
Reference value may not be available for all
types of network objects. When Reference
Value is selected, the parameter is tuned
using the Reference Value corresponding to
the other parameter values of the processed
network object.
The Forecast parameter values retrieved
from the current Tuning Session must be
used when available. If no forecast value is
available, then the Operational value must
be used.
If the parameter tuning operation is applied
on more than one object and one parameter,
there could then be different values for each
combination (network object / parameter).
Planned value The tuned parameter is set with the planned
value.
Planned value may not be available for all
types of network objects, nor for all network
objects of a given type (for example, there is
no planned BSC and some operational
Cell2G may not be planned). When Planned
value is selected, the parameter is tuned
using the value coming from the last
imported planning project.
on more than one object and one parameter,
there could then be different values for each
combination (network object / parameter).
User Defined value The user must enter the value manually.
When User Defined is selected, the
parameter is tuned using the value entered
by the operator.
on more than one network object, all these
objects are tuned with the same value (the
one entered by the operator).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter Tuning Value Description

Historical value The tuned parameter is set with the value of
the parameter for the current object at the
selected date.
When Historical value is selected, the
parameter is tuned using the value of the
tuned object at the date selected by the
operator.
on more than one network object and one
parameter, there could then be different
values for each combination (network object
/ parameter).
Reference object The tuned parameter is set with the value of
the parameter for the selected reference
object.
When a Reference Object is selected, the
parameter is tuned using the value of the
parameter from the Reference Object. If the
parameter tuning operation is applied on
more than one network object, all these
objects are tuned with the same value (the
one coming from the Reference Object).
Operator Reference Value When Operator Reference Value is selected,
then the parameter will be tuned using the
ORV value.
Delta When Delta is selected, the parameter will
be tuned using the formula entered by the
operator. The formula is computed from the
operational value. If the parameter tuning
operation is applied on more than one
network object, all these objects will be
tuned with the formula computation based
on their operational value. Only basic
operations (+;-;*; / ) are supported on the
formula. The formula can contain only 1
operator and 1 number (for example: * 2 or
+ 0.1). The number must have the same type
as the parameter that is tuned (i.e. if the
parameter is an integer then only integer
value can be provided in the formula).
The window location, splitter position and window size are stored as implicit user
preferences. The parameters are displayed with OMC name or RNP name or NPO
name as per user preference.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the appropriate Parameter Tuning Value for the selected network object.
Result: If User Defined is chosen, the forecast value can be modified. In the other
cases, the forecast value is just displayed without any possibility of changing it.
To preview the value, click on Preview.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click as appropriate on the required button.
Button Name Result Description

The selected value is set in the Forecast column only for the current
Apply to Current Object
network object.
The selection cursor is updated to point to the next network object. If the
tuned network object was the last one in the table, then the next tab (i.e.
next parameter) is automatically selected, and the first network object of
that new table is also selected. If it was the last network object and there is
no other parameter to tune, then the window is closed.
TheCurrent
Apply to All Objects for selectedParameter
value is set for all network object(s).
The next tab (i.e. next parameter) with the first network object in the table
is selected. If it was the last parameter, then the window is closed.
TheAll
Apply to All Objects for chosen value is set for all network object(s) and all parameter(s).
Parameters
The window is closed.
Result: A new window opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Select one of the following checks to be performed on the network objects.
Check Description
Mandatory Checks All mandatory checks linked to the tuned
parameter(s) are performed. This includes
mandatory rules referencing tuned
parameter(s), check of system min / max
bounds and check of the allowed steps when
applicable.
Optional Checks All optional checks linked to the tuned
parameter(s) are performed. This includes
optional rules referencing tuned parameter(s)
and check of reference min / max bounds.
All Checks Both mandatory and optional checks are
performed.
No Checks No checks other than the system min / max are
performed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The type of check is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click on OK.
Result: The selected checks (as described in step ) are triggered, the progress bar is
displayed.
If at least one of the checks fails, then a window opens, displaying all the errors and
all the warnings returned by the checks.
The selected checks are applied only to the concerned operations (current object +
current parameter, or all objects + current parameters, or all objects + all parameters)
and not on the whole tuning session.
The window is closed and the Tuning Session Viewer is refreshed, displaying all new
created operations.
If the labels of the objects appear in italic, it means that the new value set for tuning is
the same as the initial value.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.10: Create topology relation tuning
operation(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-3.10: Create topology relation tuning

operation(s)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select:
The appropriate network object(s) from the Topology browser, and
The Topology Relation Tuning Operation: Adjacencies Tuning from the Functions
window, from the Tuning tab.
Result: The required elements are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Relation Tuning window appears.
Figure 23-4 Tuning session window - relation tuning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
operation(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 23-5 Tuning session window - relation tuning - new object
The Direction Setting panel permits to define the type of relation that is created. It
can be:
Incoming
Outgoing
Bi-directional .
The Operational Relations panel displays the list of existing relation(s) of the
currently processed network object.
The Added Relations panel displays the list of new relation(s) to be created for the
The Removed Relations panel displays the list of relation(s) to be removed for the
The Preview of Changes panel displays how the result is after the changes are
applied.
The window location, size and the splitters' position are stored as implicit user
preferences.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Edit the appropriate information for the relation tuning.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
operation(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following Operations for Relations are available.
Operation Type Description

Add Relation Perform the following steps:
1. Select the appropriate Direction Setting.
2. Select the required network objects from the right panel, then drag
and drop them to the Added Relations panel.
If the relation does not already exist, it is added according to the set
direction.
Remove Relation To remove:
An operational relation, right click on it and select Remove.
The operational relation is added to the list of removed relations.
A relation from the Added / Removed Relations panel, right click
on it and select Remove.
The relation is removed from the list.
Change Relation Changed the direction for operational, added or removed relations, right
click on the relation and select:
Change to <-, to change the direction to incoming
Change to ->, to change the direction to outgoing
Change to <- ->, to change the direction to bi-directional.
Related Object tabs There can be more than one tab if the tuned relations can link objects of
different types or has to be managed as a single relation type.
For adjacencies (for example), there must be one tab for 2G Cells and
another one for 3G Cells as user can create adjacencies between both
technologies.
A particular (optional) tab contains objects that can be linked using the
tuned relation and that can be unknown for NPO. These are called
External NPO Objects (External NPO Cell means a cell not managed by
any of the integrated OMC's). Note that, in that particular External tab,
there must be a way to create a new External NPO Object (even if, most
of the time, these external objects are imported using the Customer
Topology interface).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 To create a new object for a relation tuning:

Select the appropriate Direction Setting
Select as appropriate New ECell2G or New ECell3G
Fill in the available fields with the cells' properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
operation(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on Create.
Result: The Parameter Tuning window opens on the new sub-object(s).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Edit the parameters tuning information.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
operation(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Parameter Tuning window closes, and the Relation Tuning window
comes on top. The new object is added in the Added Relations panel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If several network objects were selected to be tuned, click on Next Object.

Set the appropriate relations for each network object.
Result: When you are in the last object, the Next Object label changes to Apply.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Click on Apply.
Result: If relations are created (and not just removed), when the Relation Tuning
closes, the Parameter Tuning window opens on the new sub-object(s), so that the
operator can tune the parameters.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Edit the parameters tuning information.

Result: The changes are applied and the window closes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.11: Create Frequency Tuning Operation(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-3.11: Create Frequency Tuning Operation(s)

Do not use the same frequency for different TRX of the same cell.
Do not set the BCCH frequency on two ARFCN of the same cell.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select:
The appropriate cell(s) from the topology browser, and
Frequency Tuning from the Functions window, from the Tuning tab.
Result: The cells and frequency tuning are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Frequency Tuning window appears.
Figure 23-6 Tuning session window - frequency tuning
The BSIC field displays the list of current forecast BSIC of the cell, or the operational
value if the BSIC has not been changed. This list proposes the available possible
values.
It is obtained using the following formula: BSIC = BCC + 8 x NCC, where:
BCC varies from 0 to 7
NCC can take all the values indicated by the NCC_Permitted parameter.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following cell types that display different frequency tuning details are available.
Cell Type Description

Cell There is only one set of values, labeled Normal .
Cell split There are two sets of values, Main and Secondary, corresponding
respectively to main and secondary BTS sectors.
Concentric cell There are two sets of values, Inner and Outer, each relating to one of the
zones covered by the cell .
Concentric cell There are four sets of values, each relating to the sectors and zones
split covered by the cell.
The Frequency Tuning window contains one tab per traffic zone of the processed
cell. Each tab contains:
A Cell Allocation panel
This contains the list of frequencies used by the cell. Note that for multi-band cell
objects, Cell Allocation can be different in traffic zone tabs.
A Frequency Configuration panel, that can be:
TRX Configuration - when no TRX uses FHS (i.e. Hopping Group)The values
of the TRX mode are: Preference Mark, Planned, Operational, and Forecast.
FHS Configuration - when all TRX use FHSThe values of the FHS mode are:
Planned, Operational, and Forecast.
RH / NH Configuration - when some TRX use FHS and others do not.If the
selected type is TRX, the values are as for the TRX mode, but you can only
tune the BCCH frequency on the non hopping TRX.If the selected type is
FHS, the values are as for the FHS mode, but you can only tune the
frequencies on the hopping TRX.The user can change from TRX to FHS, or
from FHS to TRX (when this is available).
For TRX / FHS mode:

When a value is not available for a configuration, a N/Avalue is displayed
When a value is not defined, for instance if there are more planned TRX than
operational TRX, a N / D value is displayed
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Only the Forecast value column is editableThe forecast value is the
operational value by default if there is no current forecast value.
A cell which displays the BCCH value is highlighted using blue color
background.
For RH / NH mode, depending on the type selected in the combo box, the cells are
displayed.
Note: The window location and size are stored as implicit user preferences.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Use one of the following methods to edit the new forecast values.
Method Description
Manually Forecast frequencies can be entered manually
and, in that case, the Cell Allocation list is
updated accordingly (adding the new entered
value if required, removing the old value if not
used anywhere else).
Whenever there is an N / D in forecast
(respectively operational) and not in
operational (respectively forecast) columns,
then only the Restore operation is allowed to
fix the inconsistency.
Using drag and drop Forecast frequencies can be dragged and
dropped in order to switch them between two
TRX.
This is applicable only in the case of TRX
configuration mode.
Setting planned values Forecast frequencies can be set to planned
frequencies if available with the help of the
popup menu in the Tuning Table.
Restrictions: It is not possible to copy
planned values into forecast values in the
following cases:
When one of the planned values is either
N/Aor N / D
When the number of planned TRX is
different from number of forecast TRX
When there is an N / D value in the
Forecast value.
To set the forecast values back to the operational values, click on Restore.
Result: The forecast values are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If several cells were selected to be tuned, click on Next Object.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The details of frequency tuning for the next cell are displayed.
Update the forecast values as appropriate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on Apply.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click on Yes.
Result: The window closes and the Tuning Session Viewer is refreshed, displaying all
new created operations.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.12: Create advice tuning operation(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-3.12: Create advice tuning operation(s)

Advice may be added to network object(s) in a tuning task, to send a message to the
OMC-R user. They are only available in the tuning session. A network object may have
several advice.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select:
The appropriate network objects from the topology browser, and
Advice Tuning from the Functions window, from the Tuning tab.
Result: The cells and frequency tuning are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Create Advice window appears.
Figure 23-7 Tuning session window - advice tuning
The window location and size are stored as implicit user preferences.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Type the appropriate advice for the selected cell.
To Do
Save the current advice and step to the next Perform the following steps:
available network object tab Click on Apply to Current Object.
When the user is in the last object, the
Apply to Current Object label changes to
Apply.
Click on Apply to save the changes and
close the window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.12: Create advice tuning operation(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Save the current advice to all the remaining Click on Apply to All Objects.
objects and close the window.
Result: The window closes and the Tuning Session Viewer is refreshed, displaying all
new created operations.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.13: Edit tuning operation(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-3.13: Edit tuning operation(s)

Tuning operations can be updated.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the appropriate tuning operation(s).

Result: The tuning operation(s) are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Right click and select Edit, OR
From the menu bar, select Tuning -> Tuning Operation> Edit.
Result: The same window that was used to create the selected tuning operation(s) is
displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform the required updates.

Refer to:
Procedure 23-3.9: Create parameter tuning operation(s) (p. 23-42)
Procedure 23-3.10: Create topology relation tuning operation(s) (p. 23-48)
Procedure 23-3.11: Create Frequency Tuning Operation(s) (p. 23-53)
Procedure 23-3.12: Create advice tuning operation(s) (p. 23-57).
Result: The changes are updated in the tuning session.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.14: Copy tuning operation(s) to system
clipboard
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-3.14: Copy tuning operation(s) to system

clipboard
Tuning operations from a tuning session can be copied and pasted in another tuning
session or in other applications such as Word or Excel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Right click and select Copy, OR
From the menu bar, select Tuning -> Tuning Operation> Copy, OR
Press Ctrl+Shift+H.
Result: The data corresponding to the selected tuning operation(s) is copied into
system clipboard in the following format:
Internal Tuning Operation format, for pasting into another tuning session
Unformatted text, for pasting into .doc or .xls formats.
Note: The data displayed in the synthesis tables can also be copied.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.15: Delete tuning operation(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-3.15: Delete tuning operation(s)

Tuning operation(s) can be deleted from a tuning session.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Right click and select Delete, OR
From the menu bar, select Tuning -> Tuning Operation> Delete, OR
Press Ctrl+Shift+D.
Are you sure you want to delete <tuning_operation_name>?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Yes.
Result: The tuning operation(s) is deleted from the tuning session.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-4: Propagate from tuning session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-4: Propagate from tuning session

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 23-4.1: Propagate tuning session content (p. 23-63).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 23-4.2: Propagate tuned parameters of network object(s) (p. 23-64).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 23-4.3: Propagate tuned network objects of parameter(s) (p. 23-65).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-4.1: Propagate tuning session content
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-4.1: Propagate tuning session content

The content of a tuning session (tuned network objects and tuned parameters) can be
propagated to network objects / function tree.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the tuned network objects / tuned parameters to propagate.

node are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click on the icon from the tuning session tool bar, then select Propagate Tuning
Session, OR
From the menu tool bar, select Tuning -> Propagate -> Tuning Session.
Result: The network objects and / or parameters are selected in the appropriate trees /
modes / standards.
The selection is also made in non-active modes. So, if you switch to another mode
containing tuned network objects (for example), they are displayed as selected.
If there is an active filter on any active topology or function classification and some of
the propagated network object(s) / function(s) are not visible due to this filter, you are
informed and can choose to automatically remove the current filter (i.e. switch to No
Filter), or to propagate anyway.
If any propagated network object(s) and / or parameter(s) is not found, no error
message is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-4.2: Propagate tuned parameters of network
object(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-4.2: Propagate tuned parameters of network

object(s)
The tuned logical / design parameters of a tuning session can be propagated to the
corresponding logical / design function trees.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click on the parameter(s) from the tuning session.

Result: The parameter(s) are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click on the icon from the tuning session tool bar, then select Propagate Tuned
Parameters, OR
From the menu tool bar, select Tuning -> Propagate -> Parameters.
Result: The tuned logical / design parameters contained in the tuning session are
selected in their respective trees / modes / standards.
containing tuned parameters, they are displayed as selected.
If there is an active filter on any active function classification and some of the
propagated parameter(s) are not visible due to this filter, you are informed and can
choose to automatically remove the current filter (i.e. switch to No Filter), or to
propagate anyway.
If any propagated parameter(s) is not found, no error message is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-4.3: Propagate tuned network objects of
parameter(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-4.3: Propagate tuned network objects of

parameter(s)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click on the parameter(s) from the tuning session.

Result: The parameter(s) are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click on the icon from the tuning session tool bar, then select Propagate Tuned
Network Objects, OR
From the menu tool bar, select Tuning -> Propagate -> Tunable Objects.
Result: The network objects are selected in the appropriate trees / modes / standards.
containing tuned network objects, they are displayed as selected.
If there is an active filter on any active topology or function classification and some of
the propagated network object(s) are not visible due to this filter, you are informed
and can choose to automatically remove the current filter (i.e. switch to No Filter), or
to propagate anyway.
If any propagated network object(s) is not found, no error message is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-5: Manage reference object(s) for tuning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-5: Manage reference object(s) for tuning

Note: The MUSE_TUNING_LICENSE and MUSE_NPO_ADMINISTRA-
TE_REFERENCE_OBJECT FAD must be installed to manage reference objects for
tuning.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 23-5.1: Declare network object(s) as reference object(s) for tuning

(p. 23-67).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 23-5.2: Undeclare network object(s) as reference object(s) for tuning

(p. 23-70).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-5.1: Declare network object(s) as reference
object(s) for tuning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-5.1: Declare network object(s) as reference

Network object(s) can be declared as reference object(s). When tuning some parameters,
the values to be used can be retrieved from any existing reference object (i.e. reference
object can be used as a template). The values retrieved from the reference object are the
operational values.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the appropriate network object(s).

Result: The network object(s) are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Right click and select Set Reference Object..., OR
From the menu tool bar, select Topology -> Set Reference Object....
Result: The Declare / Undeclare Reference Object window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select Declare Reference Object.

Result: Declare Reference Object is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If required, edit the reason of the operation in the Reason panel.

If several network object(s) are selected, the same comment can be applied to all selected
objects, or you can enter a different message for each of them.
By default, the same message is applied to all selected network objects.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on OK.
Result: The following confirmation window appears:
Are you sure to save the changes?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click on Yes.
Result: The network object is set as reference object and highlighted in blue color, as
shown in the following figure:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The parameter is tuned using the value of the parameter from the reference object.
If the parameter tuning operation is applied on more than one network object, all these
objects are tuned with the same value (the one coming from the reference object).
A notification is sent to all clients about the new status of the concerned network
object(s).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-5.2: Undeclare network object(s) as
reference object(s) for tuning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-5.2: Undeclare network object(s) as reference

Network object(s) can be undeclared as no longer being reference object(s).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right click on the network object and select Set Reference Object.
Result: The Declare / Undeclare Reference Object window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Deselect the Declare Reference Object checkbox.

Result: The Declare Reference Object checkbox is deselected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If required, edit the reason of the operation in the Reason panel.

Result: he Declare Reference Object checkbox
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on Yes.
Result: The selected network object(s) are no longer defined as reference object(s)
and their label(s) appear in standard format.
object(s).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-6: Manage tuning inhibition of network
objects
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-6: Manage tuning inhibition of network objects

Note: The MUSE_TUNING_LICENSE and MUSE_NPO_ADMINISTRATE-
_TUNABLE_OBJECT FAD must be installed to manage tunable objects.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 23-6.1: Inhibit tuning of network object(s) (p. 23-72).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 23-6.2: Allow tuning of network object(s) (p. 23-74).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-6.1: Inhibit tuning of network object(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-6.1: Inhibit tuning of network object(s)

By default, all network objects are admitted for tuning, but the tuning operation can be
forbidden on some network objects.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the appropriate network object.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Right click and select Set Tunable Object..., OR
From the menu tool bar, select Topology -> Set Tunable Object....
Result: The Allow / Inhibit Tuning window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Deselect Allow Tuning.

Result: The parameter is deselected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If necessary, edit the reason for the operation in the Reason panel.
If several network object(s) are selected, the same comment can be applied to all selected
objects, or you can enter a different message for each of them.
By default, the same message is applied to all selected network objects.
Result: The reason for the operation is edited.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on OK.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-6.1: Inhibit tuning of network object(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The selected network object(s) are no longer accepted for tuning, and their
label(s) appear in italic format, as shown in the following figure:
object(s).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-6.2: Allow tuning of network object(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 23-6.2: Allow tuning of network object(s)

If some network objects were declared as non-tunable, the tuning operation can be
allowed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right click on the network object and select Set Tunable Object.
Result: The Allow / Inhibit Tuning window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Allow Tuning.

Result: The Reason panel displays the comment associated with the network object
when it was disabled for tuning.
If several network objects are selected, the window displays the comment associated
with the first selected network object.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If necessary, update the Reason panel.

Result: The Reason panel is updated.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on Yes.
Result: The network object(s) is now defined as tunable and its label appears in
standard format.
object(s).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
24 Cartography
24
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the management of network objects and layers in a geographical
representation.
Contents
Presentation 24-2
Open cartography 24-16
Procedure 24-1: Use layer manager 24-17
Procedure 24-2: Use cartography navigation 24-45
Display information interactively 24-56
Minimap 24-56
Manage network objects 24-57
Procedure 24-3: Thematic Layer Template (THL) 24-65
Procedure 24-4: Execute THL 24-86
Procedure 24-5: Display thematics for adjacencies 24-92
Procedure 24-6: Manage frequency re-use 24-93
Procedure 24-7: Show THL legend 24-95
Procedure 24-8: Export THL 24-97
Procedure 24-9: Manage adjacencies 24-100
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Presentation
Overview
Note: The MUSE_CARTOGRAPHY_LICENSE must be installed for the
cartography viewer to be available.
The cartography module allows you to:
Correlate the design view and the operational view
Access the topology of operational elements
Focus on faulty objects
Highlight network objects
Perform adjacency analysis and tuning
Manage background maps, as well as strongest server maps
Manage multiple map layers, including:
Network objects filtering
Use customizable rendering properties, such as overlaid raster and vector maps
Levels of details based on network object density, controlled by the operator.
View multi-technology objects for the same map.
The following table gives the definitions of the main cartography terms.
Term Definition
Raster A bitmap image consisting of a matrix of pixels.
The accepted formats for raster files are:
.jpg
.jpeg
.tif
.tiff
.png
Vector A file that contains objects and shapes using mathematical coordinate systems
and formulas.
The accepted formats for vector files are:
.mif
.mid
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Term Definition
Back- Used to display a set of raster and vector maps in the background, while all the
ground other layers are put in front of this one by default. This is mainly the place where
Maps satellite / aerial maps, roads, rivers, elevation maps are displayed.
The NPO imports all the available background maps for:
Vectors, in .mif format (MapInfo Interchange File format) and in the
longitude / latitude geographical WGS84 co-ordinate system
You can import the files directly from the Analysis Desktop or via web
administration tools.
For more information, refer to the NPO Administration User Guide
document, to Import vector file using GUI.
Rasters, in .jpg, .jpeg, .tif, .tiff, .PNG formats and in the longitude / latitude
geographical WGS84 co-ordinate system using .txt georeference files (two
georeference points required).
You can import the files directly from the Analysis Desktop or via web
administration tools.
For more information, refer to the NPO Administration User Guide
document, to Import raster file using GUI.
Examples: A map of a country, RNP imported files such as a power map.
CCA (Cell It is a data file containing polygons (layers of georeferenced vectors) representing
Coverage surfaces associated with a network object reference, coming from RNP files that
Area) are processed at the import.
Each polygon of the files is referenced with a network Object ID. CCA Layers
contain a list of polygons with rendering properties (line color, fill color / pattern,
transparency coefficient).
CCA layers show Voronoi cells, best server files coming from RNP, or any kind
of polygon linked with a topology object reference.
There are two types of Cell Coverage Area files:
.mif and .mid files (containing polygons data), or
Computed Voronoi.
CCA layers show Voronoi cells, the best server files coming from RNP, or any
kind of polygon linked with a topology object reference.
CCA objects cannot be moved or zoomed.
The user can define which CCA is associated with the cell, by configuring the
cartography configuration file. If only one CCA is available, the Cartography
module makes this choice automatically. When at least two CCA are available,
you must define which CCA is used for this association. All CCA can be
displayed simultaneously.
DT It is a data file containing layers of the drive test files. A Drive Text file is a .mif
(Drive Test) or .mid file.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Term Definition
Network The network objects from the topology classification (cell, BTS, NodeB,
Objects eNodeB) that are dropped into the cartography viewport.
This layer is further sub-layered based on the object type (e.g. Cell3G, RNC):
All the Cell3G objects are grouped into the Cell3G sub-layer
Network Objects are not displayed in this sub-layer
The Relations Layer, another sub-layer, constitutes the adjacencies present in
the viewport. Its sub-layers are grouped based on the technology.
Icon A bitmap image used to render a network object in the cartography.
Main The network object type that is the focus of a technology. Example: CELL3G for
Object W-CDMA, CELL2G for GSM, CELLLTE for LTE.
Type
Voronoi Voronoi maps are computed polygons per object, that represent a zone where a
function is maximized for the object.
A Voronoi map displays the Voronoi contours of an area covered by a cell. Each
of these areas is called a Best Server. To use a Voronoi map for Adjacency
Analysis, you must load it before you carry out the analysis.
The algorithm used for Voronoi computing is the distance, and this function is
tuned by the network object parameters.
Best Server The Best Server is a computed raster or vector file coming from RNP software.
The Best Server computes polygons for cells showing the geographic zone that is
the best telecom service. Several polygons can be set for a network object. The
Best server file comes in a MAP info of mif / mid format describing the polygon
list, the rendering attributes, and additional information on each polygon
(Network object reference).
Thematic A thematic layer graphically displays the value of parameters. It contains
Layer sub-layers by sorting criteria, containing all selected objects that match the
criteria.
An executed thematic layer is a set of network objects sorted by criteria in
sub-layers and displayed in various shapes and colors (user defined rendering).
Thematics are computed using thematic layers template and a set of network
objects for a consolidated period.
Example: a selection of cells drawn in color depending on the call drop.
Cartography browser
The Cartography browser appears as a tab in the Report browser. There can be multiple
report tabs and multiple tuning tabs, but there is only one tab for cartography.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Cartography browser consists of five regions.
Region Description
Cartog- Refer to the Tool bar (p. 24-45).
raphy
Cartog- The rendering Viewport is the main window of the cartography module; it is a
raphy drawing area showing the visible layers at their right position in the current world
View- coordinates system.
port This area displays background maps, CCA polygons, network objects, and thematic
objects. This area can be zoomed and panned.
Mini- The minimap defines the overview of the actual viewport. At any point in time, the
map entire map is visible in the mini map with a small rectangle.
Layer The layer manager contains a list of layers and sub-layers that are arranged in the
Manager hierarchical tree structure. A layer is a graphical component containing the
description of the graphical content and not the graphical content itself.
The layers can be moved up and down in the hierarchy, depending on the type of the
layers. The sub-layer within the main layer can be moved up and down, except for
the relation type and thematic layers.
The root nodes and the leaf nodes, as well as their corresponding icons are defined in
the configuration file.
Informa- The information bar shows the latitude and longitude of the cursor position in the
tion Bar map. It also contains a scale displaying the information regarding the distance of the
line when the user is in compute distance mode. The number displayed in the scale
changes dynamically when the viewport is zoomed or unzoomed.
The distance unit for the distance and scale is taken from the user preference, for
more information refer to Cartography user preferences (p. 26-10):
When the value is between 0 and 5000 meters, the unit is meters
When the value is more than 5000 meters, the unit is kilometers
When the value is between 0 and 5000 feet, the unit is feet
When the value is more than 5000 feet, the unit is changed to miles.
Figure 24-1 The information bar
The user can choose to hide both the layer manager and the minimap; in this case most of
the screen space is filled with the cartography viewport. The Density Level is recalculated
and the objects are adjusted according to the new density factor.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 24-2 Cartography browser
Display network objects in viewport

Note: For W-CDMA, only 3G cells are available (RNC and NodeB are planned but
not yet implemented).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A site is a logical object, where one or more network objects are located. All the objects
that have the same geographical position (latitude / longitude) are usually grouped
together as a site.
The site is usually represented as a filled circle. It has the same latitude / longitude as that
of the objects it contains.
The site name is a parameter:
Of the cell, for W-CDMA
Retrieved from the RNP cell ID, for GSM.
When no names are available, the site name is the latitude / longitude information.
A sector is a line joining the site to the network objects. A line appears using the
cartography configuration file attributes (thickness, color, leh). The sector usually gives
the information about the azimuth of the cell.
The Azimuth is the angle of the antenna of the cells in the network. Its value is taken
from the OMC-R or RNP.
The following figure presents the site elements as displayed in the viewport.
Cells are considered to be the main object types in the viewport. They are always
displayed as hexagons. To differentiate cells of different standards, a small hexagon
containing the technology letter (G for GSM, U for W-CDMA, W for WiMAX) appears
on the lower right corner of the hexagon, as shown in the figure below.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You can use the user preferences to show the standards or not:
The figure below shows the layout of a cell along with its rendering attributes:
ObjectType giving the shape
Technology represented by a symbol
Two parameters:
cellClass - background
cellType - sub-icon.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Size of the sector line: the azimuth line has a fixed graphical size, but when it is zoomed,
so when the Density Level is increased, the line is also thickened. This shows expanded
views of collapsed cells.
You can display any kind of network objects in the Cartography, given a couple of
latitude and longitude coordinates.
The NPO can display network objects coming from OMC or from RNP.
Density level
The viewport can contain thousands of objects, making the rendering of all objects along
with all their properties practically impossible. The density level is the level of details to
which the network objects are displayed in the viewport, and thus allows the user to refine
displays in the viewport.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The table below explains the density level depending on the number of objects in the
viewport.
Density Number of Rendering

Level Network
Objects in
Viewport
Main Object Site Other Other Nodes
Type Nodes Parents
Children
1 >2000 None None None Point
2 [501;2000] None Point None Icon
3 [101-500] None Point None Icon
Azimuth
4 [51-100] Collapsed Icons Point None Icon
size (1/2) Azimuths
5 [26-50] Collapsed Icons Point Icon size Icon
size (1) Azimuths (1/2) Size (1)
6 [11-25] Expanded Icons Point Icon size Icon
size (1) sub-Icon Azimuths (1) Size (1)
labels
7 [1-10] Full Expanded Point Icon size Icon
Icons size (1) Azimuths (1) Size (1)
sub-Icon labels
Notes:
1. 1/2 equals half the original size.
2. 1 equals full size.
To set the density level of the network objects, choose the appropriate value from the
Density Level dropdown list in the Cartography tool bar:
To lock it to the chosen value, select the Density Lock checkbox.
Graphic modes
Depending on the of the viewport, two modes of graphic display are automatically
selected for the main object type: collapsed and full-expanded mode.
Collapsed mode
Since the viewport may contain thousands of objects, some of which are of similar type or
located in the same site and can be grouped together. In this case, they are also called
co-localized cells or collapsed cells.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Three cells of different standards (GSM, W-CDMA, WiMAX) can be co-localized. The
maximum number of cells co-localization for a given azimuth (or a sector) is:
2G: two co-localized cells
3G: four co-localized cells.
The following figure provides an example of a graphical representation of the collapsed
cells.
Figure 24-3 Example of collapsed cells
The meaning of the graphical object presented above is as follows:

The double hexagon indicates that there are multiple cells situated at the same
location (co-localized)
U-3 means that there are three W-CDMA cells grouped together
G-2 means that there are two GSM cells grouped together
W-1 means that there is one WiMAX cell in the collapsed cell.
Full-expanded mode
The full expanded co-localized cells are rendered on the border of the circle representing
the sector, by technology, with a larger space between co-localized objects. This allows
rendering of adjacencies between co-localized objects.
The sub-icon and background pattern drawing rule is defined in the configuration file.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 24-4 Full-expanded cells
Compute Voronoi maps

Voronoi maps are used:
At the CCA files import
For THL template shapes.
The Voronoi cells computing is triggered every night, automatically creating CCAs.
For each target Voronoi layer, a Voronoi polygon is computed and stored in the database
as a couple (MuseId, polygon data and rendering). Voronoi computation is based on cell
localization.
The process is as follows:
1. The list of cells is retrieved using the filter defined in the Voronoi layer.
2. The barycenter of all the cells is calculated. A UTM (Universal Transverse Mercator)
projection centered on this point is then created.
3. If several cells are co-located, the same polygon is assigned.
A list of sites is then built. A site is identified by a number (from 0 to the number of
cells) and a position.
4. Voronoi diagram computation is performed.
The goal of the Voronoi algorithm is to divide the plane in polygons (there is one
polygon per cell) so that each point inside a polygon is closer to the attached cell than
to any other cell.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5. A post processing is made in order to find all the segments of a cell and to order them
so that the last point of a segment is equal to the first point of the next segment.
The polygon sizes are then adjusted to telecom constraints (umbrella, micro, macro
cells,...).
6. The Best Server contour is created.
The polygons are adjusted to represent more accurately a best server contour. To do
that the edges of the polygons are moved to the nearest circle defining the maximum
distance for a cell.
7. Cell coverage limitation takes place.
The cell coverage is limited to a maximum distance. In the cartography configuration
file, in each Voronoi layer definition, the radius of the circle is associated with the
values of a single criterion.
To check the Voronoi maps computation, view the traces in the following file:
/alcatel/muse/data/trace/MUSE_VORONOI_JOB_MUSE_0.traces
To view the Voronoi maps inside the Cartography viewport, refer to Procedure 24-1.2:
Show / hide layer (p. 24-23).
Common cartography usage

The basic common usage of cartography module in NPO is as follows.
Operator Task
Administrator Tasks The Administrator tasks are as follows:
1. Import rasters, vectors and THL Template files in the database via
web administration tools.
2. Import RNP planned data files into the Muse database.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Operator Task
Operator Tasks The Operator tasks are as follows:
1. Start the Analysis Desktop, choose a working zone, and open the
Cartography browser.
2. Import background, CCA or DT layers in the database directly from
the Analysis Desktop.
3. Add new graphical layers from the database to display in the
cartography viewer.
4. Add a set of Network Objects to display, by dragging and dropping
them from the topology classification into the cartography viewport.
5. Select a set of Network Objects and a thematic layer template in the
function browser. Drag and drop this double selection into the
cartography viewer and enter additional execution context such as
periodicity, start and end time.
The Analysis Desktop retrieves data from MUSE and generates the
result (called an executed thematic layer).
The Analysis Desktop renders the executed thematic view as a new
layer with sub-layers for each sorting criterion.
6. Perform the required operations with the displayed result:
Select
Pan
Zoom
Center
Compute distances
Display properties
Hide layers
Modify rendering properties.
7. Edit the executed thematic layer properties in order, for example, to
define how to display these network objects or change the execution
context.
8. If necessary, save the modified executed thematic layer as a thematic
layer template in order to be able to execute it again later without
redefining all graphical properties.
9. Select a cell and display incoming and outgoing adjacencies.
10. Launch a wizard to manage the cell adjacencies and choose to add or
remove adjacencies based on the geographical criterion.
11. Use the Highlight facility to find the set of network objects.
12. Propagate this subset of network objects to the topology manager.
13. Export the graphical results into several raster or vector formats.
The following figure shows an example of the Cartography window displaying a selected
cell and a selected adjacency.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 24-5 Example of Cartography window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Open cartography
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Open cartography
Open the cartography browser:
From the menu bar, select Cartography -> Launch Cartography, OR
Click on from the menu bar.
A set of predefined layers appears in the cartographic viewer corresponding to the current
working zone if no layers were loaded in the previous session of this working zone.
The last saved layer display configuration is retrieved from the user preferences if the
working zone has not changed. Layers are downloaded and displayed.
To enlarge the cartography window to window size, double click on its title tab, or click
on the array from the splitter.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1: Use layer manager
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-1: Use layer manager

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 24-1.1: Load layer (p. 24-18).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Display layer / layer list (p. 24-22).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 24-1.2: Show / hide layer (p. 24-23).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Procedure 24-1.3: Display layer legend (p. 24-24).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Procedure 24-1.4: Modify layer display properties (p. 24-27).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Procedure 24-1.5: Modify layer order (p. 24-29).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Procedure 24-1.6: Add layer in DT, CCA and background layer (p. 24-30).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Procedure 24-1.9: Correlate drive test results with NPO data (p. 24-33).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Procedure 24-1.10: Remove layer from layer manager (p. 24-35).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Procedure 24-1.11: Delete layer (p. 24-36)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Procedure 24-1.12: Export displayed layers / viewport (p. 24-37).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Procedure 24-1.13: Google earth export (p. 24-39).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.1: Load layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-1.1: Load layer

During the Cartography start up, the Cartography module fetches the layers associated
with the working zone, depending on the user rights. The layers must be first imported by
the administrator or they can be loaded by the user directly from the Analysis Desktop.
To import layers via web administration tools, refer to the NPO Administration User
Guide document, to:
Import vector file using GUI
Import raster file using GUI
Import drive test file using GUI.
From the Analysis Desktop, you can:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Import background layer of raster type (p. 24-18).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Import background layer of vector type (p. 24-19).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Import CCA layer (p. 24-20).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Import DT layer (p. 24-21).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Import background layer of raster type

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the layer manager, select Background and:

Right click and, from the popup menu, select Load Layer..., OR
From the menu bar, select Cartography -> Load Layer....
Result: The Load Layer window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Load Layer window:

Check Background
For the Type field, select Raster.
Result: The type of the background layer to import is set to Raster.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Type / browse for the Raster file you want to import.

Type / browse for the Georeference data file you want to import.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Only one raster file and one georeference data file is allowed to import.
Both the raster file and georeference data file are mandatory.
The supported formats for raster file are: .PNG, .TIFF and .JPEG, and for the
georeference file are .rast and .txt.
If you type the name of a layer that already exists in the database, a confirmation window
appears. Click on Yes to update the layer from the database with the new layer.
Result: The raster and the georeference files to load are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Type the name of the layer in the Layer Name field.

Result: The layer name is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on Load.
Result: The background layer is loaded.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Import background layer of vector type

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the layer manager, select Background and:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Check Background
For the Type field, select Vector.
Result: The type of the background layer to import is set to Vector.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Type / browse for the MIF file you want to import.

Type / browse for the MID file you want to import.
Note: Only one MIF file and one MID file is allowed to import.
The MIF file is mandatory for vector file import, whereas the MID file is optional for
background layer of vector type.
The supported file formats for vectors are mif / mid from Alcatel RNP V6 tool and
MapInfo version 300 and 450.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The files to load are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on Load.
Result: The background layer is loaded.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Import CCA layer

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the layer manager, select CCA and:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Check CCA
From the Technology combo box, select the technology.
Result: The technology of the CCA layer to import is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Note: The names of the MIF file and MID file to be imported must be the same.
Only one MIF file and one MID file is allowed to import.
Both the MIF file and the MID file are mandatory for import of CCA layer.
The supported file formats for vectors are mif / mid format from Alcatel RNP V6 tool
and MapInfo version 300 and 450.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on Load.
Result: The CCA layer is loaded.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Import DT layer
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the layer manager, select DT and:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Check DT
From the Technology combo box, select the technology.
Result: The technology of the DT layer to import is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Note: The names of the MIF file and MID file to import must be the same.
Only one MIF file and one MID file is allowed to import.
Both the MIF file and the MID file are mandatory for import of CCA layer.
The supported file formats for vectors are mif / mid format from Alcatel RNP V6 tool
and MapInfo version 300 and 450.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on Load.
Result: The DT layer is loaded.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Display layer / layer list

A layer represents a set of sub-layers, which are grouped in categories. Basically, layers
and sub-layers offer the same features. A sub-layer can be a raster or a group of vector
objects.
The layers and sub-layers are displayed in the layer manager. The user has no direct
access to this operation, as this is part of the Cartography module startup.
For example, if the user starts the Cartography module for the first time, since the user
does not have any last user layers in the working zone, the default layers associated with
the working zone are loaded. If the user adds or removes the layer from the layer manager
and closes the Cartography module, when they reopen the cartography module, the layers
that were last saved in the user preferences are fetched and loaded. However, when
restarting the Analysis Desktop, if the user changes the working zone, the last saved
layers in the user preferences are ignored and the layers associated with the new working
zone are loaded.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.2: Show / hide layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-1.2: Show / hide layer

The following figure shows the layer.
For the defined layers, the layer manager tree disposes of a V checkbox, representing the
visibility option.
To Do
Show a layer in the viewport Select its corresponding Visible checkbox.
Hide a layer from the viewport Deselect its corresponding Visible checkbox.
Refer to Filter network objects in a layer (p. 24-62) for a table with all the objects in
the Cartography Layers and the availability of their visibility checkboxes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.3: Display layer legend
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-1.3: Display layer legend

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select a cartography layer and:

Right click and, from the popup menu, select Show Legend..., OR
From the menu bar, select Cartography -> Show Legend....
Result: The legend window appears.
Legend window content Description

Background Layer The mid information for vectors and rasters.
CCA Layer The mid information.
Drive Test Layer The mid information.
Network Object Layer The list of possible representations of the
Object Type extracted from the cartography
configuration file.
Thematic Layer The thematic layer legend.
Relations Layer The state of the adjacencies.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Example: The following figures show the background and network object layer
legend dialog.
Figure 24-6 Background layer legend dialog
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 24-7 Network object layer legend dialog
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.4: Modify layer display properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-1.4: Modify layer display properties

Perform this task to modify a background layer appearance by changing its contrast,
brightness and transparency.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Right click and, from the popup menu, select Modify Layer Properties..., OR
From the menu bar, select Cartography -> Modify Layer Properties....
Result: The Display Properties window appears.
If multiple layers of same layer type are selected, the Display Properties window
opens for the most top selected layer.
Figure 24-8 Display background layer properties
Figure 24-9 Display THL layer properties
If all layers have the same value, then all their labels are displayed in black.
If the layers have different values for an attribute, then the label for that attribute
appears in blue, to indicate that the values are not same for all the selected layers.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.4: Modify layer display properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Set the appropriate parameters.
Parameter Name Description Default Value

Contrast Contrast of the layer 0.5
Brightness Brightness of the layer 0.6
Transparency Transparency level of the layer 0.5 for raster files
1 for others
Note: The Contrast and Brightness can only be applied to raster files. For all other
types of layers, these fields are greyed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on OK.
Result: All the modifications done for the layer are saved as the implicit user
preference.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.5: Modify layer order
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-1.5: Modify layer order

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To modify the order of a layer in the same group, select the required layer.
Result: The layer is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Use the icon to drag and drop the layer to the required position.
Note: The order of sub-layers belonging to the thematic layers cannot be changed.
Result: All the modifications done for the layer are saved as the implicit user
preference.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.6: Add layer in DT, CCA and background
layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-1.6: Add layer in DT, CCA and background layer

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Right click and, from the popup menu, select Add Layer..., OR
From the menu bar, select Cartography -> Add Layer....
Result: The Add Layer to Layer Manager window appears, showing the list of
imported DT and CCA files (including computed Voronoi) and background maps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the appropriate imported layer, choose the background, the DT or the CCA type,
then click on OK.
Result: The layer is downloaded into the cartography and is added in the layer
manager tree, at the top of the layer type sub-tree.
Whenever a DT layer is added, lines between the drive test points / objects and their
referenced network objects are shown if the Show DT Lines option is checked in the
User Preference. Refer to Procedure 26-1: Configure user preferences (p. 26-2).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.7: Add layer in network object layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-1.7: Add layer in network object layer

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Drag and drop the appropriate network objects from the Modes and Functions tree into
the layer manager.
Result: A new layer is created for each newly dropped object type. For example,
when dropping Cell3G objects, if the Cell3G sub-layer is not present in the network
object layer, then a new sub-layer is created for Cell3G and the objects are added in
the Cell3G layer.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Drag and drop the appropriate adjacencies from the Modes and Functions tree into the
layer manager.
Result: The adjacencies and their corresponding network objects are added to the
viewport.
To view the adjacencies in the viewport, right click on a network object and choose to
Procedure 24-9.2: Display adjacencies (p. 24-109), or choose to Procedure 24-9.5:
Run Adjacency Analysis Wizard to Create / Delete Adjacencies (p. 24-114).
The network objects are not visible in the layer manager, but the cell objects are
rendered in the viewport.
Whenever a new sub-layer is added in the network object layer, the parameters (only
those that have enumerations) for the object type is fetched and displayed as the
children of the sub-layer node in the tree.
For each parameter, all the enumeration values are added in the tree as sub-node of
the parameters. All these have checkboxes in the tree table, so you can shown / hide
them in the viewport. Refer to Filter network objects in a layer (p. 24-62).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.8: Add layer in thematic layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-1.8: Add layer in thematic layer

The thematic layer can be added in the layer manager by executing thematic templates.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the appropriate network objects and a thematic template in the Layer Manager.
Result: The appropriate network objects and a thematic template in the Layer
Manager are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Drag and drop the appropriate network objects and a thematic template in the Layer
Manager.
Result: If a layer is not already there for the thematic template, a new layer is created
in the layer manager and network objects are sorted in the thematic layer based on the
criterion defined in the THL template.
Figure 24-10 Example Add Layer in Layer Manager window
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.9: Correlate drive test results with NPO
data
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-1.9: Correlate drive test results with NPO data

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 The Drive Test vector map appears in the cartography viewport, with thematic showing
QoS values on the cells / adjacencies.
Select the corresponding cell of the measure in the drive test points.
Result: The required cell is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Use thin lines to associate the points of the drive test with the corresponding cells.
Result: The points of the drive test are associated with the corresponding cells.
The figure below shows all the handover of the test drive. The line color can be
modified in the configuration file.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.9: Correlate drive test results with NPO
data
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.10: Remove layer from layer manager
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-1.10: Remove layer from layer manager

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the cartography layer(s) to remove, and:

Right click and, from the popup menu, select Remove Layer..., OR
From the menu bar, select Cartography -> Remove Layer....
If you select a node in the tree that cannot be removed, then the menu items are disabled.
You must take into account the following information:
In the thematic layer, you can select only the thematic template node to remove the
layer. You cannot remove the main thematic layer node, criteria or the steps in the
criterion.
In network object layer, you can only select sub-layers such as Cell3G and RNC for
removal from the layer manager.
You cannot remove the main network object layer and the main relations layer, under
the Network Object layer node.
You can only select the immediate sub-layer of the Relations layer (for example,
Adjacencies) for that layer.
In the CCA layer, you can only select the leaf nodes for removal. You cannot remove
the main CCA layer node.
In the background layer, you can only select the leaf nodes for removal. You cannot
remove the main background layer node.
In the DT layer, you can only select the sub-layer of DT layer for removal. You cannot
remove the main DT layer node.
Result: The following confirmation window appears.
Are you sure you want to remove the following layer(s)? <list of
layer(s) >
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on Yes.
Result: The selected layer(s) is removed from the layer manager tree and the memory
is freed. The layer is also removed from the Cartography viewport.
The layer is not removed though from the database. The new layer list is stored in the
implicit user preferences so that when Cartography module is restarted only the new
list is reloaded.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.11: Delete layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-1.11: Delete layer

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the layer manager, select the main layer node (Background, CCA or DT) and:
Right click and, from the popup menu, select Delete Layer..., OR
From the menu bar, select Cartography -> Delete Layer....
Result: The Delete Layer From Database window opens, displaying the list of layers
which can be deleted.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the layer / layers you want to delete and click on OK.
If you want to delete layers of a different type than the ones displayed in the list, change
the type from the Layer Type combo box.
Result: The Delete Layer(s) window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 To confirm the deletion of the layer / layers, click on Yes.

Result: The layer(s) are deleted from the database. They are also removed from the
layer manager and from the cartography viewport.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.12: Export displayed layers / viewport
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-1.12: Export displayed layers / viewport

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Right click and, from the popup menu, select Export..., OR
From the menu bar, select Cartography -> Export....
Result: The Export window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the appropriate export format, then click on OK.

The following table presents the available export formats for different types of
cartography files.
Layer Type Export Description

Raster layer This layer can be exported only as PNG format. This layer can be
exported as full layer and viewport.
The export can be done as a viewport only in the case when all the layers
in layer manager are selected.
Vector layer This layer can be exported in:
mid / mif format, as a full layer only
PNG format, as a viewport only.
DT layer This layer can be exported as mid / mif format.
Network object This layer can be exported as PNG and KMZ formats using Viewport and
layer All Network Objects and Thematic export.
When it is exported in:
PNG format, all the layers that are seen in the current viewport are
also exported
KMZ format, all the network objects, their corresponding THL
objects, sites and sectors present in the viewport are also exported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.12: Export displayed layers / viewport
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Thematic layer This layer can be exported as PNG and KMZ formats using Viewport and
All Network Objects and Thematic export.
also exported
Export possibilities:
Layer type Full Layer Export Viewport Export All Network Objects
and Thematic
Export
PNG KMZ mid / PNG KMZ mid / PNG KMZ mid /
mif (1.) mif mif
Raster Yes No No Yes No No No No No
Vector No No Yes Yes No No No No No
Network No No No Yes Yes No No Yes No
Objects
Executed THL No No No Yes Yes No No Yes No
Notes:
1. Since a PNG export is an image grab of the cartography viewport, when one layer is
captured as PNG, all other layers that are visible in the viewport are also captured, therefore,
a PNG viewport export on one layer cannot be done. It is always on multiple layers.
Result: The Save window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Save window, choose the location where to save the exported file, then click on
Save.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Depending on your preference, select as appropriate Yes or No.

Result: The export is saved accordingly.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.13: Google earth export
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-1.13: Google earth export

Presentation
The cartography information can be exported in order to be displayed in Google Earth
through the KML interface. The KML (Keyhole Markup Language) is an XML grammar
and file format for modeling and storing geographic features such as points, lines, images
and polygons for display in Google Earth.
For the Google Earth export cartography module, KMZ files (zipped KML files) are used.
The KMZ files (the .kmz extension is used) contain the KML exported cartography file
and an / images directory containing a list of rasters for each exported sector.
The supported version of XML schema for creating KMZ format files is KML 2.1.
Google Earth KML 2.1 allows the user to:
Specify icons and labels to identify locations on the earth
Create different camera positions
Use image overlays attached to the ground or screen
Define styles to specify feature appearance
Write html descriptions of features, including hyperlinks and images
Use folders for hierarchical grouping of features
Set the level of details for each place mark.
For more information, refer to the following links:
http://earth.google.com
http://earth.google.com/downloads.html
http://earth.google.com/kml/kml_tut.html
http://earth.google.co/kmml/kml_tags_21.html
Export cartography in KMZ format

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 24-1.12: Export displayed layers / viewport (p. 24-37) in .KMZ format.
Result: The displayed layers or viewport are exported.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Double click on the saved .KMZ file.

Result: Google Earth opens, zooming to the region where the network objects and
associated thematics of the KMZ file are located.
The following are exported in Google Earth:
The site is exported as an icon at the correct geographical position with the
latitude-longitude coordinates
The sectors, exported with the correct Azimuth angle display.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A line appears using the cartography configuration file attributes (thickness, color,
leh).
The leh is static, configurable only in the cartography configuration file. A
multiplier factor is used with the configuration file sector leh.
The main object type of the technology is exported as rasters (one raster per
sector).
The azimuth is used as name of the cell group.
The raster is generated per sector and put in the images repository of the export.
Depending on the level of detail defined in the .KMZ file, two levels of details are
rasterized:
The expanded mode
The collapsed mode.
The cell background is also exported.
Only the visible objects are exported; filtered objects are ignored.
Transparency / contrast / brightness is ignored for Network Objects.
Special thematic rendering modes (mobile, standard deviation and Voronoi) are
not exported.
Adjacencies are not exported.
If all the objects in the cell group are not visible (because the filtering checkboxes
or main layer visibility feature are on), their corresponding site, sector and
thematics are not exported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 24-11 Example of site exported in Google Earth at level of detail expanded
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 24-12 Example of Site Exported in Google Earth at level of detail collapsed
Figure 24-13 Example of site exported in Google Earth at level of detail where
cells are not shown
The left panel, Places, presents the exported KMZ file, with associated azimuths.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 24-14 Google Earth places window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 View information concerning the main object type:

Click on the appropriate azimuth hyperlink from the Places left panel, OR
Click on the appropriate cell from the exported site window.
Result: A tool tip window opens, displaying information about:
The sector azimuth value
The site to which it belongs
The list of cells friendly names for each technology, with the corresponding
thematics criteria values.
Figure 24-15 Sector tool tip
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-2: Use cartography navigation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-2: Use cartography navigation

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Tool bar (p. 24-45).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Use single / circular selection (p. 24-46).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 24-2.1: Use pan rendering viewport (p. 24-48).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Procedure 24-2.2: Zoom in / out / rectangular (p. 24-49).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Procedure 24-1.7: Add layer in network object layer (p. 24-31).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Procedure 24-2.4: Compute distance between points / network objects (p. 24-54).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Procedure 24-2.5: Navigate in viewport records (p. 24-56).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Procedure 24-1.8: Add layer in thematic layer (p. 24-32).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Display information interactively (p. 24-56).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Minimap (p. 24-56).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Tool bar
The following tool bar icons are available for the cartography operations.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use single / circular selection

To Do
Single selection
Select an object Click on .
If you click on a collapsed object, all the
objects inside the collapsed graphic objects are
selected.
Deselect the object or append to the current Press the Ctrl key.
selection The selection list is updated.
Circular selection
Use the circular selection mode Click on then draw a circle in the viewport.
All the objects in the drawn circle are selected.
Note: The objects in the viewport are selected only if their selection field in the layer
manager is enabled; refer to Filter network objects in a layer (p. 24-62).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When there is a high density of objects, some of the objects are not displayed, or they are
shown as points, in which case no selection is shown.
The selection color of the network objects can be configured in the user preferences.
Refer to Chapter 26, User preferences.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-2.1: Use pan rendering viewport
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-2.1: Use pan rendering viewport

The panning operation describes how you can move up, down, left, or right in the current
viewport.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To pan:
From the menu bar, select Cartography -> Export..., OR
Click on .
Result: The minimap appear.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the minimap, click and hold the left mouse button, then drag to the required direction.
Result: Both the minimap and viewport are moved.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-2.2: Zoom in / out / rectangular
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-2.2: Zoom in / out / rectangular
To Do
Zoom in You can:
From the menu bar, select Cartography -> Zoom Plus...,
OR
Right click in the viewport and select Cartography ->
Zoom Plus..., OR
Click on , OR
Press the Ctrl key and move the wheel of the mouse
down.
The zooming percentage is set in the User Preferences
window.
Zoom out You can:
From the menu bar, select Cartography -> Zoom
Minus..., OR
Right click in the viewport and select Cartography ->
Zoom Minus..., OR
Click on , OR
Press the Ctrl key and move the wheel of the mouse up.
The zooming percentage is set in the User Preferences
window.
Zoom in rectangular mode Click on the icon, and then hold the left mouse button
and drag it to create a rectangle.
This defines the amount of viewport pixels in both axis of
the displacement.
The viewport is zoomed in only for the drawn area. You can
then move or enlarge / decrease the rectangular
zone.
Figure 24-16 Example of object zoom
The following figure shows successive zoom actions. The first two views show fixed
sized sectors and icons. The last zoom displays the cells grouped in a sector.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figures summarize a display with real cells.
Figure 24-17 Example of site exported in Google Earth at level of detail expanded
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 24-18 Example of site exported in Google Earth at level of detail collapsed
Figure 24-19 Example of site exported in Google Earth at level of detail where
cells are not shown
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-2.3: Center viewport
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-2.3: Center viewport

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Display the viewport.

Result: The viewport appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Right click in the viewport and select Center in Viewport, OR
Click on the icon from the Cartography tool bar, OR
From the menu bar, select Cartography -> Center Viewport....
Result: If the selection is a set of network or DT objects, the viewport is computed to
display all network or DT objects plus a 10% zone around.
If there is no network object selected, the centre is done on the current layer selection
in the layer manager. The zone to display is the whole layer.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-2.4: Compute distance between points /
network objects
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-2.4: Compute distance between points /

network objects
Note: You cannot select a combination of one point and one network object to
compute distance.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Right click in the viewport and select Compute distance..., OR
From the menu bar, select Cartography -> Compute distance....
Result: The distance between two points can be computed either by drawing a line,
OR choosing two network objects.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 To compute the distance between two points:

Select one point in the viewport. A line is drawn interactively following the mouse
from the first point.
Select a second point up to the distance to be calculated.
Result: The distance is shown on the line that unites the two points.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-2.4: Compute distance between points /
network objects
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 To compute the distance between two network objects:

Select one network object in the viewport.
A line is drawn from the network object real position (latitude longitude) interactively
following the mouse from the first network object.
Select a second network object up to the distance to be calculated.
Result: The distance is shown on the line that unites the two points.
To stop the computing of distance, exit the compute distance mode.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-2.5: Navigate in viewport records
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-2.5: Navigate in viewport records

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Display the viewport.

Result: The viewport appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Right click in the viewport and select Navigate Backward / Forward, OR
Click on the or icon from the Cartography tool bar, OR
From the menu bar, select Cartography -> Navigate Backward / Forward....
Result: The viewport properties: position / zoom / layer configuration are saved into
the viewport history.
A maximum of 20 records can be saved (circular record).
The current view can be later recalled via back and forward navigation.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Display information interactively

The current position of the mouse in the viewport appears in the status bar of the
cartographic viewer.
The coordinates can be expressed in two coordinate systems:
Longitude / Latitude (WGS84)
UTM (Universal Transverse Mercator).
If the mouse stops over a graphical object that is associated with a muse object (e.g.
network object, executed thematic layer), a tool tip popup opens in the cartographic
viewer (rectangular area) showing the related information.
Minimap
The Minimap displays in a limited graphical zone the whole displayed area, with a
rectangular area representing the current viewport zone. The background content is a
global view of the background layer currently drawn.
The minimap window displays the main viewport area of the main rendering window
using a white rectangular zone which is not filled.
The size of the minimap window depends on the size of the Analysis Desktop but is set as
a percentage of the current cartographic viewport.
The minimap shows the background layers in the world coordinates and the zoom level of
the minimap is always set to display all visible background layers within the minimap
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Minimap
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Whenever the operator changes the viewport co-ordinates or the zoom on the viewport, it
is reflected in the mini map.
Show / hide minimap
From the menu bar, select Cartography -> Show / Hide Minimap.
The minimap window is shown / removed from the cartography browser.
Whenever the minimap is shown, the minimap rectangle is updated to show the current
viewport coordinates. The density factor is recalculated and the objects are adjusted
according to the new density factor. The level of details changes according to the new
density level.
Navigate to position through minimap
Select a point in the minimap window by clicking on it. The rendering viewport is
updated (panned) so that the new center of the viewport is the selected point in the
minimap.
Manage network objects

Select and manage network objects
To Do
Select a network object Click on the object.
Add / remove an object in the current selection Perform one of the following options:
Press Ctrl and click on the object, OR
Create an interactive rectangular surface
over the objects to be selected, by pressing
the left button of the mouse.
Remove objects from the selection Right click on the objects and select UnSelect
All.
Select all the objects of a collapsed graphic Click on the collapsed objects.
Select a set of objects Click on the network object layer.
Configure the selection color Perform one of the following options:
Refer to Procedure 26-1: Configure user
preferences (p. 26-2), to the Selection
Color option, OR
Define the selection in the cartography
configuration file.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Manage network objects
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Convert one (or several) highlighted object(s) Right click on the object(s) and select:
into selected one(s) Convert to Selection -> Append to
Selection, to add the selected object(s) to
the selected list
Convert to Selection -> Replace
Selection, to make the previously selected
object(s) lose the selection and to select
the new object(s).
Display network object properties

Select the appropriate network object from the viewport, then:
Right click and select View Properties..., OR
From the menu bar, select Cartography -> Object Properties....
The Properties window appears.
For more information, refer to Procedure 3-2: Display and edit properties (p. 3-7).
Add network objects in viewport

To add network objects in the viewport, select them from the topology tree and drop them
in the rendering viewport or layer manager.
Only the network objects whose co-ordinates can be computed (except adjacencies) are
added in the viewport and are highlighted.
Only the cells with defined geographical coordinates can be displayed. If the dragged
BTS or BSC have no coordinates, their coordinates can be calculated depending on the
coordinates of the cells declared to them.
The network objects themselves are not displayed in the network object layer. Only the
parameters of the object with all its enumerations are displayed in the layer manager.
Network objects are sorted by Object Type and a layer is created per Object Type.
For each network object, the corresponding site is computed as follows:
The distance of the network object with the existing sites is computed; if the distance
is zero, the network object is added in the site
If the network object has not found an existing site, the distance between all others
network objects is computed
When two objects are in the same location (distance is zero), a site is created and the
objects are added in this site. The coordinates of the site are computed from the first
object put in the site
All new sites are added in the site layer (not displayed in the layer manager).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For each adjacency, the packed link is computed if required:
The source object density level rendering mode and target density level graphic object
are determined
If there is already a packed link between the source and target graphic object, the
adjacency is added in the list and the number of links is updated on the packed link
If there is already a single link in the same direction between the source and target
graphic object, the current single link is destroyed and a packed link is created with
the two adjacencies in it.
For the network objects that do not have coordinates or which cannot be calculated, an
error dialog appears, displaying the non-computed object IDs.
Adjacencies do not have any co-ordinates, but they have the source and target objects,
therefore they can still be displayed in the viewport.
If the filtering is applied in the layer manager for the dragged and dropped network
objects, they are not shown in the viewport.
Depending on the user preferences, whenever new objects are added to the viewport, their
operational value or planned value are displayed first
Their density level is also updated based on the current density level selection.
Remove network objects from viewport

Select one or several network objects in the viewport, right click and select Remove.
The selected objects are removed from the viewport and from the THL Layer (if any) in
the layer manager.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For network objects:
If there are no more network objects in the site, the site is removed from the rendering
viewport
If there are no more network objects in the layer manager, the layer is removed from
the layer manager
If there are no more network objects on an Azimuth line, the Azimuth line is removed
If the removed network object was co-localized, the co-localized group is updated and
the viewport is refreshed. If the collapsed group has only one object in it, the
collapsed object is replaced by the expanded object.
Incoming relations and outgoing relations of the removed network objects are also
removed from the adjacency layer and from the rendering viewport.
For adjacencies: if there are no more adjacencies in a packed link, the packed link is
destroyed.
When a network object is removed from the viewport, the corresponding THL objects
will also be removed from the viewport.
When the objects are removed from the viewport, density level is recomputed and the
objects are rendered according to new density level.
Propagate network object selection from cartographic viewer into mode

Right click and select Propagate -> All / Selection, OR
From the menu bar, select Cartography -> Propagate to M&F -> All / Selection.
All of the selected network objects are propagated to the topology tree browser. The tree
is auto-scrolled so that the first selected object is visible.
Propagate executed view to highlight network objects in cartography

Note: Only views that contain indicators, rules and parameters can be propagated
from viewers to cartography.
Perform the following tasks:
1. Select the objects in the executed view.
2. Right click and select Propagate -> Propagate Highlighted Network Objects to
Cartography.
The network objects and the most severe color are propagated to the cartography
viewport.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Highlight network objects
Perform the following tasks:
1. Select one or several network objects in the viewport, then:
Right click and select Highlight, OR
From the menu bar, select Cartography -> Highlight.
2. Select as appropriate one of the following options.
To Select
Highlight all parent objects All Parent Objects
Highlight all children objects All Children Objects
Highlight all incoming adjacencies All Incoming Adjacencies
Highlight all outgoing adjacencies All Outgoing Adjacencies
Highlight all adjacencies All Adjacencies
Highlight all cells that are interfered by the Interfered -> Co-channel Probability
current selected cell with co-channel
probability *
Highlight all cells that can interfere with the Interfering -> Co-channel Probability
current selected cell with co-channel
probability *
Highlight all cells that can interfere with the Interfering -> Adjacent Channel
current selected cell with Adjacent channel Probability
probability *
Highlight all cells that are reusing frequency Frequency Reusing Objects
in a specified radius around the
corresponding network object
Highlight the CCA Highlight CCA
* An interference matrix provided by RNP is used in order to analyze potential

interference problems.
The network objects are colored semi transparently with the current highlight color.
You can select one network object and choose to highlight the CCA of the object, if it
is loaded in the Analysis Desktop.
For the collapsed objects, you can open the contents of the collapsed object dialog and
can see the details of highlighting.
When there is a high density of objects, some of the objects are not displayed, or they
are shown as points, in which case no highlight is shown.
The highlight color of the network objects can be configured in the user preference. Refer
to Chapter 26, User preferences.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To convert one (or several) highlighted object(s) into selected one(s), right click on them
and select one of the following options.
To Do
Configure the selection color Perform one of the following options:
Refer to Procedure 26-1: Configure user
preferences (p. 26-2), to the Selection
Color option, OR
Define the selection in the cartography
configuration file.
Convert one (or several) highlighted object(s) Right click on the object(s) and select:
into selected one(s) Convert to Selection -> Append to
Selection, to add the selected object(s) to
the selected list
Convert to Selection -> Replace
Selection, to make the previously selected
object(s) lose the selection and to select
the new object(s).
Un-highlight objects Right click on the objects and select
UnHighlight All.
Filter network objects in a layer

For the network objects, the layer manager tree contains two checkboxes.
Checkbox Description
Select Check the Select checkbox in the Select
column to select all the network objects that
are the children of the selected node in the
tree.
If the selected node is the leaf node, then that
particular category of network objects are
shown in the viewport immediately.
Visible Check the Visible checkbox in the Visible
column to show all the network objects that
are the children of the selected node in the tree
in the viewport immediately.
If the selected node is the leaf node, then that
particular category of network objects are
shown in the viewport immediately.
When all the objects on the sector line become
invisible, then the sector line itself becomes
invisible.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure shows a example screen with the corresponding checkboxes.
The following checkbox selection rules apply:

If all sub-values of the same leaf node are selected, the leaf node remains selected
If all sub-values of the same leaf node are unselected, the leaf node is also unselected
If only some of the sub-values of the same leaf node are selected, the leaf node
remains selected.
The following logical functions apply.
OR Between the sub-values of the same parameter.
AND Between the values of the different parameters.
The network objects are displayed in the viewport only if they satisfy the filtering criteria
in the layer manager. The selection and visibility filter is applied to all the objects that are
added to the viewport.
The select and visible checkboxes are not available for some of the tree nodes. In this
case, the component is not present in the layer manager. Refer to the following table.
Object in the Tree Select Checkbox Visible Checkbox

Available Available
Thematic main layer node No Yes
Executed thematic node No Yes
Criterion node No No
Steps node No No
Network objects under the steps No No
Network objects main layer Yes Yes
Network objects sub-layer (object type & Yes Yes
relations layer)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Object in the Tree Select Checkbox Visible Checkbox

Available Available
Adjacency layers (Immediate sub-layers of Yes Yes
Relations layer)
Parameters of Network objects and adjacencies No No
Enumerations of parameters Yes Yes
CCA main layer node No Yes
CCA leaf layer No Yes
Background main layer node No Yes
Background leaf layer No Yes
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-3: Thematic Layer Template (THL)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-3: Thematic Layer Template (THL)

Presentation
The thematic layer is the equivalent of an executed view in cartography. It allows you to
graphically display the values of logical / design parameters, QoS indicators, diagnosis,
rules, geographic (for example, distance from the POI) and customer data (free fields).
This visual analysis can help you determine the best configuration and optimization
characteristics to apply to the group. The NPO offers a default Thematic Layer when
installed, but you can create, modify and delete your own thematic layers using the
Thematic Layer Manager.
Thematic layers are available only when you are working with one of the types of
network objects listed below:
For GSM: Cells, Adjacencies, BTS, BSC
For W-CDMA: CELL3G, NodeB, RNC
For LTE: CELLLTE, eNodeB.
Thematics are computed using thematic layers template and a set of network objects for a
consolidated period. It contains sorted objects given criteria with a specific rendering.
Example: a selection of cells whose color depends on the call drop.
The criteria of the THL is configurable in the cartography configuration file.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 24-3.1: Display THL properties (p. 24-66).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 24-3.2: Propagate THL to function tree (p. 24-67).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 24-3.3: Open THL editor (p. 24-68).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Procedure 24-3.4: Create THL Template (p. 24-69).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Procedure 24-3.5: Create THL template by copy (p. 24-81).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Procedure 24-3.6: Edit THL template (p. 24-82).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Procedure 24-3.7: Delete THL template (p. 24-83).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Procedure 24-3.8: Export THL template (p. 24-84).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-3.1: Display THL properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-3.1: Display THL properties

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select a THL template from the function tree, right click and select Display THL
Properties.
Result: The THL Properties page opens in an html browser.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 You can display and edit the following properties pages; refer to Procedure 3-2: Display
and edit properties (p. 3-7) for more information:
Generic Thematic Layer Template definition
Attributes of rendering mode
Graphical properties of a THL
Attributes of interval distribution (steps and colors)
Graphical properties of adjacency.
Result: The required properties page is edited.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-3.2: Propagate THL to function tree
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-3.2: Propagate THL to function tree

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select one or more THL templates from a function tree.

Result: The THL templates are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Drag and drop them to another target function of the same mode.
A THL can be propagated to:
Indicator - to retrieve all indicators referenced in the selected Thematic Layer
Templates
Design Parameter - to retrieve all design parameters referenced in the selected
Thematic Layer Templates
Logical Parameter - to retrieve all logical parameters referenced in the selected
Thematic Layer Templates.
Result: The THL templates are propagated accordingly.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-3.3: Open THL editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-3.3: Open THL editor

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select Data -> THL... from the menu tool bar, OR
Press Ctrl+K.
Result: The Thematic Template Editor window opens.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-3.4: Create THL Template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-3.4: Create THL Template

THL editor graphical property rules
The following rules apply when editing the graphical properties of the steps and of the
criterion property.
Criterion Case Rules

Only one criterion is defined in the THL The following rules apply:
It is mandatory to choose first the label
and / or graphic (shape or icon) in any
part, either at criterion level or at the step
level
If you selected a graphic property at the
criterion level, then the same graphic
property cannot be selected in the steps
step level, then the same graphic property
cannot be selected in the criterion graphic
property
Shape and icon cannot be simultaneously
selected for any step or inside the criterion
If shape is selected in steps or criterion
properties, then icon cannot be selected in
steps
The same shape and color can be selected
for multiple steps
If shape is selected in the criterion
properties, then icon cannot be selected in
steps
If Voronoi is selected and a layer name is
given in one step, Voronoi can be selected
in another step with a different layer name
If one property in one step is selected, that
property should also be selected in all the
other steps.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Criterion Case Rules

Two criteria are defined in the THL The following rules apply:
It is mandatory to choose the label and / or
graphic (shape or icon) in any part first,
either at criterion level or at the step level
criterion level, then the same graphic
property cannot be selected in the steps of
first criterion, or in the second criterion, or
in the steps of second criterion
If you selected the graphic property at the
step level, then the same graphic property
cannot be selected in the criterion graphic
property
Shape and icon cannot be simultaneously
selected for any step or inside the criterion
Shape in one step and icon in another step
cannot be selected. If shape is selected in
one step, the icon is disabled in all the
other steps
If shape is selected in criterion properties,
then icon cannot be selected in steps
If Voronoi is selected and a layer name is
given in one step, Voronoi can be selected
in another step with different layer name
If one property in one step is selected, that
property should be selected in all other
steps of that particular criterion.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select Data -> THL... from the menu tool bar, OR
Press Ctrl+K.
Result: The Thematic Template Editor window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Thematic Template Editor window, click on .
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: On the right panel, the system shows:
Available indicators sorted by structure type and then by family (you can select
both visible and invisible)
Available design / logical parameters sorted by family / sub-family
Available rules.
The left panel shows the existing THL templates.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name
Name Name of the thematic template. THLTemplate_
<owner> _n
where <owner> is
the owner of the
THL template, and n
is an incremented
number to find a
unique name ( n can
be 1, 2, 3...).
Owner User who is creating the thematic template. The username you
application.
Created Date when the thematic template was created.
Modi- Date when the thematic template was last modified, in the
fied case of a thematic template update.
Access Access rights for Public or Private
Rights
Title Title of the thematic template.
This title appears in the layer manager of the cartography.
Visible A flag that indicates if the THL template is visible in the Checked.
function browser.
If the visible flag is false, then only the administrator and
the owner can see the template in the function browser.
System True, if this THL template is a System view template, so it
cannot be modified or deleted.
False, otherwise.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name
Type The type of the thematic template. Standard.
The supported values are Standard and Specific
Families Each row in the table is a family.
The first column is always the family name and each
subsequent columns are the sub-families. One family can
have maximum of four sub-families.
One thematic template can belong to multiple families.
tion current thematic template.
Template Spatial domain for the THL template. Cell3G
For The supported object types are all the supported object types
in Analysis Desktop.
The THL template is created for the object type. For
example, the THL template created for Cell3G cannot be
executed on the objects other than Cell3G.
Avail- The availability domain for the THL template is for the
ability selected object type, so the THL template is only available
Domain for the object type for which the THL template was created.
The temporal availability is that of the function used in the
THL template. If density is selected, then it is available for
all the temporal periodicity.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name
Special Used in the Graphical Properties window.
render- You can select the following:
ing
Positioning algorithm, to specify which algorithm is
mode
used to calculate the position of the mobile icon or the
rectangular box.
The following options are available:
All
Timing Advance
Conventional GPS
MS-Based A-GPS
MS Assisted A-GPS.
Shapes
Mobile and Standard deviation are available in the
graphical properties, if this mode is selected:
Mobile rendering mode is used so that a mobile
symbol appears in the executed THL. The position
of the mobile symbol is calculated using the
selected positioning algorithm.
Standard deviation rendering mode is used so that a
rectangular box appears in the executed THL. The
position of the box is calculated using the selected
positioning algorithm.
Show line.
This option is enabled only when the Mobile or
Standard deviation rendering mode is selected. This
option specifies whether to draw a line from the network
object to the mobile icon or the rectangular box.
Result: The template parameters are defined.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 You can define a minimum of one criterion and a maximum of two criteria. To add a new
criterion to the thematic template, click on Add Criterion.
When there are two criteria in the THL template, then the Add Criterion button is
disabled.
Whenever a user adds or removes a criterion, all the graphical properties of the criterion
level and the step level properties are reset.
The criterion can be a function selected from the available functions of the:
Object Type
Parent of the Object Type. In this case the parent Object Type is chosen from the
available parents Object Type.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The criteria are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Fill in the parameter criterion properties, as described below.

Name
Name Name of the criterion. Criterion_
<number>
Function ID Function to be applied while executing the thematic
template.
Drag and drop a function (indicator, logical / design
parameter, rule) in this field.
This field is greyed if Density is selected.
Use Planned If a design / logical parameter is added in the Function
ID field, you can choose whether to display its planned
value or not.
Applied To The target object on which the thematic should be SELF
executed.
The supported values are:
SELF
PARENT
CHILD
SOURCE
TARGET.
SOURCE and TARGET are not available when the
Template For is a relation type.
If Use Planned is selected, Applied To is grayed.
This field is greyed if Density is selected.
Target policy The computation policy to be applied during the AVG
execution of the template.
The supported target policies are:
MIN
MAX
AVG
Evaluate Indicates whether to use the distance factor or to use the False
Density functions for executing the template.
If the density is on, then the user is not able to specify
any function in the function ID field (it is greyed).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The parameter criterion properties are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Click on to open the Criterion Graphical Properties window.

The fields in the dialog box are arranged in the form of a tree structure. The child nodes
are enabled only when the parent field is checked. See the table below.
Panel Parameter Description Default Value

Name Name
Label Label on the executed thematic. False
Font properties are enabled only if the Label checkbox is
selected.
Font Color The color of the font when displaying labels. Black
This is a RGB value.
Font Size The size of the font to be displayed in the 10
viewport when a label appears. The values are
from 8 to 15.
Font Style The style of the font to be used when drawing Plain
the label.
Font The transparency of the font. The values are 0.5
Transpar- from 0 to 1
ency The transparency is used as a help for
visualization (when shapes are superposed).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name Name
Graphics Graphics properties on the executed thematic. False
The graphic properties are enabled only when the Graphic
checkbox is selected.
Shape The shape to be displayed for the criterion. Square
The supported shapes are:
Square
Circle
Rectangle
Triangle
Oval
Voronoi
Mobile
Standard deviation.
Layer When Voronoi is selected in the Shape field, NA
Name you have to mention from which layer file the
Voronoi shape is picked.
To select a layer name, click on Browse and
choose a layer from the opened layer browser.
Shape The background color of the shape. Black
Background
Color
Shape The pattern used to display the shape. UP_
Pattern DIAGONAL
Shape Line The color of the line to draw the shape. Black
Color
Shape Line The style of the line to be applied while DASH
Style drawing the shape in the viewport.
Shape Line This thickness of the line when drawing the 1 pt.
Thickness shape.
Shape The transparency of the shape. 0.5
Transpar-
ency
Shape Scale The scaling of the shape when displaying in 1
the viewport.
The values are from 0.1 to 10.
Icon The icon to be displayed instead of the shape. None
To select an icon, click on Browse and choose
the required one.
When Icon is selected, none of the graphical
properties are applied.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-76 Transpar- The transparency
Alcatel-Lucent of the icon.
Proprietary 0.5 NPO
ency Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name Name
Scale The scaling 1
of the icon
when
displaying
in the
viewport.
The values
are from 0.1
to 10.
If Special rendering mode is selected, then in the graphical properties two more shapes
are displayed:
Mobile
Standard deviation.
You must select the positioning algorithm and check / uncheck the Show Link checkbox.
Whenever special rendering mode is checked or unchecked, all the criterion of the
graphical properties and step level properties are reset.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The preview of graphical properties appears in the Rendering Preview area.

It contains two images representing different graphical properties selected in the criteria
and previous steps:
If the template contains only one criterion, the first image on the preview represents
the consolidated graphical property of the first criterion and the first step of the first
criterion. The second image represents the consolidated graphical property of the first
criterion and the last step of the first criterion.
If the template contains two criteria, the first image on the preview represents the
consolidated graphical property of the first criterion, first step of the first criterion,
second criterion and the first step of the second criterion. The second image represents
the consolidated graphical property of the first criterion, the last step of the first
criterion, second criterion and the last step of the second criterion.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The criterion graphical properties are defined.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 For the Boundary parameters:

If you select Static bound determination, you must also enter the values for minimum
and maximum interval distribution
If you select Dynamic bound determination, then minimum and maximum values are
disabled. In this case, the values are dynamically calculated at execution time.
Result: The Boundary parameters are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Use the Interval Distribution to create automatic step values and colors:
Select one of the possible values (Linear, Logarithmic, Exponential)
Select the Number of Intervals if you want to compute steps automatically.
If the selected function ID is a parameter and if the parameter has enumerations, then the
steps are automatically adjusted to have same number as the number of enumerations in
the parameter. In this case, you are not allowed to enter Interval Distribution, or the
number of steps, or the boundary parameters.
Example:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If you enter the number of steps as four and the type of distribution as Linear, and then
click on Auto Background, a total of four steps are added in the distribution steps. If you
enter minimum and maximum values, those values are distributed for each step based on
the selected type of distribution (linear in this case). Auto Background is disabled if you
selected the background in criterion graphical properties.
Result: The Interval Distribution parameters are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Click on .
Result: When all verified data is correct, a confirmation message asks whether the
THL template is to be saved or not.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Click on OK.
Result: The THL template is created in the MUSE database and the Thematic Layer
Template is added in the function trees.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-3.5: Create THL template by copy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-3.5: Create THL template by copy

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Thematic Template Editor window, select the THL to copy, then click on .
Result: The new THL template is created with a default name:
The THL Template Properties window is filled with the with the current properties of
the template, except for the name and owner.
The user becomes the owner of the THL template.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The new THL template is created and the function tree is refreshed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-3.6: Edit THL template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-3.6: Edit THL template

A THL template cannot be edited if the modification impacts its current use.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

In the Thematic Template Editor window, select the THL to update, then click on
, OR
In the function tree, select the THL template to update, right click and select THL....
Result: If the operator is the owner or the administrator of the THL, the Thematic
Template Editor window opens and the current attribute values of the selected THL
are displayed.
If the owner of the THL is not the one viewing it, the button is grayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Edit the required editable fields.

Result: The modifications are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on OK in the confirmation window, then click on Close to close the Thematic
Template Editor window.
Result: The THL template is edited.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-3.7: Delete THL template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-3.7: Delete THL template

The delete option is only available if the user is the owner or the administrator of the THL
template.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

In the Thematic Template Editor window, select the THL to delete, then click on
, OR
In the function tree, select the THL template to delete, right click and select Delete.
Are you sure you want to delete the THL template <THL_name> ?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

If only one THL is selected to be deleted, click on Yes, OR
If multiple THLs are selected to be deleted, click on Yes to All.
Result: The THL template is deleted.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-3.8: Export THL template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-3.8: Export THL template

This export allows to share between different NPOs some customer THL templates.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select one or more THL templates from the THL template tree of the THL Template
editor.
Result: The THL template(s) is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the THL Template Editor window, click on .

Note: If only system THL templates are selected in the THL template tree of THL
Result: If the current selection of THL templates contains some system THL
templates, a warning dialog is displayed listing all the selected system THL templates
and explains that they will not be exported.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Browse for the location to save the THL(s) and give the appropriate File Name.
Click on Save.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on OK.
Result: The selected templates are exported in an xml THL dictionary containing only
the selection. The file is exported in the location defined in the previous step.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
NPO Administration User Guide document, to Import THL template dictionary using
GUI procedure.
If some of the exported THL templates are referencing customer objects, a warning dialog
is displayed indicating that the exported THL templates may not be imported on another
system if the embedded customer objects are not also exported and imported on the other
system before the import of these THL templates.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-3.8: Export THL template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-4: Execute THL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-4: Execute THL

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 24-4.1: Execute THL template (p. 24-87).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 24-4.2: Edit executed THL template by dialog box (p. 24-89).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 24-4.3: Execute specific THL template (p. 24-91).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-4.1: Execute THL template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-4.1: Execute THL template

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the appropriate network object(s) from the topology tree and one THL template
from the function tree, then drag and drop them into the cartography viewport.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: Using the availability domain of each criterion, the possible temporal values
are proposed for the criteria. The date for each criterion can be different.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Execute to execute the THL template.

Result: The executed thematic layer is computed and all the network objects that were
dropped along with the THL template are added to the viewport.
The executed thematic layer appears as a new thematic layer in the cartographic
viewer, containing:
The THL template reference ID
The execution context if available
The executed layer containing the rendering information
The legend explaining each rendering criterion.
Extensions:
If the object type node for the network object does not exist in the layer manager,
the object type node is created and added as a sub-layer in the network object
layer in the layer manager. The parameters that have enumerations are fetched
from the server and added as a node in the Table Tree.
If any of the network objects does not satisfy the filtering criterion, then that
object is not shown in the viewport, and no thematic object appears in the
viewport for that network object.
The thematic object is rendered on top of all the network objects that satisfy the
step definition. If the user selected a Mobile deviation or Standard deviation, then
those objects are rendered on top of network objects.
The THL template is added as a sub-node under THL layer in the layer manager.
This new sub-node is added on top of all executed layer nodes. The structure of
the layer in the layer manager is described in the Structure section of the executed
THL layer in the layer manager.
When density is selected in the THL template and if you select only one network
object, the execution is not allowed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-4.1: Execute THL template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 24-20 Example of executed THL template
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-4.2: Edit executed THL template by dialog
box
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-4.2: Edit executed THL template by dialog box

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right click on a THL layer in the layer manager and select Executed THL....
Result: The Executed THL Properties window opens.
Figure 24-21 Example executed THL properties window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on Edit THL Template.

Result: The Thematic Template Editor window opens, displaying the selected THL
data.
Edit the appropriate properties of the THL template. Some of the fields are not
available for editing.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-4.2: Edit executed THL template by dialog
box
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on to save changes, then on to close the THL editor.

Result: The changes are saved and the THL editor closes.
Note: This operation will not impact the THL template modification. To edit the
THL template, refer to Procedure 24-3.6: Edit THL template (p. 24-82).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 You can perform one of the following options.
Option Description
Create a new THL layer with the new changes Click on Create THL.
A new THL layer is created in the layer
manager and the thematic objects are rendered
in the viewport.
Apply the changes to the current executed Click on Execute.
layer All thematic objects of the previous template
are updated with the new properties of the
template.
Result: The THL template is re-executed with the new properties.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-4.3: Execute specific THL template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-4.3: Execute specific THL template

The specific THL templates cannot be modified and are supplied by the vendors. These
templates can only be executed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the appropriate network objects and one specific THL template, then and drag and
drop them into the cartography viewer.
Result: The Specific Execution Context window appears.
This is built dynamically, based on the specific THL template.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Enter the values for the Specific Execution Context.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Execute to execute the specific THL template.

Result: The selected objects along with the specific template are executed. The
execution and rendering are same as that of the normal execution.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-5: Display thematics for adjacencies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-5: Display thematics for adjacencies

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 24-3.4: Create THL Template (p. 24-69).

Take into account the following:
In the Template For field, select ADJ
From the right panel, select the appropriate logical parameter from the Logical tab,
then drag and drop it into the Function ID field.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the appropriate adjacencies and the newly created THL, then drag and drop them in
the cartography viewport, to execute the THL.
Refer to Procedure 24-4.1: Execute THL template (p. 24-87).
Result: The thematics are displayed for the dropped adjacencies.
The executed THL adjacencies are shown under the THL layer and all the NO
Adjacencies dropped along with THL template are displayed under the Relations layer
of the NO layer grouped by the type of the adjacency.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-6: Manage frequency re-use
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-6: Manage frequency re-use

Presentation
This feature performs a graphical analysis regarding the re-use of one of the frequencies
of the selected cell by comparing it to the other cells inside a geographical area.
The geographical area is a circle centred on the selected cell. The radius of this circle is
defined by the minimum and maximum values of the U_TIMEADVANCE parameter of
the cell, multiplied by a scaling factor (from 0.5 to 2.0). The minimum and maximum
values of the scale are stored in the cartography configuration file.
The radius of the area, on which the frequency reuse check is performed, can be set inside
these bounds in the execution context.
The frequency re-use analysis is performed on all frequencies of the selected cell except
in the case where RH or NH / RH is used (only the BCCH frequency is checked).
For every non RH hopping frequency of the studied cell, the same check is performed on
all Ncell cells that satisfy the geographical criterion (cells inside the circle defined above):
If Ncell is using RH or NH / RH, only the BCCH of Ncell is checked
If Ncell is using NH or BBH, all frequencies of Ncell are checked.
According to the legend in the following table, Ncell appears with the highest color code
(red > orange > yellow > green).
Color Definition
Red Ncell BCCH is a co-channel frequency with at least one frequency of
studied cell.
Orange Ncell TCH is a co-channel frequency with at least one frequency of studied
cell.
Yellow Ncell BCCH is an adjacent channel frequency with at least one frequency of
studied cell.
Green Ncell TCH is an adjacent channel frequency with at least one frequency of
studied cell.
Co-channel frequencies are those with identical ARFCN.

Adjacent channel frequencies are those for which ABS (ARFCN1-ARFCN2) = 1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select a network object in the viewport, then right click and select Highlight ->
Frequency Reusing Objects.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-6: Manage frequency re-use
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Input window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Type the appropriate radius of the circle that forms the geographic area under to have the
frequency re-use.
Figure 24-22 Example input for radius window
Result: The re-use radius is defined.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on OK.
Result: The request is sent to the server to get the frequency re-used objects. The
viewport is then updated and the network object is highlighted in the appropriate color
code.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-7: Show THL legend
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-7: Show THL legend

The legend of the executed thematic layer contains information about the split and the
rendering properties. It is a graphical representation of the criteria definition in the THL
template.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select a THL.
Result: The THL is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The legend appears.
Figure 24-23 Example THL template with one criterion legend
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-7: Show THL legend
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 24-24 Example THL template with two criteria legend
The thematic symbol represents a label giving information about the thematic symbol.
The criterion 1 step value column gives information about the graphical properties
used in the criterion 1 step value.
The criterion 2 step value column gives information about the graphical properties
used in the criterion 2 step value.
For more information, refer to Procedure 24-1.3: Display layer legend (p. 24-24).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-8: Export THL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-8: Export THL

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Right click and, from the popup menu, select Export..., OR
From the menu bar, select Cartography -> Export....
Result: The Export window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the appropriate export format, then click on OK.

The following table presents the available export formats for different types of
cartography files.

Raster layer This layer can only be exported in the .PNG format. This layer can be
exported as full layer and viewport.
The export can be done as a viewport only in the case when all the layers
in layer manager are selected.
Vector layer This layer can be exported in:
.mid and .mif formats, as a full layer only
.PNG format, as a viewport only.
DT layer This layer can be exported in the .mid and .mif formats.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Network object This layer can be exported as .PNG and .KMZ formats using Viewport
layer and All Network Objects and Thematic export.
.PNG format, all the layers that are seen in the current viewport are
also exported
.KMZ format, all the network objects, their corresponding THL
Thematic layer This layer can be exported as .PNG and .KMZ formats using Viewport
and All Network Objects and Thematic export.
also exported
Export possibilities:
Layer type Full Layer Export Viewport Export All Network Objects
and Thematic
Export
PNG KMZ mid / PNG KMZ mid / PNG KMZ mid /
mif (1.) mif mif
Raster Yes No No Yes No No No No No
Vector No No Yes Yes No No No No No
Network No No No Yes Yes No No Yes No
Objects
Executed THL No No No Yes Yes No No Yes No
Notes:
1. Since a PNG export is an image grab of the cartography viewport, when one layer is
captured as PNG, all other layers that are visible in the viewport are also captured, therefore,
a PNG viewport export on one layer cannot be done. It is always on multiple layers.
Result: The Save window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Save window, choose the location where to save the exported file, then click on
Save.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Depending on your preference, select as appropriate Yes or No.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The export is saved accordingly.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-9: Manage adjacencies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-9: Manage adjacencies

Presentation
The Cartography Module offers the adjacencies analysis functionality. Graphic tools
enable you to view existing and forecasted adjacency additions and deletions for a cell,
and decide whether you want to add the forecast to a tuning session. Once this forecast is
added to a tuning session, it can be exported to the OMC-R.
The following actions are applicable within the adjacencies analysis tool:
Propose a choice of geographical discrimination:
Circle
CCA buffer
U-Time-Advance for 2G
Analysis: primitive returning adjacencies list
Find all target cells corresponding to the discrimination criteria
Show some statistics about candidate selection
Display a specific caption
Automatically suggest adjacencies to be added or removed
Allow the user to change the default proposal (by removing or adding any other
adjacencies).
Adjacency representation
Standalone links
This link is a Bezier Curve with an arrow at its center to give the direction.
When there is the same link in the opposite direction (Adj1 source = Adj2 target and Adj2
source = Adj1 target), only one link appears and two arrows are displayed in the opposite
direction.
When displaying object properties for bi-directional links, the objects properties are
shown for both adjacencies objects.
The color of the link is set in the cartography configuration file.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 24-25 Single adjacency representation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 24-26 Bi-directional adjacencies representation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 24-27 Non co-localized cells in full-expanded / expanded rendering mode
Figure 24-28 Co-localized cells in full-expanded rendering mode
Packed links for collapsed source / target objects

Due to the amount of links to display (up to 32 outgoing adjacencies per W-CDMA cell
for example), when more than one link have the same graphic source and same graphic
target, the links are drawn in a packed mode showing a double link, the direction and the
number of packed links.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The list of links in the packed link can be displayed in a popup window.
The graphic source / target is the rendering mode of an object:
Full Expanded colocalized objects
Expanded colocalized objects
Collapsed objects
Object icon.
Figure 24-29 Packed links for colocalized cells in collapsed rendering mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 24-30 Packed links for colocalized cells in expanded rendering mode
The packed links are used to render also the adjacencies between sectors or between sites.
In this case, packed links can be bi-directional.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 24-31 Packed links between sectors and sites
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 24-9.1: Select adjacencies (p. 24-108).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 24-9.2: Display adjacencies (p. 24-109).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 24-9.3: Display adjacency properties (p. 24-110).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Procedure 24-9.4: Open packed link content (p. 24-113).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Procedure 24-9.5: Run Adjacency Analysis Wizard to Create / Delete Adjacencies

(p. 24-114).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Procedure 24-9.8: Show legend (p. 24-120).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-9.1: Select adjacencies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-9.1: Select adjacencies

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select an adjacency by clicking on it, as follows.
To Do
Select a single direction adjacency Click on the line or on the arrow to select it.
Select a bi-directional adjacency Click on the arrow of the adjacency.
One direction adjacency (source or target) is
selected.
If you select the right line from a cell, the
outgoing adjacency is selected.
If you select the left line from a cell, the
incoming adjacency is selected.
Select packed links Select all the links in one direction.
Select one or more links inside the packed Perform the following tasks:
links objects 1. Procedure 24-9.4: Open packed link
content (p. 24-113) window.
2. Select one or more links inside the list.
If you select the right line from a site, the
outgoing adjacencies are selected.
If you select the left line from a site, the
incoming adjacencies are selected.
Select multiple adjacencies Select in the viewport.
Result: The adjacency is selected.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 You can configure the selection color, either from the user preferences menu or in the
cartography configuration file.
Result: The selection color is configured.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-9.2: Display adjacencies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-9.2: Display adjacencies

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the cell whose adjacencies to display.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

From the menu tool bar, select Cartography -> Display Adjacencies, OR
Right click and select Show Adjacencies -> Incoming / Outgoing / Both.
Note: You can also display adjacencies using the procedure described in Add
network objects in viewport (p. 24-58).
Result: The incoming, outgoing, and / or both adjacencies of the selected cell are
rendered in Bezier curves.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-9.3: Display adjacency properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-9.3: Display adjacency properties

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select an adjacency in the cartography viewport.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right click and select Properties... from the popup menu; refer also to .
Result: The Object Properties window opens with the properties of the selected
adjacency.
If you change the selection, the Object Properties window is updated with the new
selection properties.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 24-32 Example adjacency properties
The following tables describes the Adjacencies properties window parameters.

Name
Relation Type The type of the displayed relation: ADJ Yes Yes
RELATION ID The Relation ID of the displayed Yes Yes
relation.
EXTERNAL ID The External ID of the displayed Yes Yes
relation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name
SOURCE TYPE The type of the displayed source Yes Yes
relation.
SOURCE The External ID of the displayed Yes Yes
EXTERNAL ID source relation.
TARGET TYPE The type of the displayed target Yes Yes
relation.
TARGET The External ID of the displayed target Yes Yes
EXTERNAL ID relation.
FRIENDLY Friendly name of the relation. Yes Yes
NAME
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-9.4: Open packed link content
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-9.4: Open packed link content

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the packed adjacency link to detail.

Result: The link is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right click and select Open Packed Content.

Result: The Packed Link Contents window opens, displaying the friendly name of
the adjacency and the adjacency type.
If the packed link contains more than one type of adjacency (combination of planned
and operational), then that adjacency appears in a pre-defined color, which is
configurable.
Each link in this window can be selected or highlighted, by checking the
corresponding checkbox ( Highlight or Select). If the packed link is partially selected
or highlighted, it is shown in a pre-defined color that is configurable.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-9.5: Run Adjacency Analysis Wizard to Create
/ Delete Adjacencies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-9.5: Run Adjacency Analysis Wizard to Create /

Delete Adjacencies
The objective of this task is to make a proposal for the creation / deletion of adjacencies
based on the topological distance between the cells. Based on this proposal, a tuning
session can then be created and exported to the OMC-R.
The Adjacency Analysis Wizard works for GSM, W-CDMA, LTE and WIMAX
technology.
Note: The MUSE_<TECHNO>_ADJWIZARD_CARTOGRAPHY_LICENSE
must be installed for the Cartography Adjacency Wizard to be available.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Open the Adjacency Analysis Wizard window.

Select the cell with the packed adjacencies to display, then:
From the menu tool bar, select Cartography -> Adjacency Wizard..., OR
Right click and select Adjacency Wizard..., OR
Click on the icon from the Cartography tool bar.
Result: The Adjacency Analysis Wizard opens.
All the incoming and outgoing adjacencies for the selected cell are displayed in the
cartography viewport with the default adjacency color. The planned adjacencies are
displayed in the proposed for addition color. All the other adjacencies are removed
from the viewport.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Update the appropriate parameters, as explained in the table below.
U_TIMEADVANCE: Operational value of the U_TIMEADVANCE of the selected cell
Operational (in unity, and in parentheses the equivalent values in meters).
The operational value is multiplied by the radius, and is considered
as the radius for the Adjacency wizard calculations.
U_TIMEADVANCE is not used for W-CDMA, LTE and WIMAX.
U_TIMEADVANCE: Planned value of U_TIMEADVANCE of the selected cell (in unity,
Planned and in parentheses the equivalent values in meters).
Circle: Center The circle center is either the site location or the Voronoi
barycentre. If there is no Voronoi map, the choice is the site
location (by default the site is proposed).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Circle: Radius The default value (of radius) associated with the cell class of the
selected cell.
The Radius of the circle can be defined as:
U_TIMEADVANCE - writes the distance in meters or in feet
associated with the operational U_TIMEADVANCE value
The operational value is multiplied by the radius, and is
considered as the radius for the Adjacency wizard calculations.
Cell Class Radius - writes the distance associated with the
cell class.
An edit area allows to enter the value in meters or feet for the circle
radius. By default, this edit box contains the value in meters
associated with the operational U_TIMEADVANCE value.
This value is then considered as the radius for Adjacency wizard
calculations.
Deletion Filter Parameter or Indicator Name indicate if this function criterion is
activated or not.
Operator Field list the possible operators allowed for the function
criterion (parameter / indicator).
Operator Value indicate the threshold value of the function.
With HO filter When the With HO filter checkbox is activated, the type of traffic
density becomes editable.
If the default traffic density Low Usage is checked, you can choose
among one of the two possibilities proposed on the left of this
checkbox. The OFF position resets the filter.
HO traffic is not used for W-CDMA, LTE and WIMAX.
Adjacency Analysis This area summarizes the information concerning the last analysis
applied, with the number of adjacencies removed, added, and the
total of forecast ones.
Result: All planned only adjacencies are candidates for addition.

All operational cells that are below the mentioned radius are candidates for addition.
All other cells that are not candidates for addition are proposed as candidates for
deletion.
All adjacencies that are candidates for addition are changed to green color and all
adjacencies that are candidates for deletion are changed to red color.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Update to save the new values.

Result: The results are seen in the cartography viewport.
If you change the radius in the text box, press the Update button again to see the new
result.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If there were no adjacencies between two network objects, and you clicked on
Update, and the network object lies inside the circle, adjacencies proposed for
addition are drawn on both directions between these cells. If there already is only
one adjacency between the cells, then only one adjacency, which is proposed for
addition, is drawn in the reverse direction.
The Operational cells are represented by a continuous line, and the
non-operational cells by a dotted line.
All planned adjacencies are represented by thick lines, and the not-planned
adjacencies are represented by thin lines.
A circle is drawn with the specified radius, centered as the user has specified (on
Site location or on the Voronoi Barycenter).
The incoming and outgoing adjacencies that are already displayed in the viewport
are changed to green and red colored lines. Green lines are all candidates for
addition and red lines are all candidates for deletion.
You can select either green or red line and choose to remove the proposal (either
addition or deletion) from the list.
The list below explains the details of the contextual menu that appears on the
objects.
To Do
Create a new proposed adjacency Select the cell for which to create the new
adjacency, then right click and select
Adjacency Management -> Add to
Addition List -> Incoming / Outgoing.
Up to 25 adjacencies can be defined per
sector.
Delete a proposed adjacency Select the cell whose adjacency to delete,
then right click and select Adjacency
Management -> Add to Deletion List ->
Incoming / Outgoing.
Delete an existing adjacency Select it, then right click and select
Adjacency Management -> Add to
Deletion List.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Remove a proposed adjacency creation / Perform one of the following
deletion options:Select the cell whose adjacencies
you proposed for creation /
deletion, then right click and
select Adjacency Management
-> Remove from the Proposal
-> Incoming / Outgoing, OR
Select the adjacency you proposed
for creation / deletion, then right
click and select Adjacency
Management -> Remove from the
Proposal.
If the graphic object is a packed link or the collapsed objects, open first the dialog
to select the individual objects inside the group and then do the operation on the
selected object.
In the Packed link dialog, for the adjacencies that are proposed for addition and
deletion, the Highlight and Select columns have the same background color as the
adjacency color.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 To add the new values and proposals of creation / deletion of adjacencies to a tuning
session, select it from the available dropdown list in Choose Tuning Session, then click
on Send to tuning.
Result: The Relation Tuning window opens and you can apply the tuning session.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-9.6: Filter adjacencies using function criteria
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-9.6: Filter adjacencies using function criteria

A function criterion is a coded function based on queries on the NPO server that allows
filtering of potential candidates for incoming / outgoing adjacent cells. The list of possible
indicators / parameters is stored in the configuration file per technology.
Function criteria can also be implemented on existing adjacencies to propose them for
removal if they do not comply with the filter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select one or more scalar function criteria in the wizard.

Result: The scalar function criteria are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 For each function, set the operation for the threshold.

Use the following operations:
>
<
=
<>
<=
>=
Result: The threshold is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 For each function, set the value for the threshold.

If the function is a String, only =, <> are possible
If the function is an Enumeration, all possible values are possible
If the function is an integer, float values and string are not possible.
Result: The filter is defined.
If one or more function criteria is NOT fulfilled by a cell inside the geographic
criterion that has an adjacency with the current selection, the adjacency between this
cell and the selection is proposed for deletion.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-9.7: Set adjacency wizard radius circle
interactively
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-9.7: Set adjacency wizard radius circle

interactively
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select a cell in the cartography viewport.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the circle in the viewport.

Result: The circle is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Drag the circle perimeter from any point in the circle.

Result: The circle radius value is changed in real time.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on Update to launch the new proposals computing using the new radius and current
function criteria configuration.
Result: The deletion and addition proposal is updated with the new radius.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-9.8: Show legend
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 24-9.8: Show legend

For more information, refer to:
Procedure 24-1.12: Export displayed layers / viewport (p. 24-37)
Procedure 24-1.3: Display layer legend (p. 24-24).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select an adjacency.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The State of Adjacency Symbol column gives information about the
Adjacency symbol.
Figure 24-33 Relations layer legend dialog
The Operational column identifies whether the adjacency is Operational.

The Planned column identifies whether the adjacency is Planned.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
25 Alerters
25
Overview
Purpose
This section describes how to display and manage alerters in NPO.
Contents
Presentation 25-1
Procedure 25-1: Use alerter editor 25-12
Display and use alerter list 25-35
Display and use alerts list 25-38
Presentation
Note: The Alerters feature is not available for B10 GSM.
The MUSE_ALERTER_LICENSE must be installed for the Alerter related featured
to be available.
The 1/4 Hour periodicity is not available for GSM.
Definition
Alerters are defined to detect QoS problems and generate QoS alarms in the OMC, on the
basis of reported Performance Measurement data, and then automatically loaded to the
NPO. They are calculated from indicators. If an indicator used in the alerter is modified,
this modification is taken into account.
Alerters have the following associated attributes:
Name
Alarm ID
Predicates
Validity and stability conditions.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
At the end of each PM reporting period, the loader processes algorithms on these alerters,
using thresholds and validity conditions, to detect the appearance or suppression of an
alarm.
NPO alerters are not evaluated in real time, as are the OMC alerters. The minimum
supported evaluation period is one hour to evaluate hourly indicator values.
Alerters can be:
System defined, when they are delivered with the system and only some parameters
may be customized by the operator
Operator defined, and can be created from any Performance Indicator and are fully
managed by the operator.
Types, severities and states

The following alerter types are available.
Standard alerters
Standard alerters generate alerts if the value of the indicators crosses the pre-defined
thresholds.
The used threshold value is defined by the selected threshold color or by providing a user
entered value.
The stability parameter permits to decide when an alert is to be generated: for example if
stability is 3, an alert is generated only if the threshold is crossed during the 3 last periods
(1/4 hour / hour / day / week / month). If sampling is used, the alert is not generated if the
sampling conditions are not fulfilled (enabled only when the indicator has an associated
sampling indicator).
Variation alerters
Variation alerters generate alerts if the variation of the indicators value compared to a
pre-defined base line exceeds the pre-defined thresholds.
The variation alerter is defined by:
The number of observation periods P
The observation period is the time between the two points of measure. To have the
variation with the same hour last week, the observation period is one week.
The number of smoothing periods Q
Q is always less than P. It represents the number of periods required to compute the
first value (F) and the last value (L) of the curve.
The delta in percentages that is used to determine if the alert must be generated
The algorithm that determines how the values of the smoothing period are treated to
have one value (Average, Max, Min, Sum)
The evolution (degradation or improvement) that determines if the alerter evaluation
marks a degradation or an improvement of the variation.
One period is equal to the alerter evaluation periodicity.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For example, if the evaluation periodicity is one hour and P=4, the observation period is
equal to four hours. If the evaluation periodicity is 1/4 hour and P=3, the observation
period is equal to 3 quarters of hour (45 minutes).
Example of variation computation with P=9 and Q=3:
For an hourly case (periodicity hour), to check if an alert is raised at 13h, the NPO
considers the indicator values at 1h (I=12), 2h (I=14) and 3h (I=16) for computing F, and
the indicator values at 10h, 11h and 12h for computing L.
Points value for F: 12, 14 and 16. For each algorithm, F is:
Average: F = (12+14+16) / Q = 14
Min: F = 12
Max: F = 16
Sum: F = 42.
Points value for L: 8, 7 and 9. For each algorithm, L is:
Average: L = (8+7+9) / Q = 8
Min: L = 7
Max: L = 9
Sum: L =24.
The variation coefficient is S =sign* (L-F) / F, where sign is an integer such that:
sign upperIsFault
true false
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
evolution degradation (default) +1 1
improvement 1 +1
Average: (8-14) / 14 = -0.42 => S= -42%

Min: (7-12) / 12 = - 0.41 => S= -41%
Max: (9-16) / 16 = - 0.43 => S= -43%
Sum: (24-42) / 42 = - 0.42 => S= -42%
S appears in percentages (S multiplied by 100). It can be then compared to the given delta
percentage. If the value of S is greater than the computed delta, then an alert is generated.
The alerters (when defined with a GP=1H) are evaluated each hour plus 20 minutes
(10:20, 11:20, and so on).
The user can smooth only on past data and to define easily the variation alerter according
to the comparison of the last value of the indicator with the indicator value at the same
type of periodicity but for another period, for instance, the hourly value at same hour but
seven days ago.
The observation period provided by the user for variation alerter templates is added to the
smoothing period in order to obtain the real observation period. This permits the user to
smooth old values in the same way as the last value.
For example, when the periodicity is Hour and the dropdown selection is Day, if the
chosen observation period is seven days, this means that:
The last value of the first smoothing period will be the same hour as the last value of
the last smoothing period but seven days before (for example, if the last period is 9-10
h, it will be compared with 9-10 h, seven days before).
The real observation period is equivalent to: 7 x 24 h + smoothing period in order to
be able to compare the last hour with the same hour seven days ago. Therefore, the
NPO compares the indicator values of the last smoothing period (L) with the indicator
values of the first smoothing period (F) such that each time of F corresponds to the
same time of L but n observation period units ago (here seven days ago). The
following figure presents the real observation period versus the observation period
provided by the user.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The same principle applies with day periodicity. If the observation period provided by
the user is equal to one week, then the real observation period is equal to 1 week +
smoothing period, in order to be able to compare the indicator value at the same day
but of the previous week.
Complex alerters
Complex alerters generate alerts in the case where a formula predicate is evaluated to
true.
This predicate is constructed with a formula using multiple indicators. There is no limit to
the number of indicators involved in the formulas.
The formula can use simple arithmetical and logical operators. There is no limit to the
number of terms involved in the formulas.
For example, an alert is generated if ((I1 + I2 +I3)==0) && ((I1 + I2 + I4 + I5) > 5).
The stability parameter is used as for standard alerters.
Multiple severities
Multiple severities can be defined for an alerter with different criteria.
The supported severities are:
Critical
Major
Minor.
It is not mandatory to define all of the severities; only one among these three is
mandatory.
Cleared defines the case when the alert is removed.
Alerter states
Three alerter states are used to manage the QoS alerter:
Active
The alerter is enabled and may raise or clear alarms.
Inactive
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The alerter is disabled. There is no alarm on this alerter. The alerter is created in the
deactivated state. It can only be deleted in this state.
Failed
If a problem occurs during the alerter evaluation, the alerter is deactivated and the
state becomes Failed.
Alerter validity period examples

Refer to the following examples of alerter validity periods.
Scenario 1
Alerter Type: Standard
Periodicity: Day
Validity period: Monday, Wednesday, Saturday
Repetition: 1
Alerter activation: Monday (30-July-2007)
Alerter Consolidated day data Consolidated day data

evaluation day considered for Alert considered for Alert
generation (stability = generation (stability =
1) 2)
1st Evaluation Tuesday Monday (30-July-2007) Monday
(31-July-2007) Sunday
2nd Evaluation Thursday Wednesday Wednesday
(02-Aug-2007) (01-Aug-2007) Tuesday
3rd Evaluation Sunday Saturday (04-Aug-2007) Saturday
(05-Aug-2007) Friday
4th Evaluation Tuesday Monday (06-Aug-2007) Monday
(07-Aug-2007) Sunday
Scenario 2
Periodicity: Day
Validity period: Tuesday, Friday
Repetition: 2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alerter Consolidated day data Consolidated day data

evaluation day considered for Alert considered for Alert
generation (stability = generation (stability =
1) 2)
1st Evaluation Wednesday Tuesday (31-July-2007) Tuesday
(01-Aug-2007) Monday
2nd Evaluation Saturday Friday (03-Aug-2007) Friday
(04-Aug-2007) Thursday
3rd Evaluation Wednesday Tuesday (07-Aug-2007) Tuesday
(08-Aug-2007 Monday
Scenario 3
Periodicity: Hour
Validity period: 10.00 to 12.00
Repetition: 1
Alerter activation: 09.45 (30-July-2007)
Alerter Consolidated hour Consolidated hour

evaluation data considered for data considered for
hour Alert generation Alert generation
(stability = 1) (stability = 2)
1st Evaluation 11.00 10.00 10.59 10.00 - 10.59
(30-July-2007) (30-July-2007) 09.00 - 09.59
2nd Evaluation 12.00 11.00 11.59 11.00 - 11.59
(30-July-2007) (30-July-2007) 10.00 - 10.59
3rd Evaluation 13.00 12.00 12.59 12.00 - 12.59
(30-July-2007) (30-July-2007) 11.00 - 11.59
4th Evaluation 11.00 10.00 10.59 10.00 - 10.59
(31-July-2007) (31-July-2007) 09.00 - 09.59
Scenario 4
Periodicity: Hour
Validity period: 09.00 to 12.00
Repetition: 2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alerter activation: 09.45 (30-July-2007)
Alerter Consolidated hour Consolidated hour

hour Alert generation Alert generation
1st Evaluation 10.00 09.00 09.59 09.00 - 09.59
(30-July-2007) (30-July-2007) 08.00 - 08.59
2nd Evaluation 12.00 11.00 11.59 11.00 - 11.59
(30-July-2007) (30-July-2007) 10.00 - 10.59
3rd Evaluation 10.00 09.00 09.59 09.00 - 09.59
(31-July-2007) (31-July-2007) 08.00 - 08.59
Scenario 5
Periodicity: Week
Repetition: 1
Alerter Consolidated week Consolidated week

week Alert generation Alert generation
1st Evaluation Monday Monday - Sunday (30-July-2007 -
(06-Aug-2007) (30-Jul-2007 05-Aug-2007)
05-Aug-2007) (23-July-2007 - 29- July
-2007)
2nd Evaluation Monday Monday - Sunday (06-Aug-2007 -
(13-Aug-2007) (06-Aug-2007 12-Aug-2007)
12-Aug-2007) (30-July-2007 -
05-Aug-2007)
Scenario 6
Periodicity: Week
Repetition: 2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alerter Consolidated week Consolidated week

week Alert generation Alert generation
1st Evaluation Monday Monday - Sunday (30-July-2007 -
(06-Aug-2007) (30-Jul-2007 05-Aug-2007)
05-Aug-2007) (23-July-2007 - 29- July
-2007)
2nd Evaluation Monday Monday - Sunday (13-Aug-2007 -
(20-Aug-2007) (13-Aug-2007 19-Aug-2007)
19-Aug-2007) (06-Aug-2007 -
12-Aug-2007)
Scenario 7
Periodicity: Month
Repetition: 1
Alerter Consolidated month Consolidated month

month Alert generation Alert generation
1st Evaluation 01-Aug-2007 (01-July-2007 (01-July-2007 -
31-July-2007) 31-July-2007)
(01-June-2007 - 30-
June-2007)
2nd Evaluation 01-Sep-2007 (01-Aug-2007 (01-Aug-2007 -
31-Aug-2007) 31-Aug-2007)
(01-July-2007 -
31-July-2007)
Scenario 8
Periodicity: Month
Repetition: 2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alerter Consolidated month Consolidated month

Evaluation data considered for data considered for
month Alert generation Alert generation
1st Evaluation 01-Aug-2007 (01-July-2007 (01-July-2007 -
31-July-2007) 31-July-2007)
(01-June-2007 - 30-
June-2007)
2nd Evaluation 01-Oct-2007 (01-Sep-2007 (01-Sep-2007 -
30-Sep-2007) 30-Sep-2007)
(01-Aug-2007 -
31-Aug-2007)
Alerter evaluation examples

Refer to the following examples of alerter validity periods.
Example 1
Hourly evaluation with Data Validity Period: 10:00 to 12:00.
Repetition one hour:
Evaluation at 11:00 with 10:00-10:59 data
Evaluation at 13:00 with 12:00-12:59 data.
Repetition two hours:
Evaluation at 13:00 with 12:00-12:59 data.
Example 2
Daily evaluation with Data Validity Period: Tuesday, Friday.
Repetition one day
Evaluation on Wednesday with Tuesday data
Evaluation on Saturday with Friday data.
Repetition two days, activation on Monday:
Check for validity on Tuesday (Monday data) = NOK => next check to be done in one
day
Check for validity on Wednesday (Tuesday data) = OK. Evaluate alerter => next
check to be done in two (i.e. repetition factor) days
No check for validity on Thursday
Check for validity on Friday (Thursday data) = NOK => next check to be done in one
day
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Check for validity on Saturday = OK. Evaluate alerter => next check to be done in
two days
No check for validity on Sunday.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Procedure 25-1: Use alerter editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 25-1: Use alerter editor

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 25-1.1: Open alerter editor (p. 25-13).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 25-1.2: Create an alerter template (p. 25-14).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 25-1.3: Create an alerter (p. 25-22).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Procedure 25-1.4: Create an alerter template by copy (p. 25-25).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Procedure 25-1.5: Create an alerter by copy (p. 25-26).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Procedure 25-1.6: Edit an alerter template (p. 25-27).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Procedure 25-1.7: Edit an alerter (p. 25-28).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Procedure 25-1.8: Delete an alerter template (p. 25-29).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Procedure 25-1.9: Delete an alerter (p. 25-30).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Procedure 25-1.10: Export an alerter template (p. 25-31).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Procedure 25-1.11: Use default alerters to detect BSC without traffic (p. 25-33).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Procedure 25-1.1: Open alerter editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 25-1.1: Open alerter editor

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select Alerter -> Alerter....
Result: The Alerter Editor window opens.
On the left of the Alerter Editor, there are two tabs one listing the alerter Templates
and the other listing the Alerters.
The Templates are classified by type (System or Customer) and then by sub
classified owner and then further sub-classified by alerter type.
In alerter type classification alphabetical order is used.
The Alerters are classified by templates and in this classification alphabetical
order is used.
If Templates tab is selected in the left panel, the Indicators tab is enabled, the
Operators tabs is enabled for complex alerter template type and disabled for
standard or variation complex alerter template types and the Topology tab is
enabled if Instantiate in alerter check box is checked after user clicks on
Edit/Copy.
If Alerters tab is selected in the left panel, the Templates and Topology tree tabs
are enabled and the other tabs are disabled.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Procedure 25-1.2: Create an alerter template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 25-1.2: Create an alerter template

Note: The 1/4 Hour periodicity is not available for GSM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Alerter Editor window, select Templates tab in the left panel and click on .
Result: The Alerter Template Type window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the appropriate alerter type to create, then click on OK.

Result: The Alerter Editor window appears with default values and editable fields.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name
Name Name of the alerter to be created. Alerter_
A maximum of 64 characters are allowed. <owner> _n
where <owner> is
the owner of the
alerter, and n is an
incremental number
to define a unique
name
Owner User who is creating the alerter. The username you
application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name
Alerter Defines the selected alerter type in the editor. User selected type
Type The possible types are:
Standard
Variation
Complex.
System True if the alerter template is a System template (In this N/A
case, the alerter template cannot be modified, nor deleted
except if the alerter template system dictionary is removed
by the Administrator).
False, otherwise.
tion current alerter.
Availabil- Availability domain (AvD) of the Alerter template. Computed by NPO
ity This (spatial and temporal) Availability Domain is from indicator(s)
Domain computed (and displayed) automatically from indicator(s) used in alerter
used in the alerter template (Object types that have no template. The user
corresponding mode and zones are not be available). has the possibility
to restrict the AvD.
The user has the possibility to restrict the AvD by
unchecking some boxes.
Indicator Drag the appropriate indicator from the Indicators tab in -
the right frame, and drop it in the Indicator field.
This field must be filled in only in the case of Standard and
Variation alerters.
You can only drop indicators with a defined threshold in
the Indicator field.
Upper/ Defines the indicator fault configuration (upper/lower is -
Lower fault).
It changes dynamically when user changes the indicator.
It is defined only for Standard or Variation alerter templates
(not for complex alerter templates).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In the alerter severity panel, select the required tab(s):

Critical
Major
Minor
Cleared.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The displayed fields to update vary depending on the Alerter Type.
At least one severity must be chosen for the created alerter.
For a Standard Alerter
Perform the following options:

Select the Color criteria of the alerter from the dropdown list. The possible colors are
Red, Orange, Yellow, and Green.
The default values are Red for Critical, Orange for Major, Yellow for Minor, and
Green for Cleared.
For standard alerters, the Free value also appears in the list. Use this option to choose
your own threshold value.
Select the appropriate Stability.
The periodicity unit is automatically updated whenever the Periodicity field value
changes.
If the alerter will use sampling, check the Use Sampling checkbox.
If sampling is not supported by the selected indicator, the checkbox is grayed.
For a Variation Alerter

Select the Evolution for the threshold: Degradation or Improvement.
Degradation (default) means that the user will be warned when the quality drops by
x%, whereas improvement means the user will be warned when the quality improves
by x%.
Select the appropriate Observation Period of the selected alerter with respect to
periodicity.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the appropriate Smoothing Period. This represents the number of periods
required to compute the first and last value of the curve.
The value of the Smoothing Period must be less than the Observation Period value.
Refer to Types, severities and states (p. 25-2) for more information about this
option.
Select Hour or Day in the dropdown list. This enables the user to define the variation
alerter according to the comparison of the last hourly (or daily) value of the indicator
with the indicator value at same type of periodicity (hourly or daily) but for n
observation period units ago.
Example: the hourly value 30 hours ago or the hourly value at same hour but ten days
ago, or the daily value seven days ago or the daily value at same day but three weeks
ago.
All the observation period limits are configurable in the Analysis Desktop properties
file.
Select the Smooth Only With Past Values. This means that the smoothing period is
only used in old (past) values to calculate the first value.
Select the Delta in Percentage. This defines the delta that is used to determine if an
alert needs to be generated. The value can be positive or negative.
Select the appropriate Algorithm from the dropdown box, required for the
computation of the variation alerter.
Average
Max
Min
Sum.
For a Complex Alerter
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Formula field, drag and drop the appropriate indicators and mathematical /
logical / comparison operators from the right frame, to create the appropriate formula.
This must be done for each severity.
Click on Check Formula to validate the formula. If errors occur, re-attempt to create a
correct formula.
Select the appropriate Stability.
The periodicity unit is automatically updated whenever the periodicity changes.
Attention: Take in account that values are not multiplied by 100.
Result: The alerter parameters are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If you want to create an alerter directly during the template creation, select the
Instantiate in alerter check box.
Result: New information appears in the second part of the Alerter Editor window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name
where <owner> is
the owner of the
incremental number
to define a unique
name
application
Created Date when the alerter was created. Creation date
Modified Date when the alerter was last modified, in the case of an Modification date
alerter update.
QoS Describes the alerter QoS requirement. Retrieved from
Require- The possible types are: User Preference /
ment Working Zone QoS
Low
requirement value
Medium
High.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name
Periodicity Periodicity for alerter evaluation. First supported
It can be: periodicity
Indicator supported periodicity, for Standard or
Variation alerters
The possibilities for the periodicity depend on the
availability domain of the chosen indicator.
Formula supported, for Complex alerters.
The possible types are:
1/4 Hour
Hour
Day
Week
Month
If the periodicity is not supported by the indicator or
formula for complex alerters, then the Periodicity is
grayed.
If the Availability Domain of the alerter template does not
contain Hour, then the 1/4 Hour option is grayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Select the appropriate Repetition time for the selected alerter.

The Repetition time is the evaluation period of the alerters.
Result: The periodicity unit is automatically updated whenever the periodicity
changes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 In the case of Hour or Day periodicity, select the appropriate Data Validity Period.
The period of validity is a time interval during the day or a list of days, in which the
alerter can be evaluated.
Result: For example, if the Data Validity Period is 1H and the Repetition is 1H,
then the alerters are evaluated every one hour. If the Data Validity Period is 1H and
the Repetition is 12H, then the alerters are evaluated every two hours.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Check Activate on apply for the alerter to be automatically activated after its creation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The alerter activation parameter is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Check Automatic Clear for all the alerts to be cleared when the alerter state is changed
to inactive.
Result: The alerter clear parameter is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 During an alerter severity evaluation, if the alerter cannot be evaluated, either because the
value of the indicator is null or Nerr, or the complex formula results is null or Nerr value,
if Raise alert on error / no data cases is checked, an alert is generated for the current
severity and the alerter evaluation ends. If Raise alert on error / no data cases is not
checked, no alert is generated and the alerter evaluation continues with the next severity.
Result: The Raise alert on error / no data cases option is checked or unchecked as
required.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 The Object Type is automatically filled in when selecting the indicator, or in the case of
Complex alerters, from a formula.
If several options are available in a dropdown box, select the required option.
This does not display the zone object types.
Result: The Object Type is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Drag the appropriate network objects from the topology tab tree (in the right frame) and
drop them in the Network Objects panel.
Result: The selected objects will be evaluated in the alerter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 For the alerter to be evaluated for the whole Working Zone, check Entire Working Zone:
Global.
Result: The Entire Working Zone: Global option is defined.
When this is selected, the Topology tab from the right frame is disabled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Click on .
If the Instantiate in alerter check box was checked, you must confirm the creation of
both the new alerter template and the new alerter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Click on Yes at the confirmation message.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The alerter template is created and appears in the Alerter template tree that is
automatically refreshed.
If the Instantiate in alerter check box was checked, also the created alerter appears
in the alerter tree of the alerter editor that is automatically refreshed.
If activate option was selected, the alerter is automatically activated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Note: All the created alerters are only available on the Analysis Desktop client, and
not on the NPO server. To send all the created alerts to the NPO server, ensure the
GENERATE_ALARM variable is set to true (this is the default value), in the
AlerterResourceFile.cfg file located in the
/alcatel/muse/MUSE_MAAT/alerter/rsc/com/alcatel/muse/maat/
alerter directory.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Procedure 25-1.3: Create an alerter
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 25-1.3: Create an alerter

Note: The 1/4 Hour periodicity is not available for GSM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Alerter Editor window, select Alerters tab in the left panel and click on .
Result: A window appears with the Template field contains the string:
Drop a template here. This string is replaced by the template name when you
drag on drop a template from the right Templates tab.
The window contains the information defined in the Alerter Template that was
selected and with some optional and some mandatory fields to be filled in. The fields
correspond to the scheduling part of the alerter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name
where <owner> is
the owner of the
incremental number
to define a unique
name
application
Created Date when the alerter was created. Creation date
Modified Date when the alerter was last modified, in the case of an Modification date
alerter update.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name
Periodicity Periodicity for alerter evaluation. First supported
It defines also the indicator periodicity to be used for the periodicity
evaluation.
The possibilities for the periodicity depend on the
availability domain of the selected Alerter Template.
1/4 Hour
Hour
Day
Week
Month
If the Availability Domain of the alerter template does not
contain Hour, then the 1/4 Hour option is grayed.
QoS Describes the alerter QoS requirement. Retrieved from
Require- The possible types are: User Preference /
ment Working Zone QoS
Low
requirement value
Medium
High.
Repetition Permits to select the repetition for selected alerter. 1
This repetition depends on the chosen periodicity.
Data It defines alerter validity period. Period: From - 00
Validity hour To - 23 hour
Period
Activate If it is checked, the corresponding alerter is activated Unchecked
on Apply automatically after successful creation. In this case, its state
is Active after successful creation.
If it is unchecked its state is Inactive.
Automatic If it is checked, all the alerts corresponding to this alerter Unchecked
clear are cleared when the alerter state is changed to inactive.
Raise alert During an alerter severity evaluation, if the alerter cannot Unchecked
on error/no be evaluated, either because the value of the indicator is
data cases null or Nerr, or the complex formula results in null or Nerr
value:
if it is checked, an alert is generated for the current
severity, the alerter evaluation ends.
if it is unchecked, no alert is generated, the alerter
evaluation continues with the next severity.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Name
Object Filled according to the Availability Domain (AVD) of the
types selected alerter template (i.e. The object types list is
deduced from the AVD of the selected alerter template).
This not displays the zone object types.
Network Filled from topology tab tree.
Objects The selected objects are evaluated in the alerter.
Entire This checkbox allows defining that the alerter will be
Working evaluated on the whole Working Zone. It is possible only if
zone object type corresponds to core objects (e.g. CELL_2G
for GSM, CELL_3G for UMTS).
When this is selected, the topology tab in the right side
selection tab panel is disabled.
Working This field displays the name of the working zone on which
zone the Alerter is evaluated.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on .
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on Yes at the confirmation message.

Result: The alerter is created and the alerter tree of the alerter editor is refreshed.
If activate option was selected, the alerter is automatically activated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Procedure 25-1.4: Create an alerter template by copy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 25-1.4: Create an alerter template by copy

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Alerter Editor, select Templates tab in the left panel and the alerter to copy from
the left frame, then click on .
Result: The Alerter Template Properties panel appears with the default name and
properties of the selected alerter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Define a name for the copied alerter template, using the following format:
<oldname_Copy_n>, where n is a unique incremental number.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform the appropriate modifications for the new alerter template.

Result: The new alerter template is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on Apply.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 In the confirmation window, click on Yes.

Result: The new alerter template is saved and Alerter Template tree is refreshed in
Alerter editor.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Procedure 25-1.5: Create an alerter by copy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 25-1.5: Create an alerter by copy

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Alerter Editor, select Alerters tab in the left panel and the alerter to copy from the
left frame, then click on .
Result: The Alerter Properties panel appears with the default name and properties of
the selected alerter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Define a name for the copied alerter , using the following format:
<oldname_Copy_n>, where n is a unique incremental number.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform the appropriate modifications for the new alerter.

Result: The new alerter is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on Apply.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 In the confirmation window, click on Yes.

Result: The new alerter is saved and Alerter tree is refreshed in Alerter editor.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Procedure 25-1.6: Edit an alerter template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 25-1.6: Edit an alerter template

Note: Only customer Alerter Templates can be edited.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Alerter Editor, select Templates tab in the left panel and the alerter to edit from the
Result: The Alerter Template Properties panel appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The alerter template is modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Apply.
Result: The alerter template modifications are defined.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Procedure 25-1.7: Edit an alerter
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 25-1.7: Edit an alerter

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Alerter Editor, select Alerters tab in the left panel and the alerter to edit from the
Result: The Alerter Properties panel appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The alerter is modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Apply.
Result: The alerter modifications are defined.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Procedure 25-1.8: Delete an alerter template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 25-1.8: Delete an alerter template

Note: The owner can delete the his alerters template.
The administrator is allowed to delete all customer alerter templates (but not system
alerter templates that can only be removed by a remove of the corresponding
dictionary).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Alerter Editor, select Templates tab in the left panel and the alerter template(s) to
be deleted.
Result: The alerter template(s) are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on .
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the deletion confirmation window, click on Yes.

Result: The selected alerter template(s) and the associated alerter(s) (if any) are
deleted.
All the removed alerter template(s) and alerts are logged.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Procedure 25-1.9: Delete an alerter
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 25-1.9: Delete an alerter

Note: The owner can delete the his alerters.
The administrator is allowed to delete all customer alerter (but not system alerter that
can only be removed by a remove of the corresponding dictionary).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Alerter Editor, select Alerters tab in the left panel and the alerter(s) to be deleted.
Result: The alerters are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on .
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the deletion confirmation window, click on Yes.

Result: The alerter(s) is (are) deleted from the Alerter tree of the Alerter editor. It is
(they are) also removed from Alerter list window after a refresh.
All the removed alerters and alerts are logged.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Procedure 25-1.10: Export an alerter template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 25-1.10: Export an alerter template

This export allows to share between different NPOs some customer alerter templates.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Alerter Editor, select Templates tab in the left panel and the alerter template(s) to
be exported.
Result: The alerter template(s) is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the Alerter Editor window, click on .

Note: If only system alerter templates are selected in the alerter template tree of
Alerter editor, the Export button is disabled.
Result: If the current selection of alerter templates contains some system alerter
templates, a warning dialog is displayed listing all the selected system alerter
templates and explains that they will not be exported.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Browse for the location to save the alerter template(s) and give the appropriate File
Name.
Click on Save.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on OK.
Result: The selected templates are exported in an xml alerter dictionary containing
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
NPO Administration User Guide document, to Import Alerter Template Dictionary using
GUI procedure.
If some of the exported alerter templates are referencing customer indicators, a warning
dialog is displayed indicating that the exported alerter templates may not be imported on
another system if the embedded customer indicators are not also exported and imported
on the other system before the import of these alerter templates.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Procedure 25-1.10: Export an alerter template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The warning dialog also lists all the concerned customer indicators and a Propagate
button is available to allow propagating them into the corresponding functions (indicator)
trees. Then, from the corresponding function tree, the user can open the indicator editor
(by a right click) and export these customer indicators.
Refer to:
NPO Administration User Guide document, to Import QoS dictionary using GUI.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Procedure 25-1.11: Use default alerters to detect BSC
without traffic
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 25-1.11: Use default alerters to detect BSC without

traffic
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Alerter Editor window, select an alerter from the list of default alerters.
Result: The alerter is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on .
Result: The Edit popup window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check Activate on apply.

Result: The Activate on apply is checked.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Drag the appropriate BSCs from the topology tab tree (in the right frame) and drop them
in the Network Objects panel.
Result: The selected BSCs will be evaluated in the alerter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on .
Result: The following list presents the alerters defined for detecting BSC with no
circuit traffic.
ALUDEF_TCH_total_failure - Cell no traffic alerter for 100% TCH failure
Formula for zero traffic alarm considering total traffic (Normal ASSIGN + HO):
Critical condition: raise formula (RTCH_request > 25) AND (RTCH_success
== 0)Equivalent counters formula:(((MC140a-(MC142e+MC142f)) +
((MC15b + MC15a) + (MC541a + MC561 +MC551))) > 25 AND ((MC718) +
(MC717a + MC717b)) = 0)
clear formula (RTCH_request > 25) AND (RTCH_success > 0)Equivalent
counters formula:(((MC140a-(MC142e+MC142f)) + ((MC15b + MC15a) +
(MC541a + MC561 +MC551))) > 25 AND ((MC718) + (MC717a +
MC717b)) > 0)
ALUDEF_SDCCH_total_failure - Cell no traffic alerter for 100% SDCCH
failure
Formula for zero traffic alarm considering total traffic (Normal ASSIGN + HO):
Critical Condition: raise formula (SDCCH_request > 25) AND
(SDCCH_success == 0)Equivalent counters formula:(((MC922a) - (MC922f))
> 25 AND ((MC01 + MC02) + (MC10)) = 0)
Clear formula (SDCCH_request > 25) AND (SDCCH_success > 0)Equivalent
counters formula:(((MC922a) - (MC922f)) > 25 AND ((MC01 + MC02) +
(MC10)) > 0)
ALUDEF_no_paging - Cell no traffic alerter for 0% Paging
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
without traffic
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Formula for zero paging (CS + PS) traffic alarm:
Critical Condition: raise formula (CCCH_PCH == 0)Equivalent counters
formula:(MC8a) = 0
Clear formula (CCCH_PCH > 0)Equivalent counters formula:(MC8a) > 0
ALUDEF_TCH_high_failure - Cell traffic alerter for High TCH failure
Formula for degraded traffic alarm (Normal ASSIGN + HO):
Critical Condition: raise formula (RTCH_request > 25) AND
(RTCH_success_rate > 0%) AND (RTCH_success_rate =< 20%)Equivalent
(MC541a + MC561 +MC551))) > 25 AND (((MC718) + (MC717a +
MC717b)) / ((MC140a - (MC142e+MC142f)) + ((MC15b + MC15a) +
(MC541a + MC561 +MC551)))) >0% ) AND (((MC718) + (MC717a +
(MC541a + MC561 +MC551)))) =<20% )
Major Condition: raise formula (RTCH_request > 25) AND
(MC541a + MC561 +MC551)))) =<50% )
Minor Condition: raise formula (RTCH_request > 25) AND
(MC541a + MC561 +MC551)))) =<80% )
Clear formula (RTCH_request > 25) AND (RTCH_success_rate > 90%)
Equivalent counters formula:(((MC140a-(MC142e+MC142f)) + ((MC15b +
MC15a) + (MC541a + MC561 +MC551))) > 25 AND (((MC718) + (MC717a
+ MC717b)) / ((MC140a-(MC142e+MC142f)) + ((MC15b + MC15a) +
(MC541a + MC561 +MC551)))) > 90%)
ALUDEF_SDCCH_high_failure - Cell traffic alerter for high SDCCH failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
without traffic
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Formula for degraded traffic alarm (Normal ASSIGN + HO):
Critical Condition: raise formula (SDCCH_request > 25) AND
(SDCCH_success_rate >0%) AND (SDCCH_success_rate =< 20%)Equivalent
counters formula:(((MC922a) - (MC922f)) > 25 AND (((MC01 + MC02) +
(MC10)) / ((MC04 + MC148) + (MC147+MC81+MC91+MC101))) >0%)
AND (((MC01 + MC02) + (MC10)) / ((MC04 + MC148) +
(MC147+MC81+MC91+MC101))) =< 20%)
Major Condition: raise formula (SDCCH_request > 25) AND
(SDCCH_success_rate >0%) AND (SDCCH_success_rate =< 50%)equivalent
counters formula:(((MC922a) - (MC922f)) > 25 AND (((MC01 + MC02) +
(MC10)) / ((MC04 + MC148) + (MC147+MC81+MC91+MC101))) >0%)
AND (((MC01 + MC02) + (MC10)) / ((MC04 + MC148) +
(MC147+MC81+MC91+MC101))) =< 50%)
Minor Condition: raise formula (SDCCH_request > 25) AND
(SDCCH_success_rate >0%) AND (SDCCH_success_rate =< 80%)
Equivalent counters formula:(((MC922a) - (MC922f)) > 25 AND (((MC01 +
MC02) + (MC10)) / ((MC04 + MC148) + (MC147+MC81+MC91+MC101)))
>0%) AND (((MC01 + MC02) + (MC10)) / ((MC04 + MC148) +
(MC147+MC81+MC91+MC101))) =< 80%)
Clear formula (SDCCH_request > 25) AND (SDCCH_success_rate >
90%)Equivalent counters formula:(((MC922a) - (MC922f)) > 25) AND
(((MC01 + MC02) + (MC10)) / ((MC04 + MC148) +
(MC147+MC81+MC91+MC101))) >90%)
Note: The equivalent counter formulas are for information purposes only.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Display and use alerter list

Select Alerter -> Alerter List....
The Alerter List window opens, listing all available alerters.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Display and use alerter list
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Column Name Description

Alerter Name Name of the alerter.
Owner Owner of the alerter.
Alerter Type Type of the alerter.
Standard
Variation
Complex.
Object Type Network objects type of the faulty object of an alert.
Object Nb Object number or name of the alerter, taken from the working zone.
State Current state of the alerter.
The possible states of the alerter are:
Active
Inactive
Failed (when a problem occurred in the database).
Alerters are displayed, taking into account the following:

The evaluation is done for each object involved in the alerter
The evaluation is done from the highest severity to cleared. When a severity leads to
an alert generation, the other severities are not evaluated.
Soft-deleted objects are not evaluated. They are simply ignored.
An alert is generated for each faulty object of the alerter
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If an alert with the same severity already exists for the same alerter and same object,
the existing alert is updated
If an alert exists for same alerter and same object, but a new severity is evaluated (up /
down), the existing alert is cleared and a new one generated
in the case of a problem during evaluation, the alerter state is set to failed
The alerts are kept until they are cleared by the system or the user
If cleared is fulfilled, and an alert exists, the alert is removed
If a GP is missing on the requested stability, the alerter is not evaluated and alerts are
not generated
For variation alerters, if a GP is missing for the observation period, the algorithm will
only use present values.
Alerter list window actions

Select the required alert and then perform one of the following actions.
To Click on
Update the alerter list Refresh
Edit the current selected alerter Edit
The Alerter Editor window opens.
Perform the actions described in Procedure
25-1.7: Edit an alerter (p. 25-28).
Activate the selected alerter after checking the Activate
owner status A confirmation window appears.
Click on Yes.
The first evaluation of the alerter occurs at the
next deadline of the granularity period in the
validity period.
If the user is not the owner or the
administrator, or if the alerter is already active,
the Activate button is grayed.
Deactivate the selected alerter after checking Deactivate
the owner status A confirmation window appears.
Click on Yes.
If the user is not the owner or the
administrator, or if the alerter is already
inactive, the Deactivate button is grayed.
If Automatic Clear is checked in the Alerter
Editor, all the alerts of this alerter are
suppressed.
Close the alerter window Close
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: You can also right click on the required alerter(s), then select from the popup
menu:
Edit
Activate
Deactivate.
Display and use alerts list

When you open the Analysis Desktop, if an alerts list with unacknowledged alerts is
present in the system, the alert window is automatically displayed. Also, the tool bar
Alerts icon is highlighted until all alerts present in the system are acknowledged.
In the Analysis Window, perform one of the following options:
Select Alerter -> Alerts List....
The Alerts View window opens.
If the user has administrator rights, the Alerts View window displays all the alerts.
Otherwise, it displays only the alerts created by the user.

Ack Displays if the alert is acknowledged or not.
This column is not editable.
Severity Alerter severity.
Critical
Major
Minor
Cleared.
Alerter Name Name of the alerter.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Display and use alerts list
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Owner Owner of the alerter.
Working Zone Name of the Working Zone to which the alert is related.
Name
First Raise Date First raise date of the alert.
The date format is taken from the Analysis Desktop user preference.
Last Raise Date Last raise date of the alert.
The date format is taken from the Analysis Desktop user preference.
Object The faulty object of an alert.
If this is not in the current working zone, unknown appears instead of the
object identifier.
Reason The reason for the alert.
Depending on the alerter type, the column displays different data:
For a standard type, the indicator and color criteria are displayed
For a variation type, the indicator and delta values are displayed
For a complex type, the indicator and formula are displayed.
Alerter Type Type of the alerter.
Standard
Variation
Complex.
Manage display alerts list

Select the required alerter(s) and then perform one of the following actions.
To Click on
Select all alerts Select All
Deselect all alert(s) Deselect All
Acknowledge all the selected alert(s) Acknowledge
If any of the selected alerts is already
acknowledged, the Acknowledge button is
grayed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Display and use alerts list
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Click on
Clear all the selected alert(s) Clear
An alert should be cleared if:
No alert is to be generated
The Cleared criterion is satisfied
There is currently an alert present on the
current object.
The alerts are not cleared when the alerter
definition is modified.
Edit the alerter for which the alert is generated Edit Alerter
Perform the actions described in Procedure
25-1.7: Edit an alerter (p. 25-28).
Close the alerter window Close
Note: You can also right click on the required alerter(s), then select from the popup
menu:
Edit Alerter
Copy
Propagate -> Network Object(s) / Indicator(s).
Acknowledge.
Clear
Hide Acknowledged Alerts.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
26 User preferences
26
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the user preferences.
Contents
Presentation 26-1
Procedure 26-1: Configure user preferences 26-2
General user preferences 26-2
Views / reports user preferences 26-5
Cartography user preferences 26-10
3D views user preferences 26-11
Layout user preferences 26-13
Save user preferences implicitly 26-14
Presentation
The Analysis Desktop can be configured to suit the individual preferences of each user.
This allows you to choose, for example, a preferred layout, or which keys to use for
different actions, the default directory for export, etc.
These settings apply only to the user currently logged onto the Analysis Desktop. They do
not affect settings made by any other user when that user is logged on. These settings can
be changed by regular users, as well as by the administrator user.
Once these settings are saved, each time the operator re-opens Analysis Desktop, the
defined preferences are used.
If the related FAD is not provided to the user, the related setting is not available, so it
cannot be selected from the User Preferences window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
User preferences Procedure 26-1: Configure user preferences
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 26-1: Configure user preferences

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Alcatel-Lucent Analysis Desktop window, select Edit -> Preferences....

Result: The User Preferences window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select and modify as appropriate:

General user preferences
Views / reports user preferences
Cartography user preferences
3D views user preferences.
Note: To reset the default values, click on Default Settings.
To launch the online help, click on Help.
Result: The user preferences are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on OK.
Result: The Analysis Desktop refreshes according to the new User Preferences and
changes appear to the user immediately. The modified User Preferences are saved.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
General user preferences

The following figure shows the general user preferences.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
User preferences General user preferences
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 26-1 General user preferences parameters
Preference Name for Description

General Tab
Prompt to confirm on exit Gives the following confirmation before exiting from the Analysis Desktop:
Modified data has not been saved and will be lost if you
exit now (executed views or reports, tuning sessions,
object editors).
Are you sure you want to exit?
Possible values:
Yes
No.
Add favorite to current If a favorite function is selected, it is added to prior selections in the function
selection tree.
Possible values:
Yes
No.
Created indicators are Sets the default value of the Temporary Indicator check box in the Properties
temporary Panel of the Indicator Editor window.
Possible values:
Yes
No.
If you choose Yes, then, per default, the indicators that are created are temporary
indicators.
If you choose No, then, per default, the indicators that are created are permanent
indicators.
Save layout on exit Saves the customized Analysis Desktop layout (windows, position, and size)
after exiting the Analysis Desktop.
Possible values:
Yes
No.
Ask.
Data format Sets date with one of the following formats: dd / mm / yyyy, mm / dd / yyyy, or
yyyy / mm / dd.
Default behavior for Opens the target page in a new window or the same window.
hyperlinks Possible values:
New window
Same widow.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 26-1 General user preferences parameters (continued)
Preference Name for Description

General Tab
Mode tabs text Changes the mode for tab text in the Analysis Desktop main window.
Possible values:
Horizontal
Vertical.
Display time before a tab is Indicates the time for triggering the auto-raise after the mouse selects a tab.
raised and made active Possible values: between 1 to 5 seconds.
Show soft-deleted objects If Yes is selected, then soft-deleted topology objects are visible in all trees (with
the red cross icon ).
If No is selected, then the soft-deleted topology objects are not displayed in
Analysis Desktop.
Display tips on startup If true, displays Tip of the Day window at Analysis Desktop start up.
If false, the window is not displayed.
Trace level Sets the trace level of the Analysis Desktop.
Font Changes the default font.
Size Changes the default font size.
Views / reports user preferences

The following figure shows the views / reports user preferences.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
User preferences Views / reports user preferences
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Preference Name Description

for Views / Reports
Tab
Prompt to save Asks you to save the view template.
modified view template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

for Views / Reports
Tab
Prompt to save Asks you to save the report template.
modified report
template
Always set highlight in Allows you to keep highlighting in the tabular view.
tabular view
Allow Dynamic Indicates interpolation to be allowed for change while executing or
Interpolation not.
Text synthetic output Allows the display of values in text for diagnosis execution
Wrap tabs in view and Allows the choice between scrollable and stacked tabs in view and
report browsers report tabs.
When checked, all the tabs in the view / report browsers are visible.
If it is unchecked, arrow buttons appear allowing you to scroll among
all the existing tabs.
Open results in new Allows you to edit the results in a new view window.
viewer on editing
Open results in new Allows you to edit the results in a new report window.
report on editing
Display Grid in View Allows to display or not the grid.
Automatic Filter List When checked, automatically activates the filter list when a new
Reactivation filter is added.
Default resize of views Automatically resizes the views inside an executed report.
inside report
Enable Week Allows to display the week number instead of the date of the week
Numbering first day (in row / column header, graph labels, 3D view 3rd
Dimension selection), while executing a view / report in weekly
periodicity.
Enable Month Naming Allows to display the month name instead of the date of the month
first day (in row / column header, graph labels, 3D view 3rd
Dimension selection), while executing a view / report in monthly
periodicity.
Week Numbering Allows you to change the display format of the week numbering, if
Format Enable Week Numbering checkbox is selected.
Possible values:
yyyy Week ww
yy Week ww
Week yyww
yyyy Www
Wyyww
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

for Views / Reports
Tab
Month Naming Options Allows you to choose between long and short month naming if the
Enable Month Naming checkbox is selected.
Highlighting synthesis, Defines mode of highlighting synthesis, legend selecting and legend
legend selecting and filtering.
legend filtering Possible values:
Row
Columns.
Drag & Drop modifier Sets a key for the add specific action in the executed views.
to add Required to change the modifier keys used for adding elements to an
existing view / report using drag and drop.
Possible values:
Ctrl
Alt
Shift
Ctrl-Shift
Alt-Shift
Ctrl-Alt.
Drag & Drop modifier Sets a key for the remove specific action in the executed views.
to remove Required to change the modifier keys used for removing elements to
an existing view / report using drag and drop.
Possible values:
Ctrl
Alt
Shift
Ctrl-Shift
Alt-Shift
Ctrl-Alt.
Its value must be different from the Drag & Drop modifier to add
value.
Preferred Display Type Sets a tabular or graphical view, when not specified in the view
template.
Possible values:
Tabular
Graphical.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

for Views / Reports
Tab
Default graph type Sets the type of the graph.
Possible values:
Bar chart
Continuous Line
Stacked column
100% Stacked column.
No value display Specifies the string to be displayed when no values are present in the
table.
Possible values:
Empty
N/A.
View copy policy when Allows you to change the view copy policy on a report.
duplicating a report Possible values:
template
Links to Existing View Templates
Duplicated View Templates.
Display operational Display the operational value when executing the view in tabular
value mode.
Display reference value Display the reference value of parameter when executing the view in
tabular mode.
Display operator Display the operator reference value of parameter when executing the
reference value view in tabular mode.
Display forecast value Display the forecast value of parameter when executing the view in
tabular mode.
Display planned value Display the planned value when executing the view in tabular mode.
Display max reference Display the max reference values when executing the view in tabular
mode.
Display historical value Display the Historical value of parameter when executing the view in
tabular mode.
Display min reference Display the min reference values when executing the view in tabular
mode.
Default directory for Allows you to select a directory for export.
view export The default value is C:/WINNT/Temp
Default directory for Allows you to select a different directory for exporting a report.
report export The default value is C:/WINNT/Temp
Width of exported Allows to set the width of exported PDF / html in pixels.
graphs ( .PDF / .html) The incremental / decremental value change is in multiples of 100
pixels.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
User preferences Cartography user preferences
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cartography user preferences

The following figure shows the cartography user preferences.

for Cartography Tab
Zoom / unzoom Sets the percentage of zoom or unzoom to be done in the
cartography.
Adjacency Color Select the color of the adjacency lines.
Selection Color Sets the color of the selected Network Objects.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
User preferences Cartography user preferences
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

for Cartography Tab
Highlighting Color Sets the color of the highlighted Network Objects.
Highlighting Mode This option is used to keep the old highlighting or to reset the
highlighting.
Coordinates You can use this option to tell the cartography module whether to use
the planned values or the operational values first.
Show Standards You can use this option to show or hide the standards in the viewport.
Measuring Unit This option is used for distance computing in the Cartography. The
values are: Meters-kilometers and Feet-Miles
The default value is Meters / Kilometers.
Planned Utimeadvanced Sets the value of planned U_TIMEADVANCE parameter when
Factor defining adjacencies.
For W-CDMA, LTE and WIMAX, there is no U_TIMEADVANCE.
Operational Sets the value of operational U_TIMEADVANCE parameter when
Utimeadvanced Factor defining adjacencies.
For W-CDMA, LTE and WIMAX, there is no U_TIMEADVANCE.
3D views user preferences

The following figure shows the 3D Views user preferences.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
User preferences 3D views user preferences
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
User preferences 3D views user preferences
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Preference Name Description Default Value

for 3D Views Tab
Group By You can choose whether the columns or the rows to Columns
be grouped.
Possible values:
Row
Columns.
A Sets the dimension for the Top Level Header. Dates
Possible values:
Dates
Network Objects
Functions Objects.
B Sets the dimension for the Non Grouped Header. Network Objects
Possible values:
Dates
Network Objects
Functions Objects.
C Sets the dimension for the Second Level Header. Functions Objects
Possible values:
Dates
Network Objects
Functions Objects.
The following error message appears if the same dimension is present in two locations:
Two or more dimensions are the same. Please change your choice.
Layout user preferences

You can customize the Analysis Desktop layout by:
Resizing or changing the position of the main window
Changing the position of the dividers
Changing the size and position of all sub-windows.
To Do
Save current From the menu bar, select Window -> Save Layout.
layout with your
customized
preferences
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
User preferences Layout user preferences
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Use pre-defined From the menu bar, select Window -> Layouts, then:
Analysis Desktop Default Layout, to keep the Analysis Desktop pre-defined default
window layouts layout: displays the Analysis Desktop with all the browsers (mode,
view and report).
Maximize Report, to enlarge the executed reports browser area (to
67%). The mode browser is displayed and occupies the remaining part.
Maximize Trees, to enlarge the topology and functions trees area (to
67%). The executed view window is displayed and occupies the
remaining part.
Maximize View, to enlarge the executed views browser area (to 67%).
The topology and functions area is displayed and occupies the
remaining part.
Report Full View, to maximize the executed reports browser area. The
mode browser and the executed view browser are hidden.
User-Defined Layout, to display the layout as it was when last saved
by user.
Save user preferences implicitly

The values entered by the user in any Analysis Desktop dialog box are implicitly saved as
user preferences.
The next time the same dialog box opens, the fields are automatically filled in with these
pre-saved values.
These parameters are associated with an identifier, which defines a user and / or a profile,
so that each user and / or profile can have its own set of preferences.
If the user did not enter any values in a dialog box earlier, then the default values are
displayed.
The following parameters are also stored as implicit user preferences:
Displayed and hidden modes
Order of modes
Topology classifications
Topology trees
Function classifications
Function trees.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
27 Icons
27
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the icons.
Contents
Tool bar icons 27-1

Topology icons 27-4
Function icons 27-16
Tool bar icons

The following figure shows the tool bar icons.
Refer to the following table for a list of the icons and their corresponding descriptions.
Table 27-1 Tool bar icons and descriptions
Icon Description Grayed

Report Template If a report template is selected when triggering the tool bar
Editor button, then it appears in the report template editor, if not, an
empty properties panel with no values appears. Grayed when
user does not have MUSE_PUBLIC_REPORT_ADMIN
FAD.
View Template Never grayed. If a view template is selected when triggering
Editor the tool bar button, then it appears in the view template
editor, if not, an empty properties panel with no values
appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Icons Tool bar icons
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 27-1 Tool bar icons and descriptions (continued)

Object Zone Editor Never grayed. If an object zone is selected when triggering
the tool bar button, then it appears in the object zone editor,
if not, an empty properties panel with no values appears.
Indicator Editor Never grayed. If an indicator is selected when triggering the
tool bar button, then it appears in the indicator editor, if not,
an empty properties panel with no values appears.
THL Template Never grayed. If THL is selected when triggering the tool bar
Editor button, then it appears in the THL template editor, if not, an
empty properties panel with no values appears.
Diagnosis Editor Grayed when the user does not have the MUSE_NPO_START_
DIAG FAD.
It launches the diagnosis editor.
Alerter Editor Never grayed. It launches the alerter editor.
Job Scheduler Grayed when the user does not have MUSE_NPO_
Editor ADMINISTRATE_REPORT_ SCHEDULING FAD.
It launches the job scheduler editor
Cartography Grayed when the user does not have the MUSE_NPO_
CARTO FAD.
It launches the Cartography module.
Refreshes Tree N/A
having the focus
Consolidation
Follow Up
Alerter List Grayed if alerter feature is not enabled.
Alerts List Grayed when the user does not have both the
MUSE_ALERTER_ADMIN and MUSE_ALERTER_
USER FADs.
Alerts List with Grayed when the user does not have both the
unacknowledged MUSE_ALERTER_ADMIN and MUSE_ALERTER_
alerts USER FADs.
Job List Grayed when the user does not have MUSE_NPO_
ADMINISTRATE_REPORT_ SCHEDULING FAD.
It launches the job list.
The job lists correspond to scheduled jobs (reports,
diagnosis).
Launches the Grayed when no notification messages are pending to be
Notification acknowledged
Window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Displays the N/A
analysis desktop
default layout.
Displays the N/A
analysis desktop
with executed
reports browser area
maximized.
Refer to Layout
user preferences
(p. 26-13).
Displays the N/A
analysis desktop
with topology and
functions trees area
maximized.
Displays the N/A
analysis desktop
with executed views
browser area
maximized.
Displays the N/A
analysis desktop
with executed
reports browser area
maximized to 100%
area.
Displays the N/A
analysis desktop
layout as it was
when last saved by
user.
Display Pending Never grayed.
Diagnosis Executed
Reports
Display Pending Never grayed.
Executed Reports
Export All Views Grayed when no executed view to export.
Export All Reports Grayed when no executed report to export.
Export All Grayed when there is no executed diagnosis.
Diagnosis
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Close All Views Grayed when is no view open.
Close All Reports Grayed when is no report open.
Close All Diagnosis Grayed when is no diagnosis open.
Topology icons
GSM, W-CDMA and LTE objects and icon types
The following tables presents the list of GSM, W-CDMA and LTE objects and icon types.
Note: Not all the objects are described in these tables. Only main objects are listed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Icons Topology icons
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 27-2 GSM Network Objects in a Topology Tree
Network Icon 1 Icon 2 Icon 3 Icon 4 Icon 5 Displayed

Object String
CELL2G Frequency Cell type: User Note Deleted - Depending on
band: Extended The icon is the label
GSM1900 Outer displayed only This configuration at
the server the
Mini when a user icon is
cell label can be
GSM1800 note exists. only
displayed one of the
Concentric
when following:
GSM900
the Cell name
Extended_
object (Id =
MULTIBAND Inner
is [number])
Indoor or
deleted.
EMULTIBAND
Cell name
Micro or
concentric
GSM850-GSM1900
Cell name
(Operator =
Umbrella
GSM850-GSM1800 [PLMN-Id])
or
GSM850 Indoor Cell name
concentric (Operator =
EGSM900 [PLMN-Id],
Mini Id =
concentric [number])
If operational
Micro name exists,
then the Cell
Umbrella name will be
concentric [Cell Name] /
LAC=xx CI=yy
Single If name does

not exist the
Cell name will
be / LAC=xx
CI=yy
BSS User Note Deleted - - - BSS name (ID =
This icon is [number])
The icon is only
displayed displayed
only when a when the
user note object is
exists. deleted.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 27-2 GSM Network Objects in a Topology Tree (continued)

Object String
ADJ Technology User Note Deleted Source cell label
This icon is Target cell
The icon is only displayed label
displayed when the
only when a object is
user note deleted.
exists.
ADJ2G3G Technology User Note Deleted Source cell label
This icon is Target cell
The icon is only displayed label
displayed when the
user note deleted.
exists.
Traffic Zone Zone Type: Sector: Frequency User Deleted [Related Cell
Normal Main band: Note
This icon is label] ([Zone
type];[Sector-
Secondary GSM1900 only displayed
Type];
Inner The when the
[FrequencyBand])
Outer GSM1800 icon is object is
displayed deleted.
Generic
GSM900 only
when a
user
MULTIBAND
note
exists.
EMULTIBAND
GSM850-
GSM1900
GSM850-
GSM1800
GSM850
EGSM900
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Object String
TRX Zone Type: User Note Deleted - - [Related Cell
Normal This icon is label] #[TRX
The icon is only displayed index][Prefer-
ence order]
Inner displayed when the
Outer only when a object is
user note deleted.
exists.
TRXTS User Note Deleted - - - For SDCCH:
This icon is [Related Cell
The icon is only label] #[TRX
displayed displayed index]#S#[ID]
only when a when the For TCH:
user note object is [Related Cell
exists. deleted. label] #[TRX
index]#T#[ID]
BTS User Note Deleted - - - BTS name
This icon is
The icon is only
displayed displayed
user note object is
exists. deleted.
X25 User Note Deleted - - - X25_<ID>
This icon is
The icon is only
displayed displayed
user note object is
exists. deleted.
BTS_BSC User Note Deleted - - - LAPD_<ID>
_LAPD This icon is
The icon is only
displayed displayed
user note object is
exists. deleted.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Object String
BSC_MFS User Note Deleted - - - LAPD_<ID>
_LAPD This icon is
The icon is only
displayed displayed
user note object is
exists. deleted.
N7SL User Note Deleted - - - N7SL_<ID>
This icon is
The icon is only
displayed displayed
user note object is
exists. deleted.
N7LS User Note Deleted - - - N7LS_<ID>
This icon is
The icon is only
displayed displayed
user note object is
exists. deleted.
AIC User Note Deleted - - - AIC_<ID>
This icon is
The icon is only
displayed displayed
user note object is
exists. deleted.
GPU User Note Deleted - - - GPU_<ID>
This icon is
The icon is only
displayed displayed
user note object is
exists. deleted.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Object String
PVC User Note Deleted - - - PVC_<ID>
This icon is
The icon is only
displayed displayed
user note object is
exists. deleted.
Bearer User Note Deleted - - - BC_<ID>
Channel This icon is
The icon is only
displayed displayed
user note object is
exists. deleted.
Network User Note - - - Network
The icon is
displayed
only when a
user note
exists.
Cell Zone, System Editable Not computed, User - [Cell Zone
TRXZone, Customer Non Editable Computed and Note name] if the cell
2G Object public empty zone is
Zone & Computed and The computed and
Customer
Other Object not empty icon is non-empty
private
Zones displayed (except for the
only Network): [Cell
when a Zone name]
user [number of cell]
note
exists.
GSM 2G User Note Deleted - - - GSM 2G
External This icon is External Cells
Cells The icon is only name
displayed displayed
user note object is
exists. deleted.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Object String
GSM 3G User Note Deleted - - - GSM 3G
External This icon is External Cells
Cells The icon is only name
displayed displayed
user note object is
exists. deleted.
GSL User Note Deleted - - - GSM_ GSL
This icon is name
The icon is only
displayed displayed
user note object is
exists. deleted.
MFS User Note Deleted - - - GSM_ MFS
This icon is name
The icon is only
displayed displayed
user note object is
exists. deleted.
SGSN_IP_ User Note Deleted - - - GSM_
NSVC This icon is SGSN_IP_
The icon is only NSVC name
displayed displayed
user note object is
exists. deleted.
SGSN_ITF User Note Deleted - - - GSM_
This icon is SGSN_ITF
The icon is only name
displayed displayed
user note object is
exists. deleted.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Object String
NRI User Note Deleted - - - GSM_ NRI
This icon is name
The icon is only
displayed displayed
user note object is
exists. deleted.
BSC_NRI User Note Deleted - - - GSM_
This icon is BSC_NRI name
The icon is only
displayed displayed
user note object is
exists. deleted.
BSC_TC User Note Deleted - - - GSM_ BSC_TC
This icon is name
The icon is only
displayed displayed
user note object is
exists. deleted.
SS7SL User Note Deleted - - - GSM_ SS7SL
This icon is name
The icon is only
displayed displayed
user note object is
exists. deleted.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 27-3 W-CDMA Network Objects in a Topology Tree
Network Icon 1 Icon 2 Icon 3 Icon 4 Displayed String

Object
Cell 3G Supplier: Cell Class: User Note Deleted Depending on the
Alcatel-Lucent Rural The icon is label configuration
displayed only This at the server the cell
Suburban
when a user note icon is label can be one of
exists. only the following:
Urban
displayed Cell 3G name
Dense (Id = [number])
when
Urban or
the
object is Cell 3G name
deleted. or
Cell 3G name
(Operator =
[PLMN-Id]) or
Cell 3G name
(Operator =
[PLMN-Id], Id
= [number])
RNC Supplier User Note Deleted [RNC name]
The icon is
displayed only This
when a user note icon is
exists. only
displayed
when
the
object is
deleted.
IuR Supplier User Note Deleted [IuR name]
The icon is
displayed only This
exists. only
displayed
when
the
object is
deleted.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 27-3 W-CDMA Network Objects in a Topology Tree (continued)

Object
IuB Supplier User Note Deleted [IuB name]
The icon is
displayed only This
exists. only
displayed
when
the
object is
deleted.
TMU Supplier User Note Deleted [TMU name]
The icon is
displayed only This
exists. only
displayed
when
the
object is
deleted.
2G ADJ Frequency PLMN Mode: User Note Deleted [Source cell label] -
Mode: Inter PLMN The icon is [Target cell label]
Inter-freq displayed only This
Intra PLMN when a user note icon is
Intra-freq exists. only
displayed
Inter-system when
the
object is
deleted.
3G ADJ Frequency PLMN Mode: User Note Deleted [Source cell label] -
Mode: Inter PLMN The icon is [Target cell label]
Inter-freq displayed only This
Intra PLMN when a user note icon is
Intra-freq exists. only
displayed
Inter-system when
the
object is
deleted.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Object
Node B Supplier User Note Deleted [Node B name]
The icon is
displayed only This
exists. only
displayed
when
the
object is
deleted.
W-CDMA W-CDMA User Note Deleted - Depending on the
External Cell The icon is This icon is only label configuration
displayed only displayed when at the server the cell
when a user note the object is label can be one of
exists. deleted. the following:
Cell name (Id =
[number]) or
Cell name or
Cell name
(Operator =
[PLMN-Id]) or
Cell name
(Operator =
[PLMN-Id], Id
= [number])
2G External Cell Frequency User Note Deleted - If operational name
band: The icon is This icon is only exists: [Cell Name]
PCS 1900 displayed only displayed when / LAC=xx CI=yy If
band when a user note the object is name does not
exist: / LAC=xx
DCS 1800 exists. deleted.
band CI=yy
If cell is not
planned then (not
planned) is shown
at the end of the
label.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Object
Network Supplier User Note Deleted Network
The icon is
displayed only This
exists. only
displayed
when
the
object is
deleted.
Table 27-4 LTE Network Objects in a Topology Tree

Object String
LTE Cell Supplier: User Note Deleted Cell name (Id =
Alcatel- This icon is [number])
Lucent The icon is only displayed
displayed when the
Other only when a object is
user note deleted.
exists.
eNodeB Supplier User Note Deleted eNodeB name
This icon is (Id = [number])
The icon is only displayed
displayed when the
user note deleted.
exists.
Note: Depending on the status of the Show Soft-Deleted Objects user preference,
objects that are soft-deleted are either visible or not in all topology trees. This user
preference does not affect the Tuning Operations tree rendering (i.e. even if the user
preference asks to hide soft-deleted objects, the new object created in the Tuning
Session remains visible).
WiMAX objects and icon types

The following table presents the list of WiMAX objects and icon types.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 27-5 WiMAX Network Objects in a Topology Tree
Network Object Icon 1 Icon 2

Network Supplier
WAC Supplier
BSCell (BSID) Supplier
WADJACENCY -
WPROCESSOR -
WPHYSLNK -
WDISKP -
AAA_CNX Supplier
AAA Supplier
BS -
MAC -
PHY -
MAC_MR -
MAC_SC -
Function icons
The following tables presents a list of the GSM, W-CDMA and LTE functions and icon
types.
Table 27-6 Function icons - Counter
Function Icon 1 Icon 2 Icon 3 Icon 4 Icon 5 Displayed

String
Counter Counter User Note - - - <Counter name>
icons: The icon is (<reference
Scalar displayed only name>)
when a user
Vector note exists.
Matrix
Axis
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
Icons Function icons
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 27-7 Function icons - indicator

String
Indicator System Indicator type With User <Indicator name>
icons: Threshold Supports Note (<reference
and / or name>)
Customer Scalar the trend The icon
Sampling prediction is
Vector
and information. displayed
Temporary Matrix associated
Does not only
Axis diagnosis
when a
support
trend user note
With exists.
Threshold prediction
and / or information
Sampling (the icon is
and no intentionally
associated blank).
diagnosis
Without
threshold
and / or
Sampling
(icon is
blank)
Table 27-8 Function icons - Design

String
Design GSM User Note - - - <Design
Parameter
W-CDMA The icon is
displayed only Displayed name>
when a user
note exists.
Table 27-9 Function icons - Logical

String
Logical GSM User Note - - - <Logical
Parameter
W-CDMA The icon is
displayed only Displayed Name>
when a user
note exists.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 27-10 Function icons - Rule

String
Rule GSM Error User Note - - <Rule Name>
W-CDMA Warning The icon is
displayed
These icons only when a
correspond to user note
the level of the exists.
rule.
Table 27-11 Function icons - Diagnosis

String
Diagnosis System Public Indicator User Note - <Diagnosis
trigger Name>
Private
Customer associated The icon is
with the displayed
diagnosis only when a
user note
Indicator exists.
trigger
not
associated
with the
diagnosis
Table 27-12 Function icons - Thematics

String
Thematics System Public Editable User Note - <THL Name>
Private
Customer Non The icon is
Editable displayed
only when a
user note
exists.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 27-13 Function icons - Event
Function Icon 1 Icon 2 Icon 3 Icon Icon Displayed

4 5 String
Event System Adjacency Changes User - - <Event
Note Name>
Customer BCCH / BSIC Changes
Cell Capacity Changes
The
Cell Creations icon is
Cell Deletions displayed
Cell Type Changes only
Frequency Changes when a
user
Logical Parameter Changes
note
Planned Logical Parameter exists.
Changes
Release Changes
Topology Changes
All
Aggregated Adjacency Changes
Aggregated BCCH / BSIC

Changes
Aggregated Cell Capacity
Changes
Aggregated Cell Creations
Aggregated Cell Deletions
Aggregated Cell Type Changes
Aggregated Frequency Changes
Aggregated Logical Parameter

Changes
Aggregated Planned Logical
Parameter Changes
Aggregated Release Changes
Aggregated Topology Changes
These icons are the system icons
provided by Alcatel-Lucent. Other
icons can be defined according to the
defined metadata.
Depending on the technology, they are
displayed or not.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 27-14 Function icons - Tuning

String
Tuning GSM User Note - - - <Tuning
Parameter
W-CDMA The icon is
displayed only Displayed Name>
when a user or <Tuning
note exists. Operation
Displayed Name>
Table 27-15 Function icons - Free Field

String
Free Field User Note - - - - <Free Field
The icon is name>
displayed
only when a
user note
exists.
Table 27-16 Function icons - View Template

String
View Public Editable View Associated User <View template
Template template type Filtering Note name>
Non
icons: indicator
Private Editable The icon
Scalar is
displayed
Vector only
when a
Matrix user note
exists.
Axis
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 27-17 Function icons - Report Template

String
Report Public Editable Mono- Top N User <Report template
Template Object Note name>
Non
Private Editable Evolution Top N The icon
Absolute is
Multi- Variation displayed
Object only
Evolution Top N when a
Relative user note
Multi- Variation exists.
Object
Comparison Red
Only
Mono-
Object Red &
Distribution Orange
Warning Red,
- Worst Orange
&
Warning Yellow
- Best
Orange
Only
Orange
&
Yellow
Yellow
Only
Green,
Yellow
&
Orange
Green
&
Yellow
Green
Only
Absolute
Variation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011 Relative
Variation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
28
Overview
Purpose
This section describes how to download some NPO example files.
Contents
Procedure 28-1: Download NPO example files 28-2
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011
NPO example files Procedure 28-1: Download NPO example files
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 28-1: Download NPO example files

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the Windows Client PC, type the corresponding server hostname or the server IP
address in an Internet Explorer browser bar:
https://<server_hostname> or <server_IP_address>
Note: If you use the hostname, it must be added in the hosts file located in the
C:/WINDOWS/system32/drivers/etc directory.
If a Security warning page opens, click on Continue to this website (not
recommended).
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent CSA login window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Alcatel-Lucent CSA window:

1. Type the appropriate user name and password
2. Click on Login.
Note: If the Convergent Security Asset (CSA) warning window opens, click
Continue.
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent Welcome page appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Alcatel-Lucent Welcome page, click on Install First.

Result: The Install these packages before starting page opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Right click on Download example files and select Save Target As...
Save the Examples_files.zip file on the Windows Client PC. Close the Download
Complete window.
Result: The Examples_files.zip file is saved on the Windows Client PC and you can
open the needed file.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 10 March 2011

NPO Analyze Desktop - User Guide174465110e10

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

NPO Analyze Desktop - User Guide174465110e10

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Reason for revision ................................................................................................................................................................. xxix

Document pertinence .............................................................................................................................................................. xxix

Audience ..................................................................................................................................................................................... xxix

Assumed knowledge ............................................................................................................................................................... xxix

Product names ........................................................................................................................................................................... xxix

How to comment ....................................................................................................................................................................... xxx

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1

Terminology ................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-1

NPO presentation ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1-6

NPO user interface ................................................................................................................................................................... 1-6

NPO functions ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1-9

NPO advanced optimization features .............................................................................................................................. 1-13

2 Getting started with Analysis Desktop

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1

Procedure 2-1: Initialize Analysis Desktop first time .................................................................................................. 2-3

Procedure 2-2: Initialize Analysis Desktop ..................................................................................................................... 2-4

Procedure 2-3: Exit Analysis Desktop .............................................................................................................................. 2-5

Use title bar ................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-5

Procedure 2-5: Reorganize standards, modes, topology .......................................................................................... 2-35

Use tool tips .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-35

Procedure 2-6: Display functions browser values ...................................................................................................... 2-37

Create and execute reports .................................................................................................................................................. 2-38

Procedure 2-7: Diagnose QoS problems ........................................................................................................................ 2-40

Create tuning operations ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-40

Use cartography management functions ........................................................................................................................ 2-41

QoS analysis using Thematic Layers (THL) ................................................................................................................ 2-41

Manage network stability, availability and alarms ..................................................................................................... 2-42

Use remote inventory data management (RIDM) ...................................................................................................... 2-42

Access online help ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-43

Use tip of the day .................................................................................................................................................................... 2-44

Manage licensing .................................................................................................................................................................... 2-45

Procedure 2-8: Manage notifications .............................................................................................................................. 2-50

Manage tokens ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-51

Procedure 2-9: View consolidation follow up .............................................................................................................. 2-54

Procedure 2-10: Select / deselect all items .................................................................................................................... 2-56

Procedure 2-11: String based tree filtering ................................................................................................................... 2-57

3 Functional window common tasks

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1

Drag and drop objects ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-1

Procedure 3-2: Display and edit properties ..................................................................................................................... 3-7

Procedure 3-3: Copy URL ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-9

Use generic editor .................................................................................................................................................................. 3-10

Refresh ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-14

Procedure 3-4: Search ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-15

Procedure 3-5: Set QoS requirement ............................................................................................................................... 3-33

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1

Presentation ................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-1

Topology object tabs ................................................................................................................................................................ 4-2

Display topology object properties .................................................................................................................................. 4-11

Procedure 4-1: Add associated network objects .......................................................................................................... 4-21

Use network object class ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-22

Procedure 4-2: Use network object class editor .......................................................................................................... 4-25

Procedure 4-3: Assign operational network object class ......................................................................................... 4-31

5 Use object zone

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1

Presentation ................................................................................................................................................................................. 5-1

Procedure 5-1: Compute object zone ................................................................................................................................. 5-6

Display object zone properties ............................................................................................................................................. 5-6

Procedure 5-2: Use object zone editor ............................................................................................................................ 5-10

6 Use topology classifications

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1

Presentation ................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-2